mi_ref

Reference GuideVersion 7.0

MapInfoProfessional

Reference MapInfoCorporation

Troy, New York

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written permission of MapInfo Corporation, One Global View, Troy, New York 12180-8399. 1992–2002 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved. MapInfo, MapInfo Professional, MapBasic, and the MapInfo Logo are registered trademarks of MapInfo Corporation. Contact MapInfo Corporation on the Internet at: http://www.mapinfo.com.

Adobe Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States.libtiff 1988–1995 Sam Leffler, copyright 1991–1995 Silicon Graphics, Inc.libgeotiff 1995 Niles D. Ritter.Portions Copyright 1999 3D Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.HIL – Halo Imaging Library™ Copyright 1993, Media Cybernetics Inc. Halo Imaging Library is a trademark of MediaCybernetics, Inc.Portions hereof LEAD Technologies, Inc. 1991–1997. All Rights Reserved.Portions Copyright 1993–2002 Ken Martin, Will Schroeder, Bill Lorensen. All Rights Reserved.This software uses patented LZW technology for .GIF image compression and/or decompression. (Unisys United States patent No. 4,558,302 and corresponding patents in Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan and the United King-dom). GIF images compressed or decompressed for transmission via the Internet or via any other on-line communi-cation capability may not be sold or licensed for revenue, or used by an Internet Service Provider or in paid advertisements unless the user first enters into a written license agreement with Unisys. For information concerning licensing, please contact:Unisys CorporationWelch Licensing Department C1SW19Township Line & Union Meeting RoadsP.O. Box 500Blue Bell PA 19424Blue Marble 1993–2002.ECW by ER Mapper 1998–2002.VMGrid by Northwood Technologies, Inc., a Marconi Company 1995–2002 ™.Portions 2002 Earth Resource Mapping, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.Portions of this software are copyrighted by MERANT, 1991–2002.MrSID, MrSID Decompressor and the MrSID logo are trademarks of LizardTech, Inc. used under license. Portions of this computer program are copyright (c) 1995–1998 LizardTech and/or the university of California or are protected by US patent nos. 5,710,835; 5,130,701; or 5,467,110 and are used under license. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected under US and international patent & copyright treaties and foreign patent applications are pending. Unauthorized use or duplication prohibited.Universal Translator by Safe Software, Inc. 2002.Crystal Reports® is proprietary trademark of Crystal Decisions. All Rights Reserved.Products named herein may be trademarks of their respective manufacturers and are hereby recognized. Trademarked names are used editorially, to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intent to infringe on the trademark.This documentation reflects the contributions of almost all of the women and men that work for MapInfo Corporation. It was specifically produced by Marie Costa and Gayle Patenaude, with the help of Juliette Funiciello, and Ed McElroy. Colleen Cox, Managing Editor. The Documentation Department is indebted to MapInfo’s Quality Assurance Department and, of course, to all the members of the Product Development team that engineered this project.

MapInfo welcomes your comments and suggestions.

June 2002

MapInfo Corporate Headquarters: MapInfo Europe Headquarters: Germany:

Voice: (518) 285-6000 Voice: +44 (0)1753 848 200 Voice: +49 (0)6142 203 400

Fax: (518) 285-6060 Fax:+44 (0)1753 621 140 Fax: +49 (0)6142 203 444

Sales Info Hotline: (800) 327-8627 email:[email protected] email:[email protected]

Federal Sales: (800) 619-2333

Technical Support Hotline: (518) 285-7283Technical Support Fax: (518) 285-6080

Toll-free telephone support is available in the U.S. and Canada. Contact your MapInfo sales representative for details. For international customers, please use the Technical Support Fax number.

Table of Contents

File Menu

New Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Open DBMS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Close Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Close All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Close DBMS Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Save Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Save Copy As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Save Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Save Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488Save Window As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Revert Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428Recent Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Edit Menu

Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Clear Map Objects Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Reshape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456New Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Get Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Tools Menu

Crystal Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Tool Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559Universal Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Contents

Objects Menu

Set Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Clear Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Disaggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Create Convex Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Enclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Voronoi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Erase Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Polyline Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Overlay Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Check Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Snap/Thin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513Unsmooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Convert to Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Convert to Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Query Menu

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494SQL Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Invert Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Unselect All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Find Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Calculate Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Table Menu

Update Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579Append Rows To Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Geocode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Create Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Combine Objects Using Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

ii MapInfo Professional Reference Guide

Contents

Table > Maintenance Menu

Table Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546Delete Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Rename Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454Pack Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Make DBMS Table Mappable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Change DBMS Table Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Unlink DBMS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Refresh DBMS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Table > Raster Menu

Adjust Image Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Modify Image Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Select Control Point From Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Options Menu

Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Region Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557Show Theme Legend Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508Show Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Show MapBasic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509Hide StatusBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Custom Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Map Menu

Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Create 3DMap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Create Prism Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Create Thematic Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Modify Thematic Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Create Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Change View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Clone View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Previous View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427View Entire Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585Clear Custom Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Save Cosmetic Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473Clear Cosmetic Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Set Clip Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Clip Region Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

MapInfo Professional Reference Guide iii

Contents

Digitizer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Browse Menu

Pick Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Window Menu

New Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277New Map Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332New Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281New Layout Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329New Redistrict Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Tile Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556Cascade Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Graph Menu

Formatting Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299General Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Series Options Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Grids and Scales Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Titles Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2873D Viewing Angles Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Saving a Template File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Layout Menu

Change Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33View Actual Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584View Entire Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586Previous View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Bring To Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Send to Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497Align Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Create Drop Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Redistrict Menu

Assign Selected Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Set Target District From Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505Add District . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Delete Target District . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

iv MapInfo Professional Reference Guide

Contents

Main Toolbar

Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Marquee Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Radius Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Polygon Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Boundary Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Unselect All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576Invert Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Graph Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Zoom-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590Zoom-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Change View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Grabber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222HotLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Hide Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Set Target District From Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505Assign Selected Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Clip Region Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Set Clip Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Drawing Toolbar

Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Rounded Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Reshape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Add Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Symbol Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Region Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

MapInfo Professional Reference Guide v

Contents

DBMS ToolbarOpen DBMS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Refresh DBMS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Unlink DBMS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Make DBMS Table Mappable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Change DBMS Table Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Tools ToolbarRun MapBasic Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Show/Hide MapBasic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509Run Mapping Wizard Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566Launch MetaData Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Standard ToolbarNew Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Save Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Print Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574New Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277New Map Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332New Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281New Layout Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329New Redistrict Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Features and FunctionsAutotrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Expression Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Projection Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Register Raster Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Rotate Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Save Thematic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Snap to Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517Startup.wor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537StatusBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Appendix: Using Graphs created prior to version 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

vi MapInfo Professional Reference Guide

About MapInfo Professional Command Help Menu

About MapInfo Professional Command Help Menu

Use About MapInfo Professional to:• display a dialog indicating which version of MapInfo you are using, licensing

information and Technical Support information.

About MapInfo is available when:• About MapInfo is always available.

Menu Path• Help > About MapInfo

To return to the previous window:

• Choose OK.

Hard Copy?

If you’d prefer to have a printed version of this

manual, contact Customer Service.

The MapInfo Professional® Reference Guide is

available for $99 plus S&H.

Customer Service:

M-F, 8 a.m. to 7 p.m. Eastern Time

(800) 552-2511, option 3

Queue/Voice mailbox: 6329

email: [email protected]

MapInfo Professional Reference Guide 1

Add District Command Redistrict Menu

Add District Command Redistrict Menu

Use Add District to:• add a new district to an existing Districts Browser window.

Add District is available when:• a redistricting session is in effect.

Menu Path • Redistrict > Add District

or

• Display Shortcut Menu

Using Add District Choose Add District to create a new district and add the district to the bottom of the Districts Browser. MapInfo assigns a default name (district #) to the new district, and highlights it for editing.

Changing a District’s NameTo change a district’s name:

1. Click on the name in the Districts Browser.

2. Enter the new name.

Do not use “Districts” as a name for your base tables. MapInfo uses “Districts” internally as a system table when beginning a redistricting session.

See:Assign Selected Objects Command

New Redistrict Window Command

Set Target District From Map Command

User’s Guide: Chapter 16

2 MapInfo Professional Reference Guide

Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar

Add Node Button Drawing Toolbar Use the Add Node button to:

• access the Add Node tool. Use the Add Node tool to add a node to regions, polylines, and lines.

Add Node button is available when:• a Map window is active, the Map layer is editable and Reshape mode is active

or

• a Layout window is active and Reshape mode is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button

Adding a NodeNodes can be added only to lines, polylines and regions.

The maximum number of nodes for regions and polylines is 1,048,572 nodes for a single polygon region or polyline. The limit drops by seven nodes for every two additional polygons.

If an object with more than 32K nodes is saved and the table is read in a version of MapInfo prior to version 4.5, the object(s) will not be visible. Objects in the table that do not exceed the 32K limit will be visible.

To add a node:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button.

2. Move the cursor to the point on the segment where you want to add a node.

3. Click to add the node.

Press the backspace key to delete the last node added.

See:Overlay Nodes Command

Reshape Button/Command

Select Button



Adjust Image Styles Command Table > Raster Menu


Use Adjust Image Styles to:• adjust the contrast or brightness of a raster image, select a transparent color, adjust the

translucency of a raster image or display a color raster image in gray-scale mode.

Adjust Image Styles is available when:• one or more raster image tables is open.

Menu Path• Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles

Using the Adjust Image Styles DialogThe Adjust Image Styles dialog lets you control how a raster image appears in MapInfo. Through this dialog, you can adjust an image’s contrast and brightness settings, you can set a color image to display in shades of gray instead of in color, and you can designate a color image to display in a transparent color.

Additionally, use the Adjust Image Styles dialog to set the translucency of a raster image from 0-100%. You can place a translucent layer on top of other layers and set the visibility of the layers beneath the raster layer. To adjust the transluceny setting on a per layer basis, access Style Override in the Layer Control dialog.T

The Adjust Image Styles dialog does not modify the raster image file; instead, it changes the way MapInfo displays the raster image file. Every raster image table consists of two or more files: a raster image file (e.g. photo.gif), and a table file (e.g. photo.tab). When you change the image display styles, MapInfo stores the new style settings by modifying the table file. MapInfo does not modify the raster image file in any way.

You can display additional map layers, such as StreetInfo street maps, on top of a raster image. Since overlaying raster and vector data may make it difficult to tell which lines are part of the raster image and which lines are part of the vector data, adjusting the display style of the raster image can make it easier to differentiate the separate layers.

If you set the image Contrast to a low setting, such as 30%, and set the image Brightness to a high setting, such as 70%, MapInfo displays the image in a subdued style, which is appropriate if you want the raster layer to act as a “backdrop.”

If you change the display options and choose OK, MapInfo stores the new display styles immediately; you do not need to choose File > Save.

To adjust the display on a raster layer on a per layer basis, access the Layer Control dialog: choose Display > Raster.

To display the Adjust Image Styles dialog:

• Choose Table > Raster > Adjust Image Styles.



Adjust Image Styles Dialog

Adjustments

Contrast Adjust the contrast in the image. The default contrast setting is 50%.

Brightness Adjust the brightness in the image. The default brightness setting is 50%.

Translucency Adjust the translucency of the raster image. An image with 0% translucency is opaque; one with 100% translucency is transparent.You cannot print a translucent raster on the Windows 9x platforms, or export to EMF/WMF format. Use a non-metafile format to export on Windows 9x.With many printers, the "Print Direct to Device" option may not work correctly if there are translucent images. If you are printing translucent images, use the "Print Using EMF" option.

Transparent When checked, a color from the image is made transparent. A rectangular box of this color is displayed. On the dialog, the transparent color is displayed as white. Very slight differences in the image may result in smaller transparent images than anticipated.

Select Color If the transparent box is checked, press the Select Color button to choose a transparent color.



Conversions

See: Modify Image Registration Command

Register Raster Image


Original Image Display a color raster image in color.

Gray Scale Gray Scale: display a color raster image in shades of gray instead of in color.+ Button, - Button+: zoom in on the raster image.-: zoom out from the raster image.

OK Store the new contrast, brightness, and gray-scale settings in the table file that corresponds to the raster image.

Cancel Cancel the dialog options.

Help Display appropriate Help topic.


Align Objects Command Layout Menu


Use Align Objects to:• align objects with each other in a layout or with the horizontal and vertical frame of

the Layout window.

Align Objects is available when:• a Layout window is the active window

and

• one or more objects are selected in the layout.

Menu Path• Layout > Align Objects

or


Aligning ObjectsTo align one or more objects in the Layout window:

1. Choose one object.

Press <SHIFT> to select several objects.

or

Choose Query > Select All to select all objects in the layout.

2. Choose Layout > Align Objects. The Align Objects dialog displays.

Align Objects Dialog



Horizontal

Horizontal settings govern the left-to-right positions of objects.

Vertical

Vertical settings govern the top-to-bottom positions of objects.

See:New Layout Window Command


selected objects Choose alignment from the drop-down list: Don’t change, Align left edges of, Align center of, Align right edges of, or Distribute. Distribute places an even amount of space between objects.

with respect to Choose from the list of relationships for specifying alignment. Choose to align objects with respect to each other or the entire layout.

selected objects Choose alignment from the drop-down list: Don’t change, Align top edges of, Align center of, Align bottom edges of, or Distribute. Distribute places an even amount of space between objects.

with respect to Choose from the list of relationships for specifying alignment. Choose to align objects with respect to each other or the entire layout.

OK The objects selected are aligned according to the specified settings. Alignment settings are saved from one use to the next within a session.




Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu

Append Rows To Table Command Table Menu

Use Append Rows To Table to:• attach the records from one table to another table. The tables you are appending

should have the same set of columns, in the same order.

Append Rows to Table is available when:• two tables are open.

Menu Path • Table > Append Rows to Table

Appending One Table to AnotherWhen appending data, MapInfo takes data from columns in one table and puts that data into columns having corresponding positions in the other table. When the corresponding columns do not have the same data type, a “best fit” is done to convert data to the appropriate type. When the columns of the two tables are not ordered properly, so that columns with corresponding positions do not have corresponding data, use Modify Structure to change the order of the columns in one of the tables.

You also can use SQL Select to reorder the columns of one of the tables and then append the results. If you have information from another table that you want to combine with your table, use the Join command.

To append one table to another:

• Choose Table > Append Rows to Table. The Append Rows to Table dialog displays.

Append Rows to Table Dialog

See:New Row CommandTable Structure CommandUser’s Guide: Chapter 22

Append table Specify the table containing the records you want appended.

to table Specify the table to which the records will be appended.

OK The status of the append displays.

Cancel Cancel the append.



Arc Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Arc button to:• access the Arc tool. Use the Arc tool to draw an arc the shape of one quarter of an

ellipse.

The Arc button is available when:• a Layout window is active

or

• a map with an editable layer is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Arc button

Drawing an ArcUse the Arc tool to draw an arc in an editable map or layout. The arc will be the shape of one quarter of an ellipse. The endpoints are at 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees on the ellipse. Once you have drawn an arc, you can reshape it.

To draw an arc:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Arc button.

2. Move the cursor to the location where you want to begin drawing the arc.

To draw an arc that is a quarter of a circle, press <SHIFT> while drawing.

3. Press and hold the mouse button.

4. Move the cursor. The arc appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the cursor.

5. Release the mouse button.

If the arc does not curve in the correct direction, redraw it in the same place, but move the mouse in the opposite direction.

Using the Arc Object DialogTo specify arc object attributes:

1. Select the arc.

2. Choose Edit > Get Info.

or

Double-click the arc with the Select tool. The Arc Object dialog displays.



Arc Object Dialog

Repositioning an ArcTo reposition an arc manually:

1. Make the arc’s map layer editable.

2. Position the Select tool at any point of the arc.

3. Press and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays as a four-way arrow.

4. Drag the arc to a new position.

5. Release the mouse button. The arc moves to the new position.

To reposition an arc using coordinates:

1. Double click the arc. The Arc Object dialog displays.

See the preceding: Arc Object Dialog.

2. Enter the new center coordinates.

Center X,Y The center of the arc’s ellipse specified in X and Y coordinates.

Radius X The horizontal distance from the center of the arc’s ellipse to the rightmost (or leftmost) point.

Radius Y The vertical distance from the center of the arc’s ellipse to the topmost (or bottommost) point.

Start Angle The angle of the arc’s starting point on its ellipse.

End Angle The angle of the arc’s end point on its ellipse.

Style Display the Line Style dialog. See Line Style Button/Command.

OK Apply the designated attributes. The arc is reshaped to fit the specified starting and ending angles.

Cancel Cancel dialog options.




Resizing an ArcTo resize an arc manually:

1. Make the arc’s map layer editable.

2. Choose the arc by clicking on either end with the Select tool.

Four edit handles (small squares) appear around the arc, indicating that it is now selected for editing.

3. Choose any of the four edit handles and drag it in the appropriate direction.

When you drag an edit handle, a dotted box appears around the arc. Drag the edit handle until you have resized the arc appropriately.

4. Release the mouse button. The arc resizes according to the size of the box.

When the mouse button is released, the arc resizes so that it extends to the lower right corner of its bounding rectangle.

To resize an arc using coordinates:

1. Double click the arc. The Arc Object dialog displays.

See the preceding: Arc Object Dialog.

2. Type the new beginning and ending coordinates.

Reshaping an ArcTo reshape an arc manually:

1. Select the arc by clicking on either end with the Select tool. Four edit handles (small squares) appear around the arc, indicating that it is now selected for editing.

2. Choose Edit > Reshape.

A small box (node) appears at both the start and end-points of the arc.

3. Position the cursor over one of the nodes.

4. Click the node and drag it to a new location.

The selected node becomes hollow. This node moves along the arc’s ellipse and the angle between the two end nodes changes, reshaping the arc.

5. Continue dragging until the arc has the appropriate shape.

See:User’s Guide: Chapter 15


Arrange Icons Command Window Menu

Arrange Icons Command Window Menu

Use Arrange Icons to:• order the icons of the minimized windows so they are more accessible.

Arrange Icons is available when:at least one of the following is open and in icon form (minimized):

• Browser window

• Map window

• Graph window

• Redistrict window

• MapBasic window

• Layout window

Menu Path• Window > Arrange Icons


Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar

Assign Selected Objects Button Main Toolbar

Assign Selected Objects Command Redistrict Menu

Use the Assign Selected Objects button and command to: • permanently assign all selected map objects to the target district.

Assign Selected Objects is available when: • a redistricting session is active

and

• the Districts Browser is the active window.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects Button

or

• Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects

or


Using Assign Selected Objects If you select map objects while a redistricting session is in effect, those objects are tentatively assigned to the current target district.

To make this assignment permanent:

• Choose Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects Button.

or

• Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects.

When you choose Assign Selected Objects, the target district’s name is stored in the district column of each of the selected objects. If you assign objects to a district named NorthEast, MapInfo stores NorthEast in the district column of each selected object. Changes to the table are not permanent until you save the table.

See:Add District CommandNew Redistrict Window CommandSet Target District From Map CommandUser’s Guide: Chapter 16


Autotrace

Autotrace

Use Autotrace to:• trace the nodes of a polyline or polygon.

Autotrace is available when:• snap mode is activated

and

• polyline or polygon tool is active.

Menu Path• Activate Snap Mode by pressing the “S” key

Using AutotraceTo use Autotrace:

1. Select the polyline or polygon tool.

2. Activate Snap mode by pressing the ”S” key.

3. Click on a node of the polyline/polygon you want to autotrace.

4. Move the mouse to another node of the same object.

To trace the shortest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Shift key and click.

To trace the longest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Ctrl key and click.

Pressing the Shift or Control keys highlights the autotrace path. Click to automatically trace the segments between the nodes and add them to the polyline/polygon you are drawing.

To autotrace more than one polygon, click on a node common to both polygons. The autotraced border(s) are placed in the editable layer. To see the autotraced object, select it and drag it away from the existing object.

You may also find it helpful to autotrace a border and place it in the Cosmetic Layer. To do so, make the Cosmetic Layer editable before you begin the autotrace process. Autotrace the polygon(s) or polyline(s) and save the Cosmetic Objects to a new layer.

See:Reshape

Snap to Node

Polygon Button

User’s Guide Chapter 15


Boundary Select Button Main Toolbar


Use the Boundary Select button to:• access the Boundary Select tool. Use the Boundary Select tool to search for and select

objects within a given region.

The Boundary Select button is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Boundary Select button

Searching for Objects Within a Region To search for objects within a region (polygon, ellipse, rectangle or rounded rectangle):

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Boundary Select button. The cursor displays as a cross in a map window.

2. Click on a region in a selectable layer that contains other objects, such as points. All objects in the topmost selectable layer, including the cosmetic layer, within the region will be selected.

The tool chooses all objects within any polygonal region, ellipse, or rectangle on the map, such as a state or county boundary, a police patrol district or a sales territory. When the region is a complex one, with several component polygons, it includes all the component polygons in its search. If an object’s centroid is located in another region, it will not be included the search.

Two layers must be selectable:

• the layer containing the objects for which you are searching

and

• the layer containing the region within which you want to search.

These can be the same layer.

Click on the region you want to search. All the objects (points, lines, polylines, text, arcs, ellipses, rectangles and rounded rectangles) within that region are selected. MapInfo Professional searches for objects in the topmost selectable layer in which it find objects (including the cosmetic layer).

For example, if you want to see all the crimes committed in a particular patrol district, both the patrol districts layer and the crime locations layer must be selectable. To select all the crimes committed in Central Park, click on the Central Park region with the Boundary Select tool.

Again, if you want to select all customers in Texas, the customer locations layer and the states layer must be selectable. Click on Texas, and MapInfo highlights all the customers.



If you do not have a boundary layer available, you may wish to create your own region, then

select that region with the Boundary Select tool.

Searching for Objects in Other LayersThere may be occasions when you want to work with more than one layer of regions. In this situation, MapInfo ordinarily chooses the topmost layer when you click on the map window with the Boundary Select tool.

Adding Objects to the Selection SetPress <SHIFT> while using the Boundary Select button to add objects to the previous selection.

See:Marquee Select Button

Radius Select Button

Select Button



Bring To Front Command Layout Menu

Bring To Front Command Layout Menu

Use Bring to Front to:• bring an object from behind objects that are covering it in a layout.

Bring to Front is available when:• any layout object is selected.

Menu Path• Layout > Bring to Front

or

• Right-click in the Layout Window to display the Shortcut Menu

Changing Objects to be Frontmost in a LayoutBring to Front, in conjunction with Send to Back, is used to re-order overlapping objects. You can then move any number of objects simultaneously. The selected objects maintain their relative front-to-back order and are placed in front of all other objects.

All objects in a layout are ordered from front to back. Consider frames and other graphic objects as being stacked in the layout. When you draw a new object it is automatically the frontmost object. The object overlaps any other object in the layout. Use the Send to Back and Bring to Front commands to change the ordering of objects in the stack.

If you have added a dropped shadow to an object, select both the object and its dropped shadow when you want to send the object to the back. Otherwise, the object goes behind its dropped shadow.

To bring an object to the front of a layout:

1. Choose the object or objects you want to move.

2. Choose Layout > Bring to Front.

When the object you want to choose is behind other objects:

• Press <CONTROL> while using the Select tool.

The Select tool cycles through overlapping objects starting with the topmost one.


Send to Back Command



Buffer Command Objects Menu


Use Buffer to:• create a buffer polygon around one or more selected object(s). A region object is

created and added to the editable layer.

Buffer is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• the map has an editable layer

and

• one or more objects are selected in any layer in the map.

Menu Path• Objects > Buffer

Creating a BufferUse the Buffer Objects dialog to specify the radius of the buffer. There are two methods of determining the buffer radius: value and computed. Use computed to buffer each object by a different amount. For example, if you have a point layer of cities, you can buffer each object proportional to its population. You may create each buffer separately, or combine all buffered objects into a single object.

Before buffering you should:

• make the layer containing the object(s) for which you want to create a buffer selectable

and

• make the layer in which the buffer objects will be created editable.

To create a buffer:

1. Select the object or objects around which you want to create a buffer.

2. Choose Objects > Buffer. The Buffer Objects dialog displays.



Buffer Objects Dialog

Radius

Radius Specify the buffer radius, the distance between the object (or objects) and the border of the buffer polygon.

Value Enter a number for the buffer radius in coordination with the appropriate units.

From Column Specify a column or display the Expression dialog. The buffer radius can be determined from a table value or by specifying an expression in the Expression dialog. See Expression Dialog. See Functions.

Units Specify the units. The following units are available: US Survey Foot yards, rods, chains, miles, nautical miles, millimeters, inches, links, feet, centimeters, meters, kilometers. The default unit is the distance unit for the map.



Smoothness Specify the segments per circle to determine the resolution of the curves in the Buffer polygon; enter a number between 3 and 100. The default value is 12 segments per circle. More segments produce a smoother curve; fewer segments make a more jagged curve. While in versions of MapInfo Professional prior to 5.5, the smoothness was proportional to the time required to prepare the buffer (higher smoothness numbers produce more segments and take a longer time to produce the buffer), in MapInfo Professional 5.5 the smoothness number has little effect on the time it takes to produce the buffer.

One buffer of all objects Create one buffer for all objects. For example, if you are buffering Pennsylvania, New York and New Hampshire, one buffer will be created for all three of these objects.

One buffer for each object

Create one buffer for each object. For example, if you are buffering Pennsylvania, New York and New Hampshire, each object will have a separate buffer.

Buffer Width Distance using

SphericalSpherical calculations are used for distance methods, which attempt to keep the measurement on the curved surface of the earth. The data is first converted to Latitude/Longitude and then a calculation is produced. Non-Earth projections cannot use spherical calculations.CartesianCartesian methods are used to perform calculations on data projected onto a flat plane. Cartesian coordinates are a pair of numbers, (x, y), defining the position of a point in a two-dimensional space by its perpendicular projection onto two axes which are at right angles to each other. Latitude/Longitude projections cannot use Cartesian calculations.

Next Display the Data Aggregation Dialog.





Data Aggregation Dialog

There are different versions of the Data Aggregation dialog; the dialog which displays depends on the designations in the Buffer Dialog.

Aggregate Method

Destination Box Choose one column or a group of columns. To choose one column name from the list, click on that column name. To select a group of column names, shift-click. To select or deselect one column at a time, control-click. Once you have selected one or more columns, clicking on an option in the lower half of the dialog applies that option to all selected columns. If you want to choose the Sum or Average method, make sure that all of the selected columns are numeric columns. If any of the selected columns are not numeric, the Sum and Average options are grayed, because Sum and Average cannot be applied to non-numeric columns.

No Change Leave the selected column(s) unchanged. The No Change option is available only if you specified a map editing target.

Blank Store blank values in the selected column(s). To store blank values in all columns, check the No Data checkbox. Only choose the Blank option when you want to blank out individual columns. The Blank option is available only if you did not specify a map editing target.

Value Store a specific value, the value displayed in the edit field, in the new row. Enter an appropriate value in the field.

Sum Calculate a sum based on the column values from all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the sum in a column of the new row. The Sum option is available only if you have selected a numeric column or columns. If you have specified a map editing target, and if the editing target is in a different table than the currently selected object(s), the Sum option adds numeric values from both tables, and stores the sum in a column of the target object. See the following: Adding Values from Two Tables.

Average Calculate the average of the column values for all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the average in the new row. See the following: Averaging Column Values.



See:Functions

New Row Command


Weight By The Weight By control is available when you select the Average option. It is not available if the target object is in a different table than the selected objects. Choose a column on which to perform weighted averaging. With weighted averaging, MapInfo adjusts the calculation of averages so that the values from each selected object are weighted more or less heavily. The Weight By column gives some of the selected objects more impact, or “weight” than others. See the following: Weight By.

No Data If you have not specified a target: check the No Data checkbox to store blank values in all columns of the new row. If you have specified a target: check No Data to leave all column values of the target object unchanged.


OK Accept the dialog options.



Calculate Statistics Command Query Menu


Use Calculate Statistics to:• perform statistical calculations on a column in a table or query/selection. These

statistics can then be used in other applications.

Calculate Statistics is available when:• at least one table is open

and

• there is at least one numeric column in that table.

Menu Path• Query > Calculate Statistics

Performing Statistical CalculationsTo perform statistical calculations on a column:

• Choose Query > Calculate Statistics. The Calculate Column Statistics dialog

displays. Use this dialog to specify the table and column used for the calculation.

Calculate Column Statistics Dialog

Table Display all available open tables. Choose the table that contains the column that you want to use to calculate statistics.

Column Display the numeric columns in the specified table. Choose a column for calculating statistics; the column must be numeric.

OK The Column Statistics dialog displays listing statistics for the specified column. These statistics can now be used in other applications. See the following: Specifying Thematic Ranges By Standard Deviation.





Column Statistics Display

See:Show Statistics Window Command

Hide Statistics Window Command

Table The name of the table containing the column for which statistics have been calculated.

Column The name of the column for which statistics have been calculated.

Count The number of records in the table.

Minimum The smallest value in the column.

Maximum The largest value in the column.

Range The difference between the maximum and the minimum value.

Sum The sum of all values.

Mean The mean (average) of all values.

Variance The standard statistical measure of the variance in a distribution.

Standard Deviation The square root of the variance.

OK Removes the dialog from the screen.



Cascade Windows Command Window Menu

Cascade Windows Command Window Menu

Use Cascade Windows to:• resize and arrange windows vertically. Only the contents of the topmost window is

visible. The titles of the other windows with which you are working display, if space is available to display all titles.

Cascade Windows is available when:• a Browser, Map, Graph, Layout, Redistrict, Legend or MapBasic window is open.

Menu Path• Window > Cascade Windows

Cascading WindowsWhen you choose Cascade Windows, only the contents of the topmost window is visible. The topmost window is always the active window.

To make another window the active window:

• Click on the title bar

or

• Choose a window from Window menu.

Choose Windows > More Windows to select a window when you have more than nine windows open.

See:Tile Windows Command


Change DBMS Table Symbol Button DBMS Toolbar


Change DBMS Table Symbol Command Table > Maintenance

Use Change DBMS Table Symbol to:• change the symbol for a mappable DBMS table.

Change DBMS Table Symbol is available when:• DBMS support is installed.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Change DBMS Table Symbol

or

• DBMS Toolbar > Change Symbol for a Mappable DBMS Table Button

Using Change DBMS Table SymbolThe Change DBMS Table Symbol command allows you to change the symbol attributes for a mappable DBMS table.

To change the symbol on an DBMS table:

• Choose Table > Maintenance > Change DBMS Table Symbol or the Change

Symbol for a Mappable DBMS Table Button. The Open dialog displays; select a

mappable DBMS table in order to change its symbol. The dialog will only

display mappable DBMS tables.



Open Dialog

Open dialog for DBMS

Places Bar: Quickly access the specified directory. There are four MapInfo Professional Places options: Tables; Workspaces; Import Files; Remote Tables. Designate each directory path in Options > Preferences> Directories.

If the operating system is Windows 2000, select MapInfo Places to display MapInfo Professional specific folders, or choose Standard Places to display the default places.

Owner: This field is present only for data sources that make use of owners (such as Oracle). This field allows you to list tables owned by different users.

Filter Tables: The Filter button lets the user select which types of tables to list. The default shows Tables, View, and Synonyms, and hides System tables.

New Connection button

Press this button to display a series of dialogs to establish a new connection. Refer to Open DBMS Connection for more information.

File name: Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files of Type box.To see a list of files with a particular extension type an asterisk (*), a period and the three character extension. For example if you want to see all files with a .dbf extension in a directory, type *.dbf.



Once you have selected an DBMS Table, the following dialog displays:

Change Table Object Style Dialog

Use the Change Table Object Style dialog to specify new symbol attributes for the objects in the selected table. Close and reopen the DBMS table for the changes to take effect.

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly.For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab

Files of type: If there are multiple existing connections open, the last made connection displays. in the Connection type box. To change connections, choose a connection from the pull-down list.

Preferred View Choose the view in which you want the table data displayed:Automatic: MapInfo selects the appropriate display for the table: mapper, add to mapper, or browser.Browser: Open table in a Browse window. Current Mapper: Add table to current map window.New Mapper: Display table in a map window.No View: Open table; do not display data.

Database Displays the directory path of the database connection or the database name. This field is present only for data sources that provide this information. In the example above it is not present.

Open Opens the table or displays an in import information dialog. Displays the Change Table Object Style dialog.





See:Make DBMS Table Mappable Command


Change View Button Main Toolbar


Change View Command Map Menu

Use the Change View button and command to:• access the Change View dialog to specify settings for map window width, map scale,

map resizing, and center point of a map.

Change View is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Change View button

or

• Map > Change View

or


Zooming, Scaling and Positioning a Map Using Change View To re-center a map or change the map’s zoom or scale:

• Choose Main Toolbar > Change View

or

• Choose Map > Change View

The Change View dialog displays.



Change View Dialog

See:Grabber Button

Zoom-in Button

Zoom-out Button

Zoom (Window Width) Type in a distance, in geographic units (such as miles or kilometers). When you click OK, the map window will redraw, showing an area that wide. To access the Map Unit drop-down list, select Map > Options > Distance Units.

Map Scale Specify the distance that one unit represents on the map. Choose the unit: inches, points, picas, millimeters centimeters, from the Paper & Layout units drop-down list. To access this list, select Options >Preferences > System Settings.

Center of Window Change the X and Y coordinates of the map’s center. If Military Grid Reference is the display coordinate string, the dialog indicates MGRScoordinate string.

OK Accept the options.




Change Zoom Command Layout Menu

Change Zoom Command Layout Menu

Use Change Zoom to:• display the magnification factor at which the Layout is currently being displayed and

specify a zoom level.

Change Zoom is available when: • a Layout window is active.

Menu Path • Layout > Change Zoom

Specifying a Zoom Level in a LayoutTo specify the zoom level in a layout:

1. Choose Layout > Change Zoom. The Layout Zoom dialog displays.

The magnification factor at which the layout is currently being viewed displays in the Zoom box.

2. Type a new value in the Zoom box.

A zoom of 25% means the contents of the current Layout is being displayed at 25% of its actual size.

3. Choose OK.

Additional Zoom Level Information The minimum zoom level is 6.25%; the maximum is 800%.

The keyboard numbers 1-8 can be used to specify the Layout Zoom. Click one of these keys when a layout is active, and MapInfo changes the layout’s zoom.

See:Zoom-in Button

Zoom-out Button

KEY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ZOOM 6.25 12 25 50 100 200 400 800


Check Regions Objects Menu


Use Check Regions to:• check region objects for various aspects of data which may cause incorrect results.

Check Regions is available when: • a map is in the active window

and

• a selection exists

and

• the map contains an editable layer.

Menu Path Objects > Check Regions

Using Check RegionsUse Check Regions to check region objects for self-intersections. Self-intersections includes line segments within a region which cross each other and nodes within a single polygon of a region where the polygon overlaps itself.

Check Regions can also be used to detect overlapping polygons. The overlapping polygons may be in the same region object or in different region objects.

Additionally, use Check Regions to detect gaps between regions. Gaps are closed areas between regions that do not contain objects.

To use Check Regions:



• Choose Object > Check Regions. The Check Region Objects dialog displays.

Self-Intersection Detection

The symbol displayed in Self-Intersection Detection section of the dialog displays on the map wherever a self-intersection occurs. Click the symbol to display the Symbol Style dialog to modify the symbol.

Overlap Detection When Overlap Detection is enabled, the region style displayed in the Overlap Detection section of the dialog displays on the map, indicating regions created from overlapping regions. Click the region symbol to display the Region Style dialog to modify the fill and border of the overlapped region.

Gap Detection Detect Gaps: check to detect gaps that are less in area than that designated in the Maximum Gap Area and Area Units prompts. Maximum Gap Area: Enter a number that will be used with the designated Area Units from the Area Units drop-down. Area Units: Choose a unit from the drop-down list.


Clean Command Objects Menu


Use Clean to:• remove any self-intersections in the region data.

Clean is available when:• objects are selected in an editable table. All of the objects selected must be closed

objects (i.e., regions, rectangles, rounded rectangles or ellipses).

Menu Path• Objects > Clean

Using the Clean Command

Choose Objects > Clean to display the Clean Objects Dialog:

Overlap Removal

Enable Overlap Removal

Check to eliminate overlapping areas in specified regions.



Gap Removal

See:Check Regions

Snap/Thin

Enable Gap Removal Check to remove gaps between regions using the Maximum Gap Area specified. The gap is added the region with the largest area that touches the gap.

Maximum Gap Area Specify the maximum gap area.

Area Units Specify the Area Units to be used in the determining the maximum gap area.


Clear Command Edit Menu

Clear Command Edit Menu

Use Clear to:• delete selected text or objects.

Clear is available when:• a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected

or

• a Layout window is active and at least one object is selected

or

• a Map window is active, a layer is editable, Reshape is not active, and at least one object is selected

or

• a Map window is active, a layer is editable, Reshape is active, and one or more nodes is selected

or

• MapBasic window text is selected.

Menu Path• Edit > Clear

Deleting Text or ObjectsWhen in a Map window, a layer must be editable. The selection is not placed on the clipboard.

The <BACKSPACE> or <DELETE> key has the same effect as the Clear command. Use the Edit > Undo command immediately after using Clear to reverse the action.

Choose Options > Preferences> System Settings to designate the maximum number of objects that can be undone. See the Undo command.

Use Clear with the Reshape command to eliminate a selected single node from an object, or multiple selected nodes. Position the cursor over the node you want to eliminate and click to select it. Click on a node; shift/click or control/click on another node to select multiple nodes. Choose Edit > Clear. The node(s) is removed and the graphic object is reshaped.

See:Layer Control CommandReshape CommandUndo Command


Clear Cosmetic Layer Command Map Menu

Clear Cosmetic Layer Command Map Menu

Use Clear Cosmetic Layer to:• clear all objects from the cosmetic layer.

Clear Cosmetic Layer is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• objects reside in the cosmetic layer.

Menu Path• Map > Clear Cosmetic Layer

or


Removing All Objects from the Cosmetic LayerTo remove all objects from the cosmetic layer:

1. Choose Map > Clear Cosmetic Layer.

2. Choose Discard.

All objects are removed from the cosmetic layer.

See:Save Cosmetic Objects Command


Clear Map Objects Only Command Edit Menu

Clear Map Objects Only Command Edit Menu

Use Clear Map Objects Only to:• remove graphic objects from a table.

Clear Map Objects Only is available when:• an editable Map is the active window

and

• at least one object in the editable layer is selected.

Menu Path• Edit > Clear Map Objects Only

Removing One or More Graphic Objects from a TableTo remove one or more of the objects in a table:

1. Make the table you are working with the editable layer of the active map.

2. Select the object(s).

3. Choose Edit > Clear Map Objects Only.

Removing All Graphic Objects from a TableTo remove all the objects in a table:

1. Make the table you are working with the editable layer of the active map.

2. Make this layer the topmost selectable layer.

3. Choose Query > Select All.

4. Choose Edit > Clear Map Objects Only.

See:Clear Command

Layer Control Command


Clear Target Command Objects Menu

Clear Target Command Objects Menu

Use Clear Target to:• clear as a target any object that was previously set for object editing.

Clear Target is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• a target object exists

and

• Erase, Erase Outside, Split or Overlay Nodes have not been performed on the object.

Menu Path• Objects > Clear Target

Clearing a TargetIf you do not want to edit an object after it has been set as the target, use Clear Target to make the object display as normal and the object is no longer marked for editing. An object also will be cleared as a target automatically if it has been deleted or modified by Erase, Erase Outside, Split, Overlay Nodes, or if you have chosen a new target.

See:Set Target Command


Clip Region Off Command Map > Clip Region Off


Use Clip Region Off to:• redisplay an entire map after using the Set Clip Region command.

Clip Region Off is available when:• a map window is active and the Set Clip Region command has been enabled.

Menu Path• Map > Clip Region Off

or

• Main Toolbar > Clip Region Button

Using Clip RegionUse Clip Region to isolate a region of a map for display and/or printing. Designate the region to be clipped using the Select tool; the region may be a pre-defined map region, such as a state, or one you define using a drawing tool. Thematic maps and seamless layers, labels, and points displayed on the map will be included in the clipped region. To clip a raster image, use an object created in the cosmetic layer, or an object from an existing vector layer.

To use Clip Region:

1. Use the Select Tool to select the region of the map you want to clip.

Only one region can be selected. If you select another clip region, you will be prompted to replace or retain the current clipped region.

2. Choose Map > Set Clip Region.

or

Click the Set Clip Region button in the Main Toolbar.

The map redraws; only the clipped region displays.

3. To redisplay the entire map, choose Map > Clip Region Off

or

Click the Clip Region On /Off button in the Main Toolbar.

To toggle between the map and the clipped region, you may find it useful to use the Clip Region On /Off button.

After defining a map clipping object to use as a cutter, you may wish to save the object for reuse.

To save a map clipping object in the cosmetic layer:

1. Click the Layer Control button and make the Cosmetic Layer editable. Also, make sure each of the layers you want to clip are visible.

2. Use a Drawing Tool to draw the map clipping object.

3. Click the Select Tool and select that object.




The prompt “Retain the object used for clipping in the Cosmetic Layer” displays.

5. Select OK to leave the map clipping object in the Cosmetic Layer.

The selected map clipping object displays in the Cosmetic Layer.

6. To view the map region associated with the map clipping object choose Options > Region Style and choose None from the Pattern drop-down list.

The layers that comprise the clipped region display.

Map Window Preferences and Clip RegionsMap Window Options offers three options for specifying how clip regions are applied:

See:Set Clip Region

User’s Guide Chapter 7

Windows Device Clipping (all objects)

The Windows Device Display (screen or printer) provides the clip region functionality. All objects (including points, labels, text, rasters and grids) will be clipped at the Clip Region boundary. This is the default mode.

Erase Outside (no points, text)

The Erase Outside method uses the MapInfo Erase Outside functionality to produce the clipping. This method is used in all versions prior to MapInfo 6.0. The Clip Region object is the Cutter object, and all other objects are Target objects for this operation. All objects are clipped using Erase Outside, excepts points and labels. In addition, Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects, raster, and grids are always displayed and never clipped.

Windows Device Clipping (no points, text)

The Windows Device Clipping (no points, text) option emulates the Erase Outside method used in previous versions of MapInfo Professional. All objects are using Erase Outside except points and labels. Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects, rasters, and grids are always displayed and never clipped.


Clone View Map Menu

Clone View Map Menu

Use Clone View to:• make a duplicate of a map window.

Clone View is available when:• a map window is active.

Menu Path• Map > Clone View

Using Clone View Clone View, an especially helpful feature when creating a layout window, duplicates a map window. You may wish to show the same map with a different zoom level, for example.

To use Clone View:

• Choose Map > Clone View. A duplicate of the map window displays.



Close All Command File Menu

Close All Command File Menu

Use Close All to:• close all open tables and all Layout windows.

Close All is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• File > Close All

Closing All Open TablesTo close all open tables:

• Choose File > Close All.

If you have made no edits to the table(s), all tables will be closed.

If you have made edits to the table(s), the Save all layers with edited objects prompt displays:

See:Close Table Command

Close Choose a table to close.Since each window has only one cosmetic layer, that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains.

Discard Discard all edits.

Cancel Cancel the close operation.



Close DBMS Connection File Menu

Close DBMS Connection File Menu

Use Close DBMS Connection to:• close all DBMS connections without live tables.

Close DBMS Connection is available when:• at least one connection is open.

Menu Path• File > Close DBMS Connection

or

• DBMS Toolbar > Disconnect DBMS

Using Close DBMS ConnectionTo close a DBMS Connection:

1. Choose File > Close DBMS Connection from the menu or toolbar.

2. The Close DBMS Connection dialog displays. The list shows all open connections.

3. Press OK to close the selected connection.

See:DBMS Toolbar, Disconnect Button


Close Table Command File Menu


Use Close Table to:• close tables, including Query tables and Linked tables.

Close Table is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• File > Close Table

Closing a TableTo close a table:

• Choose File > Close Table. The Close Table dialog displays.

Close Table Dialog

When closing a window, but not the associated table, click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window; choose Close.

Close Choose a table to close.Since each window has only one cosmetic layer; that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains.

Cancel Close the dialog box; do not close the table.




Closing Multiple Tables To close multiple tables:

1. Choose File > Close Table. The Close Table dialog displays.

2. To close a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want.

To close multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables.

3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the tables.

Closing a Query TableWhen you make selections using Select, SQL Select, or any select tool, temporary tables are generated from the source table. When displayed in windows, these tables are named “Query1,” “Query2” etc. Closing these tables eliminates them, but does not affect the source table. However, if you close the source table, all associated query tables will be closed and eliminated.

To save the contents of a Query table:

• Choose File > Save Copy As.

Closing a Linked TableWhen you close a linked table and there are no edits pending, the file is closed and retains links to its respective DBMS table on the remote database.

When you close a linked table and there are edits pending, the Close Edited Linked Table dialog is displayed. This dialog provides three choices for how to close the linked table.

Closed Edited Linked Table Dialog



Save Changes to MapInfo Table

Save the edits only to the local MapInfo table. These may be saved to the server at a later time.

Save Changes to DBMS Table

Save edits to the DBMS table on the remote database. Edits are also saved to the local MapInfo table.

Discard Changes Discard the changes made to the table.

OK Accept the options.

Cancel Cancel the dialog box; do not close the table.



Combine Command Objects Menu


Use Combine to: • combine separate map objects into a single object. The Combine command also

performs data aggregation which allows a new object’s data columns to contain sums or averages of the values from the original objects.

The Combine command works with objects that are selected.

Combine is available when: • there is currently no map editing target (you have not chosen Objects > Set Target) and

two or more objects are selected in the editable layer of the active Map window

or

• there is currently a map editing target that consists of exactly one object and one or more map objects are selected in any layer of the active Map window.

Menu Path• Objects > Combine

Combining Map ObjectsWhen you choose Combine, MapInfo:

• geographically combines the selected objects. The new object represents the geographic union of the original objects. If you select two adjacent region objects and choose Combine, MapInfo combines the regions into a single object, and the border between the regions disappears

and

• performs data aggregation. Data aggregation is a process where MapInfo calculates what the column values for the new object should be, based on sums or averages of the values of the original objects.

For example, if you have a table of sales territories that contains demographic information about the number of households per territory, use the Combine command to combine two of the sales territories into one territory. In the same operation, you could also use data aggregation to calculate the number of households in the new territory by adding the values from each of the original territories.

Combining Different Types of Objects The Combine command can combine different types of closed objects: regions, rectangles, rounded rectangles and ellipses. Closed objects combine to produce a region object.

The Combine command also can combine different types of linear objects: lines, polylines and arcs. Linear objects combine to produce a polyline object.



Combining Selected Map Objects To combine selected map objects:

1. Select two or more map objects from the editable layer of the active Map window.

2. Choose Objects > Combine. The Data Aggregation dialog displays.

3. Complete the Data Aggregation dialog. In this dialog, specify how to calculate values for the data columns of the new object. Depending on the data, you may want the columns of the new object to contain sums or averages of the values from the selected objects. See the following: Using the Data Aggregation Dialog.

4. Choose OK. MapInfo combines the selected objects into a new region or polyline object; the original objects are deleted. The new combined object replaces the objects you selected in step 1.

Creating a Multipoint Object A multipoint object consists of a number of points combined into a single object. All points in a multipoint object have the same symbol. The multipoint object displays in the Browser as a single record.

To create a Multipoint Object:

1. Select two or more points from the editable layer of a map window.

2. Choose Objects > Combine. The points are combined into a single object.

To break up a Multipoint Object, use the Disaggregate Command.

Modifying Multipoint Object AttributesTo view the Multipoint Object dialog, the layer in which the object resides must be selectable; to edit the Multipoint Object dialog, the Multipoint Object must be in an editable layer. Access the Layer Control dialog to make the layer containing the Multipoint Object editable.

To display the Multipoint Object dialog:

Select a multipoint, press F7; the Multipoint Object dialog displays.

or

Double-click on the multipoint object; the Multipoint Object dialog displays.

or



Select a multipoint object; choose Edit > Get Info or right-click to display the ShortCut Menu, choose Get Info.

Using the Multipoint Object Dialog

Creating a Collection ObjectCreate a Collection Object by combining points, linear and closed objects into a single object. The Collection Object displays in the Browser as a single record.

All line, polyline, and arcs, combine to form a new polyline object.

All regions, rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ellipses combine to form a new region object.

Text objects cannot be combined.

To create a Collection Object:

1. Select two or more objects from the editable layer of a map window.

2. Choose Objects > Combine. The selection is combined into a single object.

To break up a Collection Object, use the Disaggregate Command.

Bounds X1, X2 Left and right boundaries of the object.

Center X, Y Coordinate value of the object’s center.

Bounds Y1, Y2 Top and bottom boundaries of the object.

Points Displays the number of points in the Multipoint Object.

Style Choose Style to access the Symbol Style dialog.



Modifying Collection Object AttributesTo view the Collection Objects dialog, the layer in which the collection resides must be selectable; to edit the Collection Object the Collection Object must be in an editable layer. Access the Layer Control dialog to make the layer containing the Collection Object editable.

To display the Collection Object dialog:

Select a Collection Object, press F7; the Collection Object dialog displays.

or

Double-click on the Collection Object; the Collection Object dialog displays.

or

Select a Collection Object; choose Edit > Get Info or right-click to display the ShortCut Menu, choose Get Info.



Using the Collection Object Dialog

Combining Selected Map Objects Using a Target ObjectThe Combine operation also works with the Edit menu’s target option. Before you choose Combine, you can select one map object and designate that object as the editing target. You can then select additional map objects and choose Combine to combine the selected objects with the target. If you set a target before you choose Combine, the Combine operation is more flexible by allowing you to combine objects from different tables.

You should assign a target object if one of the objects you are combining is more important than any of the other objects. For example, if you want to add small, unnamed islands to an existing “mainland” region, you should make the mainland region the target object. If you designate the mainland region as the target, the mainland region’s name is retained after the objects are combined.

To combine map objects using the map editing target:

1. Select one object in the editable layer of the active Map window.

2. Choose Objects > Set Target. The object you selected now appears in a different style, indicating that it is the map editing target.

3. Select one or more objects in any layer in the active Map window.


5. Complete the Data Aggregation dialog. Specify how to calculate the values for the data columns of the new object. Depending on the data, you may want the columns of the new object to contain sums or averages of the values from the selected objects. See the following: Using the Data Aggregation Dialog.

Bounds X1, X2 Left and right boundaries of the object.

Center X, Y Coordinate value of the object’s center.

Bounds Y1, Y2 Top and bottom boundaries of the object.

Region Displays the Total Area, Total Perimeter, Line Segments and number of polygons in the selected Collection Object. Choose the Style button to access the Region Style dialog.

Polyline Displays the Total Length, number of Line Segments and number of sections in the selected Collection Object. Check smooth to smooth the polyline. Choose the Style button to access the Style Picker dialog.

Multipoint Displays the number of points in the Collection Object. Choose Style to access the Symbol Style dialog.



6. Choose OK. The selected objects are combined into a new region or polyline object. This new object replaces the target object you selected in the first step. The objects you selected in the third step are deleted if they came from the same table as the target object. If the objects selected in step 3 reside in a different table, they are not deleted

since they are not in the editable layer.

Using the Data Aggregation Dialog The Combine command rewrites an existing row or writes a new row to a table. This row represents the union of the selected objects. To define the data values stored in this row’s columns complete the Data Aggregation dialog.

Choosing Data Aggregation MethodsTo specify data aggregation methods:

1. Select one or more columns by clicking in the list at the top of the dialog.

Use Shift-Click to select multiple contiguous columns.

Use Control-Click to select non-contiguous columns.

If you select multiple columns, the aggregation method is applied to all selected columns.

2. Choose a data aggregation method: Blank, No Change, Value, Sum, Average, or Weighted Average. (Depending on whether you specified an editing target, some of these aggregation methods may not be available.) MapInfo updates the column list in the upper half of the dialog to show the chosen method.

For example, if you choose Average, you calculate the average of the column values of all the selected objects. This average is stored in the column of the new row.

Aggregation methods are described below.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all columns in the table.

If the table contains a large number of columns, it can be time-consuming to specify aggregation methods for all columns. However, since the specified aggregation methods are retained for the entire session. The next time you choose Combine, you do not need to respecify all aggregation options.

Default Data Aggregation Methods When the Data Aggregation dialog first displays, MapInfo automatically assigns a default aggregation method to every column in the table. For numeric columns (Integer, Small Integer, Float, or Decimal), Sum is assigned as the default aggregation method. For all other types of columns, Value is assigned as the default method.

You can choose OK, without changing any of the default aggregation methods. However, the default aggregation methods may not produce meaningful results. By default, MapInfo uses



the Sum method for all numeric columns; however, depending on the data, it may not be appropriate to total all of the columns.

For example, perhaps the table contains demographic information, such as median income statistics. If two adjacent regions have different median income values ($30,000 and $35,000), and you combine the two regions, it is not appropriate to total the two values; instead, you should choose Average or Weighted Average as the aggregation method.

A Combine ExampleUse the Combine command to add island polygons to existing region objects.

To add an island to an existing region:

1. Make the appropriate map layer editable.

2. Select the region to which you want to add an island or lake.

3. Choose Objects > Set Target.

4. Use the Polygon tool to draw the new island.

5. Select the island region.


7. Check the No Data checkbox. Since you specified an editing target, checking No Data will not to modify any of the target’s column values.

8. Choose OK.



Data Aggregation Dialog

There are three slightly different versions of the Data Aggregation dialog; the dialog which displays depends on whether you have specified a map editing target or whether the currently-selected objects are in the same table as the target.

Aggregate Method


No Change Leave the selected column(s) unchanged. The No Change option is available only if you specified a map editing target.


Value Store a specific value, the value displayed in the edit field, in the new row. Enter an appropriate value in the field.



Sum Calculate a sum based on the column values from all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the sum in a column of the new row. The Sum option is available only if you have selected a numeric column or columns. If you have specified a map editing target, and if the editing target is in a different table than the currently selected object(s), the Sum option adds numeric values from both tables, and stores the sum in a column of the target object. See the following: Adding Values from Two Tables.

Average Calculate the average of the column values for all the objects to be combined. MapInfo stores the average in the new row. See the following: Averaging Column Values.

Weight By The Weight By control is available when you select the Average option. It is not available if the target object is in a different table than the selected objects. Choose a column on which to perform weighted averaging. With weighted averaging, MapInfo adjusts the calculation of averages so that the values from each selected object are weighted more or less heavily. The Weight By column gives some of the selected objects more impact, or “weight” than others. See the following: Weight By.







Adding Values from Two TablesTo add values from two tables:

1. Choose a column name from the list in the upper half of the dialog. This choice designates which of the target object’s columns will hold the sum value.

2. Choose a column name other than “none” from the drop-down list in the lower right part of the dialog. This drop-down list contains all numeric columns from the selected objects.

3. Choose the Sum option. MapInfo calculates the sum of values of the selected objects’ numeric column (the column you chose in step 2), then adds the target object’s numeric column (the column you chose in step 1), and stores the grand total in the target object’s numeric column.

Averaging Column ValuesIf you choose the Average option, and you do not choose a Weight By column, a simple average is calculated: the data values data values from all the objects to be combined are summed. This sum is divided by the sum by the number of objects to be combined. If you choose a Weight By column, a weighted average will be calculated. See the following: Weight By.

The Average option is available if you have selected only numeric columns. If you have specified a map editing target, and if the editing target is in a different table than the currently selected object(s), the Average option only becomes available when you choose a column name other than “none” in the columns drop-down list.

Weight By

The Weight By column gives some of the selected objects more impact, or “weight” than others. For example, the table may contain two numeric columns: a median income column, med_inc, and a net population column, net_pop. When you combine two regions in this table, you probably want to use the Average option to calculate the average of the median income values. If one region has a med_inc value of $30,000, and another region has a med_inc value of $36,000, and you combine the two regions, the resultant region might have a med_inc value of $33,000.

However, if one of the regions has a larger population than the other region, you would probably want the larger region’s med_inc value to be weighted more heavily when the average median income is calculated. In the Data Aggregation dialog, perform these steps:

1. Choose the med_inc column from the list in the upper part of the dialog.

2. Choose Average. MapInfo averages the med_inc values when combining objects.

3. Choose the net_pop column from the Weight By drop-down list. MapInfo weights the average median income calculations. Thus, objects with large net_pop values affect the median income averaging more than objects with small net_pop values.



If you are combining closed objects, the Weight By drop-down list contains a special option: Area. If you choose Area from the Weight By drop-down list, MapInfo weights the average calculations according to the relative geographic areas of the regions to be combined.

If you are combining linear objects, do not choose Area as the Weight By option. Linear objects have no width, therefore, they have no area.

To choose standard (non-weighted) averaging, choose “none” from the Weight By drop-down list.

See:Combine Using Column Command

Set Target Command

Split Command



Combine Objects Using Column Command Table Menu


Use Combine Objects Using Column to:• modify the geographical data and create one map object for each group. Combine

Objects Using Column is the reverse operation of a Split. If you have data or have created objects by splitting existing objects, you can combine them again by using a common value. You can create a new table for the newly combined objects.

Combine Objects Using Column is available when:• at least one MapInfo table is open.

Menu Path• Table > Combine Objects Using Column

A Combine Using Column ExampleIf you wanted to make a new map of the US based on areas such as Midwest, Pacific Coast, Northeast, etc., you can combine all of the state data and create new objects where some common data value is the key to which new map object the states will belong.

Draw a rectangle somewhere on the States map. Select some states around the rectangle and specify them as the target. Select the rectangle and perform a split operation. The new objects will be created and each split object will have its same state initials. Then, use Combine Using Column and specify the state initials fields as the grouping value. The states will be re-created.

Combining ColumnsTo combine columns:

1. Open at least one MapInfo table.

2. Choose Table > Combine Objects Using Column. The Combine Objects using Columns dialog displays.



Combine Objects using Column Dialog

Specify computations in the Data Aggregation Dialog; the objects will be combined. For information on how to use this dialog, see Combine Command, Using The Data Aggregation Dialog. If you specified a field where all values are unique for each object, no objects will be created.

See:Combine Command


Combine objects from table

Specify the table that the contains the objects to be combined.

Group objects by column

Specify the field (column) in that table that should be used as the basis for creating groups. If you specify a field where all values are unique for each object, no objects will be created.

Store results in table Specify the table in which to place the results. It can be the same as the Combine Objects from table. Choose New to create a new table in which to store the newly-combined objects. If you choose New, the New Table, New Table Structure and Create New Table dialogs display. See New Table Command.



Next Display the Data Aggregation dialog. See Combine Command, Using the The Data Aggregation Dialog.


Convert to Polylines Command Objects Menu


Use Convert to Polylines to: • change each of the selected objects into a polyline object.

Convert to Polylines is available when:• a Map window is the active window

and

• the Map window has an editable layer

and

• one or more objects in the editable layer are selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Convert to Polylines

Converting Objects into Polyline Objects When you choose Convert to Polylines, MapInfo converts each of the selected objects into a polyline. Each object is converted into a separate polyline; MapInfo does not combine all selected objects into one polyline. To combine objects, see the Combine Command.

Line, arc, ellipse, rectangle, rounded rectangle and region objects may all be converted to polylines. Point objects, text objects and polyline objects are not affected by the Convert to Polylines command.

If a region contains lakes or islands, and you convert that region to a polyline, the polyline has multiple sections. Each lake or island comprises one section of the polyline.

When you convert a circle or ellipse into a polyline, the polyline contains 101 nodes. When you convert an arc into an ellipse, the number of nodes depends on the starting and ending angle of the arc. If the arc spans 180 degrees (e.g. the starting angle is zero and the ending angle is 180), a polyline based on the arc will contain 51 nodes; if the arc spans 90 degrees, a polyline based on the arc will contain 26 nodes.

MapInfo versions earlier than 3.0 cannot display multi-section polylines. If you produce maps for users of MapInfo version 2.x, do not enter any multi-section polylines in the maps. To see the number of sections in a polyline object, select the object and choose Edit > Get Info.

Using Convert To Polylines The Convert to Polylines command simplifies the task of creating doughnut-shaped buffer regions. If you want to create a buffer representing the area within one mile of a county boundary. You may want the buffer to be doughnut-shaped, extending exactly one mile to either side of the county line.



You could create a buffer simply by selecting the county region and choosing Objects > Buffer. However, the resultant buffer would not be doughnut-shaped; it would contain all of the county, plus an area of one mile outside the county.

If you convert the county region into a polyline before you choose Buffer, the resultant buffer region is doughnut-shaped.

Convert to Polylines also allows you to perform node-editing operations (e.g. adding and moving nodes) on objects that ordinarily do not allow node editing. For example, MapInfo does not allow you to add nodes to rectangle objects; however, if you convert a rectangle to a polyline, you can then add nodes to the polyline.

See:Polyline Button



Convert to Regions Command Objects Menu

Convert to Regions Command Objects Menu

Use Convert to Regions to: • change each selected object into a region object.

Convert to Regions is available when: • a Map window is the active window

and

• the Map window has an editable layer

and

• one or more objects in the editable layer are selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Convert to Regions

Converting Objects Into Region Objects When you choose Convert to Regions, MapInfo converts each of the selected objects into a region object. Each object is converted into a separate region; MapInfo does not combine all selected objects into one region. To combine objects, use the Combine command. MapInfo automatically assigns the current region style to each of the region objects. To specify a region style, choose Options > Region Style.

Polyline, arc, ellipse, rectangle, and rounded rectangle objects may all be converted to regions. Point objects, text objects and region objects are not affected by the Convert to Regions command. When you convert a circle or ellipse into a region, the region contains 101 nodes. When you convert an arc into a region, the number of nodes depends on the starting and ending angle of the arc. If the arc spans 180 degrees (e.g. the starting angle is zero and the ending angle is 180), a region based on the arc will contain 52 nodes; if the arc spans 90 degrees, a region based on the arc will contain 27 nodes; etc.

Using Convert to RegionsIf you perform extensive map editing, you may need to convert polylines to regions. If you Cut or Copy a group of selected nodes, MapInfo treats the set of nodes as a polyline object, and places the polyline on the clipboard. If you then paste the object, MapInfo places the polyline on the map. At this point, you may want to perform Convert to Regions, depending on whether you want the finished object to be a region. Convert to Regions also allows you to perform node-editing operations (adding and moving nodes) on objects that ordinarily do not allow node editing. For example, you can not add nodes to rectangle objects; however, if you convert a rectangle object to a region, you can then add nodes to the region.



Copy Command Edit Menu


Use Copy to:• copy the selected text and/or graphic objects information and place it on the

clipboard.

Copy is available when:• a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected

or

• a Map window is active and at least one object from the map is selected

or

• a Graph window is active

or

• the MapBasic window is open with text selected

or

• a Layout window is active and at least one object is selected.

Menu Path• Edit > Copy

Copying Objects to the ClipboardBefore using the Copy command, you may want to specify what is copied and moved to the clipboard. See the following: Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard.

To copy objects to the clipboard:

1. Select the graphic or text you want to copy.

2. Choose Edit > Copy.

A copy of the selected graphic or text is now on the clipboard. You can paste the contents of the clipboard to the appropriate location.

Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the ClipboardWhat happens when you copy objects to the clipboard depends on the settings in the Copy to Clipboard option in the System Preferences dialog, accessed through Options > Preferences.

• Choose Options > Preferences > System Settings. The System Settings Preferences

dialog displays.



Copy to Clipboard

See:Cut Command

Paste Command

Copy TEXT to clipboard

Copy only text to the clipboard. When you do not want text copied to the clipboard during Cut and Copy operations, clear the Copy TEXT to clipboard option.

Copy BITMAP to clipboard

Copy only graphic objects as a bitmap; bitmaps are non-scalable representations of the object.

Copy Metafile to clipboard

Copy graphic objects as a metafile; metafiles are scalable representations of an object.





Create 3DMap Map Menu


Use Create 3DMap to:• create a 3D view of a Grid Thematic map.

Create 3DMap is available when:• the active map window contains a Grid Thematic map.

Menu Path• Map > Create 3DMap

3DMapUse the Create 3DMap command to create a 3D view of a Grid Thematic map when the Grid Thematic map is in the active window. You can rotate, zoom, and pan the 3D view. Additionally, you can clone the 3D view.

The 3DMap window is a standalone window. Therefore, if you modify the tables in the Grid Thematic map used to create the 3DMap, choose the Refresh Grid Texture option in the 3DMap menu to update the 3DMap.

To change the settings in an existing 3DMap window, select Properties on the 3DMap menu.



Creating a 3DMapTo create a 3DMap:

1. Create a Grid Thematic map; or open an existing Grid Thematic map. See Create Thematic Map Command.

2. Choose Map > Create 3DMap. The Create 3DMap dialog displays.

Camera Specify the camera position and orientation. Horizontal Angle: Enter a horizontal angle; ranges from 0-360 degrees and rotates the map around the center point of the grid.Vertical Angle: Enter a vertical angle; ranges from 0-90 and measures the rotation in elevation from the start point directly over the map.

Light Designate the position of the light source. The 3DMap lies on an X-Y plane. Therefore, X, Y and Z represent the coordinates based on the 3DMap’s Cartesian plane, with 0 at the center of the plane. Color: Choose a color that ’covers’ the camera’s lens as it views the map.



The 3DWindow MenuWhen the 3DMap is the active window, the 3DWindow menu option displays. Additionally, the 3DWindow menu option displays by right-clicking the mouse button when in the 3DMap window.

Appearance Units: Specify the units the grid values are in. Specify None for ’unitless’ grids, for example, grids displaying temperature or density. This option is only available when the 3DMap is initially created.

Resolution: Designate the number of samples to take in the X and Y directions. The resolution values can be set to a value greater than the grid size, but the actual number of samples will not exceed the actual grid size. The smaller the number of samples, the faster the grid will rotate.

Scale: Designate a number to scale the grid in the Z direction. A value less than 1 scales down the features and a value greater than one exaggerates the scale in the Z direction.

Background Color: Designate a background color using the color

palette.

Refresh Texture Regenerate the image that is used for the texture on the grid. If the tables used in the 3DMap change or objects are updated, use this option to refresh the map.

Clone View Create a clone of the 3DMap window.

Previous View Return to the previous view of the 3DMap.

View Entire Grid Recenter the 3DMap in the window. If you zoom or pan the map from view, use this option to redisplay the map in the window.



Manipulating the 3DMap To manipulate within the 3DMap window, choose the Select tool, click and hold the left mouse button in the 3DMap window. As you move the mouse the viewpoint will be rotated around the focal point.

The Info, Grabber, and Zoom tools are available for use within the 3DMap window. The Info Tool will return the grid elevation value at a selected point.

3DMap Preference OptionChoose Options > Preferences > Map Window to display the Map Window options. Clear the “Enable Hardware Acceleration for 3DMap Window” box to allow MapInfo to display the 3DMap without using your video card acceleration capability.While disabling hardware rendering will diminish performance, it does avoid potential failure when using certain graphic adapters and drivers.

See:Create Thematic Map


Viewpoint Control Display the Viewpoint Control dialog. The Where Am I section of the dialog displays a sample of the active 3DMap.Rotate Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to rotate the sample view in the specified direction.Pan Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to pan the sample view in the specified direction.Zoom Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to zoom in or out on the sample view.Mapper View: Display the view of the map used to create the 3DMap.OK: Redraw the map with the specified changes. Close the Viewpoint Control dialog.Cancel: Return to the 3DMap, with no changes made.Apply: Apply the changes to the 3DMap; do not close the Viewpoint Control dialog.

Wireframe Toggle between a wireframe and surface representation of the grid. This option is not saved to a workspace. Additionally, cloned 3DMap windows do not display the wireframe.

Properties Display the 3DMap Properties dialog displaying the current 3DMap settings. Use this dialog to modify the Light and Appearance settings of the active 3DMap. Additionally, display this menu by right-clicking when in the 3DMap window.


Create Convex Hull Objects Menu

Create Convex Hull Objects Menu

Use Convex Hull to:• create a polygon representing a convex hull around a set of points.

Convex Hull is available when:• a map is active

and

• there is an editable layer in the map

and

• objects are selected.

Menu Path• Object > Create Convex Hull

Using Convex HullConvex Hull creates a polygon representing a convex hull around a set of points. Convex Hull can be considered an operator that places a rubber band around a minimal set of points such that all other points lie on the boundary or inside the polygon. The points used to construct the convex hull are any nodes from regions, polylines or points in the table. Create one convex hull object from all of the input objects, or create one convex hull object for each input object.

To create a Convex Hull:

1. Select objects in an active map window with an editable layer. Convex Hull requires three input nodes to produce results. Therefore, the minimum input is three point objects, or one point and a line or a three point polyline or region.

2. Choose Objects > Convex Hull. The Create Convex Hull dialog displays:

Create One Convex Hull Object Using

One output object for all input objects

Create one convex object from all of the input objects.

One output object for each input object

Create multiple convex objects, one for each of the input objects.


Create Drop Shadows Command Layout Menu


Use Create Drop Shadows to:• create drop shadows behind window frames or objects in a layout.

Create Drop Shadows is available when:• a Layout window is the active window

and

• any layout object is selected.

Menu Path• Layout > Create Drop Shadows

or


Creating Drop ShadowsTo create a drop shadow:

1. Click the object with the Select tool.

or

Press <SHIFT > and click on several objects.

or

Choose Query > Select All to select all the objects in the layout.

2. Choose Layout > Create Drop Shadows.

The Create Drop Shadow dialog displays.



Create Drop Shadow Dialog

See:Frame Button

New Layout Window Command


Distance to offset the drop shadow

The default offset value is .125 inch, or .318 centimeters. When you change the values, MapInfo retains the changes throughout the session or until you change them again.

Horizontal The left-to-right offset.

Vertical The top-to-bottom offset.

OK Accept the dialog options. The drop shadow displays behind the selected object(s). To delete or change the fill pattern and line style of a drop shadow, select the shadow object and choose Options > Region Style, or double-click to open the Rectangle Object dialog. See Region Style Button/Command.When you move or resize the layout object, the shadow does not resize or move. You may not want to create a drop shadow until you are sure of the position of its source.




Create Legend Map Menu

Create Legend Map Menu There are two legend windows available in MapInfo Professional: the theme legend window and the cartographic legend window. The theme legend window is automatically created and details the meaning of the colors, symbols and styles on a thematic map. You can display or hide the theme legend window using the Options > Show/Hide Theme Legend Window menu option.

The cartographic legend displays legend frames for any map layer, not just thematic map layers. The legend frames can all be in one window, or can be split among several legend windows for the same map. Therefore, each map can have one or more cartographic legend windows containing the frames of your choice. Additionally, you can customize the text and style of the information presented.

The Create Legend process allows you to create attribute driven legends. This makes it easier to create legends because text descriptions can be automatically generated. Legends can be created based on unique map styles, or by unique values in an attribute column. Text descriptions can be generated from attribute columns and/or expressions. Additionally, the process by which the legend was generated can be saved to the map table metadata as a default that will be invoked when the legend is next created. The metadata defaults are used to initialize the Create Legend Step 3 dialog. Override metadata defaults and select your own settings in the dialog and save your changes by writing them to the map table metadata.

Use Create Legend to:• Show cartographic data for any map layer, not just thematic map layers.

Create Legend is Available when:• a map is in the active window.

Menu Path• Map > Create Legend

Creating a Cartographic Legend

Glossary:Legend Window: A window containing legend frames. You can create more than one legend window for each map. The legend window can contain more than one frame. For example, you can have one legend window containing four legend frames, or you can have four legend windows, each containing one legend frame.

Legend Frames: Each legend frame corresponds to a style or theme layer in the map window; the legend frame displays within the legend window.



Creating a Cartographic Legend

• Choose Map > Create Legend. The Create Legend Step 1 of 3 dialog displays.

The Create Legend Step 1 of 3 Dialog

From Map Displays the title of the map window for which the legend will be created.

Legend Frames The Legend Window contains a legend frame for each layer listed in the Legend Frames listbox. Legend Frames contains the layers that can contribute to the legend window. A layer must contain style attributes or theme information to appear in the listbox; therefore raster layers are not included in the listbox. When the legend is created, the information about each layer displays in a frame; you can choose to place a border around each frame to make it more distinct. By default, all layers are selected and appear in the Legend Frames listbox. If you want to choose specific layers for the cartographic legend you are creating, use the Remove button to move the layer name to the Layers listbox.

Remove Remove layers from the Legend Frames listbox . These layers will not be included in the cartographic legend.

Add Add layers to the cartographic legend.

Layers Any layer you move to the Layers listbox will not be included in the legend window.



Create Legend Step 2 of 3 dialog

Legend Properties

Next Display the Create Legend Step 2 of 3 Dialog. This dialog sets default options for all frames picked in Step 1. After the frame is created, you can override the settings for any frame by selecting the frame and clicking the right mouse button to display the frame properties dialog.

Finish A legend is created, using one frame for each layer listed in the Legend Frame listbox. Multipoint objects are treated as point objects. Collection objects display at the end of the legend.


Window title Enter a title for the Legend, or accept <Default> to let MapInfo generate the title based on the title of the Map window.

Scroll bars Check to include scroll bars in the legend window.

Portrait/Landscape Determines the orientation of frames within the legend window.



Legend Frame Defaults

Title Pattern Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. Each occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of # . This will produce Legend of States. To create a title with the # character in it, precede it with a ’\’ character. For example, ”\# of Customers” produces ” # of Customers”.

Subtitle Pattern Designates subtitle text; uses the # symbol in the same manner as described in Title Pattern.

Style Name Pattern Designates the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. Use the % character to include the symbol type: point, line, region in the style name text. For example, ” % of #” expands to ”Region of States”. To create a title with the % character in it, precede it with a ’\’ character. For example, ”\% of Total” produces ” % of Total”.

The % symbol is available only in the style pattern option; the # symbol can be used in Title, Subtitle and Style patterns.

Border Style Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the check to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.

Next Display the Create Legend Step 3 of 3 Dialog. This dialog sets default options for all frames picked in Step 1. After the frame is created, you can override the settings for any frame by selecting the frame and clicking the right mouse button to display the frame properties dialog.

Finish Display the legend. Multipoint objects are treated as point objects. Collection objects display at the end of the legend.If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.



Create Legend Step 3 of 3 dialog

Select and set attributes for each Legend Frame.

Legend Frames The list box includes all frames selected in Step 1 (including all theme frames). The list is single select. Select one frame and set attributes for it (or accept the defaults). Each frame in the list represents a layer (and underlying table) in the map.

Title Designate a title for the selected legend frame.

Subtitle Designate a subtitle for the selected legend frame.

The title and subtitle are either from the defaults indicated in the Step 2 of 3 Create Legend dialog or from the metadata in the .tab file. If metadata keys do not exist, the Legend Frame Defaults from Step 2 are used. See the following section: Save Frame Settings to Metadata.

Styles from unique map styles:

unique values in selected column: select from a list of columns in the table

Label styles with Displays a list of columns in the table + <Style Name Pattern> + Join + Expression.... Join displays in the drop-down list if at least two tables are open. If you select Join, the Update Columns dialog displays. Complete the dialog and choose OK to create a legend using information from a Joined table. Choose Finish in the Step 3 of 3 Create Legend dialog to create the legend.



Creating a Customized LabelTo create a customized label, choose Expression... to display the Expression dialog box. In the Expression dialog box you can create multiline labels (using CHR$(10)) that references several columns of text.

Put single quotation marks around text in label expressions.

Creating Legends with Labels from a Joined TableCreate Legend frames using labels from a joined table:

1. In the Create Legend, Step 3 of 3 dialog, choose Join from the Label styles with drop-down list. The Update Column dialog displays.Choose Join; the Specify Join dialog displays. Complete the dialog; if necessary, specify the information needed to associate the data in the two tables by using their common tabular or graphic data.

2. Choose OK to display the Step 3 of 3 dialog; choose OK to create the legend.

Working with Theme LegendsOnly title/subtitles can be set for theme frames. If a theme layer is selected, the title/subtitle currently set for the thematic legend displays; you may edit these. The other options are not available. Changing a theme legend’s title/subtitle affects all occurrences of the thematic legend. Additionally, fonts designated in Step 2 will not be applied to thematic legends.

Display Style Overrides Are in EffectWhen the selected layer has style overrides active, the following text is displayed at the bottom of the dialog: “Display style overrides are in effect for this legend frame.” and column and label fields are ignored when the legend is created. However, if Display style overrides are not active for the map layer and the legend is refreshed, it will refresh according to the column and label originally designated.

Save Frame Settings to Metadata

Choose “Save frame settings to Metadata“ to save the settings for Title, Subtitle, styles column and styles label to the table metadata for the selected legend frame. If you select this option, the designated settings are saved to the table metadata, and become the defaults for the legend frame.

Finish Display the legend. Multipoint objects are treated as point objects. Collection objects display at the end of the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.

Cancel Exit from the Create Legend dialogs.

Back Return to Step 2 of 3 dialog.

Help Display the Help topic.



Metadata Support For Step 3If you have saved the frame settings to the table metadata, the map layer table is updated accordingly.

The metadata keys are:

”\legend” = ””

”\legend\title” = ”a string value”

”\legend\subtitle” = ”a string value”

”\legend\column” = ”a column identifier”

”\legend\label” = ”an expression”

Example:“\legend” = “ ”

“\legend\title” = “Legend”

“\legend\subtitle” = “ ”

“\legend\column” = “type”

“\legend\label” = “Ucase$(type)”

If there is no metadata for \legend\column, the default is:

• Styles from = unique map styles (e.g., the object column)

If there is no metadata for \legend\label, the default in the User Interface and MapBasic is:

• Label styles with = <Style Name Pattern>

Therefore, the current value of Style Name Pattern from Step 2 is used to generate legend text, based upon Legend Preferences. If there is no metadata for \legend\title or \legend\subtitle, the default will be based on the Title and Subtitle patterns defined in Legend Preferences.

Metadata Keys and Style OverrideWe support the following metadata keys when Display Style override is active. If these keys exist, their value is used for the legend text.

\legend\allpoints = some string value

\legend\alllines = some string value

\legend\allregions = some string value



Creating Metadata KeysEmbedded string literals in label expressions have to be double quoted to be supported in metadata. For example, to add the string constant ”Feature Code” to an expression that returns the uppercase string from the column fcode, set the metadata key/value like this:

• ”\legend\label” = ”Ucase$(fcode) + ”” Feature Code ”””

Note that a metadata key such as:

• ”\legend\label” = ””

does not mean that the label expression is an empty string. It means that there is NO metadata available for the ”\legend\label” key, so the default will be <Style Name Pattern>.

Extended Metadata Support (pass-through metadata keys)For data that has feature codes, but no feature description, there is additional metadata support, called Pass-through Keys. The keys map column values to descriptive text used in the legend. Table metadata contains ’pass-through” text for legends if the following criteria are met:

1. the metadata label expression is a simple column reference.

2. a pass-through prefix key exists in the metadata that is the result of appending the column reference to the top level ”\legend” key, for example, given the following legend label expression key:

• ”\legend\label” = ”CFCC”

the following pass-through prefix key must also exist in metadata:

• ”\legend\CFCC”

The prefix key may exist as a separate line in metadata:

• ”\legend\CFCC” = ””

If the above two criteria are met, then the legend creation code looks for legend text in additional ’pass-through’ metadata keys that are the result of appending evaluated label expressions to the prefix key. The values for each key replace the original expression value:

• ”\legend\CFCC\F32” = ”Church”

• ”\legend\CFCC\F34” = ”Hospital”

• ”\legend\CFCC\value_n” = ”legend text used in place of CFCC value_n”

This results in a legend with the descriptive text “Church”, “Hospital”’ etc., rather than “F32”, or “F34”.

Metadata Pass-through Key LimitationsOnce a Legend Frame that uses pass-through metadata keys for text is created, changes to the pass-through key values do not display in a Legend Refresh. They will display the next time the Legend Frame is recreated.



Working with the Legend Window

Modifying Legend Window Properties

Click the right mouse button anywhere in the legend window to display the Shortcut Menu.

or

• Double-click in the legend window, outside of a legend frame.

or

• Choose Legend > Window Properties.

The Legend menu, including the shortcut menu, is context sensitive. When no legend frame is selected, the final item is “Window Properties. . . ” If a frame is selected the last item is ”Properties.”

The Legend Window Properties dialog displays.

The Legend Window Properties Dialog

Properties

Window title Enter a window title or type <default> to use the default title.

Scroll bars Choose to display scroll bars in the window.

Autoscroll Choose to activate autoscroll.

Smart Pan The Grabber Tool will automatically redraw the exposed area as the legend is moved, otherwise the redraw is not done until the grab is finished.



Working with Legend Frames

Adding a Legend Frame

To add a frame to a legend window:

• Choose Legend > Add Frames.

or

• Right click in the legend window; choose Add Frames from the Shortcut Menu.


Legend Frames Displays only layers that are not currently contributing to the legend.

Add Add layer(s) from the Layers listbox to the Legend Frame listbox. The layers will be added to the legend frame.

Remove Remove layers from the Legend Frames listbox . These layers will not be included in the cartographic legend.

Layers Any layer you move to the Layers listbox will not be included in the legend window.

Finish Display the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.

Next Displays the Add Frames Step 2 of 2 dialog.



Add Frames - Step 2 of 3

Legend Frame Defaults

Title Pattern Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. Each occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of # . This will produce Legend of States. To create a title with the # character in it, precede it with a ’\’ character. For example, ”\ # of Customers” produces ” # of Customers”.


Style Name Pattern Designates the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. Use the % character to include the symbol type: point, line, region in the style name text. For example, ” % of #” expands to ”Region of States”. To create a title with the % character in it, precede it with a ’\’ character. For example, ”\ % of Total” produces ” % of Total”.

The % symbol is available only in the style pattern option; the # symbol can be used in Title, Subtitle and Style patterns.

Border Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the X to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.



Add Frames - Step 3 of 3

Select and set attributes for each Legend Frame.

Back Return to previous dialog.

Finish Display the legend. If the Legend is the active window, Legend displays as a menu option.

Legend Frames The list box includes all frames selected in Step 1 (including all theme frames). The list is single select. Select one frame and set attributes for it (or accept the defaults). Each frame in the list represents a layer (and underlying table) in the map.

Title Designate a title for the selected legend frame.

Subtitle Designate a subtitle for the selected legend frame.

The title and subtitle are either from the defaults indicated in the Step 2 of 3 Create Legend dialog or from the metadata in the .tab file. If metadata keys do not exist, the Legend Frame Defaults from Step 2 are used. See the following section: Save Frame Settings to Metadata.

Styles from unique map styles:

unique values in selected column: select from a list of columns in the table



Creating a Customized LabelTo create a customized label, choose Expression... to display the Expression dialog box. In the Expression dialog box you can create multiline labels (using CHR$(10)) that references several columns of text.

Put single quotation marks around text in label expressions.

Working with Theme LegendsOnly title/subtitles can be set for theme frames. If a theme layer is selected, the title/subtitle currently set for the thematic legend displays; you may edit these. The other options are not available. Changing a theme legend’s title/subtitle affects all occurrences of the thematic legend. Additionally, fonts designated in Step 2 will not be applied to thematic legends.

Display Style Overrides Are in EffectWhen the selected layer has style overrides active, the following text is displayed at the bottom of the dialog: “Display style overrides are in effect for this legend frame.” and column and label fields are ignored when the legend is created. However, if Display style overrides are not active for the map layer and the legend is refreshed, it will refresh according to the column and label originally designated.

Metadata Support For Step 3If you have saved the frame settings to the table metadata, the map layer table is updated accordingly.

The metadata keys are:

”\legend” = ””

”\legend\title” = ”a string value”

”\legend\subtitle” = ”a string value”

”\legend\column” = ”a column identifier”

”\legend\label” = ”an expression”

Label styles with Displays a list of columns in the table + <Style Name Pattern> + Join + Expression.... Join displays in the drop-down list if at least two tables are open. If you select Join, the Update Columns dialog displays. Complete the dialog and choose OK to create a legend using information from a Joined table. Choose Finish in the Step 3 of 3 Add Frame dialog to create the legend.

Save Frame Settings to Metadata

Choose “Save frame settings to Metadata“ to save the settings for Title, Subtitle, styles column and styles label to the table metadata for the selected legend frame. If you select this option, the designated settings are saved to the table metadata, and become the defaults for the legend frame.



Example:“\legend” = “ ”

“\legend\title” = “Legend”

“\legend\subtitle” = “ ”

“\legend\column” = “type”

“\legend\label” = “Ucase$(type)”

If there is no metadata for \legend\column, the default is:

• Styles from = unique map styles (e.g., the object column)

If there is no metadata for \legend\label, the default in the User Interface and MapBasic is:

• Label styles with = <Style Name Pattern>

Therefore, the current value of Style Name Pattern from Step 2 is used to generate legend text, based upon Legend Preferences. If there is no metadata for \legend\title or \legend\subtitle, the default will be based on the Title and Subtitle patterns defined in Legend Preferences.

Metadata Keys and Style OverrideWe support the following metadata keys when Display Style override is active. If these keys exist, their value is used for the legend text.

\legend\allpoints = some string value

\legend\alllines = some string value

\legend\allregions = some string value

Creating Metadata KeysEmbedded string literals in label expressions have to be double quoted to be supported in metadata. For example, to add the string constant ”Feature Code” to an expression that returns the uppercase string from the column fcode, set the metadata key/value like this:

• ”\legend\label” = ”Ucase$(fcode) + ”” Feature Code ”””

Note that a metadata key such as:

• ”\legend\label” = ””

does not mean that the label expression is an empty string. It means that there is NO metadata available for the ”\legend\label” key, so the default will be <Style Name Pattern>.



Extended Metadata Support (pass-through metadata keys)For data that has feature codes, but no feature description, there is additional metadata support, called Pass-through Keys. The keys map column values to descriptive text used in the legend. Table metadata contains ’pass-through” text for legends if the following criteria are met:

1. the metadata label expression is a simple column reference.

2. a pass-through prefix key exists in the metadata that is the result of appending the column reference to the top level ”\legend” key, for example, given the following legend label expression key:

• ”\legend\label” = ”CFCC”

the following pass-through prefix key must also exist in metadata:

• ”\legend\CFCC”

The prefix key may exist as a separate line in metadata:

• ”\legend\CFCC” = ””

If the above two criteria are met, then the legend creation code looks for legend text in additional ’pass-through’ metadata keys that are the result of appending evaluated label expressions to the prefix key. The values for each key replace the original expression value:

• ”\legend\CFCC\F32” = ”Church”

• ”\legend\CFCC\F34” = ”Hospital”

• ”\legend\CFCC\value_n” = ”legend text used in place of CFCC value_n”

This results in a legend with the descriptive text “Church”, “Hospital”’ etc., rather than “F32”, or “F34”.

Metadata Pass-through Key LimitationsOnce a Legend Frame that uses pass-through metadata keys for text is created, changes to the pass-through key values do not display in a Legend Refresh. They will display the next time the Legend Frame is recreated.

Modifying Legend Frame PropertiesTo modify a Legend Frame:

Select a frame with the left mouse button; click the right mouse button to display the Shortcut Menu. Choose Properties.

or

Choose Legend > Properties after a frame is selected.

The Frame Properties dialog displays.

If you have selected the frame for a thematic map, the Modify Thematic Map dialog displays; choose Legend to display the Customize Legend dialog.



Frame

Title Enter a title for the Legend Frame.

Title Font Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.).

Subtitle Enter a subtitle for the Legend Frame.

Subtitle Font Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose a font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.).

Border Style Check to place a border around the selected Legend Frame. Click the box displaying the check to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.

Styles Listbox displays the name of each style object in the selected frame. To edit the style text, double-click on a listview item or click once to select, then click the listview item again.

Font Select to display the Text Styles dialog. Choose a font; font size; color; effects (including haloing, bold etc.).

Edit selected text here Enter text that will replace the selected text. You can enter multiple lines of text.



Deleting a Legend FrameTo delete a legend frame:

• Select the frame to be deleted; press the DEL key. If you delete the last legend frame, the legend window will close.

or

• Click on the frame with the right mouse button and select Delete from the menu.

Moving a Legend Frame• Use the left mouse button to select and drag the frame to a new location within the

legend window.

Legend RefreshChoose Legend Refresh to redraw the legend window.

To access Legend Refresh:

• Choose Legend > Refresh.

or

• Right-click anywhere in the Legend window to display the Shortcut Menu: choose Refresh.

The Refresh dialog displays.

Refresh Styles MapInfo will rescan the tables associated with each “refreshable” frame. New styles are added to the frame and obsolete styles are removed. “Non-refreshable” frames can be constructed via MapBasic.

Refresh Layout MapInfo will redraw the frames in the legend using the portrait/landscape setting. Portrait/Landscape: Determines the orientation of the frames when the layout is refreshed.

Refresh Alignment Realign styles and text across all frames, regardless of whether the legend window is in portrait, landscape, or custom layout mode.



The Customize Legend DialogThe Customize Legend option in the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog includes the Into Window and Border options. The Into Window dropdown list displays these options:

No Legend Window: A cartographic legend window is not created for the theme. However, if the old theme legend window is open, the theme legend displays in it.

New Legend Window: Create a new cartographic legend using the specified options.

Legend of (title): Add the theme information to the existing cartographic legend.

Note: All legend information, including edited text is saved to the workspace.Embedding cartographic legend windows inside map windows and the shields layer of MapInfo StreetPro are not supported in cartographic legends.

A cartographic legend based on a Live Access SpatialWare table displays the object types: points, lines, and regions, stored in the ObjectTypeColumn in MapInfo_MapCatalog. You can edit the ObjectTypeColumn in MapInfo_MapCatalog.

See: Show/Hide Theme, Legend Window, Legend Button and the User’s Guide: Chapter 16


Create Points Command Table Menu


Use Create Points to:• create point objects for a database with X and Y coordinates. These points can then be

displayed on a map.

Create Points is available when:• at least one table is open

and

• the table has at least two numeric fields. The table cannot be read-only.

Menu Path• Table > Create Points

Creating Points Use Table > Create Points to create point objects for a database that has X and Y coordinates or longitude/latitude coordinate information. It is most useful when you are working with files imported from other databases. These points can be displayed on a map.

When you do not have coordinates in the table, you can use Geocode to match some other geographic information (such as street address or ZIP Code) against a table already containing graphic objects.

To create points:

1. Open a table with x and y coordinate information; it cannot be read only.

2. Choose Table > Create Points. The Create Points dialog displays.

Create Points Dialog



See:Geocode Command


Create points for table Choose a table from the drop-down list.

using symbol Display the Symbol Style dialog from which you can choose a symbol to mark the point on the map. See Symbol Style Button.

Get X coordinates from column

Specify the column for obtaining X coordinate information.

Get Y coordinates from column

Specify the column for obtaining Y coordinate information.

Multiply the X coordinates by

Specify a multiplier for the X coordinate (i.e. multiply all MapInfo for DOS data by -0.000001 to convert to degrees). The default is 1. Multipliers vary depending on the GIS system. You can specify a different multiplier for each coordinate. Coordinates in MapInfo for Windows, Macintosh, Sun, and HP increase up and to the right. Coordinates in MapInfo for DOS increase up and to the left. The default X coordinate multiplier is a negative number to convert between these two systems.

Multiply the Y coordinates by

Specify a multiplier for the Y coordinate. When the table has no graphic objects, the coordinates are interpreted as longitude and latitude values. When the table already has graphic objects (some rows already have point objects) the coordinate values are treated as native coordinates in the projection saved with the map.



Projection Choose the Projection button to display the Choose Projection dialog. Specify the coordinate system of the coordinates from the X and Y fields. By default, it is the same as the table’s coordinate system. If the table is not mappable, it defaults to Longitude/Latitude. See Projection Button.



Create Prism Map Command Map Menu


Use Create Prism Map to: • Create a Prism Map, a three dimensional map, which displays the base geometry to

the height of a corresponding row value. A Prism Map displays the magnitude of certain mapped values with respect to others. Combine a Prism Map with a color thematic map to display two attributes on one map to correlate and compare various values.

Create Prism Map is available when: • the active map has a layer containing area objects.

Menu Path• Map > Create Prism Map

Creating a Prism Map

To create a Prism Map:1. Choose Map > Create Prism Map. The Create Prism Map

dialog displays.



Appearance

The 3DWindow Menu

When the Prism Map is the active window, the 3DWindow menu option displays. Additionally, the 3DWindow menu option displays by right-clicking the mouse button when in the Prism Map window.

Choose Layer and Column

This value is used to determine the height of a specific object.

Layer Choose a layer from the drop-down list.

Column Choose a column from the drop-down list. Only numeric columns from the designated layer display in the drop-down list. To use a character column, choose Expression to create an expression to convert the character string to a number using the Val() function. This will return zero for any character string that has no numeric meaning.

Background Color Specify a color to use as the window background color.

Light Color Choose a color that ’covers’ the camera’s lens as it views

the map.

Camera Specify the camera position and orientation.

Horizontal Angle Ranges from 0-360 degrees and rotates the map around

the center point of the grid.

Vertical Angle Ranges from 0-90 and measures the rotation in elevation

from the start point directly over the map.



Using The Prism Map Properties DialogP

• To display the Prism Map Properties dialog: Choose 3DWindow > Properties

OR

• Right click to display the Short Cut Menu; choose Properties.

Refresh Texture Regenerate the image that is used for the texture on the grid. If the tables used in the Prism Map change or objects are updated, use this option to refresh the map.

Clone View Create a clone of the Prism Map window.

Previous View Return to the previous view of the Prism Map.

View Entire Layer Recenter the Prism Map in the window. If you zoom or pan the map from view, use this option to redisplay the map in the window.

Viewpoint Control Display the Viewpoint Control dialog. The Where Am I section of the dialog displays a sample of the active Prism Map.Rotate Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to rotate the sample view in the specified direction.Pan Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to pan the sample view in the specified direction.Zoom Viewpoint: Click the left mouse button to zoom in or out on the sample view.Mapper View: Display the view of the map used to create the Prism Map.OK: Redraw the map with the specified changes. Close the Viewpoint Control dialog.Cancel: Return to the Prism Map, with no changes made.Apply: Apply the changes to the Prism Map; do not close the Viewpoint Control dialog.

Wireframe Toggle between a wireframe and surface representation of the grid. This option is not saved to a workspace. Additionally, cloned Prism Map windows do not display the wireframe.

Properties Display the Prism MapProperties dialog. See Using the Prism Map Properties Dialog.



The Prism Map Properties dialog displays.

Manipulating the Prism Map

To manipulate within the Prism Map window, choose the Select tool, click and hold the left mouse button in the Prism Map window. As you move the mouse, the viewpoint will be rotated around the focal point.

The Info, Grabber, and Zoom tools are available for use within the Prism Map window. The Info Tool will return the record of the selected Prism object.

Prism Map Preference Option

Choose Options > Preferences > Map Window to display the Map Window options. Clear the“Enable Hardware Acceleration for 3DWindow” box to allow MapInfo to display the Prism Map without using your video card acceleration capability.While disabling hardware rendering will diminish performance, it does avoid potential failure when using certain graphic adapters and drivers.



InfoTip uses Select a columnar expression from the drop-down list. The selected category will display when the cursor hovers over an object in the Prism Map.

Scale Designate the amount to scale the grid in the Z direction. A value >1 will exaggerate the topology in the Z direction, a value <1 will scale down the topological features in the Z direction. The Prism Map engine will calculate a scale factor during the creation of the window.

BackgroundColor Specify a color to use as the window background color.

Light Color Choose a color that ’covers’ the camera’s lens as it views the map.


Create Thematic Map Command Map Menu


Use Create Thematic Map to:• analyze data values associated with a map. The map objects can be shaded according

to the data values (ranged, individual value), or thematic objects are created to display the data values. Create single-variable thematic maps (ranged, individual value, dot density, graduated symbols, continuous thematic shading/grid) or multi-variable thematic maps such as pie and bar charts.

• save your thematic map settings and use them in other thematic layers in current and future sessions.

Create Thematic Map is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Map > Create Thematic Map

Creating a Thematic MapCreating a thematic map is a three-step process:

Step 1: Choose a type of thematic template.

Step 2: Choose the thematic values for the map.

Step 3: Customize the thematic map.

To create a thematic map:

• Choose Map > Create Thematic Map. The Create Thematic Map-Step 1 of 3 dialog displays.



Step 1: Choosing a Type of Thematic Template Thematic templates allow you to create a thematic map based on values and settings in our default types, alter these settings and/or save them as a new template you can use again. When you first create a thematic map, you begin by selecting a template which you may modify to suit your requirements. You cannot create a theme without using an existing theme template.

Create Thematic Step 1 of 3 Dialog

Template: Sort by Name

Display available templates in alphabetical or according to their name.

Template: Sort by Time Display available templates according to the time they were created or last modified.



Ranges Display data according to ranges you set. The ranges are shaded using colors and/or patterns. Choose from templates displayed as shaded lines, points or regions. Ranged thematic maps enable you to illustrate data values across points, lines and regions. They are useful to show a relationship between the data values and geographic area (e.g. sales figures, household income), or to present ratio information such as population density (population divided by area). Ratio information can be shown in other types of thematic maps when you choose Expression in Step 2.

Bar Charts Display a bar chart of the thematic variables for each record in the table. Use bar charts to analyze multiple variables per record on the map. Make comparisons between the size of the bars in each chart to obtain information about a record in the table set, or compare one bar in all the bar charts to draw conclusions about a variable across all of the records, or compare the height of the bar charts to obtain information about the entire table. To indicate a negative value in a bar chart, bars extend in the direction opposite to the chart’s orientation. Negative values do not display in stacked bar charts.

Pie Charts Display a pie chart of the thematic variables for each record in the table. Pie charts are multi-variable. Use pie charts on the map to analyze more than one variable at a time. You can compare the size of the pie wedges in each chart to obtain information about a record in the table, or compare one pie wedge in all the pie charts to draw conclusions about a variable across all the records, or compare the diameter of the pie charts to obtain information about the entire table set.

Graduated Display a symbol for each record in the table, the size of which is directly proportional to the data values. A graduated symbol map shows data points with specific numerical values. It is useful for illustrating quantitative information, such as high-to-low rankings. The size of the symbols is proportional to the data values of the points. Points that have larger data values appear larger, and points that have smaller data values appear smaller.

Dot Density Display the data values as dots on the map, where each dot is equal to a number, and the total number of dots in a region is proportional to the data value for that region. A dot density map enables you to examine raw counts of data (e.g. population). Each dot represents a number of units. That number, multiplied by the total number of dots in the region, equals the data value for that region.

Individual Shade records according to individual data values. Individual value templates are multi-variable. Choose from shaded lines, points or regions. A thematic map that draws map objects according to individual values is useful when you want to emphasize categorical differences in the data rather than show quantitative information (e.g., types of stores in a given area, zoning classifications in a given area, etc.).



Deleting a TemplateDelete a template by selecting its name and pressing the Delete key. A dialog displays asking you to confirm or cancel the deletion. If no templates of the given type exist, a button to restore a default template displays.

Renaming a TemplateRename a template by selecting and clicking the template name; enter a new name, up to 64 characters.

Saving a TemplateThe option, Default Template Directory, in the Options > Preferences> Directories dialog allows you to designate the directory where theme templates reside.

Step 2: Choosing Thematic ValuesChoose the map layer on which you want to base the map, and the field or expression from where you want to obtain the data values (thematic variable).

Grid A grid surface theme is a continuous raster grid produced by an interpolation of point data. MapInfo Professional evaluates an expression for each row in a table and passes the row object’s centroid and expression result to an interpolator. The interpolator produces a raster grid file, which appears as a raster table in a map window. The data is displayed as color gradations. The grid thematic map can be used to create a 3DMap. You can place a translucent grid on top of other layers and set the visibility of the layers beneath the grid layer. You can adjust the translucency of the grid from 0% to 100%.There are two types of interpolators available for Grid Thematic maps: IDW and TIN.

Preview Displays a sample legend for the template type.

Use Customized Legend Text

Displays customized text for the legend. If enabled, the template has custom titles or range labels. Check this to use the custom text.

Use Individual Categories

Enabled only if the selected individual value template contains the names of individual categories and their associated styles. Check to create the theme using the individual categories from the template. The name of any category found in the data that is also found in the template, receives the individual category style for the name from the template. Leave unchecked to apply the template without using the individual category names.


Cancel Cancel the dialog options and return to the map.

Next Continue to Step 2.



A thematic variable can be the data value that is associated with the graphic objects (regions, lines, and points) displayed on the map, such as the values in a column such as Pop_1990, Buy_Power, or Median Age.

You can also obtain the thematic variable from another table using the Update Column dialog. Update Column creates a temporary column in the base table where you can aggregate or calculate information about the data.

The Join item in the Pick Field list box of the Create Thematic Map - Step 2 of 3 dialog gives you direct access to Update Column. Join displays in the list when there is more than one table open. See Update Column Command.

You can also use an expression for the thematic variable. For example, use the following expression to display population density:

Pop_1990/Area(obj, “sq mi”) You can access the Expression dialog in Step 2 of creating a thematic map. See Expressions in a Thematic Map and Expressions for further information.

Your map may have more than one variable, depending on the thematic method you choose. Pie and Bar maps can contain more than one variable. Depending on your choice of a one-variable or multi-variable thematic map, the appropriate Create Thematic Map- Step 2 of 3 dialog displays.

One-Variable Thematic MapsRanged, graduated symbol, dot density, individual value and continuous shaded (grid) thematic maps use one variable. The Create Thematic Map- Step 2 of 3 dialog that displays for these kinds of maps requires only one field or expression.

Create Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for ranged, graduated symbol, dot density, individual value maps:



Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for Grid Thematic Maps

Table Choose the table on which you want to base the map.

If you have objects selected in the Map window, the Selection from TABLE item also displays in the list. Choosing this item enables you to create a thematic map based on the selected items without having to map the selection. You can still base the thematic map on a mapped query table by adding the layer to the map first.

Field Choose the field or expression you want to use.

Ignore Zeroes or Blanks Check this box to ignore zero values and blank values in the table. Since you are creating a thematic map based on one field in a table, any zero or blank values in that field will cause the entire record to be ignored. Disabled for Graduated and Dot Density maps.

Next The Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog displays.



Back Return to the previous Thematic dialog.

Table Choose the table on which you want to base the map.



Grid Options

Multi-Variable Maps Pie, and Bar Chart thematic maps allow you to analyze more than one variable at a time. In the Create Thematic Map- Step 2 of 3 dialog, choose the fields or expressions you want to use as the variables, and list them in an order that is most appropriate to the analysis. Use up to 20 variables.

Field Choose the field or expression you want to use.

Ignore Zeroes or Blanks Check this box to ignore zero values and blank values in the table. Since you are creating a thematic map based on one field in a table, any zero or blank values in that field will cause the entire record to be ignored. Disabled for Graduated and Dot Density maps.

Select a Table of Boundaries to Clip Against:

Table Choose a table of regions to clip the grid against. Defaults to none. Grid cells will be written if the cells fall within the selected region.

Grid File Name Specify the directory and name of the new grid file that will be created. By default the grid will be named according to the source table and field and saved in the directory specified in Options >Preferences > New Grid.Grid mapping creates a file type called a grid image. The default filename is tablename_fieldname, with the extension: .mig. Open a grid file using the File > Open Table dialog.The grid thematic layer is independent of its base layer and can be re-ordered in the map window as a separate layer. If data in the base layer changes, the grid map will not automatically update.

Browse Click to display a directory picker; select a directory in which to place the new grid file. If you click OK in the directory picker, the directory in the Grid File Name edit control will be updated.


Back Return to the previous Thematic dialog.

Next Continue to Step 3.



Thematic Step 2 of 3 Dialog for Pie, Bar Chart Maps

Fields

Table Choose the table on which you want to base the map. If you have objects selected in the Map window, the Selection from TABLE item also displays in the list. Choosing this item enables you to create a thematic map based on the selected items without having to map the selection.

Fields from TABLE Choose the field, or create an expression that contains the data values from all the numeric fields in the table you selected from the Table list.

Fields for Pie/Bar Chart

Indicate the fields or expressions you have chosen for the pie or bar chart thematic map.

Up Move the selected field or expression up one place in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list. Up is unavailable when the selected item is the first item in the list.



Down Move the selected field or expression down one place in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list. Down is unavailable when the selected item is the last item in the list. The order of the variables in the Field for Pie/Bar Chart list is the order in which the variables will appear in the legend. For bar chart thematic maps, the order in which the variables display in the legend is the order in which the bars display from left to right on the map. For pie chart maps, the first variable in the legend corresponds to the pie wedge that begins at the angle specified in the Pie Charts dialog. Pies are displayed in a clockwise or counter-clockwise order as specified in the Pie Charts dialog. To display the Pie Chart Styles dialog, click Styles in the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog and choose Options.

Add Choose to move the selected field in the Fields from TABLE list to the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list.

Remove Choose to move the selected field in the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list to the Fields from TABLE list.



Step 3: Customizing a Thematic MapThe last step enables you to customize a thematic map, or create the map based on the default settings. You can also preview the map’s legend before you display the map, and change the legend’s order.

Thematic - Step 3 of 3 Dialog

Preview Display a sample legend of the thematic map you are creating.

Legend Label Order Determine the order in which range and value labels (for ranged and individual values maps) and field labels (for all other thematic maps) appear in the legend. If you are creating a ranged map, the order you specify is also shown in the Styles dialog.

Ascending Range display from lowest to highest value.

Descending Range display from highest to lowest value.

Customize Change the default settings of particular aspects of the thematic map.

Settings Customize the size, number settings and color on a dot density map, and the symbol and other settings on a graduated symbol map.

Ranges Customize ranges on a ranged map. This option is only available for ranged maps.

Styles Customize style attributes such as color and size. This option is available for ranged, pie, bar, individual value and grid maps.

Save Customized Legend Text

Customize the legend. This option is available for all types of thematic maps.



Template

Using Expressions in a Thematic MapThe Expression dialog enables you to build expressions and use them as the thematic variable(s) in a map. See Expression Dialog. For Pie or Bar maps you can use more than one expression per bar or pie thematic map. Instead of choosing a field to represent the thematic variable in Step 2 of creating a thematic map, choose Expression to access the Expression dialog.

To access the Expression dialog in a one-variable thematic map:

1. Choose Expression from the Field list box in the Create Thematic Map - Step 2 of 3 dialog. It is the last item on the list. The Expression dialog displays.

2. Create the appropriate expression.

3. Choose OK. The Create Thematic Map - Step 2 of 3 dialog displays.

4. The expression is added to the Field list box. Choose Next to go on to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.

5. Repeat to create as many expressions as necessary.

To access the Expression dialog in a multi-variable thematic map:

1. Double click on Expression in the Fields from TABLE list box. It is the last item on the list. The Expression dialog displays.

2. Create the appropriate expression.

Save As Display the Save Theme to a Template dialog. Type a unique name or select an existing name and overwrite it. If you overwrite an existing template, you will be asked to confirm this action. Templates have a .thm extension.

Merge The Merge button is enabled only when you are modifying an existing theme, not when you are creating a thematic map.Merge Individual Categories: Enabled for individual value themes when the template was saved with individual categories. The theme is modified using the individual categories from the template. Merge Customized Legend Text: Enabled when a legend’s text has been changed. Choose to save the customized text.

Save Customized Legend Text

Enabled when a legend’s text has been changed. Choose to save the customized text.

Save Individual Values Categories

Enabled for individual value themes. Choose to save individual category names with their corresponding styles.



OK Create a thematic map based on either the default or customized settings.



3. Choose OK. The Create Thematic Map- Step 2 of 3 dialog displays.

4. The expression is added to the Fields for Pie/Bar Chart list.

You can customize three aspects of a ranged map: Ranges, Styles and Legends.



Customizing Ranges

Calculate ranges using a number of methods. The choice of method depends on the data values and the type of analysis you want to perform. You can determine ranges based on a statistical or mathematical formula that MapInfo calculates automatically, such as standard deviation, or you can break the ranges according to the number of records, the range intervals, certain statistical values, or a value you choose. You also can set your own ranges using the Custom method.

To customize ranges on a ranged map:

1. From the Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Choose Ranges to display the Ranges dialog.

2. Choose the items you want to customize and make the appropriate changes.

3. Choose Options if you are using the Equal Count or Equal Ranges methods to use the Forced Break feature.

Range Dialog

Method Choose an option from the Method drop-down list to select how the ranges are created. Choose from the methods described below.


OK Customize the map according to the specifications and return to the Create Thematic Map Step 3 of 3 dialog.

Cancel Cancels the customizing and return to the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog.



Range MethodsEqual Count: Each range contains approximately the same number of records. If the number of records is not evenly divisible by the number of ranges, MapInfo places the remaining records into the most appropriate ranges.

Equal Ranges: The difference between the minimum and maximum endpoints in each range is the same.

Natural Break: The range breaks are determined using an algorithm that sets the range breaks to minimize the difference between the data values and the average of the data values is minimized on a per range basis. The MapInfo natural break algorithm is based on the procedure described by Jenks and Caspall in the article: ”Error on Choroplethic Maps: Definition, Measurement, Reduction” from the Annals of American Geographers, June, 1971.

Standard Deviation: The middle range breaks at the mean of the data values, and the ranges above and below the middle range are one standard deviation above or below the mean.

Quantile: Determines the distribution of a variable across a segment of the data (e.g. population). When you choose Quantile, a Quantiling box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Choose the field or an expression you want to perform the quantiling operation on from the drop-down list.

Custom: Indicates that the ranges are user-defined. When you choose Custom, a Custom Ranges box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Highlight the range you want to change from the list in the middle of the dialog, and edit the minimum and maximum values in the Custom Ranges box.

# of ranges: Choose the number of ranges you want from the drop-down list. The minimum number of ranges is 2, and the maximum number of ranges is 16. The default is 4 ranges.

Round by: Choose a rounding factor for the range breaks from the drop-down list. Each rounding factor is a multiple of 10.

>= Min: Indicates the inclusive lower bound of the range. The data values in the range interval are greater than or equal to the minimum value of the range.

The range intervals are displayed so that the minimum value of one range, and the maximum value of the range above it in the list box, are the same number. The records that have that value are counted in the range interval where the value represents the minimum value.

For example, one range is 26.2 to 30.9, and the range below it is 30.9 to 31.8. The record (or records) with the value 30.9 is counted in the range interval, 30.9 to 31.8, because 30.9 represents the minimum value in that range interval.

< Max: Indicates the exclusive upper bound of the range. The data values in the range interval are less than the maximum value of the range, with the exception of the last range, where the values are <= to the maximum value. For example, there are four ranges and the values in the fourth range are 30-40. A data value of 40 falls into the last range.

%Indicates the percentage of the total number of records in the range.

# Indicates the number of records in the range.



Recalc: Whenever you change a setting with any of the controls explained above, the OK button becomes a Recalc button, and the list box displays this message: “Press <Recalc> button to Recalculate ranges.” You can make several changes at once before doing a recalculation. Recalculations can be time consuming, depending on the data set and range method you are using.

Customizing Styles The Styles on a ranged map include the color and size attributes of the map objects. You can customize these attributes to illustrate quantitative information about the data values in each range.

To customize styles on a ranged map:

1. From the The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog Choose Styles to display the Customize Styles dialog.


3. Choose Options for advanced customizing features.

Customize Range Style Dialog

Auto Spread Choose style attribute you want to vary. MapInfo spreads the attribute across the ranges. The spread in the ranges displays in the column of Style Buttons, where each Style Button represents one of the ranges. For the styles that you are not varying, MapInfo uses the same styles in each Style Button.

Color Spread color attributes.

Size Spread size attributes. This radio button displays only when you are working with a map that contains point or line objects.

None Disable auto spreading.

Styles The number of style buttons is the same as the number of ranges with which you are working. The top and bottom range intervals are labeled in the Styles Group box. Clicking on an inner Style Button sets AutoSpread to none and allows you to customize any or all style attributes for any of the ranges. Setting the Style for “All Other” Range does not change Autospread.

Style Buttons Display style attributes for each of the ranges. The Style Buttons are arranged the same way the range intervals will display in the legend. To change the style attributes of a range, click on a style button to display the Region Style dialog. See Region Style Button/Command.

All Others Style Button Display style attributes for the “All Others” range.

Cancel Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map - Step 3 of 3 dialog.



If you are spreading by color, these options display:

If you are spreading by size, these scaling options display:


OK Customize the map according to the specifications and returns you to the Thematic -Step 3 of 3 dialog.

Options The dialog expands, displaying advanced customizing features. These feature descriptions follow.

Save Styles as Default Save the customized style settings as default settings. It is active when Autospread is set to Size or Color. It is disabled if Autospread is set to None. Save Styles as Default saves the top and bottom styles in the Style buttons, the All Others style, Inflection and the Autospread Style by Setting.

Auto Spread Style by Determine how color and size is spread across the ranges.

RGB Indicate that the color is spread using the red-green-blue color model. RGB is recommended if you are using a two-color spread, particularly if one of the colors is white.

HSV Indicate that the color is spread using the hue-saturation-value color model.

Square Root Scale by square root.

Constant Scale linearly.

Log Scale logarithmically (base 10).

Inflection Insert an intermediate color at a point between the top and bottom styles. The inflection point provides you with a second interpolation of the data. If you want to show profits of sales regions, for example, make the inflection point white (the default) and set it at the range where the minimum value is zero. Set the top style to black, and the bottom style to red. Values above the inflection point spread from black down to white to show profit, and values below the inflection point spread from white to red to show loss. Instead of the top and bottom styles spreading to each other, as in a two-color spread, they spread to the inflection point color.

Inflection at Specify an inflection point from the drop-down list. Choose none, for no inflection, or choose from 2 to 16, depending on the number of ranges you have. The number you choose indicates the placement of the inflection point.



The Map LegendMapInfo creates a legend automatically when you create a map. Keep the default settings or customize the legend. Choose the Legend button in the Customize group box of the Create Thematic Map - Step 3 of 3 dialog to customize the legend’s display. See the following: Customizing a Legend.

Customizing Bar Charts Customize the bar chart by using the Styles and/or Legend button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you return to the dialog whose information you want to change.

You can customize two areas on a bar chart map:

• Styles

• Legend

Customizing Bar Chart Styles

The Customize Bar Styles dialog enables you to customize the styles on a bar chart map. Styles includes the height, width and color of the bars, the type of bar chart, the bars’ scale, the charts’ orientation, and other bar attributes including the border of the bars and the frame around the bars.

To customize bar chart styles:

• From. The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Choose Styles to display the Customize Bar Styles dialog.

Style Display the Fill Style dialog and make changes in the inflection point style.

Apply Determine which attributes from the Style Buttons are applied to objects on the map. The button you choose in the Apply group overrides and in some cases, changes the selection you made in the Autospread group.

All Attributes All styles are applied.

Color The color(s) shown in the style buttons is applied. The Autospread setting changes to color.

Size The size(s) shown in the style buttons is applied. The Autospread setting changes to size. This radio button displays only when you are working with a map that contains point or line objects. When you apply color or size attributes to a thematic layer, the other attributes from other thematic layers are not affected. Since each layer retains its attributes, you can apply different attributes to each layer, so that when the layers are overlapped, a bivariate map results. For detailed information on creating a bivariate map, see Chapter 11 in the User’s

Guide.



Customize Bar Styles Dialog

Fields Display the fields and expressions you are using to build each bar chart. There is one bar chart per record and one bar for each field or expression. Double-click on a field or expression to change the brush style for its corresponding bar.

Brush Choose Brush when a field or expression is selected in the list box to change the fill style for its corresponding bar.

Chart Type Choose the type of bar chart you want to create from the four choices in the group.

Stacked Stack the bars for each variable on top of each other, creating a single bar chart.

Graduated Stack Determine the height of the bars is by using the ratio of the sum of the values for each record to the value in the at value box.

Multiple Bars Create a multi-bar chart, one bar for each field.

Chart Dimensions Set the size of the bar charts.



If you choose Stacked, and you also check Graduated Stack in the Chart Type group box, the value in the Height box is the height, in paper units, of a stacked bar when the value in the at value text box is the sum of the bar’s data values.

If the bar chart is stacked but not graduated, then all the bars are the same height, as specified in the Height box, and the value in the at value box cannot be changed.

If the bar chart contains multiple bars with identical scales for each bar, all bars are scaled according to the ratio of Height to at value. If the bar chart contains multiple bars with independent scales, at value is ignored and each bar is scaled according to the ratio of Height to its field’s or expression’s maximum value.

Independent Scales (Multi-Bar)

Create a multi-bar chart where the bars are scaled independently of one another. The same bar in each chart is scaled according to the ratio of the height in the Max Height box to the maximum value of its corresponding variable ignoring the at value setting. When you check Independent Scales, at value and the scaling options are grayed.If Independent Scales is clear, all the bars in each chart are scaled according to the ratio of the height in the Max Height box to the value in the at value box.

Height Indicate the maximum height of a bar. The default height is .25 paper units, and the valid range is .1 to 10 inches. You can set the paper units in the System Preferences dialog. See the Preferences Command.

at value Indicate the value at which a bar is a certain height. MapInfo will choose a value, or you can choose your own value. At value is grayed for stacked bars that are not graduated and for multi-bar/independent scales.

Width Indicate the width, in paper units, of the bar chart. The valid range is .1 to 4 inches. Set the paper units in System Preferences. See the Preferences Command.

OK Customize the map according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog.

Cancel Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog.

Options Display more customizing options.

Orientation Choose one of the buttons in the Orientation box to set the bar chart’s placement and direction with respect to the object’s centroid in the base layer. Each button shows a different orientation. The base layer is the map view of the table on which you have chosen to base the map. For example, if you are making a thematic map with bar charts from the STATES table, the STATES layer is the base layer. The default is to place the bar chart above the object’s centroid in the base layer.



Bar Attributes


1. Choose Next. The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog displays. Use this dialog to customize the map or legend. See the following: Customizing Pie Charts.

2. Choose OK.

Customizing Pie Charts Customize the map using the Styles and/or Legend button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog you want to change.

You may customize two areas on a pie chart map:

• Styles

• Legend

Customizing Pie Charts Styles

The Customize Pie Styles dialog enables you to customize the styles on the pie map. The Styles include the diameter of the pies and the color of each pie wedge, the type of pie chart, the pies’ scale, the charts’ orientation, and other pie attributes such as the border of the pies, the angle at which the first pie wedge begins, and the order of the pie wedges (clockwise, counter-clockwise).

Border Pen Set the pen style for the borders of the bars and the frame. The Line Style dialog displays. The default pen style is a black, single width, solid pen. See Line Style Button/Command.

Frame Brush Set the fill pattern of the rectangle that frames each bar chart. If you set the Frame Brush pattern to none (the “N” pattern in the Fill Style dialog), there will be no frame around the bar charts.

Graduate Size By Choose one of the three scaling methods.

Square Root Choose Square Root to scale by square root.

Constant Choose Constant to scale linearly.

Log Choose Log to scale logarithmically (base 10). All bars are scaled to a zero-sized bar for a zero value. The default setting is to scale by a constant, which is best for representing data in one dimension. Since you are only concerned with one dimension in bar charts, the height of the bars, we recommend that you stay with the default scaling method. If the data range is extremely large, or the numbers are related in an exponential way, graduate the size by log.



To customize pie charts:

1. From The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Styles to display the Customize Pie Styles dialog.


3. Choose Options for additional customizing features.

Customize Pie Styles Dialog

Fields Display the fields and expressions you are using to build each pie chart. There is one pie chart per record and one pie wedge for each field or expression. Double-click on a field or expression to change the brush style for its corresponding pie wedge.

Brush Displays when a field or expression is selected in the list box. Choose it to change the fill style for the field or expression pie wedge.

Chart Type Choose the type of pie chart.

Graduated Make the size of the pies proportional to the sum of their components.

Half Pies Display half pies instead of full pies.

Pie Dimensions Specify the size of the pies or half pies.



Diameter Indicate the maximum diameter of a pie. The default diameter is .25 inches, and the valid range is .1 to 10 inches. You can set paper units in System Preferences. See the Preferences Command. When Graduated is checked in Chart Type, the value in the Max Diameter box is the diameter, in paper units, of a pie when the pie’s sum is the sum specified in the for sum text box. If the pies are not graduated, then all the pies are the same diameter, as specified in the Max Diameter box, and the value in the for sum box is ignored.

for sum Displays when Graduated is checked in the Chart Type group box. Indicates that at this sum, the pie is the maximum diameter in size.

Cancel Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog.



Orientation Set the pie’s placement and direction with respect to the object’s centroid in the base layer. Each button shows a different orientation. The base layer is the map view of the table on which you have chosen to base the thematic map. For example, if you are making a thematic map with pie charts from the STATES table, the STATES layer is the base layer. The default is to center the pie chart over the object’s centroid in the base layer.

Pie Attributes Specify the pie chart attributes.

Start Angle Specify at what angle you want the first pie wedge to start.

Clockwise Specify the pie wedges to run clockwise.

Border Pen Set the style for the pies’ borders. The Line Style dialog displays. The default is a black, single width, solid line. See Line Style Button/Command.

Graduate Size By Choose one of the three scaling methods for the pies on the map.



Log Scale logarithmically (base 10). This option is available when Graduated in the Chart Type group box is checked. All graduated pies are scaled to a zero-sized pie for a zero sum. The default setting is to scale by square root. We recommend that you scale by square root for pie charts because the pies’ area varies as a square of the radius.




Customizing a Graduated Symbols MapCustomize a map using the Settings button. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog whose information you want to change.

You can customize two areas on a graduated symbols map:

• Settings

• Legend

Customizing SettingsThe Customize Graduated Symbol dialog enables you to customize the settings for the graduated symbols map. The settings include the type of symbol that displays, its size and color attributes, and the data value on which to base the size of the symbol you choose. Additional options allow you to choose how you are going to scale the symbol, specify the symbol’s orientation, and choose a symbol for negative values.

To customize a graduated symbols map:

• From the- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Settings to display the Customize Graduated Symbols dialog.

Customize Graduated Symbols Dialog



Symbol Display the current symbol. To change the symbol’s attributes, click inside the Symbol style box to display the Symbol Style dialog. You can change the type of symbol, its color and size.

Symbol Choose a symbol type from the palette. The default symbol is a circle.

Color Choose a color from the palette. The default color is red.

Size Choose the point size for the symbol. The default size is 36 points.

at Value Enter the data value on which you want to base the symbol’s proportion. The size of the symbol at this value is the size you specified in the Symbol Attributes dialog. The symbols for the remaining data values will be sized using this value. The default setting is the maximum value of the data, with two significant digits. The symbols are scaled down to a one point symbol for zero values.

Cancel Cancel customization and displays the Thematic - Step 3 of 3 dialog.

OK Customize the map according to the specifications and returns you to the Thematic -Step 3 of 3 dialog.


Negative Values Choose a symbol for negative data values.

Show Symbol Check to display the symbol for negative values on the map. Changing the attributes of the negative values symbol has no effect on the attributes of the positive values symbol. To change the negative values symbol’s attributes, click inside the Symbol style box in the Negative Values group. The Symbol Style dialog displays. You can change the type of symbol, its color and size. The default is a 36 point/blue/circle.

Graduate Size By Choose one of the three scaling methods for the symbols on the map.



Log Scale logarithmically (base 10). The default setting is to scale by square root. We recommend that you scale by square root in a graduated symbols map. When you scale by square root, MapInfo assigns symbol sizes in such a way that the area of a symbol is proportionate to the symbol’s value. Thus, if one record’s value is three times larger than another record’s value, the larger record has a symbol that occupies three times as much area on the map. Cartographers have determined that this method of varying symbol sizes produces maps that result in more accurate visual representation of the data values which provide better comparisons.



The Map LegendMapInfo creates a legend automatically when you create a map. Keep the default settings or customize your legend. Choose the Legend button in the Customize group box of the Create Thematic Map - Step 3 of 3 dialog to customize the legend’s display. See the following: Customizing a Legend.

Customizing a Dot Density MapCustomize the map using the Settings and/or Legend button in Step 3. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the dialog whose information you want to change.

You can customize on a dot density map:

• Settings

• Legend

Customizing Settings

The Customize Dot Density Settings dialog enables you to customize the settings for the dot density map. The Settings include how many units each dot represents and the size of the dots. The color of the dots cannot be changed; it is always black.

To access the Customize Dot Density Settings dialog:

• From the The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose the Settings button to display the Customize Dot Density Settings dialog.

Customize Dot Density Dialog

Each dot represents:____ units

MapInfo makes an estimate of how many units each dot should represent and places this estimate in the text box. You can enter a different number. The greater the number of units each dot represents, the fewer the number of dots that appears per region.

Dot Size Specify dot size. Choose either small dots (one pixel) or large dots (four pixels).




Customizing An Individual Values MapCustomize the map using the Styles button. To return any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you return to the dialog whose information you want to change.

You can customize two areas on an individual values map:

• Styles

• Legend

Customizing Styles

The Customize Individual Values dialog enables you to customize the line, fill, or symbol used to shade each individual value.

To access the Customize Individual Values dialog:

1. From the The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Styles to display the Customize Individual Values dialog.


3. Choose OK.

OK Customize the map according to the specifications and return to the Thematic - Step 3 of 3 dialog.

Cancel Cancel customization and display the Create Thematic Map - Step 3 of 3 dialog.



Customize Individual Values Dialog

Individual Value Indicates each data value, up to 255.

Style Indicates the style for each value. To change the style for a value, highlight the value in the list. Choose the Style button. A style dialog, appropriate for the type of map object with which you are working (e.g. points, regions, lines), displays, enabling you to change the style attributes for that value. Please note that the default symbol for an individual values thematic map corresponds to the symbol from the base table. See Region Style, Line Style, and Symbol Style Buttons/Commands.

All Attributes Apply all attributes of the style to the theme.

Color Apply only the color attribute to the theme.

Use Color Styles Check to use colors in the styles. Clear to use gray scale. The default is to use color styles.


Cancel Cancel customization and display the Thematic - Step 3 of 3 dialog.




Customizing a Continuous Thematic Shading/Grid MapCustomize a Continuous Thematic Shading/Grid map using the Settings and/or Styles button in the Create Thematic Map-Step 3 of 3 dialog. To return to any of the earlier dialogs to make changes, choose the Back button until you come to the appropriate dialog.

To customize a grid thematic map:

1. From the The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Settings and/or Styles. Descriptions of each option follow.


SettingsDisplay the Interpolator Settings dialog. Choose the IDW (Inverse Distance Weighting) or TIN (Triangulated Irregular Network) interpolator. The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window.

TIN Interpolator Settings

Cell Size Defines the width and height of a grid cell in distance units. Grid cells are square so both width and height are specified with one value. When you change the cell size, the Grid Dimensions Control is updated to reflect the new dimensions.

Tolerance Specify a tolerance to control discarding closely-spaced points. The tolerance is specified as a fraction of the diagonal length of the bounding box of the points.



IDW Interpolator Setting

Distance Specify distance values to control the output of the TIN filter. For a non-zero distance value, only edges or triangles contained within a sphere centered at mesh vertices are output. This is useful to contain the TIN to a specified distance, otherwise triangulation will cross concave regions.

Feature Angle Specify the angle, in degrees, that define a sharp edge. If the difference in angle across neighboring polygons is greater than this value, the shared edge is considered ’sharp’. This designation is used to smooth the final grid display.

Cell Size Defines the width and height of a grid cell in distance units. Grid cells are square so both width and height are specified with one value. When you change the cell size, the Grid Dimensions Control is updated to reflect the new dimensions.

Tolerance Specify a tolerance to control discarding closely-spaced points. The tolerance is specified as a fraction of the diagonal length of the bounding box of the points.

Distance Specify distance values to control the output of the TIN filter. For a non-zero distance value, only edges or triangles contained within a sphere centered at mesh vertices are output. This is useful to contain the TIN to a specified distance, otherwise triangulation will cross concave regions.

Feature Angle Specify the angle, in degrees, that define a sharp edge. If the difference in angle across neighboring polygons is greater than this value, the shared edge is considered ’sharp’. This designation is used to smooth the final grid display.

Aggregate Coincident Points By

Choose how to aggregate the z-values of source data points that occupy the same grid cell. The values can be counted, averaged, summed. Additionally the minimum or maximum can be used.



StylesThe Grid Appearance dialog displays. A preview of the inflection points, the color spectrum bar, and relief shading options display.

Grid Appearance Dialog

Method There are four different methods that determine where inflection values occur. Select the method for distributing inflections. Equal Cell count and Custom Cell Count are based on percentages. Equal Value Ranges and Custom Value Ranges are based on values.

Equal Cell Count Sets the inflections so that approximately an equal number of grid cells falls between each inflection value. Inflection breaks can be expressed as a percentage of the whole. When the grid cells are interpolated, these percentages can are converted to actual values. If the inflection spread is based on cell count (equal or custom), you will see percentages in the inflection listview and in the preview legends. You won’t see the actual values until the grid is actually computed. When the spread method is based on cell count, anytime you change an interpolator parameter or choose to use a different interpolator for an existing grid theme, you will see percentages in the preview legend. Changing the number of inflection values in the combo box will respread the cell count percentages. So, if the number of inflections changes from 4 (with equal cell count having set the percentages to 0%, 33%, 67%, and 100%) to 6, the percentages would be 0%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100%.



Equal Value Ranges The equal range method spreads the inflections evenly between the minimum and maximum of the source data range.

Custom Cell Count Choose this method when you want to use your own percentages and not ones that are evenly spread.

Custom Value Ranges Choose this method when you want to use your own values and not ones that are evenly spread.

Number of Inflections Select from a list of 2 to 16 inflections or type a number between 2 and 255.

Round Choose from a list of rounding factors to be applied to inflection values. You may not see the effects of this rounding if the spread method is based on cell count until inflection values are actually calculated.

Inflection Color/Value List

Control color, percentage/value inflection pairs. Items in the list are sorted by percentage/value. Edit the inflection percentages/values by single or double clicking on them with the left mouse button; edit a value by typing over it. Double click on a color swatch to display the color picker dialog and change the color. If you edit a percentage while the method is equal cell count, the method becomes custom cell count. If you edit a value while the method is equal value ranges, the method becomes custom value ranges. The vertical bar to the right of the listview control shows the spectrum of colors used in the grid.Default Colors for New Inflections When you increase the number of inflections, MapInfo Professional chooses default colors for those new inflections. It keeps the last inflection color the same but inserts new colors that fall between the new last color and the one before it.

Color Adjustments Contrast: Slide the bar between 0 and 100% to set the grid’s contrast level. Brightness: Slide the bar between 0 and 100% to set the grid’s brightness level. translucency: Slide the bar between 0 and 100% to set the grid’s translucency. A grid with 0% translucency is opaque; one with 100 % translucency is transparent.

Gray Scale Check to show only gray scale colors in the grid.

Flip Colors Click this button to invert the inflection colors.

Relief Shading Shaded relief maps are grid maps whose grid cell colors have had their brightness adjusted to indicate surface slope and slope direction relative to a user-defined light source direction. MapInfo Professional determines the orientation of each cell in the grid, and assigns a brightness to each grid cell.



Customizing a LegendTo customize the legend for a thematic map, choose the Legend button in the Thematic - Step 3 of 3 dialog. The Customize Legend dialog displays; customize the legend’s title, subtitle, fonts, or range labels. You also can specify whether or not a legend displays for this thematic layer.

To customize a legend:

• From the The Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog choose Legend. The Customize Legend dialog displays.

Brightness Brightness or reflectance values correspond to light striking the surface. The light source can be thought of as the sun shining on a topographic surface. The maximum brightness is assigned at points where the rays are perpendicular to the surface (where the slope directly faces the light source). As slope faces turn away from the light source, lower reflectance values are assigned.

Light Source The Light Source Options let you specify the orientation of the light source. Check to activate relief shading and/or generate relief shading information in the grid.

Horizontal Angle Rotate the light source in the horizontal plane. Zero degrees corresponds to the light source shining from due East. Positive angles rotate the light source counterclockwise, so, for example, 90 degrees places the light source due North.

Vertical Angle Rotate the light source in the vertical plane. Zero degrees places the light source at the horizon, and 90 degrees places it directly overhead. Specify angles between 180 and 360 degrees to have the light source originate from under the surface.

Vertical Scale Factor Specify a scale factor for the z values. Increasing this scale factor exaggerates the surface vertically, enhancing the shading effect. This can be useful for enhancing detail in relatively flat surfaces.

Interpolator MapInfo Professional offers two methods of interpolation: TIN (Triangulated Irregular Network) and (IDW) Inverse Distance Weighting. The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window.

OK Apply specifications.

Back Return to previous dialog.



Customize Legend Dialog

LegendTitle Type the title for the legend. The maximum length is 255 characters.

Title Font Click the Title Font button to choose the font for the title of the legend.

Subtitle Type the subtitle for the map. A subtitle is not required.

Subtitle Font Click the Subtitle Font button to choose the font for the subtitle of the legend.

Into Window This option displays only if you have a legend window open.No Legend Window: Do not display a theme or cartographic legend. New Legend Window: Create a new cartographic legend using the specified options.Legend of (title): Add the theme information to the existing cartographic legend.

Border Style Check to place a border around the selected legend frame. Click the box to display the Line Style dialog; choose a border style.

Restore Default Title and Labels

Choose to replace any manually entered titles or labels with the defaults.



Range Labels

Changing the range values in the legend does not change the range values in a ranged or individual values map. To do so, display the Ranges dialog by either choosing Modify Thematic Map from the Map menu, or double-clicking anywhere in the legend window. Either method will display the Modify Thematic Layer dialog, where you can access the Ranges button and modify the ranges.

See:Functions

Modify Thematic Map

New Map Window Command

Create 3DMap


Font Choose the font for the range labels.

Edit selected range here Make changes to the selected range label in this box. The maximum length is 80 characters.

# objects Indicates the number of objects in the selected range. This option is available only for ranged and individual value thematic maps.

Show this Range Check to have the selected range appear in the legend.

Show Record Count Check to display the number of records in each range. This option is available only for ranged and individual value thematic maps.

Cancel Cancel the customizing and returns to the Create Thematic Map- Step 3 of 3 dialog.

OK Customize the legend according to the specifications and display the Create Thematic Map - Step 3 of 3 dialog.


Crystal Reports Tools Menu

Crystal ReportsTools Menu

Use Crystal Reports to:• create full-featured reports including full customization of the output and the ability

to save the report for future use.

Crystal Reports is available when: • Open an Existing Report is always available.

Create a New Report is available when at least one MapInfo table is open.

Menu Path• Tools > Crystal Reports

Creating a New Report1. Choose Tools > Crystal Reports.

2. Choose New Reports to create a report. If there is more than one table open, the Choose Table dialog displays. Select one table only; you cannot create a report using a raster grid file or seamless map sheets. The Crystal Report module displays. Other tables may be inserted in the report using the Crystal Report Insert feature. Make appropriate selections to create the report.

For full documentation on creating a report, see the online Crystal Report User’s Guide and online Help.

Saving a ReportWhen you save a report, a .rpt extension is assigned to the report. The report is assigned the default name: (tablename) report.rpt. You may rename the report using the Crystal Reports SaveAs feature.

All .rpt files are saved in the directory specified in Preferences > Options> Directories > Crystal Report files.

Opening an Existing Report• Choose Tools > Open Report. Select the report from the dialog.

Tables with columns containing underscores, temporary column, or titles over 8 characters do not display in the default Crystal Report. Use the Expert Wizard to access columns containing these elements.

Note that columns containing an underscore ”_columnname” will not display in the default preview mode. Additionally, MapInfo DBMS drivers cannot be used with the Crystal Reports

Database > Add Database option.


Custom Colors Command Options Menu

Custom Colors Command Options Menu

Use Custom Colors to:• access a palette containing a range of colors that you can use or customize. The color

palette is accessible from the dialogs displayed when working with line, region, symbol, and text objects.

Custom Colors is available when: • Custom colors is always available.

Menu Path• Options > Custom Colors

Creating Custom ColorsTo create custom colors:

1. Choose Options > Custom Colors. The Define Custom Colors dialog displays a color palette.

2. Click on a color; customize any color on the palette.

See the following: Define Custom Colors Dialog.

3. Click Define. The Pick Color dialog displays.

or

Double-click on the color to display the Pick Color dialog.

Pick Colors Dialog

Hue, Sat, Val Specify values for Hue, Sat (Saturation), Val (Value) by clicking on the arrows to change a value one increment at a time or type the appropriate value.

Red Green Blue Specify values for Red, Green, and Blue by clicking on the arrows to change a value one increment at a time or type the appropriate value.

OK Choose OK to customize the color according to the specifications. The Define Custom Colors dialog redisplays, with the customized color on the palette in place of the original color.

Define Display the Pick Color dialog. See the preceding: Pick Colors Dialog.


Save Colors Saving the new color automatically adds it to the palette in place of the original color. Choose this option to save the current palette for future MapInfo sessions. If the box is clear, the palette is in effect for the current session only. You might want to record the color settings for the original colors before making changes; once the customized colors are saved, you cannot automatically return to the original colors.


Cut Command Edit Menu


Use Cut to:• cut selected text and objects and move them onto the clipboard.

Cut is available when:• an editable object is selected in an active Browser window, and at least one row is

selected

or

• a Layout window is active, and at least one object is selected

or

• a Map window is active, a layer is editable, and at least one object in the editable layer is selected

or

• the MapBasic window is open and active with text selected.

Menu Path• Edit > Cut

Cutting and Moving Text and Objects to the ClipboardWhen you cut from a Map, Layout, Browser, or MapBasic window, MapInfo moves what you have cut to the clipboard. Anything that was on the clipboard is replaced by the new contents; the previous text/objects are deleted.

Before using the Cut command, you may want to specify what is cut and moved to the clipboard. See the following: Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the Clipboard.

To cut and move text and objects to the clipboard:

1. Select the text and/or objects you want to cut.

2. Choose Edit > Cut.

The selected objects are moved to the clipboard. These objects remain on the clipboard until some other objects are cut and moved to the clipboard and take their place.

Text and/or objects that you are cutting from the map must be selected. Edit handles appear around selected objects.

When data is displayed as a map or table, you can cut an object from the table through the Browser window, even when its map layer is not editable.



Copying from the ClipboardTo copy the contents of the clipboard to the appropriate location:

1. Position the cursor in the layout, map, or table where you want the selected objects copied.

2. Choose Edit > Paste.

When pasting into a Map, the object is pasted to the currently editable layer. If you are pasting an object with geographic coordinates, the object is pasted to those coordinates. For example, when you are pasting a copy of New York State onto a new map, New York is pasted to the position where New York belongs.

When text is currently selected, it is replaced by the text being pasted into the table.

Specifying What Is Cut or Copied to the ClipboardThe result of cutting and copying objects to the clipboard depends on the settings in the Copy to Clipboard option in the System Preferences dialog.

To specify what is cut or copied to the Clipboard:

• Choose Options > Preferences > System Settings. The System Setting Preferences

dialog displays.

Copy to Clipboard Dialog

See:Copy Command

Paste Command


Check to specify that you want only text copied to the clipboard. Clear to specify that you do not want text copied to the clipboard.




Copy graphic objects as a metafile; metafiles are scalable representations of an object.





DBMS Toolbar

DBMS Toolbar

Use DBMS Toolbar to:• access the buttons that are used to access tables residing on a remote database.

DBMS Toolbar is available when:• DBMS support has been installed

and

• the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the DBMS Toolbar.

Menu Path• Options > Toolbars

Using the DBMS ToolbarFor an on-screen button description, move the mouse pointer over the button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button; the text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the DBMS Toolbar, and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars.

To choose from the DBMS Toolbar:

• Click on the appropriate button. The button is highlighted.

Open DBMS Table button Access the Open DBMS dialog which allows you to open a table from a remote database into a MapInfo table. If a connection has not been previously established, you will be prompted to open a connection.

Make DBMS Table Mappable button

Access the Make DBMS Table Mappable dialog which allows you make a table linked to a remote database mappable in MapInfo.

Refresh DBMS Table button Access the Refresh DBMS Table dialog which allows you to refresh a MapInfo linked table with the most recent data residing on the remote database for that linked table.

Unlink DBMS Table button Access the Unlink DBMS Table dialog which allows you to unlink a table which was downloaded from a remote database from its remote database.

Change Symbol for a Mappable DBMS Table button

Access the Change Symbol for a Mappable DBMS Table dialog which allows you to change the symbol style of a mappable DBMS table unless the table contains per record symbology. In this instance, only the default symbol style will be altered.


DBMS Toolbar

See: Toolbars Command

Disconnect DBMS Display a dialog listing the open connections; select and disconnect.


Delete Table Command Table > Maintenance

Delete Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Delete Table to:• remove a table and all its component files.

Delete Table is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Delete Table

Using Delete TableTo delete a table:

1. Choose Table > Maintenance > Delete Table. The Delete Table dialog displays.

2. Choose the name of the table to be deleted from the Delete table drop-down list, and press Delete.

A prompt displays indicating that the table will be permanently deleted.

When you delete an ASCII, dBASE DBF, Lotus, or Excel file opened in MapInfo, you delete the .tab file MapInfo created and the original file.

3. Choose OK. The specified table is deleted.

When you delete a raster image table, MapInfo deletes its associated .tab file (MapInfo Registration File) without deleting the actual raster image file.


Delete Target District Command Redistrict Menu

Delete Target District Command Redistrict Menu

Use Delete Target District to: • delete the current target district. Deletes one row from the Districts Browser window;

it does not delete the objects assigned to that district.

Delete Target District is available when: • a redistricting session is in effect.

Menu Path • Redistrict > Delete Target District

Using Delete Target DistrictThe Delete Target District command deletes the district that is currently designated as the target district. Any objects that belong to the target district are reassigned to the “Unassigned” district. The “Unassigned” district becomes the target. It is not possible to delete the “Unassigned” district.

See:New Redistrict Window Command



Digitizer Setup Command Map Menu


Use Digitizer Setup to:• configure MapInfo for digitizing.

Digitizer Setup is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• a compatible or supported digitizing tablet is installed.

Menu Path • Map > Digitizer Setup

MapInfo Digitizer SupportMapInfo directly supports the following digitizers and digitizer interfaces:

• Virtual Tablet Interface, versions 2.10 or later (VTI)

• Wintab

Obtain the digitizer driver from Digitizer Technology (VTI) or the tablet manufacturer for Wintab. Usually, the tablet includes a Wintab driver.

Digitizer Technology Company provides both sales and support for the Virtual Tablet Interface. Contact:

Digitizer Technology Company

16541 Redmond Way, Suite 195C

Redmond, WA 98052 USA

Tel: (425) 868-3246

http://www.vtablet.com

Product support is free and offered during the hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM Monday through Friday, Pacific Time.



Digitizer Setup

Activating the MapInfo Digitizer Setup When a Map is open and a digitizer is properly configured, the option “Digitizer Setup” displays in the Map Menu. If this menu option is not available, MapInfo is not recognizing the digitizer. See the following: Common Digitizing Problems and Solutions.

To access the Digitizer Setup dialog:

• Choose Digitizer Setup from the Map menu. The Digitizer Setup dialog displays.

Setting Up a Map on a TabletMake sure the map/drawing to be digitized is securely fastened to the tablet. If the map moves, control points will need to be reconfigured.

The box at the top of the Digitizer Setup dialog displays a list of control points that you created. The box displays the X and Y coordinates for each point. The coordinates are displayed in the units set with the Map Units menu.

The box also indicates the error for each point. The error is in paper units specified in Options > Preferences > System Settings.

You need to specify at least four control points for MapInfo to calculate an error value. When the error for a given point is too large, respecify the point by clicking Edit or double-clicking on the control point.

The Digitizer Setup dialog allows you to:

• set the projection of the map being digitized.

• set control points.

• configure the Draw and Close buttons on the digitizer puck.

Perform these steps in the order listed.

Specifying the ProjectionWhen you digitize a paper map, you need to specify the projection used for that map. Most paper maps indicate their projection, generally in the legend. You can use any of the projections MapInfo provides, or you can create your own coordinate system. See the MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix H: Creating Your Own Coordinate System.

It is very important to set the correct projection before you begin digitizing because you cannot adjust it afterwards. When you do not correctly specify the projection of the paper map, the digitizing is not accurate.

When digitizing from an aerial photograph, you should generally use the Longitude/Latitude projection.



The Projection button in the Digitizer setup dialog allows you to access the Choose Projection dialog where you specify the projection of the map you are digitizing.

• Choose the Projection button. The Choose Projection dialog displays.

Choose the projection of the paper map. See Projection Button.

Specifying Map UnitsUse the Map Units drop-down list in the Digitizer Setup dialog to specify a value from a list of map units.

1. Choose the Map Units drop-down list.

A list of units displays. “Degrees” is always available for earth maps. Depending on the projection you are using, another unit, the native unit for that projection, may be available. When digitizing a non-earth map, you have a wider range of values.

2. Choose the unit that matches the coordinate units on the paper map.

When the appropriate unit is not in the list, check to make sure you specified the correct projection.

In order to digitize a non-earth map, the active Map must also be non-earth.

Setting Control PointsOnce you have set the projection, you need to set control points. Set control points so that MapInfo knows how to interpret the puck position. To set a control point indicate a position on the digitizer tablet by pressing a button on the puck. Type in the map coordinates that correspond to that point. MapInfo determines the map values from these coordinates.

You should use at least four control points when digitizing a paper map. When you are digitizing from an aerial photograph, you might want to use twenty or more control points. MapInfo allows you to create as many control points as you need. You do not need to have the map in any special orientation when you digitize. However, once you start digitizing, you should not move the map for the duration of the session. We recommend that you tape the map firmly to the tablet to make sure it does not move during digitizing.

When you choose four or more control points, MapInfo makes an error calculation estimating the possible error in the setup. These error values are very important. They are the only indication of whether or not the setup is correct.

The accuracy of these control points will directly affect the accuracy of the digitized map. It is best to select control points which aren’t too close and don’t share any Latitude or Longitude coordinates. In general, more control points yield more accurate results. See the following: Dealing with Error Estimates.



Picking and Adding a Control PointThe buttons in the Control Points box (Digitizer Setup dialog) allow you to add, edit, remove, or clear all control points.

1. Choose the Add button. The Pick Tablet Point dialog displays.

2. Choose a point on the tablet.

As you move the puck around the tablet, the Pick Tablet Point dialog displays where that point is on the tablet. When you click a digitizer button, you select that tablet location as a control point.

3. Click a digitizer button or press <Return> to cancel.

If have selected a point on the digitizer tablet as a control point, the Add Control Point dialog displays. Use the Add Control Point dialog to enter a name for the control point (optional) and X, Y coordinates.

Entering a Name for a Control PointTo enter a name for a control point:

1. Type a name for the control point in the Label box.

2. Type the coordinate values for the point in Map X and Map Y.

3. Repeat the process at least three times.

When four or more control points are properly added, an error value will appear in the control points section of the digitizer setup dialog box. Most paper maps specify longitude and latitude in degrees, minutes, and seconds. See Appendix D: Converting Coordinates. Additionally, the MapBasic sample LongLats program displays a dialog that converts coordinates.

4. Choose OK.

Editing a Control PointIf you make a mistake when entering a control point, you can edit it. High error values are often an indication that such a mistake was made.

1. Choose the point from the list in the Digitizer Setup dialog.

2. Choose Edit. The Edit Control Point dialog displays.

Change the control point’s Label and its Map X and Map Y points by typing new values.

3. Press the Table X Y button and the Pick Tablet Point dialog is displayed.

4. Pick a point on the digitizer tablet and click any digitizer button.

The tablet’s coordinates are changed accordingly.



Removing a Control PointTo remove a control point:

1. Choose the point from the list in the Digitizer Setup dialog.

2. Choose Remove.

The control point is removed.

Removing All Control PointsTo remove all control points:

• Choose Clear All.

All control points are removed and the projection is reset to the projection of the

active map..

Configuring Digitizer ButtonsTo configure the buttons on your digitizing puck, click Buttons in the Digitizer Setup dialog. The dialog that displays will instruct you to click the digitizer button that you want to use as the main button and then to click the digitizer button that you want to use as the double-click button.

If you only have one button on the puck, you will use it for both drawing and completing the polyline/polygon. A single click enters a point when drawing an object; a double-click completes the object. Note: If you use the same button for single-clicking and double-clicking, MapInfo may mistake rapid single-clicks as a double-click.


Digitizer Mode Map Menu

Digitizer ModeMapInfo automatically turns digitizer mode on after you have entered three or more control points. You do not have to exit from digitizer mode to do something else. You can now do anything in digitizer mode that you can do in mouse mode: open tables and windows, use any of the tools, use the mouse, etc.

You can still, however, turn digitizer mode off and on with the D key. MapInfo will not turn digitizer mode on if you have only entered one or two control points or if your control points run in a straight line.

The details of the new digitizer mode functionality is explained below.

Using Tools with the DigitizerYou can use any of the tools with the digitizer. (You are no longer limited to just the drawing tools, as you were in version 3.0.) For instance, you can zoom in on the area you are digitizing with the Zoom in tool, use the Ruler tool to measure distances, or add nodes, etc. without ever having to leave digitizer mode.

Mouse CursorYou can use the mouse and the digitizer at the same time. The mouse is always active, even when digitizer mode is on. So you do not need to exit from digitizer mode to use the mouse. The mouse cursor is always visible, and can always be controlled with the mouse. Its appearance depends on which tool is selected.

You can also control the mouse with the digitizer using the mouse emulation capability of the digitizer driver (this must be configured outside of MapInfo). If digitizer mode is off, or if digitizer mode is on and a Map window is not active, the digitizer controls the mouse. If a Map window is active and digitizer mode is on, the digitizer controls the digitizer cursor.

Digitizer CursorThe digitizer cursor is a large cross hair that covers the entire width and height of the Map window. Its appearance does not change to indicate which tool is selected. It is always a large cross hair, making it much easier to see.

The digitizer cursor is always visible as long as a Map window is active. For example, if you decide to open a Browser window while you are in digitizer mode and work in the Browser, digitizer mode will still be on, but because the Browser is now the active window, you won’t see the digitizer cursor.

The status bar only displays the digitizer cursor location if you choose to display it (Map>Options).



Accepting or Canceling the Digitizer SetupImplement or cancel the digitizing setup from the Digitizer Setup dialog.

• Choose OK. The Digitizer Setup you have specified is implemented. Choose

cancel to cancel the selected options.

Digitizing Your MapTo begin digitizing:

1. Select a drawing tool.

2. Press the D key. The cursor displays as a large cross hair that covers the entire width and height of the Map window.

Dealing With Error EstimatesWhen you digitize a map and error values are high, the resulting map table may be too inaccurate for reliable use.

MapInfo makes the error calculation by determining the relative positions of the control points based on the map coordinates you entered. It then can determine where those points should be on the tablet. The error is the difference between where a point should be on the tablet and where you actually clicked. An error value is displayed for each point.

When you are digitizing from a paper map, these error values should be quite small; they should be on the same scale as the resolution of the digitizer. In most cases errors should be in thousandths or hundredths of an inch. Errors approaching a tenth of an inch are probably too large. When the error is too high, you should:

• Check the projection to make sure it matches the projection printed on the map.

Click on Projection in the Digitizer Setup dialog. The Choose Projection dialog

displays with the current projection highlighted. If that is not the correct

projection, scroll through the list and choose the correct projection

Once you change the projection, MapInfo recalculates the error.

• When the problem is not with the projection or when changing the projection

only slightly reduces the error, then you have to check individual control points.

Start with the points with the highest error: choose Edit in the Digitizer Setup

dialog. Correct the control points until the error is acceptably small.

When you are digitizing from a photograph, you should use many control points, preferably over twenty. In general, the more control points you use, the smaller the error.



Digitizer Setup Dialog

Control Points Buttons that allow you to add a control point, edit a control point, remove a control point, or clear all control points.

Add Access the Pick Tablet Point dialog. This dialog displays the location of the puck as you move it. Pressing a digitizer button selects the location as a point and the Add Control Point dialog is displayed. See the preceding: Picking and Adding a Control Point.

Edit Access the Edit Control Point dialog. This dialog allows you to edit the control point selected (highlighted) in the Digitizer Setup dialog. See the preceding: Editing A Control Point.

Remove Remove the control point that is selected (highlighted) in the Digitizer Setup dialog.

Clear All Remove all the control points. The projection is then reset to the projection of the active map window.

Map Units Choose the map unit that matches the coordinate units on the paper map. If the appropriate unit is not in the list, check to make sure you specified the correct projection.

Projection Access the Choose Projection dialog where you specify a projection for the paper map. See the preceding: Setting the Projection, and the Projection Button.

Buttons Access dialogs that display information for configuring the digitizer buttons. Digitizer buttons are configured so you can enter points for drawing objects and complete polylines and polygons. See the preceding: Configuring Digitizer Buttons.



Pick Tablet Point Dialog OptionsAs you move the puck around the tablet, the Pick Tablet Point dialog displays where that point is on the tablet. When you click a digitizer button, you select that tablet location as a control point.

Add Control Point Dialog Options

Edit Control Point Dialog Options

Pick Tablet Point Dialog Options

Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #1This dialog is displayed when you click the Buttons button in the Digitizer Setup dialog. It provides information for choosing a digitizer button as the draw button.

Draw and close buttons are configured to prevent the inadvertent closure of a polyline/polygon due to a misinterpreted double click. Digitizer pucks have anywhere from 1 to 16 buttons.

It is best to select draw and close buttons that are different from each other. Buttons that are opposite each other are often read as the same kind of click in windows. If you have two or more buttons on the digitizer puck, you can designate which button performs each function.

If the digitizer puck has only one button, you must use it for both drawing and completing polylines and polygons. In this case a single click enters a point when you are drawing an object. A double-click completes a polyline or polygon.

Label, Map X, Map Y Enter a name for the control point (optional) and X, Y coordinates. See the preceding: Entering A Name For A Control Point.

Label, Map X, Map Y Change the control point’s Label and its Map X and Map Y points by typing new values.

Tablet X-Y Access the Pick Table Point dialog to change the tablet position for a control point.

Tablet X, Tablet Y The Pick Tablet Point dialog displays the tablet position for a control point and allows you to change that position. You change the tablet position by moving the digitizer puck where you want it and clicking a digitizer button.



When you click the button you want to use for drawing objects, another Set Digitizer Buttons dialog is displayed with information on choosing a digitizer button for completing polylines and polygons.

Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #2This dialog is displayed when you specify the button you want to use for drawing objects in Set Digitizer Buttons Dialog Options #1. This dialog provides information on choosing a digitizer button for completing polylines and polygons.



Common Digitizing Problems and SolutionsBefore you begin digitizing, each of the following conditions must be met:

• a drawing tool is selected.

• the Map window is active.

• the D key is pressed.

The D key toggles digitizing mode on and off. When in digitizing mode, the cursor will appear as a large cross hair. Digitizing does not take place without this cursor. If you draw on the screen without the digitizer cursor, then coordinates entered into the package are relative to where the cursor is on screen. The cursor, even though driven by the digitizer tablet, is just a screen pointer until digitizing mode is entered. Once in digitizing mode, the control point transformation is put into effect, and coordinate information is taken from the tablet, not the screen.

Make sure the coordinate system, projection, map orientation and map units are known and properly set in MapInfo.

Improper initial setup may lead to inaccurate results which can only be corrected by starting over. The Projection button in Digitizer Setup refers to the paper map to be digitized, whereas Map > Options Projection button refers to the map you are digitizing into. It is possible to digitize a map with one projection into a map with a different projection, as long as the Digitizer Setup projection matches the paper map projection, and the Map > Options > Projection matches the projection you want to digitize into.

Make sure there are at least three known coordinate locations on the map/drawing which can be used to set control points for wrong calculation four coordinate locations must be indicated. The more control points that are added, the more accurate the transformation from tablet to map will be.

High error when configuring control points

• Control points were not properly entered.

• The map has moved while setting control points.

• The control points are inaccurate.

• The map being digitized is inaccurate.

Map is coming out backwards.

• Positive and negative control point information may be entered incorrectly.

Check orientation of control points, positive and negative may be reversed. Its useful to have the Map Options dialog box display cursor location while in digitizing mode. When the cursor is placed over a control point in digitizing mode, the cursor location should match the coordinates of the control point.



When switching into digitize mode, the cursor disappears.

Change active zoom and center of window to represent the zoom and center of the map/drawing being digitized. Often using a control point as the center of the window, toggling into digitize mode and placing the cursor directly over the control point will make the cursor appear.

Digitizer cursor jumps off screen when digitizing.

Increase the active zoom to better reflect the zoom being digitized. You must be in Digitizer mode (press D) but the digitizer cursor does not have to be visible in the Map window. View entire layer may help if working with a pre-existing map. It is also possible that the tablet is damaged.

Distances don’t measure properly.

The only way to measure a distance of a segment on a map being digitized is to digitize the segment into a map window and then use the ruler tool to measure the segment. Dragging the digitizer puck over the segment with the ruler tool selected will not work since screen info and not tablet info is being measured. If a digitized segment measures incorrectly, then there is a setup problem which could range from map properties (units, projection, etc.) to control points, to inaccurate digitizing.

Digitizer setup is unavailable even though the digitizer is connected.

• The tablet being used is not supported by the version of MapInfo.

• The tablet is not turned on or is incorrectly connected to the computer.

• The system.ini file is not properly configured.

• The tablet is improperly configured.

• The wrong tablet/driver combination is being used.

• There is a problem with the tablet, the comm port, or the connecting cables.

If the tablet works with other applications or is being used as a mouse pointer in Windows, and none of the above problems apply, there may be a problem with support of the tablet. If possible, configure the tablet to emulate different tablets supported by MapInfo. Make sure the system.ini file is updated to reflect the changes, and restart Windows each time a change is made to the system.ini.

The box at the top of the Digitizer Setup dialog displays a list of control points that you created. The box displays the X and Y coordinates for each point. The coordinates are displayed in the units set with the Map Units drop-down list.

The box also indicates the error for each point. The error is in paper units specified in System preferences. To learn how to specify system preferences, see the Preferences Command.



Disaggregate Command Objects Menu


Use Disaggregate to:• take the current selection objects and break them into their component parts.

Disaggregate is available when:• a layer is editable and an object is selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Disaggregate

Using DisaggregateChoose Objects > Disaggregate to display the Disaggregate Objects dialog.

All Objects Check to break up all objects.Polyline objects will be Disaggregated into many Polyline objects for each section of the original object. Multipoint objects will be disaggregated into multiple Point objects for each node contained in the original Multipoint object. Collection objects will be fully disaggregated. The region portion of the collection will be broken up into its constituent polygons as noted above. The polyline portion of the collection will be broken up by sections as noted above. The multipoint portion of the collection will be broken up into points as noted above.



Choose Next to Display the Data Disaggregation Dialog:

Disaggregation Method

Data disaggregation splits the data associated with a map object into smaller parts to match the new map objects. For example, you may want to split a state into regions and have the data previously associated with the entire state proportioned for each new region.

Retain Holes in Regions Check to allow Region objects to produce new Region objects for each exterior boundary polygon contained in the region, and retain any holes (interior boundary polygons) within the exterior boundaries. If this box is not checked, all polygons contained in the original region will produce separate Region objects, regardless of the interior/exterior boundary designation. Holes (interior boundaries) will become solid polygon regions, and no output region object will contain any holes.

Collections Only Choose to break up collection objects only. A collection will be broken up into a maximum of 3 objects: a region object representing the region component of the collection, a polyline object representing the polyline portion of the collection, and a multipoint object representing the points in the collection. All non-collection objects will be ignored.



Blank The value contained in the data field of the target object is deleted in the new object. For example, choose Blank for the state name field if you do not want the new object to be named with the state name. A Browser window of the new objects shows text and numeric fields alike to contain blank values.

Value The value is retained in the new object. For example, the name of the state in the target object will be carried over to the new object(s).

Area Proportion Numeric values of the target object are proportioned for each new object, based on the area of the new objects. For example, if you split California into three new regions and choose Area Proportion for its population, each region now contains the population for its region based on its area.

No Data Data will not be carried over into the new objects. This is appropriate if you are only editing Data an object for presentation purposes and do not need the data attached to the new objects. By choosing No Data the field names and data disaggregation choices in the dialog are grayed. A Browser window of the new objects shows zeroes where numeric data was and blank for text fields.

OK Perform the dialog options. After splitting the target object(s), MapInfo deletes the original target from the table. The new objects are appended to the end of the table. For subsequent split operations, the dialog retains the previous disaggregation status for a field.




Drag Button Main Toolbar

Drag Button Main Toolbar

Use the Drag button to:• drag an entire MapInfo map window into an OLE container application, such as

Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel. Dragging a map provides the same effects as Edit > Copy Map Window followed by Edit > Paste or Edit > Paste Special in an appropriate application.

The Drag button is available when:• a map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Drag button

Using the Drag ButtonUse the Drag button to place a MapInfo map into an OLE container application. A map dragged from MapInfo Professional provides the embedded OLE object, MapInfo Map. See the MapInfo Map section of the User’s Guide for description of functionality provided. A map dragged from 16 bit MapInfo, a metafile, is a static image.

To use the Drag Button:

1. Click on the Drag button in the Main Toolbar. The cursor displays as a drag icon.

2. Place the drag icon anywhere in the map window and click. The Begin Drag cursor

displays: .

3. Drag the map to the new location; the Doing Drag cursor displays.

4. Release the mouse button; the map is dropped on the container at that location.

The behavior of the drop operation is defined by the container; most will insert a copy of the map.

If the application into which you are dragging a map cannot accept the map object, the No Drop

cursor displays:



Drawing Toolbar Main Toolbar

Drawing Toolbar

Use Drawing Toolbar to:• access the buttons for drawing and modifying objects on a map or layout.

Drawing Toolbar is available when:• a Map, Layout or Browser window is editable

and

• the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Drawing Toolbar.


Using the Drawing ToolbarThe Drawing Toolbar contains tools and commands that are used to create and edit map objects, including: to draw lines, polylines, ellipses, regions, arcs, rectangles and text; changing to reshape mode and add nodes. It also contains a frame tool when working in a Layout window.

For an on-screen button description, click and hold the mouse button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar, and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars.

To choose from the Drawing Toolbar:


Add Node button Access the Add Node tool which allows you to add a node to regions, lines or polylines when you are in Reshape mode.

Arc button Access the Arc tool which allows you to draw an arc the size and shape of one quarter of an ellipse.

Ellipse button Access the Ellipse tool which allows you to create elliptical and circular objects.

Frame button Access the Frame tool which allows you to create frames in the Layout window to display maps, graphs, browsers, legends, and Info tool, statistics, message windows.

Line button Access the Line tool which allows you to draw straight lines.


Drawing Toolbar Main Toolbar

For more information, see the appropriate button entry.

AutoscrollingWhen you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with single-click tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.

See: Toolbars Command, User’s Guide: Chapter 4

Line Style button Access the Line Style dialog where you can change the style, color and width of line objects.

Polygon button Access the Polygon tool which allow you to draw polygons (a closed, connected sequence of lines).

Polyline button Access the Polyline tool which allows you to draw polylines (an open, connected sequence of lines).

Rectangle button Access the Rectangle tool which allows you to draw rectangles and squares.

Region Style button Access the Region Style dialog where you can change the fill pattern, color and background, and the border style, color and width of region objects.

Reshape button Allows you to toggle in and out of Reshape mode. Reshape allows you to edit regions, polylines, lines, arcs and points by moving, adding, and deleting nodes that define them.

Rounded Rectangle button

Access the Rounded Rectangle tool which allows you to draw rounded rectangles and squares.

Symbol button Access the Symbol tool which allows you to place point symbols on a map like “push pins.”

Symbol Style button Access the Symbol Style dialog where you can change the style, color and size of a symbol object.

Text button Access the Text tool which allows you to add titles, labels and annotation to maps and layouts or edit data in a Browser window.

Text Style button Access the Text Style dialog where you can change the font typeface, size, style, color and background of text objects.


Ellipse Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Button to:• access the Ellipse tool. The Ellipse tool creates ellipses and round objects.

The Ellipse Button is available when:• a Map window with an editable layer is active

or

• a Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar> Ellipse button

Drawing an EllipseTo draw an ellipse:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Ellipse button. The cursor displays as a cross.

2. Move the cursor where you want to begin creating the ellipse. This point will be the center of the ellipse.

3. Press and hold down the mouse button. Drag the mouse.

The shape appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the pointer.

4. Release the mouse button when the ellipse has the appropriate shape.

Press <CTRL> to begin drawing the ellipse from a corner of the minimum bounding region for the ellipse, instead of out from the center of the ellipse.

Drawing Circles Press <SHIFT> while using the Ellipse tool to create perfect circles. Release the mouse button before <SHIFT> when the circle reaches the appropriate size.

Use <CTRL> with <SHIFT> to create perfect circles that begin at the corner of the bounding region.

Specifying Ellipse AttributesTo set the center, horizontal, and vertical coordinates of an ellipse:

• Using the Select tool, double-click on the selected object.

or

• Select the ellipse with the Select tool and choose Edit > Get Info.

The Ellipse Object dialog displays.



Ellipse Object Dialog

Center X and Y Specify the X-Y coordinates of the ellipse’s center.

X Radius Specify the horizontal distance from the center of the ellipse to the rightmost or leftmost point.

Y Radius Set vertical distance from the center of the ellipse to the topmost or bottommost point.

Style Display the Region Style dialog. Specify the pattern, color, and background of the fill and style, color, and width of the border. See Region Style Button/Command.





Enclose Command

Enclose Command

Use the Enclose Command to: • create regions from polygonal areas enclosed by polylines. You can choose to include

regions objects in the Enclose process.

The Enclose Command is available when:• a map is active

and

• there is an editable layer in the map

and

• objects are selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Enclose

Using the Enclose CommandUnlike the Combine feature, the Objects Enclose feature can produce more than one object. Use this feature to create regions from linear tables, such as road networks.

To use the Enclose Command:

1. Select polylines in an active map window with an editable layer.

2. Choose Objects > Enclose.

3. Choose Ignore Region Objects if you do not want Region objects included in the Enclose process.

See:Convex Hull

Objects > Combine


Erase Command Objects Menu


Use Erase to:• remove a portion of a map object using the currently selected object as the eraser. The

portion of the target object covered by the erasing object is removed.

Erase is available when:• a Map window is active and a layer is editable, and

• an object is set as the target and an object is selected that will act as the eraser.

Menu Path• Objects > Erase

Erasing an ObjectYou can erase closed objects (polygon regions, ellipses, rectangles, or rounded rectangles), open objects (polylines, lines and arcs), points, multipoints, and collection objects using the Erase Outside command. You cannot use Erase Outside on text objects. The erasing object must be selected.

To erase an object or a portion of an object:

1. Choose Map > Layer Control. Make the layer editable.

2. Select Objects > Set Target. Set the object(s) to be the target for editing, and choose Objects > Set Target.

3. Create and select the erasing object (or use objects from same or another layer). The erasing object must be closed.

4. Choose Objects >Erase.

5. At the Data Disaggregation dialog, set the field functions to be either blank, value or area proportion.

6. Click OK.

The portion of the target object covered by the erasing object will be erased.



Data DisaggregationData disaggregation removes the data associated with the portion of the map object that is eliminated during the Erase operation. For instance, if you edit the West Coast region using Erase to remove the state of Nevada, you can disaggregate the data associated with Nevada as well. The Data Disaggregation dialog displays after you initiate the Erase command. For each field choose whether the data from the target region is maintained (by choosing Value), removed (by choosing Blank) or proportioned (by choosing Area Proportion).

For details on using the data disaggregation dialog, see Disaggregate.

See: Cut Command, Split Command, User’s Guide: Chapter 20


Erase Outside Command Objects Menu


Use Erase Outside to:• remove a portion of a map object using the currently selected object as the eraser. The

portion of the target object not covered by the erasing object is removed.

Erase Outside is available when:• a map window is active and a layer is editable

and

• an object is set as the target and an object is selected that will act as the eraser.

Menu Path• Objects > Erase Outside

Erasing the Outside of an ObjectYou can erase either closed objects (polygon regions, ellipses, rectangles, or rounded rectangles), open objects (polylines, lines and arcs), points, multipoints, and collection objects using the Erase Outside command. You cannot use Erase Outside on text objects. The erasing object must be selected.

The difference between Erase Outside and Erase lies in which portion of the map object is removed. Erase Outside removes the portion of the target object that lies outside the erasing object, while Erase removes the portion that lies inside the eraser.

To erase the outside of an object:



3. Create and select the erasing object (or use objects from same or another layer). The erasing object must be closed.

4. Choose Objects >Erase Outside.


6. Click OK.

The target object will now be erased except where the erasing object was located.



Data DisaggregationData disaggregation removes the data associated with the portion of the map object that is eliminated during the Erase Outside operation. For example, if you edit a sales territory using Erase Outside to remove all but a 25 mile zone around the home office, you can remove all the data from the target object (your sales territory) except that which is proportional to the zones area.

The Data Disaggregation dialog displays after you initiate the Erase Outside command. For each field choose whether the data from the target region is maintained (by choosing Value), removed (by choosing Blank) or proportioned (by choosing Area Proportion).

For details on using data disaggregation, see Split Command.

See:Set Target Command

Split Command



Exit Command File Menu

Exit Command File Menu

Use Exit to:• quit MapInfo.

Exit is available when:• Exit is always available.

Menu Path• File > Exit

Exiting MapInfoTo exit MapInfo:

• Choose File > Exit.

If you made changes to a table and did not save them, you will be prompted to save the changes.

Since each window has only one cosmetic layer; that layer contains all edits to cosmetic objects. Each window can contain multiple tables; thematic and label edits are saved on a per table basis. Prompts that display reflect the type of objects the window contains.


Export Command Table Menu


Use Export to:• export a table to another format. You can export graphics and tabular data to MapInfo

format (MIF) and AutoCAD DXF files. Only tabular data can be exported to delimited ASCII and dBASE DBF format.

Export is available when:• a table is open.

Menu Path• Table > Export

Exporting a Single TableTo export a single table:

• Choose Table > Export.

If more than one table is open, select the table to export from the Export Table drop-down list.

Export Table Dialog

The Export Table to File dialog displays

Export table Choose a table to export from this list.

Export Display the Export Table to File dialog.



.

Save in: Type or select the filename you want to export. This box lists files with the extension you select in the File Format box. To see a list of files with a particular extension type an asterisk, a period and the three character extension. For example, if you want to see all files with a .dbf extension in a directory, type .dbf.

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.dbf

Save as type: Specify the type of file export to perform: MapInfo Interchange Format MIF (default), Delimited ASCII, AutoCAD DXF, dBASE DBF. The file extension will reflect the file format type. For more information, see the following specific file format descriptions.

Save Export the file in the specified format.





MIF ExportMapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) is an ASCII file format that fully describes a MapInfo database. Both graphic and tabular data are exported into MIF files. The graphic data is in a file with a “.mif” extension, and the tabular data is in a file with a .mid extension. MapInfo Interchange Format files can be translated into other formats with other programs. See the

MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix J: MapInfo Data Interchange Format.

ASCII Export MapInfo also allows you to export tabular data to a delimited ASCII file. This file can later be edited with a text editor or imported into another software package. When you export to ASCII, MapInfo displays the Delimited ASCII Information dialog, where you choose the delimiter character. You can also choose to have the first row of the ASCII file become column titles.

MapInfo also displays a dialog used to indicate the character set for the exported ASCII file. Different platforms use different character sets. MapInfo must know the platform where you are going to use the exported file in order to provide the appropriate character set.

No graphical data is exported to ASCII.

Delimited ASCII Information Dialog

Delimiter

Tab Choose Tab when you want tabs for the field delimiters.

Other Specify the delimiter you want to use. Type the character in the box. Comma is the default choice.



AutoCAD DXF ExportIt is not necessary to set a coordinate transformation when exporting. However, you need to set a coordinate transformation in the following situations:

• When you work with the map in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo.

• When you are going to work with the map in a system whose coordinates are geographically meaningless. For example, if you are going to work in a drawing or illustration package, the package’s coordinates have no relation to the earth coordinates of the map.

Using the DXF Export Information Dialog

The DXF Export Information dialog displays after you have selected Table > Export, chosen a file name and type, and clicked Save.

File Character Set Specify the character set used by the file. Several different character sets are commonly used in computing; the specific file character set must be identified. Since these different character sets are used for different platforms, MapInfo prompts you to indicate the platform on which a given DBF file was created.

Use first line for column titles

Choose this option when you want to treat the first line of the file as column titles.

OK MapInfo exports the file.

Cancel Cancels the dialog options.

Preserve Multi-Polygon Regions As DXF Blocks

Choose to create a block for every region in the map that contains multi-polygons.



Set Coordinate Transformation DialogChoose to specify a custom coordinate transformation. If you set a coordinate transformation, the coordinates in the DXF file will be the same as the native projection for the map (i.e., longitude-latitude, Lambert Equal Area, any of the State Plane systems, or any other MapInfo projection).

MapInfo Objects as DXF EntitiesMapInfo objects are converted into DXF entities as follows:

Preserve Attribute Data

Choose to export tabular information from the database in the form of DXF attributes. Preserving Attribute Data slows down the export process significantly.

ASCII or Binary DXF File

Define the format of the output file. ASCII is the default. Binary files are processed much faster.

Number of Decimal Places

Define the number of decimal places when exporting floating point numbers into an ASCII file. This button is disabled for binary files. Acceptable values for this parameter can be between 0 and 16. The default value is 6.

Set Transformation Display the Set Coordinate Transformation dialog.

Version 13 Choose to export file compliant with AutoCAD version 13.

Version 12 Choose to export file compliant with AutoCAD version 12.



Help Display the appropriate Help topic.

MapInfo object DXF Entity

single-polygon region closed polyline

multi-polygon region block containing closed polylines; the block is named REGION0, REGION1,

circular arcs arc

non-circular arcs scaled block containing the arc; the block is named ARC0, ARC1, etc.

rectangle closed polyline

rounded rectangle closed polyline (roundness is lost)

circular ellipse circle

non-circular ellipse scaled instance of a block containing an ellipse; the block is named ELLIPSE

text underlined text is handled by prefixing a %%u code



All MapInfo colors are translated to the closest primary colors in DXF (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white).

All lines are converted to continuous, dashed, or dot-line types.

Fonts are not preserved, and all text is exported into the AutoCAD STANDARD font.

When attribute data is preserved, a block is created for every object. The blocks are named BLK0, BLK1, BLK2, etc. The attributes inside the blocks are given the same names as the field names in the database.

dBASE DBF ExportMapInfo can export tabular data into dBASE DBF format. Exporting to DBF creates only the .dbf file. No graphical data is exported to dBASE. When you save a table in DBF format, you create a .dbf file, as well as some other files. These other files contain graphic information including MapInfo indices and other information that MapInfo uses.

MapInfo also displays the dBASE DBF Information dialog that you use to indicate the character set for the exported DBF file. Different platforms use different character sets. MapInfo must know the platform where you are going to use the exported file in order to provide the appropriate character set.

dBASE DBF Information Dialog Options

line line

point point

polyline polyline

File Character Set Specify the character set used by the file. Several different character sets are commonly used in computing; the specific file character set must be identified. Since these different character sets are used for different platforms, MapInfo prompts you to indicate the platform on which a given DBF file was created.





Exporting a Map in a Different ProjectionYou may want to export a map in a projection that is different from its native projection. To do this, first create a copy of the table, and save it with a new projection.

To save a copy of a map with a new projection:

1. Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table dialog displays.

Choose the map table you want to copy. If more than one table is open, the Save Table dialog displays; choose the table to be saved.

2. Type a name for the copy.

3. Choose the format, and path of the saved copy.

4. Click the Projection button. The Choose Projection dialog displays.

5. Choose a projection for the copy.

6. Choose OK.

7. Choose Save.

Follow the directions for Exporting A Single Table, and export the copy of the table. When there is more than one table open, the Export Table dialog displays.

See: Appendix J, Import


Expression Dialog

Expression Dialog

Use the Expression dialog to:• formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions for several MapInfo

applications.

Menu PathAccess the Expression dialog through the following paths:

• Query > Select > Assist

• Table > Update Column > Assist

• Map > Create Thematic Map > Next > Expression (Field drop-down list)

• Map > Layer Control (choose a non-cosmetic layer) > Choose Label > Expression (Label with drop-down list).

• Objects > Buffers (from column drop-down list)

• Browser > Pick Fields

Specifying an ExpressionTo specify an expression:

1. Click the Assist button.

or

Choose Expression from the drop-down list. The Expression dialog displays.

2. Type the expression directly into this box or choose from the dialog drop-down lists.

Expression Dialog


Expression Dialog

Where Expressions Can Be UsedUse the Expression dialog to formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions in several MapInfo dialogs, see the preceding: Menu Path.

Expressions are used in the following commands: Select, Update Column, Create Thematic Map, and Layer Control (the Label With Column drop-down list in the Label Options dialog). The expression serves a different purpose in different commands.

For example:

In the Select command, the expression states a condition that a record in a table must meet in order to be included in a query table.

In Update Column, and in Select Columns SQL Select the expression calculates a value that is then entered into a table.

In Shade by Value (Thematic Map), the expression calculates a value that is then displayed on a map.

In Label With Column, use expressions containing string functions to customize labels.

There are two categories of expression:

Expressions that must evaluate to true or false.

Expressions that calculate some value.

Expressions that evaluate to true or false always have a comparison operator and may have multiple clauses connected by logical operators. Use these expressions for selecting objects in Select.

Type a numeric expression

Type the expression directly into the box or build the expression from dialog drop-down lists.

Column Choose a column. The column titles from the active table display.

Operators Choose an operator. Examples of operators include : +, -, and, or, contains.

Functions Functions, including Area, Sin, Year, have zero or more parameters and return a value. The returned value may be used in an expression, such as another function. See Functions.

OK Enter the expression and return to the dialog you started from.

Cancel Cancel the expression and removes the dialog.

Verify Choose to check the syntax of the query and tells you whether it is correct.



Expression Dialog

Expressions that calculate some value never have a comparison operator and generally do not have multiple clauses, unless the value being calculated is stored in a logical field. Use these expressions to calculate values for Thematic Maps, Update Column, and Label With Column in Layer Settings.

Entering Specific Values (Constants) Into ExpressionsWhen entering specific character strings, numbers, and dates into expressions, you need to observe the following conventions.

Character StringsWhen typing a particular string into an expression you must enclose it in double quotes. MapInfo then treats it as a string rather than as a column name. For example, the first two strings shown below are valid string constants, while the last two strings are not.

“Orange”

“New York”

Orange

New York

Numbers When entering specific numerical values, do not use commas, dollar signs, or any characters other than numerals, decimal points, and the minus sign for negative numbers. Use E to denote numbers in exponentiation.

Dates Dates consist of a month, a day, and an optional year. The year is specified by two or four digits and enclosed in double quotes. If the year is not specified, the date defaults to the year set on the computer’s clock. The components of a date are separated by hyphens or slashes. The following are valid data constants:

“1-20-92”

“01/20/1992”

“1/20”

Mathematical OperatorsMathematical operators are often used in creating expressions. The following chart shows the operator’s symbol, name, example, and how the operators handles different data types.


Expression Dialog

The following calculations are possible:

Adding numbers to dates to yield another date

Subtracting a number from a date to yield another date

Subtracting a date from a date to yield a number

When you add numbers to dates or subtract numbers from dates, MapInfo treats the numbers as specifying a number of days. When you add or subtract a week, you use the number 7. When you add or subtract a month, you use 30 or 31. When MapInfo subtracts a date from a date, the resulting number indicates a number of days.

String Operators

Strings must be enclosed in double quotes. For example:

“Ms. ” + Last_Name

When MapInfo evaluates this as part of an expression, it places “Ms. ” in front of each last name. The string constant (“Ms. ”) is in quotes. Similarly,

“Hello, ” + “world”

gives you “Hello, world.”

Comparison OperatorsComparison operators are often used in creating expressions. The following chart shows the comparison operator symbols and a description.

+ plus A + B Date + Number −> Datesome number + some number −> FloatNumber + Date −> Datesome integer + some integer −> Integer

- minus A - B (subtraction)-A (negative)

Date - Number −> DateNumber - Date −> Datesome integer - some integer −> Integersome number - some number −> Float

* times A * B some integer *some integer −> Integersome number * some number −> Float

/ divided by A / B some number / some number −> Float

^ exponentiation A ^ B some number ^ some number −> Float

+ “concatenation” − connects strings and string expressions.

= equals


Expression Dialog

Logical Operators“And”, “or”, and “not” are logical operators. They are used to combine expressions in Select and the Where Condition clause of SQL Select. MapInfo treats these expressions as a test that it applies to each record in the table. For each test it gets a yes/no (true/false) answer. MapInfo uses the logical operators to tell it how to combine the individual yes/no answers into an overall yes/no answer: Does the current record meet the selection condition?

Geographic OperatorsMapInfo has several geographic operators. Use them to select objects on the basis of their spatial relationship to some other object. MapInfo has a special keyword you use with geographical operators: obj or object. This keyword tells MapInfo that it has to get values based on the graphical objects in the table rather than the tabular data.

The geographic operators go between the objects being specified. Select the geographic operators from the Operators menu.

The geographic operators are:

Contains:Object A Contains object B if B’s centroid is anywhere within A’s boundary.

Contains Entire:Object A Contains Entire object B if B’s boundary is entirely within A’s boundary.

Within:Object A is Within object B if its centroid is inside B’s boundary.

Entirely Within:Object A is Entirely Within object B if A’s boundary is entirely within B’s boundary.

Intersects:Object A Intersects object B if they have at least one point in common.

<> not equal

> greater than

< less than

>= greater than or equal to

<= less than or equal to

_ like _ a wildcard for a single character

% like % a wildcard for multiple characters

and is “true” when both of its arguments (the expressions it joins together) are true. A record must satisfy both of these conditions to be selected.

or is “true” when either one, or both, of its arguments (the expressions it joins together) are true. A record need satisfy only one of these conditions to be selected. It is also selected when both of its conditions are satisfied.

not is “true” when its argument (the expression it applies to) is false. A record is selected when it does not meet the stated condition.


Expression Dialog

KeywordsUse the Expression dialog to formulate mathematical and alphanumeric expressions in several MapInfo dialogs. See the preceding: Menu Path.

MapInfo supports the use of the keywords “any”, “all”, “in” and “between”. These keywords must be typed into expressions.

Use “any” to select any item in a set of items.

ABBR = any (“AL”, “MN”, “TX”)

Any is true of any record where the state is Alabama, Minnesota, or Texas.

To understand the use of “all” consider this expression:

ABBR <> all(“AL”, “MN”, “TX”)

This statement says: Give me all orders where the state does not equal Alabama, Minnesota, or Texas. It selects all orders except those from Alabama, Minnesota or Texas. Consider what happens when we issue the following:

ABBR <> any(“AL”, “MN”, “TX”)

The following example shows the use of “in”:

ABBR in(“AL”, “MN”, “TX”)

In this case “in” is equivalent to “=any” and “not in” is equivalent to “<>all”.

Finally, consider these two examples which illustrate “between”:

PRICE between 50000 and 100000

(PRICE between 50000 and 100000) or (PRICE between 150000 and 200000)


Expression Dialog

Operator PrecedenceWhen MapInfo evaluates expressions, it needs to know which components of an expression to evaluate first. This is called precedence. By convention, certain operators are assigned different levels of precedence. Those with the highest level are evaluated first. The following table lists MapInfo’s operators in the order in which they are evaluated. Operators at the same level of precedence are evaluated from left to right.

See: User’s Guide, Appendix D, Functions, User’s Guide: Chapter 10

Highest Priority: Lowest Priority:

parenthesis Or

exponentiation

negation

multiplication, division

addition, subtraction

geographic operators, comparison operators

Not

And


Find Command Query Menu


Use Find to:• locate and mark individual objects or addresses.

Find is available when:• a field is indexed

and

• a table is mappable

and

• a table displays in a Map or Browser window.

Menu Path• Query > Find

Locating an Object or Street AddressWhen you issue the Find command for the first time in a session, the first Find dialog displays. Use this dialog to define what table to search. When you have defined the search, the second Find dialog displays. Use this dialog to specify what data to look for. If you have previously used the Find command in the session, you only need to specify what data to look for.

The tables must be mappable and indexed. If you need to specify these components, see File > New Table or Table > Maintenance > Modify Structure.

To locate an object or street address:

Choose Query > Find. The first Find dialog displays.

Find Dialog



Optional

Use this option when you are trying to find an object or address whose name is not unique and is used for other objects or locations.

Search table Specify a table to search from.

For Objects in Column Choose the column with location information for the objects for which you are searching. Only indexed columns display in the drop-down list.

Options Display the Find Options dialog. This dialog provides additional options when an exact match cannot be found.

Refine Search with Table

Choose a “refining” table (the table must contain boundaries, “region objects”).

using Boundary Name Column

Choose a “refining” column; the column containing the name of the boundary.

Mark with Symbol Click the symbol to display the Symbol Style dialog. Choose the symbol you want and designate its point size and color. See Symbol Style Button.

Find in Front Window Only

Check to perform the Find operation only in the front window of a Map, Redistrict, or Browse window. Found features are marked with the designated symbol in a Map window. The Browse window is scrolled so that the record appears in the browser view.

OK Display the second Find dialog that allows you to specify what data to find.





Find Options Dialog

Offset Address Location

Back from street: Specify a distance and distance unit indicating how far back from the street to offset the address. Select the distance unit from the drop down list. The offset can range in whole numbers from 0 to 32,767.

Inset Address Location

Specify how far from the ends of the street to inset an address either as a percentage of the line or polyline on which the address is being interpolated or a designated distance.Percent from ends of street: Specify how far from the ends of the street as a percentage of the street. Percentage can range in whole numbers from 0 to 50.From ends of street: Specify a distance and distance unit from the ends of the street. Distance can range in whole numbers from 0 to 32,767.The last specified inset/ offset options becomes the default settings for the next occurrence.

Try substitutions from “MAPINFOW.ABB”

Make substitutions from the abbreviation file. You can make several kinds of additions to this file. These additions deal with various kinds of geocoding problems. See the following: Using the MapInfo Abbreviations File and the MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding.



Find Dialog (second dialog)

The name of the column that you specified in the first Find dialog is listed to the left of the list box (i.e. Street). When locating a street address, type “# Name”, such as “30 Elm St” or “1045 Templar Blvd”. These conditions are specified in the Country Preferences in Geocoding Preferences.

Use the closest address number

Match an address number to the nearest address range. This is useful when there is no range for the address, either because the address falls in a gap or beyond the range end. If a refining boundary has also been specified, MapInfo will find the closest address number within the specified refining boundary.

Use a match found in a different boundary

Searches for a street name and address name first. Then it finds out what boundary the address is in. When address is in only one boundary, but not the one you selected in the Refine option, MapInfo locates to that boundary.

First column name Enter the name of the object or address for which you are searching. The name of the column specified in the first Find dialog is listed to the left of the box. If an exact match is not found, “Exact match not found” displays with a list of close matches from which you can choose.

Second column name If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed in the dialog. Type the name of the refining boundary.



Using the MapInfo Abbreviations FileMapInfo contains a text file called MAPINFOW.ABB [MapInfo Abbreviations]. which has a list of common street abbreviations, such as “St” for “Street” and “Blvd” for “Boulevard.” These help MapInfo to obtain exact matches. To familiarize yourself with the MAPINFOW.ABB file, you can look at its contents in the Notepad Text Editor.

To use the abbreviations file during the Find process:

1. If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed (i.e. ZIP). Type the name of the object or address you are searching for in the box.

2. Type the name of the refining boundary in this box.

If MapInfo cannot find an exact match for the object you specified, it lists possible matches.

3. Click Up or Down to move to other pages.

4. Choose a specific entry from the list.

5. Click OK. The object will be found in the map or browser.

Locating Street IntersectionsYou also can use the Find command to locate street intersections. When you type the name of the object to be found in the second Find dialog (enter object name to find), separate the two items by a double ampersand (&&). For example, to find the intersection of Congress Street and Christie Street, type: “Congress Street && Christie Street”.

If the “found” object is not on the current Map window, MapInfo positions the object in the Map window and designates the object with the symbol specified in the Find dialog.

When the object is in the current Map window, the contents of the Map does not move, but MapInfo still designates the object with a symbol. When you are working with a browser, MapInfo scrolls through the browser until the designated object is the first record in the window.

See:Find Selection Command

List box If an exact match for the object you specified cannot be found, possible matches are listed. Click Up or Down to move to other pages. To choose a specific entry from the list, click on that entry.

Respecify Returns to the first Find dialog, to choose another table and/or column, or specify Find options.

OK Initiates the Find.

Cancel Cancels the Find.



Find Selection Command Query Menu

Find Selection Command Query Menu

Use Find Selection to:• automatically find and display the selection in all windows.

Find Selection is available when:• a Browser window is active and at least one row is selected.

or

• a Map window is active and at least one object is selected.

Menu Path• Query > Find Selection

Finding and Displaying a Selected ObjectTo find and display a selected object:

1. Select the appropriate object(s).

2. Choose Query > Find Selection.

If one or more objects are currently selected:

Find Selection updates all windows so that the selected item(s) appear in Browser and Map windows.

If one object is selected:

All browsers display the selected record at the top of the browser, and any map containing the object displays the selected item.

Use Map > View Entire Layer > Selection to display all selected items at once.

See:Find Command

Select Command

SQL Select Command


Frame Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Frame button to:• create frames in a layout. Each frame can display a map, graph, browser, map legend,

Info window, statistics window, message window, or can be an empty frame.

The Frame button is available when:• a layout is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Frame button

Creating Frames in a LayoutTo create a frame in a layout:

1. Click the Frame button in the Drawing Toolbar. The cursor displays as a cross.

2. Move the cursor to where drawing, should begin.

3. Click and hold down the mouse button dragging the cursor diagonally until the dashed box outlines the area where you want the frame.


When there are no windows open, an empty frame displays with “No Window”. When there are one or more open windows, the Frame Object dialog displays.

Frame Object Dialog



For most types of objects, the frame may appear to be smaller than the area you outlined. However, the border surrounds a pre-determined area. For example, for a frame containing a Statistics window, height is determined by the font size. In all cases, the upper left corner of the border is at the upper left corner of the outlined area.

Changing a Frame’s ContentsOnce you have created a frame, you can treat it much like any other graphic object. You can change its size and position, its line style and fill pattern, and you can cut, copy, and paste it.

To change the contents of a frame:

1. Double-click the frame. The Frame Object dialog displays.

2. Choose a new window from the dialog’s window drop-down list.

3. Click OK. The existing window is replaced with the new one.

Changing a Frame’s Border and BackgroundChange the line style for a frame’s border, background pattern and fill by using Options > Region Style when the frame is selected.

Window Choose a different window to display in the frame.

Bounds X1, Y1, X2, Y2 X1 and X2 are the left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries respectively. Type new values for these coordinates. The units for bounds, center, width, height, and scale are designated by the Paper and Layout Units in the Options > Preferences > System Settings dialog. These coordinates represent positions on the layout, where 0,0 is the upper-left corner.

Center X, Y The coordinate values of the frame’s center.

Width Left to right distance of the frame.

Height Top to bottom distance of the frame.

Fill Frame with Contents

Affects how a map window fills the frame. If checked, the entire frame is filled with an image of the map. If unchecked, the aspect ratio of the map window is preserved, no matter how the frame is resized.

Scale on Paper: Displays the current scale for a frame displaying a Map. You can type in a new scale. When you do so, MapInfo resizes the frame so that it displays the map at the specified scale.

OK Placed the window within the frame.





Changing a Map’s Proportions in a LayoutWhen you want to change the proportions of a map, resize the original map window. MapInfo automatically transmits that change to the layout frame. You cannot change a map’s proportions by moving the edges of the frame over the map. MapInfo simply resizes the map, preserving its view.

Changing a Layout Scale You can use a frame’s Frame Object dialog to size the map so that it has a specific scale. For example, when you want one inch to equal 50 miles, type 50 into the Scale box and the map is rescaled so that one inch on the Layout page equals 50 miles.

To reset the map scale:

1. Click the layout, making it the active window.

2. Double-click the map frame to bring up the Frame Object dialog.

3. Set the Scale on Paper to the appropriate value.

Using the Zoom-in and Change View ButtonsWhen the map no longer fits into your layout and you do not want to change the scale, then you need to reduce the view in the map window and reset the scale in the layout.

To reduce the view, use the Zoom-in or the Change View buttons. MapInfo changes the view in the Map and then changes the contents of that Map’s frame in the Layout.

Displaying a Map Legend in a LayoutBoth cartographic and theme legends display at the same size they are in the cartographic and theme legend windows, using the same fonts and sizes set for the window. When you size a legend’s frame so that it is smaller than the legend, it crops the legend rather than shrinking it to fit. You can add a theme legend to the Layout even when no theme legend is displayed elsewhere on the screen. You can add a cartographic legend only after creating the cartographic legend using the Map > Create Legend option.

Displaying a Graph in a LayoutGraphs display in a frame so that they completely fill the frame. They display according to the proportions of the frame, not the Grapher window.

The frame displays graph text at the point size the text has in the Graph window. When a frame is substantially smaller (as measured by the frame’s rulers) than the Graph it displays, the text will scale.



Displaying a Browser in a LayoutA Browser window displays with the column headings at the top of the frame. Immediately below, it displays the contents of the table, starting with the row and column at the upper-left corner of the Browser window. It displays as many columns and rows as it can fit in the frame, regardless of how many are displayed in the table. When you resize the frame, the number of rows and columns displayed are adjusted accordingly. However, fields removed from the table with the Pick Fields command are not displayed in a table frame since the display matches the contents of the Browser window.

The number of rows and columns that can be displayed in a frame depends on font size and column width. The frame displays text using the font style and size for that Browser window. When you want a different type style in the frame, you have to make the change in the Browser window by using Options > Text Style when the Browser window is the active window. When you use smaller type, you can get more rows and columns in a frame.

You also can manually adjust column width in a Browser window without affecting the underlying field size for the base table. Do this by clicking and dragging the short vertical bars separating the column names in the Browser window.

Specifying Frame Object Attributes To specify frame object attributes:

Use the Select tool and double-click the object. The Frame Object dialog displays.

See:New Layout WIndow Command



Functions

Functions

Use Functions to:• create expressions.

The Functions List is available when:• the Expression or SQL dialog displays.

Using FunctionsAn expression can include one or more function calls. In the following table, num is any numeric expression (e.g. 5), str is any string expression (e.g. “km”), and obj is any object expression (e.g. States.obj represents the object “column” in the States table). For more information on functions, refer to the MapBasic Reference Guide on-line manual that can be found on the MapInfo CD.

Math Functions

Date Functions

Abs( num ) Returns the absolute value of a number.

Cos( num ) Returns the cosine of a number; num is in radians.

Int( num ) Returns the integer (whole number) portion of a number.

Maximum( num , num ) Returns the larger of two numbers.

Minimum( num , num ) Returns the smaller of two numbers.

Round( num1, num2 ) Returns a number (num1), rounded off to the nearest value of num2 (e.g. if num2 is ten, then num1 is rounded to the nearest ten).

Sin( num ) Returns the sine of a number; num is in radians.

Tan( num ) Returns the tangent of a number; num is in radians.

CurDate( ), DateWindow function( )

Returns the current date.

Day( date ) Returns the day-of-month (1 - 31) portion of the date.

Month( date ) Returns the month (1 - 12) portion of the date.

Weekday( date ) Returns the day-of-week (1 - 7) portion of the date; 1 represents Sunday.

StringToDate( ) Convert strings to dates

NumberToDate( ) Convert numbers to dates

Year( date ) Returns the year portion (e.g. 1994) of the date.


Functions

String Functions

ASC( ) Converts strings to codes.

Chr$( num ) Returns a character that corresponds to a character code (e.g. Chr$(65) returns the string “A”).

DeformatNumber$( str ) Reverses the effect of the FormatNumber$ function, returning a string that does not include thousands separators.

Format$( num , str ) Returns a string representing a formatted number. Example:Format$( 12345.678, ”$,#.##”) returns “$12,345.68”.

FormatNumber$( num ) Returns a string representing a formatted number. This function is simpler to use than Format$, but it gives you less control over formatting (e.g. you always get thousands separators).

InStr( num , str1 , str2 ) Searches the string str1 starting at character position num, and looks for an occurrence of the string str2. Returns the position where str2 was found, or zero if not found. To start search at beginning, use a num value of one (1).

LCase$( str ) Returns a lower-case version of the string str.

Left$( str , num ) Returns the first num characters of the string str.

Len( str ) Returns the number of characters in a string.

Like( ) Compare strings.

LTrim$( str ) Trims any spaces from the start of str and returns result.

Mid$( str, num1, num2 ) Returns a portion of the string str starting at character position num1 and extending for num2 characters.

Proper$( str ) Returns a string with proper capitalization (first letter of each word capitalized).

Right$( str , num ) Returns the last num characters of the string str.

RTrim$( str ) Trims any spaces from the end of str and returns result.

Space$( ) Repeat a string sequence.

StringCompare( ) Compare strings.

StringCompareIntl( ) Compare strings.

Str$( expr ) Returns a string approximation of an expression.

UCase$( str ) Returns an upper-case (all capitalized) version of str.

UnitAbbr$( ) Returns a unit name.

UnitName$( ) Returns a unit name.


Functions

Functions That Return Geographical Calculations

Functions That Return Objects

Val( str ) Returns the numeric value of the string; for example, Val(”18”) returns the number 18. The string that you pass should not have formatting, such as thousands separators; to remove formatting, call DeformatNumber$.

Area( obj , str ) Returns the area of the object. The str parameter specifies an area unit name, such as “sq mi” or “sq km”.

CentroidX( obj ) Returns the x-coordinate of the object’s centroid.

CentroidY( obj ) Returns the y-coordinate of the object’s centroid.

Distance( num_x , num_y , num_x2 , num_y2 , str )

Returns the distance between two locations. The first two parameters specify the x and y value of the start location; the next two parameters specify the x and y value of the end location; the str parameter is a distance unit name, such as “mi” or “km”.

Perimeter( obj , str ) Returns the perimeter of the object. The str value specifies a distance unit name, such as “mi” or “km”. Only region, ellipse, and rectangle objects have non-zero perimeters.

Buffer( obj , num_res , num_width , str )

Returns a region object representing a buffer. num_res specifies the resolution, in terms of nodes per circle; num_width specifies the radius of the buffer; str is the name of the distance unit (e.g. ”mi” or ”km”) that applies to num_width.

Centroid( obj ) Returns a point object located at the centroid of obj.

CreateCircle( num_x, num_y, num_radius )

Returns a circle object. num_radius specifies a distance in miles.

CreateLine( num_x , num_y , num_x2 , num_y2 )

Returns a line object.

CreatePoint( num_x , num_y )

Returns a point object.


Functions

Querying Map Objects

Each of these functions returns a graphical object. If you type an Update command into the MapBasic window, you can use these functions to create objects for every row in your table. For example, if your table contains x1, y1, x2, and y2 columns, the following command creates a line object for every row in your table:

Update tablename Set Obj = CreateLine(x1, y1, x2, y2)

Caution: This Update command redefines every graphical object in your table. You may want to copy your table, and practice on a copy.

Area( ), Perimeter( ),Distance( ), ObjectLen( ), SphericalObjectLen( ), CartesianObjectLen( ), Overlap( ), AreaOverlap( ), ProportionOverlap( )

Return calculated values

ObjectGeography( ), MBR( ), ObjectNodeX( ), ObjectNodeY( ), Centroid( ), CentroidX( ), CentroidY(), ExtractNodes( ), IntersectNodes( )

Return coordinate values:

Set CoordSys( ), ChooseProjection$( ) Configure coordinate system

LabelFindByID( ), LabelFindFirst( ), LabelFindNext( ), Labelinfo( )

Query a map layer's labels


Geocode Command Table Menu


Use Geocode to:• assign point objects to rows in a table. Data in the record (i.e. street address, ZIP Code,

county, state) is used to match against a map (i.e. street map, ZIP Code map, country map, state map) to determine where the point for that record should be located.

Geocode is available when:• at least two tables are open (the table you are geocoding against and the table you are

geocoding)

and

• the table that you are geocoding against is mappable (graphic objects attached to records) and has an indexed field

and

• the table is not read-only.

Menu Path• Table > Geocode

GeocodingTo geocode a table:

1. Open at least one mappable table. This table serves as the reference data in the geocoding operation (a street map with addresses indexed).

2. Index this reference table on the field you use for geocoding.

There are options in File > New Table and Table > Maintenance > Table Structure that allow you to index the table and make it mappable.

3. Open the table for which points will be created. It must be a different table than the reference table.

4. Choose Table > Geocode. The Geocode dialog displays.



Geocode Dialog

Optional

Mode

Geocode table Choose the table to be geocoded.

using column Choose the column containing the location information (addresses, county names, ZIP Codes, etc.) that is the basis for the geocoding.

boundary column Choose a column from the target table that refines the geocoding to the relevant area (e.g., counties within a certain state, streets in a certain municipality, etc.). It is not necessary to include a boundary column when geocoding. Once this option functions in conjunction with the option to Refine Search With Table, you cannot pick it until you have picked a refining table. See the following: Refining the Geocoding Search.

Search table Choose the table that is the source of the geographic information.

For objects in column Choose the column containing the name of the geographic objects you want to geocode against.

Refine search with table

Choose a table containing region objects, Zip Codes, counties etc. See the following: Refining the Geocoding Search.

Using boundary name column

Choose the refining column.

Automatic Geocode without any intervention. See the following: Geocoding In Automatic Mode.



Geocode Options Dialog

Interactive Intervene to have items appropriately coded. You should first geocode a table in Automatic mode and then go though it again in Interactive mode. See the following: Geocoding In Interactive Mode.

Symbol box Click to activate the Symbol Style dialog to specify the symbol and its point size and color. Each point that is geocoded displays as this symbol when the layer is displayed.

OK Executes the geocoding.

Cancel Cancels the dialog options.

Options Click to display the Geocode Options dialog. This dialog contains various options used to refine the geocoding process. See the following: Geocoding Options Dialog. The default settings are chosen to give you the best results for most situations. For more information, see the MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding.




Display additional column

When geocoding in Interactive mode, it is often useful to view information other than the address being geocoded. You might, for example, want to see the company name while geocoding. You can choose a column to view by choosing one from the Display additional column list box.

Put Result Code in Column

When MapInfo geocodes, it generates a code for each record. Use this code to diagnose failures and to see what options MapInfo used to get matches. You can designate a column where MapInfo should place this code; this column should be a numeric field. You can then examine the codes and formulate a strategy for further geocoding. See Appendix B: Advanced Geocoding.

Skip records that already failed to geocode

When you are geocoding in interactive mode and have a lot of records, you may not be able to complete the job in a single session. When you come back in later sessions, you do not want to retry records that have failed. Check this box so that MapInfo skips those records. This option is available only when you use a result code column. MapInfo automatically skips records that have already been geocoded.

Offset Address Location

Back from street: Specify a distance and distance unit indicating how far back from the street to offset the address. Select the distance unit from the drop down list. The offset can range in whole numbers from 0 to 32,767.

Inset Address Location

Specify how far from the ends of the street to inset an address either as a percentage of the line or polyline on which the address is being interpolated or a designated distance.Percent from ends of street: Specify how far from the ends of the street as a percentage of the street. Percentage can range in whole numbers from 0 to 50.From ends of street: Specify a distance and distance unit from the ends of the street. Distance can range in whole numbers from 0 to 32,767.The last specified inset/offset option becomes the default settings for the next occurrence.Note: If you specify a street offset of a given distance and set the street inset to zero, you may get an unexpected, although correct, display result. Points located at the end of adjoining or intersecting street might overlap each other. On the screen they will look like they are located on the wrong street. If you specify a street inset, the problem is corrected.



When an exact match cannot be found

Refining the Geocoding SearchWhen geocoding, you might refer to objects whose names are used for other objects that do not interest you. (For example, a city name that is common to two or more states.) To eliminate this problem, refine the search by selecting another column, typically from another table. To further refine the search, specify the state for each city, rather than just the city name.

If your area of interest isn’t distinct enough for MapInfo to determine automatically the position or location, you will need to refine your geocode search by specifying a particular boundary that contains your area of interest. This will provide MapInfo with geographic locations on where to position your points.

Geocoding in Automatic ModeWhen Geocoding is in Automatic mode, only exact matches are geocoded. When some of your data fails to match exactly (due, perhaps, to typographical errors), you need to geocode in Interactive mode to match the near misses manually. It is generally best to do two passes through your table, with the first pass set on Automatic and the second pass set on Interactive. This approach takes less processing time.

To geocode in the automatic mode:

Choose Automatic from the First Geocode dialog

Automatic geocoding displays addresses while geocoding.

Try substitutions from “MAPINFOW.ABB”

Make substitutions from the abbreviation file. You can make several kinds of additions to this file to deal with various kinds of geocoding problems. See Appx. B: Advanced Geocoding.

Use the closest address number

Match an address number to the nearest address range in those cases where there is no range for the address, either because the address falls in a gap or is beyond the range. If a refining boundary has also been specified, MapInfo will find the closest address number within the specified refining boundary.

Use a match found in a different boundary

Use a different boundary to refine geocoding. MapInfo searches for a street name and address name first. Then it finds out what boundary the address is in. When it is in only one but not the one, you chose in the Refine option, MapInfo geocodes to that boundary. When it is in more than one boundary, but none of them are the ones you selected, MapInfo will not geocode the record.

OK Accept dialog options.





You can click cancel to interrupt processing. When processing is interrupted, MapInfo didn’t finish geocoding all records but you can still display the points that are geocoded. If you let MapInfo finish the process, you can click OK when it is done.

When MapInfo finishes geocoding, the results are displayed in a summary dialog.

When there are ungeocoded records, you need to geocode the remaining records interactively.

Geocoding in Interactive Mode When you choose Interactive geocoding, MapInfo displays the Interactive Geocode dialog.

Interactive Geocode Dialog

Allows you to manually match each address that could not be matched in automatic mode.

To manually pick the match:

Click a value in the list box (for example, “ADELE CT”), and click OK to match the target table’s field value (“ADELLE CT.” ) Note the two Ls.

This does not change the record in the table; it is used only to find a match.

To leave a record ungeocoded: click Ignore.

To cancel geocoding: click Cancel.

Use the Up and Down buttons to move in the list of source addresses.

First column name Enter target table’s field value. The name of the column that you specified in the first dialog is listed to the left of the box.

Second column name If you have used the Refine option in the first dialog, a second column name is listed in the dialog. Type the name of the refining boundary.

List box If MapInfo cannot find an exact match, it lists possible matches in this box. Click Up or Down to move to other pages. To choose a specific entry from the list, click on that entry.

Up/Down Scroll through the source table list to find a match.

Ignore Override the match suggested by MapInfo and continue geocoding.

OK Assigns the highlighted object and continues geocoding.

Cancel Cancels Geocoding.




Finding and Examining Ungeocoded RecordsOnce you have completed a geocoding session, you might want to find all the ungeocoded records and examine them to see what the problems are. Use Query > Select to do this.

When you do not have a column for result codes, you should select all records that meet this condition:

not obj

“Obj” (or “object”) is a keyword MapInfo uses to refer to a graphic object. Records that have been geocoded have an object, and therefore fail to meet this condition. Records that have not been geocoded meet the condition.

When you have specified a result code, select all records meeting this condition:

result_code < 0

See: User’s Guide: Appendix B

Create Points Command



Get Info Command Edit Menu

Get Info Command Edit Menu

Use Get Info to:• display the Object Attribute dialog for a selected object in a map and layout. Use the

Object Attribute dialog to view and change geographic and graphic attributes.

Get Info is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active

and

• one object is selected.

Menu Path• Edit > Get Info

or


Using Get InfoIf the selected object is editable, use the [Object Name] Object dialog to change the attributes. The options in the dialog are unique to the type of object selected. If you view or change the graphic attributes by choosing Style, you also set the “current style” which is used for creating new objects.

If the selected object is not editable, the [Object Name] Object dialog will not allow you to change any attributes.

See:New Map Window Command



Grabber Button Main Toolbar

Grabber Button Main Toolbar

Use the Grabber button to:• access the Grabber tool. Use the Grabber tool to reposition a map or layout within its

window.

The Grabber button is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Grabber button

Moving a Map or LayoutTo move a map or layout:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Grabber button. The cursor displays as a hand.

2. Click an area of the map or layout.

3. While holding down the mouse button, drag the map in the appropriate direction. When you release the mouse button, MapInfo redraws the map in its new location.

If the entire layout is visible in the window, the Grabber tool does not move the layout.

See:Change View Button/Command



Graph Select Button Main Toolbar

Graph Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Graph Select button to:• access the Graph Select tool. Use the Graph Select tool Select a record in a graph

window and the corresponding record in the mapper and browser are selected.

The Graph Select button is available when:• a graph window and a mapper or browser window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Graph Select button

Making a Selection Using the Graph Select Button1. Make the graph window active.

2. Click on a record in the graph window; the corresponding record in the mapper and browser are selected.

Click on a riser bar, pie wedge, line (depending on the graph type): the corresponding record in the map or browser is selected.



Hide MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar

Hide MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar

Hide MapBasic Window Command Options Menu

Use Hide MapBasic Window button and command to:• hide the MapBasic window.

Hide MapBasic Window is available when:• a MapBasic window displays.

Menu Path• Options > Hide MapBasic Window.

• Tools Toolbar >Hide MapBasic Window button.

Displaying or Hiding the MapBasic WindowTo hide the MapBasic window:

Choose Options > Hide MapBasic. The MapBasic Window displays or disap-pears.

See:Show MapBasic Window Button/Command


Hide Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar

Hide Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar

Hide Statistics Window Command Options Menu

Use Hide Statistics Window button and command to:• hide the Statistics window.

Hide Statistics Window is available when:• a Statistics window displays.

Menu Path• Options > Hide Statistics Window

or

• Main Toolbar > Hide Statistics button

Hiding the Statistics WindowTo hide Statistics:

Choose Options > Hide Statistics Window. The Statistics window disappears from your screen.

Close the Statistics window by choosing Options > Hide Statistics or clicking on the window’s Application Control icon.

See:Calculate Statistics Command

Show Statistics Window Button/Command


Hide StatusBar Command Options Menu

Hide StatusBar Command Options Menu

Use Hide StatusBar to:• hide the StatusBar.

Hide StatusBar is available when:• a StatusBar displays.

Menu Path• Options > Hide StatusBar

Hiding the StatusBarTo hide the StatusBar display:

Choose Options > Hide StatusBar. The StatusBar disappears.

See:Show StatusBar Command

StatusBar


Hide Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Hide Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Use Hide Theme Legend Window to:• hide the legends associated with thematic maps or graphs.

Hide Theme Legend Window is available when:• a Legend window displays.

Menu Path• Options > Hide Theme Legend Window

Hiding a LegendTo hide a legend:

1. Choose Options.

2. Choose Hide Theme Legend Window. The legend window disappears from the screen.

Close the Legend window by clicking on the window’s Application Control icon.

See:Create Thematic Map Command

Legend Button



HotLink Button Main Toolbar


Use the HotLink button to:• access the HotLink tool to launch URLs or files associated with active objects.

HotLink is available when:• a map object or label is linked to a file or Internet URL

Menu Path

Main Toolbar > Hot Link Tool

HotLink Tool Support in a Map WindowMake a map object active by linking it to a file name or URL. Use the HotLink tool to launch the file or URL associated with the active object by clicking on the map object or its label. HotLinks can be associated with a bitmap, a MapInfo workspace, a MapInfo table or MapBasic program, an executable or any type of file whose extension is associated with an application installed on your system.

Creating a HotLink1. Add HotLink data to your table. (see section below).

2. Display a map using the table(s) containing the HotLink.

3. Choose Map> Layer Control. Choose the Hot Link button and complete the HotLink Options dialog. See Layer Control and the HotLink Button

4. Access the HotLink button from the Main Toolbar. See Using the HotLink Button.

Adding HotLink Data to Your Table1. Open a table containing objects you want to HotLink.

2. Choose Table >Maintenance >Table Structure. Choose the table that will contain the HotLink.

3. Choose Add Field and add a character field with an appropriate size to contain the link text. Name the field as you choose.

4. Open the table in a Browser window.

5. Enter the appropriate text in this field. Any text that represents a URL or a filename that can be launched from the Windows Explorer is a valid link.



Layer Control and the HotLink ButtonTo access the HotLink Option in the Layer Control dialog:

1. Choose Map >Layer Control.

2. Highlight a layer and choose the HotLink button. The HotLink Options dialog displays. The HotLink button is disabled for thematic, grid, raster and cosmetic layers.

Filename Expression File locations are relative to table locationsChoose the field name you created to contain the HotLink data or enter a valid MapBasic expression.Check to prefix the table’s path to the file before the it is launched.

Activate On Labels: An object displays as active only if the HotLink Cursor passes over its label.Objects: An object displays as active only if the HotLink Cursor passes over an object.Labels and Objects: An object displays as active if the HotLink Cursor passes over either the object or its label.

Save Options to Table Metadata

Checking this saves the HotLink options to the Metadata in the TAB file. The options will be automatically restored next time you open the table.



HotLink Tool Support in the Browser Window

The HotLink Tool is available in a browser window when the table being browsed has HotLink options stored in its metadata. If one of the browser field’s expressions matches the HotLink Filename Expression, then the text in that browser field is underlined and the HotLink tool is enabled. Clicking with the HotLink Tool on the underlined text launches the URL or file specified by the text. You cannot edit data in the table while the HotLink Tool is enabled; you can move and resize browser fields.

If the HotLink FileName Expression is not a simple field name, create the HotLink browser field:

1. Choose Browse > Pick Fields. The Pick Fields dialog displays.

2. From the Fields in Table list, choose Expression. The Expression dialog displays.

3. Type HotLink Filename Expression in the Type an expression section. Choose OK.

4. Choose OK in the Pick Fields dialog. Text in the new field is underlined and the HotLink Tool is enabled.

Using the HotLink Tool Select the HotLink Button from the Main ToolBar; the button displays as a lightning bolt. As you move the cursor over the map, the cursor first displays as a pointing hand ; when the cursor passes over an active object, the hand holds a lightning bolt . The link associated with the active object displays in the Status Bar. Click to launch the link.

If multiple active objects exist at the point over which the cursor passes, the Status Bar displays the message: “Multiple active objects under cursor.” Click to display a popup list of the label expression of each object under the cursor. As you scroll through the list, the link associated with the object displays in the Status Bar. Choose the object whose link you want to launch.



Import Command Table Menu


Use Import to:• import vector (but not raster) graphics files.

Import is available when:• Import is always available.

Menu Path• Table > Import

Supported File Formats The following file formats are supported:

• MIF: (MapInfo Interchange Format): MapInfo’s data interchange format.

• DXF: The graphic/data interchange format for AutoCAD and other CAD packages.

• MBI: (MapInfo Boundary Interchange Format): An ASCII file for MapInfo DOS boundary files.

• MMI: (MapInfo Map Interchange Format): An interchange format for MapInfo DOS street maps.

• IMG: A file format for MapInfo for DOS image files.

• GML: OSGB (Ordance Survey of Great Britain) files.

MapInfo imports graphics and textual information from MapInfo Interchange Format, DXF, MBI, and MMI files. MapInfo imports only graphics from IMG.

MapInfo for DOS can produce ASCII files in MBI and MMI format. MBI format is used for importing and exporting boundaries (regions), while MMI format is used for importing street maps (lines). Image files are binary files containing various types of graphic objects. MapInfo can import these files directly.

Importing Graphics FilesTo import a graphic file:

Choose Table > Import. The Import File dialog displays.



Import File Dialog

Look in: Specify the file path.

File Name: Choose the file you want to import.

Files of Type: Choose the format of the file you are importing: MIF, DXF, MBI, MMI, IMG, GML.If you choose GML, the GML Import dialog displays. See Importing GML files. If you choose DXF, the DXF Import Information dialog displays. See the following: Importing DXF Files, the DXF File Format, and Using the DXF Dialog.

Open Display the Import into Table dialog. See the following: Import into Table Dialog.





Import into Table Dialog

MIF Import InformationMapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) is an ASCII file format that can fully describe a MapInfo table. Both graphic and tabular data are stored in MIF files. MIF files can be created by MAP2MIF, BDY2MIF, MapInfo, and other programs. You also can create your own MIF files in any ASCII text editor to import later into MapInfo. See the MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix J: MapInfo Data Interchange Format.

Importing a GML FileMapInfo Professional 7.0 supports importing OSGB (Ordnance Survey of Great Britain) GML files. Cartographic Symbol, Topographic Point, Topographic Line, Topographic Area and Boundary Line are supported; Cartographic Text is not supported. Topographic Area can be distributed in two forms; MapInfo supports the non-topological form. If the files contains XLINKS, MapInfo only imports attribute data, and does not import spatial objects. These XLINKS are stored in the GML file as "xlink:href=". If topological objects are included in the file, a warning displays indicating that spatial objects cannot be imported. Access the Browser view to see the display of attribute data.

To import a GML file:

Save in: Specify the file path.

File Name: Displays the name of the imported file with a .tab extension. You can change the file name.

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly. For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab

Save as Type: Choose MapInfo, MapInfo 2.x (save to MapInfo 2.0 or 2.1 format) or dBase DBF. When saving to dBase, the data file is saved to both DBF and MapInfo format. If you want only a DBF file, use the Export command (Table > Export)..

Save Save the table with the specified name and format in the specified path. If the file format is dBASE DBF, the dBASE DBF dialog displays. Specify the appropriate character set.

If the file format is AutoCAD DXF, the DXF Import Information dialog displays. See the following: Using the DXF Import Dialog.





1. Choose a GML file from the File of Type drop-down list.

2. The GML Import dialog displays; choose the layer to import. The Default Styles designated in Options > Preferences are used.

3. The Import into Table dialog displays. Accept the default name, or enter a new name.

4. Press Save to begin the Import process.

Importing DXF FilesMapInfo lets you import and export files with DXF (drawing interchange file) format. DXF is a format used by AutoCAD and other CAD packages. MapInfo can import both graphical and tabular information from DXF files.

MapInfo is completely compatible with DXF files specified by AutoCAD Release 10-13. For more recent versions, use the Universal Translator in the Tools menu.

Using DXF ImportFor information about the DXF file format, consult the appropriate section of the AutoCAD documentation.

DXF import works with a wide range of projections and coordinate systems. This simplifies the process of importing DXF maps, which use coordinate systems other than longitude/ latitude. In most cases it eliminates the need to set a transformation.

Set a transformation when you are importing a map created in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo or when you are importing a map whose coordinates are geographically meaningless. For example, if you are importing a map image from a drawing package, the image’s coordinates may have no relation to the earth’s coordinates.

Using the DXF Import DialogIf you are importing an AutoCAD DXF file, the DXF Import Information dialog displays when you press Save.

DXF Import Information Dialog



DXF Layers to import Choose which layers in the DXF file you want to import. Only entities on the selected layers will be imported.

Preserve blocks as multi-polygon regions

When checked, blocks of this type produce a single MapInfo object out of all the polygons in the block. When cleared, multiple objects are produced. Blocks can contain multiple objects, including multiple polygons. For example, a block for New York State might contain 2 polygons: one for the mainland, and one for Long Island.

Preserve attribute data

When checked, tabular information from DXF attributes are read into the table.

Create separate tables When checked, entities from different layers in the DXF file are imported into different MapInfo tables. Otherwise, a single MapInfo table is created. If a DXF file has a single layer, this checkbox is disabled.

DXF files usually contain conceptually different types of information. One layer might contain notes and labels, another might contain buildings, a third might contain streets, etc. In many cases, you may want to place these layers into different tables, especially when tabular data is involved. By doing so, you can turn on or off different MapInfo layers in maps.

Suppress Warning Messages

When checked, allows warning messages to be suppressed while importing a DXF file.

Projection The Projection button provides access to a dialog where you can specify the coordinate system the file will be imported to (earth or non-earth map). See the following: Choosing A Coordinate System for DXF Drawings.



Creating Separate TablesIf the Create separate tables checkbox is checked, the OK button is replaced by the Next>> button, and the following dialog appears, when the Next>> button is pressed:

Set Transformation Use the Set Transformation button to access the Set Coordinate Transformation dialog to enter a coordinate transformation. Two situations require a transformation to be designated: importing a map created in a coordinate system not supported by MapInfo. importing a map whose coordinates are geographically meaningless, e.g., a map image from a drawing package.See the following: Setting A Coordinate Transformation.

Options Use the Options button to access the DXF Data Storing Options dialog. Here you specify:-whether to import whole numbers as integers or decimals.-whether to import floating point numbers as floats or decimals.-whether to store handles.-whether to store elevation.-whether to store only visible objects.



Overwrite existing tables

When checked, newly created tables can overwrite existing tables without a warning message. This feature is convenient for importing a DXF file into a large number of MapInfo tables.

Use File Name As Prefix

When checked, several first characters from the DXF file name are used as first characters in the table name. The number of characters is specified by the pop-down menu to the right.

DXF Layer Name Displays a list of all selected layers and suggested names for corresponding tables. Only one layer can be selected at a time. Name of the table for the layer 0 is derived from up to seven first characters of the DXF file name, and a 0 appended at the end. Suggested names of all tables coincide with the up to eight first characters of the DXF layer name. More than one layer can be imported into the same table.

Preserve blocks as multi-polygon regions

Serves the same function as that on the previous dialog, but now it is applied only to a currently selected layer. Its initial value is that of the corresponding value on the previous dialog (see above).

Preserve attribute data

Serves the same function as that on the previous dialog, but now it is applied only to individual layers. Its initial value is that of the corresponding value on the previous dialog (see above).

Change table name Starts the Save file dialog for the name of a table to import to a selected layer.



Choosing a Coordinate System for DXF DrawingsChoose a coordinate system (earth or non-earth map) for DXF drawings. When you do not choose a coordinate system when importing graphic files MapInfo defaults to a non-earth map with units in either meters or feet depending on the setting designated in Option > Preferences > Map Window. The bounds of the map are the extents of the DXF drawing.

To choose a coordinate system:

• Click the Projection button (in the DXF Import Information dialog). The Choose Projection dialog displays. See Projection Button

AutoflipIf you have chosen a non-Earth coordinate system in the Projection dialog, the Flipping Geographic Data dialog displays. If Autoflip is activated, the x coordinates of the imported entities are flipped around the center line of the Map window.

Setting a Coordinate TransformationBecause CAD packages represent drawings in non-earth coordinates, all drawings imported or exported between MapInfo Professional and CAD suffer some distortion. This is the result of displaying non-earth information on a spherical coordinate system (like the globe). Coordinate conversions are used to assign longitude/latitude coordinates to CAD drawings that were created using non-earth coordinates. Conversions near the equator are more exact than conversions at the extremes of the hemispheres. To minimize distortion, import and export with no coordinate conversions and avoid translating maps that cover large areas.

How does MapInfo Professional treat coordinates?

MapInfo treats coordinates as specifying longitude and latitude on a sphere. In the Western hemisphere, X coordinates (longitude) increase to the left, rather than to the right, as in standard non-earth coordinates. A point on the left side of the map has a greater longitude than a point on the right side of the map.

In the Eastern hemisphere X increases to the right.

Latitude (the Y coordinate) increases in a downward direction for maps of areas south of the equator. For areas north of the equator, latitude increases as you move up. This corresponds to the way it works in non-earth coordinates.

How do CAD packages files treat coordinates?

Most CAD maps don’t use a longitude-latitude coordinate system. They usually use state plane coordinates or some other coordinate system. When the maps show floor plans, they often use a non-earth system (simple X and Y). Typically, coordinates in these systems increase to the right and up.

To set a coordinate transformation:

Click the Set Transformation button in the DXF Information dialog. The Set Coor-dinate Transformation dialog displays.



This dialog displays a pair of points, AutoCAD coordinates on the left and MapInfo coordinates on the right. When setting a transformation, you are choosing the two corresponding MapInfo longitude-latitude points to the two DXF points. When you use the extents of the DXF drawing (the default), you must enter the extents of the drawing in longitude-latitude coordinates for the MapInfo points.

When the DXF file contains a header section, the two DXF points are the lower-left and upper-right corners of the drawing (the extents). The default MapInfo points are the same as the DXF points. This default transformation translates the map coordinates into X-Y directly. For example, a point at 72.5 degrees west, 42.7 degrees north is translated into (72.5, 42.7).

It is not necessary to use extents. All you need are any two points of the drawing (preferably far apart for greater accuracy) in both coordinate systems: the DXF coordinate system, and longitude-latitude.

The diagram displays how coordinate transformations work. Two AutoCAD drawing points and two MapInfo Professional map points define the transformation. Any two points can be chosen, but the lower-left and upper-right extents of the drawing are often used. You must

know the coordinates of each point in both coordinate systems.



Importing DXF Attributes Into MapInfo Professional Some DXF files contain textual information associated with graphic objects. In DXF, this is done by creating a block that contains the graphic objects and the textual information, stored in “attributes”. This block is inserted into the drawing in one or more places, with possibly different data values in each case. There is no database structure imposed on attributes. For example, you might have two types of objects in the DXF file with the following attributes:

Pipes:WIDTH

TYPE (sewer, water, storm sewer)

MATERIAL

Streets:NAME

ADDRESS_RANGE

When MapInfo creates a tabular database from a DXF file, it must choose a database structure. All the records in a Table contain the same fields. MapInfo builds a database structure by scanning the entire DXF file for all attributes in the layers that are being imported, and creating a union of these fields. The data type of each field is determined by the contents of the attributes.

For example, when all attributes with a given name contain a number, the resulting MapInfo field is a numeric data type.

Using the example above, when pipes and streets are both imported into the same DXF file, the database structure is:

ADDRESS_RANGE

MATERIAL

NAME

TYPE

WIDTH

DXF files of well-designed drawings put objects of different types in different layers. The above DXF file contains 2 layers: pipes (containing all the pipes of the map) and streets (containing all the streets of the map). Run DXF Import twice, importing a different layer each time. This creates two MapInfo tables, one with the correct pipe structure, and one with the correct street structure.

When you place both layers of the sample DXF file into one MapInfo table, the records for the pipes have blank or zero values for the NAME and ADDRESS_RANGE fields. Also,WIDTH, TYPE, and MATERIAL are blank for the street records.

It takes much longer to import attributes from a DXF file into MapInfo than it does to import files with no attributes. The entities section of the DXF file must be read twice. We recommend that you run the import several times, checking to make sure that you are loading the correct layers and using the correct coordinate transformation, before importing the data attributes.



Importing Attributes with Nested BlocksIn the DXF file format, blocks can be nested. The following is the logical structure of our example nested block:

Block ALineAttribute STREETNAME = “Broadway”

Block BPointAttribute ADDRESS = “200”

Block CPolylineAttribute BUILDING_NAME = “Hendrick Hudson Building”

This block consists of a line, an attribute, and two blocks. One of these blocks is a point with the address of a building, the other is a polygon with the name of the building. If all of these blocks were on the same layer (they don’t have to be), the database structure is:

ADDRESSBUILDING_NAMESTREETNAME

Objects get the value of all attributes in their current block, and inherit attributes from their parent blocks. In this case, the database is:

It is better to put objects of different types in different layers; the difficulty is determining which layer names correspond to which type of objects.

See:User’s Guide: Appendix J, Export Command, Tools Menu, Universal Translator,Open Table Command

Object ADDRESS BUILDING_NAME STREETNAME

line 0 <blank> “Broadway”

point 200 <blank> “Broadway”

polygon 0 “Hendrick Hudson Building” “Broadway”


Info Button Main Toolbar


Use the Info button to:• access the Info tool. Use the Info tool to view tabular data associated with map objects.

The Info button is available when:• a Map or Browser window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Info button

Displaying Data with the Info ToolUse the Info tool to view the tabular data associated with a map object or browser record.

To use the Info tool:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Info button. The cursor displays as a cross when it in a map or browser.

2. Click on a map object or browser record from a selectable layer.

If a single object is selected, the Info Tool window displays.

Info Tool Window for a Single Object

When you click on a map object with the Info tool, an Info Tool window displays, showing all the data associated with that map object. Also listed is the table in which the information is stored. The number of items that display depends on the Zoom level.

If multiple, overlapping objects are selected, the Info Tool window for multiple objects displays.

Info Tool Window for Multiple Objects

If you click at a point where there is more than one object, the window displays a list of all objects under that point. The cursor displays as a hand in the window; choose one of the objects in the Info Tool window. At the bottom of the Info Tool window are forward and backward arrow buttons; use the forward and backwards arrows to scroll through the other object’s data. Use the List button to return to the list of objects in the Info Tool window.



Changing Table InformationYou can change information in a table through the Info tool; the table cannot be read-only. Position the cursor in the appropriate Info tool field and use basic text-editing techniques to change the information. Use File > Save to save the changes.

If you are working in a network environment, note that only one user can edit a MapInfo table at a time. An editing session begins when the first edit is made and ends when a Save or Revert is performed. Other users can view the table while editing is in progress; the edits will not be visible until the edits are saved.

See:Label Button



InfoTips

InfoTips

Use InfoTips to:• display the value of an object’s label expression in a ToolTip-like bubble.

InfoTips is available when:• the Select, Label or Info Tool cursor hovers over a map object.

Using InfoTipsWhen the cursor hovers over an object, InfoTips display the value of an object’s label expression. The object selected for an InfoTip is in the topmost selectable layer. The label expression can be defined in the Layer Control dialog; InfoTips can be multi-line. InfoTips are active by default.

To change the default status of InfoTips:

1. Choose Options > Preferences > Map Window.

2. Clear “Show InfoTips”.


Interleaved Line Styles

Interleaved Line Styles

Use Interleaved Line Styles to:• create the appearance of intersections on your maps for overlapping intersections and

lines.

Interleaved Line Styles is available:• for lines; polylines; arcs in the Map view only.

Menu Path• Options > Line Style

Using Interleaved Line Styles:

To use interleaved lines:

1. Select Options > Line Style. The Line Style dialog box displays.

2. If you select a line style that has ‘multiple passes’, the Interleaved check box is enabled. Check this box to use the interleave feature.

Note: The interleaved option is not enabled for solid lines.The interleaved option is not activated for borders.

If you apply the interleaved option in MapInfo Professional 4.5 and higher, and use the map in a previous version to 4.5, the line will display; the interleaving will not.

Only lines of the same style and color will be interleaved. Lines of the same style and color, but different width will be interleaved.

Interleaving only works for lines within a single layer. If two lines from different layers cross, they are not interleaved.

See:Line Style


Invert Selection Query Menu

Invert Selection Query Menu

Invert Selection Button Main Toolbar

Use Invert Selection to:• invert the current selection. For example, if you have selected New York State from a

map of eastern United States and choose Invert Selection, New York Sate will be unselected and all other states on the map will be selected.

Invert Selection is available:• when a selection has been made.

Menu Path• Query > Invert Selection

or

• Main ToolBar > Invert Selection Button

Using Invert Selection:To use Invert Selection:

1. Make a selection in a map or browser window.

2. Select Query > Invert Selection OR Main ToolBar > Invert Selection Button. The selection will be inverted.


Join Table > Update Column Dialog


Use the Join Button to:• access the Specify Join dialog. Use this dialog to specify a process when an autojoin

cannot be made. You also can override default field choices.

Join is available when:• at least two tables are open

and

• different tables have been chosen from the Update Column dialog Table to Update and Get Value from Table drop-down lists.

Menu Path• Table > Update Column > Join

Geographic and Descriptive JoinJoin allows you to join two tables. To do this, you must specify how to associate records in the two tables. For example, if you are shading STATES by the values in SALES you would want all Pennsylvania sales to be associated with Pennsylvania, all Maryland sales to be associated with Maryland, etc. To accomplish this task you could join by using the following:

• a common descriptive field

• a common geographic/graph area

In this case, the most likely descriptive field contains the state name or an abbreviation for the state name. The STATES table might have a field called State that contains the abbreviation of the state name, and the SALES table might have a field called State, which contains the state abbreviation. You could match the entries in these two fields so that information in the SALES State field is matched to the record having the same entry in the State field of the STATE table. For example, NY (sales) would be matched to NY (state), or PA (sales) would be matched to PA (state).

However, if both tables contain graphic information, you could specify a graphic match. For example, if you are a conservation official and you want to shade a map of COUNTIES according to the number of FIRES that occurred in the last year and the FIRES database has been geocoded. During a geographic join, the coordinates of each fire location would specify the county where the fire had occurred and would allow each fire record to be associated with the appropriate county.

If two tables do not share a common column, you may still be able to join the tables according to the order of the rows. If you know that the first row of one table corresponds to the first row of the other table, and that the nth row of the first table corresponds to the nth row of the second table, you can join the two tables by referring to a special column named RowID.



The RowID column contains an integer value representing the row number of each row in the table. The first row in any table has a RowID value of one, the second row has a RowID value of two, etc.

To join two tables so that the nth row of one table is matched to the nth row of another table, specify a Where Condition expression:

Where Condition: TABLE_1.RowID = TABLE_2.RowID

Using Automatic JoiningWhenever you specify a source table that is different from the target table in the Update Column dialog, MapInfo tries to determine how to join them. First, a join is attempted on the basis of tabular data. If that fails, a geographic join is attempted. If that fails, MapInfo indicates that autojoin failed.

The autojoin strategy works as follows:

• The two tables’ tabular data is compared. When matching data values are found, MapInfo assumes that it has found matching fields and uses those as the basis of the join. If a match is not produced, then:

• A graphic/geographic match is attempted. MapInfo attempts either to locate source objects within target objects or to locate target objects within source objects. If a match is not produced, then:

• MapInfo reports that autojoin failed. Click the Join button and use the Specify Join dialog to specify how to make the join.

Joining Tables by Using Descriptive CriteriaTo specify a join based on descriptive criteria:

1. Open at least two tables.

2. Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays.

3. Choose different tables for the Table to Update and Get Value From Table drop-down lists.

4. Click the Join button. The Specify Join Dialog displays.

If both tables can be mapped, the Specify Join dialog allows you to choose whether to make the join on a geographic basis or on a non-geographical attributes basis.

Click the radio button next to the Where drop-down list, or

If only one table can be mapped, specify the join in terms of non-geographical attributes.

5. Choose the match field in the source table from the where drop-down list.

6. Choose the match field in the target table from the matches drop-down list.

7. Click OK.



Specifying a Join Based on Geographic CriteriaTo specify a join based on geographic criteria:

1. Open at least two mappable tables.

2. Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays.

3. Choose different tables for the Table to Update and Get Value From Table drop-down lists.

4. Click the Join button. The Specify Join Dialog displays.

5. Click the radio button next to Where object from table.

6. Use the object table from drop-down list to choose between contains or is within, depending on the geographic relationship between objects in the two tables.

Polygons “contain” points, lines, or other polygons. Points, lines, and small polygons are “within” other (larger) polygons.

7. Click OK.

Using the Specify Join DialogSpecify Join Dialog (Geographic or Descriptive Join)

Join Dialog

See: Update Column Command

where Specify a join based on descriptive data.where from table Specify the match field in the source table.matches from table Specify the match field in the target table.where object from table Specify a join based on geographic data.Object from table Choose either contains or is within, depending on the geographic

relationship between objects in the two tables. Polygons “contain” points, lines, or other polygons. Points, lines, and small polygons are “within” other (larger) polygons.

OK Accept the dialog options.Cancel Cancel the join.Help Display appropriate Help topic.


Label Button Main Toolbar


Use the Label button to:• access the Label tool. Use the Label tool to label objects with information from the

related database.

The Label tool is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Label button

Using the Label ToolTo label a map object using the Label tool:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Label button.

2. Click on a map object. A label displays.

MapInfo labels objects with information from the first selectable layer, with label visibility enabled, according to the order in Layer Control. By default, labels are created for the objects in the first selectable layer. If layers overlap, press <Control> while using the Label tool to label an object in a selectable layer other than the first selectable layer. MapInfo ignores the first selectable layer and labels objects according to the next selectable layer. Continue to press <Control>while using the Label tool to cycle through the labels in the selectable layers.

Interactive labels take precedence over automatic labels. Therefore, if you are not allowing overlapping labels and a newly created interactive label will overlap an existing automatic label, the automatic label is “hidden” so the interactive label displays with no obstruction.

If the label visibility option in the Layer Control > Label dialog is turned off, a beep sounds when you attempt to use the Label tool.

If you plan to use the Pack Table feature, do so before entering labels using the Label tool.

The Label Button and the Layer Control DialogThe settings designated in the Label Options dialog in Map > Layer Control > Label, determine the font, text color, line style, anchor point and visibility of labels. These settings are used for labels created by the Automatic Labeling option found in Map > Layer Control > Label, and for labels created with the Label tool.



Editing a LabelEdit an individual label by accessing the Label Style dialog. The designations made in the Label Style dialog apply only to the single label being entered or edited; the designations made in the Label Options dialog apply to all labels in the specified layer.

When closing a table containing edited labels, you will be prompted to save or discard the labels. If you choose to save the labels, the Save workspace objects dialog displays.

To edit an individual label:

1. Double-click on the label with the Select tool, or select the label and press F7. The Label Style dialog displays. See Label Style Dialog.

2. Make the appropriate changes.

3. Choose OK.

Label Style Dialog

Font Click to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog.

Anchor Point Click an icon to select the label position relative to the label anchor. The diamond character represents the label anchor; the rectangle represents the label. The border of the selected box is bold.

Label Line Select a line type, or no line type to attach the label to the anchor point.

Rotation Angle Specify the angle at which the label should be rotated about the anchor point.

Offset Specify the number of points, a measurement of text size, the label should be placed from the anchor point.

Text Enter text (to 255 characters) to be used as the label.



Text Style Dialog

OK Create label using the above specifications.


Help Access Help topic.

Font Choose a font from the font drop-down list.

Choose a point size from the point size drop-down list.

Text Color Display the color palette; choose a text color.

Background

None Do not halo or box the text.

Halo Display the text outlined in a designated color.

Box Surround the text with a box in a designated color.

Effects

Color Display the color palette; select a color to halo or box the text.

Bold Check to display text in boldface.

Italic Check to display text in italic.

Underline Check to display text underlined.

All Caps Check to display text in all upper case letters.

Shadow Check to display a grey “drop” shadow under the text.

Expanded Check to insert double spaces between each letter in the text.



Removing a Label To remove one or more labels:

1. Use the Select tool to select the label or labels you want to remove.

2. Press <DELETE> or choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected labels.

Clear Custom LabelsTo remove all custom labels (labels created using the Label tool):

1. Choose Map > Clear Custom Labels

The prompt Clear all custom labels and revert to defaults displays.

2. Choose Discard to clear all custom labels.

Moving LabelsTo move a label:

1. Use the Select tool to choose the label(s) to be moved.

2. Drag the label to the new position and release.

Rotating a LabelTo rotate a label:

1. Use the Select tool to choose the label to be rotated.

2. Drag the label’s rotation handle, which displays at the lower right of the label, to the desired location and release.


Sample Displays sample text using the selected options.




Layer Control Button Main Toolbar


Layer Control Command Map Menu

Use the Layer Control Command and Button to:• access the Layer Control dialog.

Use the Layer Control dialog to:

• change display of map layers in the active window.

• determine which layers are displayed, editable, selectable, zoom layered.

• change the order of map layers.

• add or remove one or more layers from the active map.

• control labels.

• alter a thematic map.

Layer Control is Available When:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Map > Layer Control

or

• Main Toolbar > Layer Control button

or


About the Layer Control DialogThe Layer Control dialog controls how maps display. Some important information includes:

• The Layer Control dialog displays the list of layers in the current map window and indicates whether each is displayed, editable, selectable or labeled automatically.

• Layers include data tables, raster images, thematic maps and the cosmetic layer. Layers are stacked in a map window.

• The order of layers in the Layer Control dialog is the order of the layers in the map window. For example, when boundary layers are placed below point layers, the points remain visible. The cosmetic layer is always the topmost layer. Thematic layer names display indented and above their corresponding data layers. The grid thematic layer is independent of its base layer and can be re-ordered in the map window as a separate layer.

• To work with a layer, choose it by clicking on it. Control its settings by checking or clearing the appropriate box to make the layer display, editable, selectable, or label automatically. Each layer attribute has an accompanying ToolTip. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed.



• In addition to the check boxes, you can control the display, labeling, or thematic map characteristics of a layer through the Display, Label, and Thematic button options. You can also add or remove layers and change the order of layers with the remaining options in Layer Control.

To access the Layer Control dialog:

• Choose Map > Layer Control

or

• Choose Main Toolbar > Layer Control button

The Layer Control dialog displays:

Layer Control Dialog

Displays the layers in the current Map window.Indicates if the layer is displayed. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer, or layers, you want to display. The check box is always enabled and all layers, except the Cosmetic layer, can have their display turned on or off. The Cosmetic layer’s display is always on.Note: When changing the display of a layer that has thematic layers created from it, you will be prompted to change the display status of the thematic layers.

Layer visible



Layers

Indicates if the layer is editable. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer you want to make editable. Only one layer can be editable. Objects in an editable layer can be edited (moved, colored, deleted, reshaped, etc.). Objects are also drawn or pasted to the editable layer. Neither thematic nor raster layers can be edited. A layer must be displayed to be made editable.If the layer is a StreetInfo layer, you cannot check editable. See the User’s Guide for an explanation of SteetInfo editing.

Indicates if the layer is selectable. Check the box under this icon that corresponds to the layer, or layers, that you want to make selectable. Layers must be selectable if you want to choose or label objects or use the Info tool. A layer must be displayed to be made selectable. More than one layer may be selectable at the same time. You may, however, only select from one layer at a time.

Check to display the map labeled automatically with labels from the table column designated in the Label with section of the Label Options dialog.If the checkmark in the Auto Label checkbox is black, all labels for that layer will be visible. If it is red, then zoom labeling is in effect specifying that labels display only within a certain zoom range, and the layer is zoomed outside of the designated zoom range.

Display Displays the Display Options dialog. Use this dialog to specify display attributes for map layers.

Label Check to display the Label Options dialog. Option is not available when the selected layer is a thematic or raster layer. Use the Label Options dialog to specify label attributes for map layers.

Thematic Available only when the selected layer is a thematic map. Choose to display the Modify Thematic Layer dialog. Use this dialog to modify the attributes of a thematic map.

See: Modify Thematic Map.HotLink

Display the HotLink Option dialog; make map objects or labels active by linking them to files or Internet URLs. See HotLink Option Dialog.

Add Add one or more layers to the map. Choose from the displayed listbox of open tables.

Remove Remove one or more layers from the map.

Editable

Selectable

Automatic Labeling



Reorder

Using the Cosmetic LayerThe cosmetic layer is the topmost layer of a Map window. It contains graphic objects and can be used for drawing; it is always displayed. Use the Layer Control dialog to make the cosmetic layer editable or selectable. You can then make changes to objects you have created in this layer.

To make the cosmetic layer editable or selectable:

1. Choose Map > Layer Control.

2. Choose the cosmetic layer in the Layer Control dialog and check the editable and/or selectable box.

3. Choose editable to edit or draw on the cosmetic layer; choose selectable if you want to choose objects.

Objects created in the cosmetic layer are not saved when you close a map window. You must save them to an existing or new table.

To save objects created in the cosmetic layer:

1. Choose Map > Save Cosmetic Objects.

2. Specify whether you want to save them to an existing table or a new table.

Seamless Map LayersIn a seamless map, several tables of the same type can be combined and treated as a single table. In Layer Control, the seamless map is listed as a single layer. Layer Control functionality is active for the seamless layer with two exceptions: a seamless map layer cannot be made editable and you cannot use the Thematic Mapping feature. Seamless layers are created using the MapBasic program, seammgr.mbx, which creates and manages seamless tables. For complete information on creating and using seamless maps, see Chapter 7 of the User’s Guide.

Specifying Display Attributes for a Map LayerTo specify display attributes for a map layer:

1. Choose the layer from the Layer Control dialog.

2. Click the Display button.

or

Up Move one or more layers up.

Down Move one or more layers down.

OK Accept the dialog options; redraw the map(s) if necessary.




Double click on the layer name.

The Display Options dialog displays.

Display Options Dialog

Display Mode

Zoom Layering

Style Override Check to override the default style of a layer. The option is grayed if the selected layer is a layer of thematic shading, a raster image layer, or the cosmetic layer.

Style Button Enabled when Style Override option is checked. Displays the button appropriate to the object type contained in the selected layer; Region; Line; Symbol; Text. Click to display the corresponding dialog. See: Symbol Style, Region Style, Line Style and Text Style Buttons.

Display within zoom range

Check to activate zoom layering. Zoom layering allows you to set the minimum and maximum distances at which the selected layer will be visible. For example, if you only want to see particular streets on a map when you are closer than 3 miles, set the minimum zoom to 0 and the maximum to 3.All layers, except the Cosmetic layer, can be zoom-layered.

When changing the zoom-layered status of a layer that has thematic layers created from it, you will be prompted to change the zoom-layered status of the thematic layers.



LabelingA map can be labeled automatically or interactively. Maps display unlabeled. To label a map automatically, check the Auto Label checkbox, in the column designated by the Label icon, in the Layer Control dialog. The map will be labeled using information from the table associated with that layer.

To label a map interactively use the Label tool. The Label tool allows you to place individual labels on a map, either from the designated table column, or using text you enter. The Label Options, Label Style and Text Style dialogs allow extensive label customization.

Labels are part of the map layer in which they reside, and are always selectable and editable. Label location is based on the object’s centroid, and user designated specifications, including anchor point and offset. These specifications are set in the Label Options dialog. Label size remains constant; it does not change with either zoom or scale changes.

Use the Text Tool to add text to a map. See Text Tool for more information on this topic.

Automatic LabelingTo automatically label a layer in a map using information from that layer:


2. Choose the layer you want to label; check the Auto Label checkbox.

If the checkmark in the Auto Label checkbox is black, either zoom labeling is not in effect, or the settings allow display at the current zoom. If it is red, then zoom labeling is in effect specifying that labels display only within a certain zoom range, and the layer is zoomed outside of the designated zoom range.

3. Choose OK.

Min Zoom Specify the minimum distance at which the selected layer is visible.

Max Zoom Specify the maximum distance at which the selected layer is visible.

Show Line Direction Check to display the line direction in the layer. It may be helpful when using a street layer for addressing to determine which side of the street is the FromLeft, ToLeft, FromRight ToRight.

Show Nodes Check to display an object’s nodes when you are editing the layer.

Show Centroids Check to show the object’s centroid in the layer.A region’s centroid does not represent its center of mass. Instead, the centroid represents the location used for labeling (using the automatic labeling feature), geocoding, and placement of thematic pie and bar charts. If you edit a map in Reshape mode, you can reposition region centroids by dragging them.





The map redisplays with labels from the table column designated in the Label with section of the Label Options dialog.

Access the Label Options dialog to change the visibility, content, font, text color, line style, and position of labels.

The Label Options DialogThe Map > Layer Control >Label Options dialog determines the visibility, content, font, text color, line style, and anchor point of labels. These settings are used for both automatic and interactive labeling using the Label tool. When using the Label tool, the label is positioned at the place you designate by clicking the mouse button.

To access the Label Options dialog:


2. Click the Label button. The Label Options dialog displays.



Label Options Dialog

Label with: Choose the column that you want reflected in the label or choose Expression to create a customized label. Expression displays the Expression dialog. See the following: Creating Map Label Expressions. See Functions.

Visibility

On Check to allow display of labels.

Off Check to prevent display of labels.

Display within range Check to activate zoom labeling. Zoom labeling allows you to set the minimum and maximum distances at which the labels will be visible. For example, if you only want to see particular labels on a map when you are closer than 3 miles, set the minimum zoom to 0 and the maximum to 3.Label size does not change with zoom or scale changes.

Min Zoom Specify the minimum distance at which labels are visible.

Max Zoom Specify the maximum distance at which labels are visible.

Allow duplicate text Check to place the same label on a map more than once.



Allow overlapping text

Allow more than one object with the same text to be displayed.

Label Partial Objects Label polylines and objects even if the centroid is not within the window view.

Maximum labels Enter the maximum number of labels that will display; labels are selected from the designated table in the order in which they are entered in the table. For example, if the designated table is the States table, and you enter 10, the first ten states listed in the table, which are in view, will be labeled.

Styles

Text Style button Click the Text Style button to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog.

Label Lines Select a line type, or no line type, to attach the label to the anchor point.

None Do not display a line with the label.

Simple Create a callout by using a simple line that connects the label to the object’s centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created.

Arrow Create a callout by using an arrow line that connects the label to the object’s centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created.

Position


Rotate label with line Check to rotate text to run parallel with line segments. This setting is ignored for points regions.

Label Offset Designate number of points (a measurement of text size) label should be placed from the anchor point.






Text Style Dialog


Choose a point size from the point size drop-down list. The label point size remains at the specified size regardless of the zoom level.


Background





Effects













Editing a LabelEdit an individual label by accessing the Label Style dialog. The designations made in the Label Style dialog apply only to the single label being entered or edited; the designations made in the Label Options dialog apply to all labels in the specified layer.

When closing a table containing edited labels, you will be prompted to save or discard the labels. If you choose to save the labels, the Save workspace objects dialog displays.

To edit an individual label:

1. Double-click on the label with the Select tool, or select the label and press F7. The Label Style dialog displays.

2. Make the appropriate changes.

3. Choose OK.

Label Style Dialog

Font Click to display the Text Style dialog. See Text Style Dialog.


Label Line Select a line type, or no line type to attach the label to the anchor point.

Rotation Angle Specify the angle at which the label should be rotated about the anchor point.

Offset Specify the number of points, a measurement of text size, the label should be placed from the anchor point.

Text Enter text (to 255 characters) to be used as the label.

OK Create label using the above specifications.


Help Access Help topic.



Removing a Label To remove one or more labels:

1. Use the Select tool to select the label or labels you want to remove.

2. Press <DELETE> or choose Edit > Clear to remove the selected labels.

To remove all custom labels:

1. Choose Map > Clear Custom Labels

The prompt Clear all custom labels and revert to defaults displays.

2. Choose Discard to clear all custom labels.

Moving LabelsTo move a label:

1. Use the Select tool to choose the label(s) to be moved.

2. Drag the label to the new position and release.

Rotating a LabelTo rotate a label:

1. Use the Select tool to choose the label to be rotated.

2. Drag the label’s rotation handle, which displays at the lower right of the label, to the desired location and release.

Using Expressions to Create LabelsWrite an expression to customize the look and information of labels. Labels created with expressions will change to reflect changes in the expression.

To create a label expression:


2. Choose a layer (other than the cosmetic layer) from the Layer Control dialog.

3. Choose the Label button. The Label Options dialog displays.

4. From the Label with drop-down list, choose Expression. The Expression dialog displays; complete the dialog. See Expression Dialog.



Creating Map Label ExpressionsCreate custom label displays by building expressions. The following Expression 1 will display the label with the county name in proper form (that is, first letter uppercase, the rest lowercase) while Expression 2 specifies the county name to be all capital letters.

Expression 1:Proper$(County)

Expression 2:Upper$(County)

Expression 3 has specifies two columns; County and Population.

Expression 3:Proper$(County) + Chr$(13) + Str$(Population)

Use the Str$ function to convert the population value into a character string so that the string concatenation operator (+) can operate on it. “Chr$(13)” inserts a carriage return into the string, and breaks it into two lines. The following label is produced:

Cambria47,934

Expression 4 is like expression 3, except that it inserts a colon into the label.

Expression 4Proper$(County) +“:” + Chr$(13) + Str$(Population)

The following label is produced:

Cambria:47,934

Expressions 5 and 6 return the lowest address number and the highest address number, respectively, for street segments in a StreetInfo table.

Expression 5Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight)

Expression 6Maximum(ToLeft, ToRight)

Expression 7 creates a label containing the address range for a street segment.

Expression 7Str$(Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight)) +“ - ”+Str$(Maximum(ToLeft, ToRight))

A space, a dash, and a space are inserted between the two numbers.

Expression 8 creates a two-line label with the street name on the first line and the address range on the second line.

Expression 8Proper$(Street) +“:” + Chr$(13) + Str$(Minimum(FromLeft, FromRight))+“ - “+Str$(Maximum(ToLeft,

ToRight))

The following label is produced:

Van Antwerp Av:131 - 154



Thematic Maps as LayersIf you have created a thematic map, it is listed in Map > Layer Control as a separate layer. Thematic layer names display indented and above their corresponding data layers. You can modify the attributes of the thematic map.

A grid thematic layer will not be indented in the layer control dialog; a grid thematic layer is a read-only layer.

To modify the attributes of a thematic map:

1. Choose Map > Layer Control. The Layer Control dialog displays.

2. Choose the thematic layer.

3. Click the Thematic button, or double click on the Thematic layer. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Double-clicking is not available for the grid thematic layer.

4. Change the thematic settings, style, or legends from this dialog.

The availability of certain dialogs depends on the type of thematic map you are altering.

Reordering Map Layers The Layer list has multi-select capabilities. To change the order of one or more contiguous layers, hold down the Shift key, select the layers, and drag them up or down. To change the order of one or more layers that are out of sequence, hold down the Control key, select the layers, and drag them up or down.

As the layer(s) is being dragged, the snap marker appears to the immediate left of the listbox and the cursor changes. The snap marker acts as a place holder and indicates the location where the layer(s) will be inserted.

When you begin to drag the layers, the cursor changes shape to represent the number of layers being dragged. If you are dragging one layer, the cursor becomes an arrow icon with a single layer icon attached to the top. If you are dragging multiple layers, the arrow icon displays as a multi-layered icon. If you select layers that cannot be dragged or if you are attempting to insert layers where they cannot be inserted, the cursor displays as a circle with a line through it. To interrupt dragging of layers, press the space bar.

A selection of layers that is out of sequence will become contiguous upon insertion.

You can also use the Up or Down buttons to move one or more layers. You cannot reorder or remove the cosmetic layer; it will always be the top layer.

To reorder layers:

• Select one or more layers and drag it up or down.

• Choose one or more layers and click the Up button. The selected layer(s) will display above its current position.

• Choose one or more layers and click the Down button. The selected layer(s) will display below its current position.



Reordering Thematic LayersThematic layers always display directly above their main layer in the Layer list. To distinguish the thematic layers from the main layer, the thematic layer, except for grid layers, is indented.

Thematic layers always stay with their main layer. Dragging a main layer will automatically drag its thematic layer with it, even if its not selected. When selecting a main layer and a thematic layer that was created from a different main layer, the thematic layer’s main layer must also be selected to reorder it. For instance, Layer Main1 has two thematic layers, Theme1a and Theme1b. Layer Main2 has one thematic layer, Theme2a. If Layer Main1 and Theme2a are selected for reordering, Layer Main2 must also be selected.

You can move the main (base) layer of a grid theme map without moving the grid theme; once the grid is drawn it is separate from the main layer.

Selecting and dragging a thematic layer(s) will not move the main layer. Thematic layers that are based on the same main layer can be reordered among themselves, according to the following draw order ranking:

Theme layers can only be inserted amongst other theme layers that are of the same draw order ranking.

Draw order ranking is determined as follows:

• Pie and Bar charts and Graduated Symbol thematic layers hold the highest draw order ranking. They will always be the top thematic layer.

• Dot Density holds the next draw order ranking. These themes will always fall below Pie and Bar charts and Graduated Symbol themes.

• Ranged and Individual Value thematic layers hold the lowest draw order ranking. They will always be below Pie and Bar charts, Graduated Symbol, and Dot Density thematic layers.

• Grid themes rank lowest; they are placed below the layer from which they are created.



HotLink Option Dialog Make a map object active by linking it to a file name or URL. Use the HotLink tool to launch the file or URL associated with the active object by clicking on the map object or label. HotLinks can be associated with a bitmap, a MapInfo workspace, a MapInfo table or MapBasic program, an executable or any type of file whose extension is associated with an application installed on your system. See HotLink for complete information on creating and using the HotLink feature.

Adding Multiple LayersTo add multiple layers:


2. Select Layers > Add. The Add Layer dialog displays, showing a list of all tables currently open in MapInfo.

3. To add a contiguous block of layers, select the first layer, hold down the shift key, select the last layer, and click on OK.

Filename Expression Choose the field name you created to contain the HotLink data or enter a valid MapBasic expression.

File locations are relative to table locations

Check to prefix the table’s path to the file before the it is launched.

Activate On Labels: An object displays as active only if the HotLink Cursor passes over its label.Objects: An object displays as active only if the HotLink Cursor passes over an object.Labels and Objects: An object displays as active if the HotLink Cursor passes over either the object or its label.

Save Options to Table Metadata Checking this saves the HotLink options to the Metadata in the TAB file. The options will be automatically restored next time you open the table.



4. To add multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key, select the layers, and click on OK.

5. Selected layers will be added to the Layer Control listbox. Each layer will be ordered automatically according to the type of layer it is. For instance, layers with points are placed above layers with lines which are placed above layers with regions.

6. To deselect layers, hold down the control key, click on the layers, and click OK.

Removing Multiple LayersTo remove multiple layers:


2. To remove contiguous layers select the first layer, hold down the shift key and select the last layer, and click Remove.

3. To remove multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key, select the layers, and click Remove.

The Cosmetic layer cannot be removed. You cannot remove all of the map layers. There must always be at least one main layer displaying in the Layer list. Selecting all the map layers disables the Remove button.

Changing Attributes for Multiple LayersUsing the multi-select functionality, it is possible to change the attributes of multiple layers at once.

To change the visible attribute for multiple layers:

1. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or, to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers.

2. Click on a check box under the Visible icon (represented by an eye) for one of the layers.

3. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked and you have un-checked it, all layers will be un-checked. The attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.

The Cosmetic layer’s display status cannot be changed.

To change the Selectable attribute for multiple layers:

1. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or, to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers.

2. Select an enabled check box under the Selectable icon (represented by an arrow) for one of the layers.

3. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked, the attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.



To change the Automatic Labeling layer attribute for multiple layers:

1. Hold down the shift key and select a contiguous block of layers, or to select multiple layers that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select individual layers.

2. Select a check box under the Zoom-layer icon (represented by a series of boxes) for one of the layers.

3. All layers will be checked or, if the check box was already checked, the attribute for all the selected layers will be cleared.

The Cosmetic layer’s Zoom-layer status cannot be changed.

Note: MapInfo only allows one editable layer in a map.

See:Functions

HotLink

Label Button




Legend Button Main Toolbar

Legend Button Main Toolbar

Use the Legend Button to:• display the theme legend window associated with thematic maps or graphs.

The Legend Button is Available when:• The Legend button is always available.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Legend button

Displaying a Legend• Choose Main Toolbar > Legend button. The theme legend window associated

with the thematic map or graph legend displays.

Use the Legend Manager tool to embed the theme legend in a mapper.

See:Show/Hide Theme Legend Window

Tool Manager


Line Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Line Button to:• access the Line tool. Use the Line tool to draw straight lines.

The Line Button is Available when:• a Layout window is active

or

• a Map window with an editable layer is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Line button

Drawing Straight LinesTo draw a straight line:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Line button.

2. Move the pointer where you want to begin drawing the line.

3. Click and hold down the mouse button, and drag the pointer. The line appears on the screen and changes length as you move the pointer.


Press <SHIFT> while drawing a line to constrain the line to horizontal, vertical, or 45-degree diagonal.

Specifying Line Object AttributesTo specify line object attributes:

1. Select a line.


or

Double-click on a line with the Select tool.

The Line Object dialog displays.



Line Object Dialog

See:


Start Point X Y Displays the current X and Y coordinate values. To change the Start Point, enter new values.

End Point X Y Displays the current X and Y coordinate values. To change the End Point, enter new values.

Length Displays the length of the line. To change the line length, enter a new value.

Style Display the Line Style dialog. Choose the style, color and width of the line. See Line Style Button.





Line Style Button Drawing Toolbar


Line Style Command Options Menu

Use the Line Style Button and Command to:• specify line attributes (type, color and width) for new or selected lines.

Line Style is Available when:• Line Style is always available.

Menu Path• Options > Line Style

or

• Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button

Using Line Style Use Line Style to set the type, size and color of lines you create, or change the attributes of existing lines. The lines must reside in an editable layer. To change the attributes of other types of objects, see Region Style Button, Symbol Style Button and Text Style Button.

Setting Style for New LinesTo set the line style for new lines:

1. Make the layer where the lines are to be created editable.

2. Choose Options > Line Style

or

Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button.

The Line Style dialog displays.



Line Style Dialog

Style Choose a type of line from the drop-down list.

Color Display the color palette, and choose a color for the symbol.

Width Choose the line width:Pixels: Enter a number from 1-7, each number represents a line width in pixels.Points: Select a point size from the drop-down list, or enter a point size.

Interleaved If you select a line style that has multiple passes, the Interleaved check box is enabled. Check the Interleaved check box to use the interleave feature.Notes:The Interleaved option is not enabled for solid lines.The Interleaved option is not activated for borders.The Interleaved option is not appropriate for all multiple pass lines; if you activate the Interleaved option in this instance, it may not appear as interleaved.

Sample Displays a sample of the line.

Cancel Cancel the operation.

OK Apply the selections. Sets style for new lines and changes the style of any selected lines.




Changing Line StyleTo change the style of existing lines:

1. Make the layer where the lines reside editable.

2. Select one or more line or polyline objects on the map.

3. Choose Options > Line Style

or

Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button.

The Line Style dialog displays.

4. Choose the appropriate options. See the preceding: Line Style Dialog.

5. Choose OK. The line attributes change according to the dialog selections.

Note to Pen Plotter UsersDepending on what device driver you are using, you may see unsatisfactory results using a pen plotter to output certain line styles. In the Line Style dialog, the list of available styles ends with several styles that may not plot properly.



Line Width

Line Width

Use Line Width to:• designate the thickness of lines.

Line Width is available for:• line style width

• region style border width

• label lines

• highlight style for selected and target lines

Menu Path• Options > Line Style > Width

• Options > Region Style > Width

or

• Drawing Toolbar > Line Style button

• Drawing Toolbar > Region Style button

• Options > Preferences > Map Window > Highlight Control > Selected Objects

• Options > Preferences > Map Window > Highlight Control > Target Objects

Using Line WidthLine width can be designated in pixels or points. In MapInfo versions prior to MapInfo Professional 4.5, only the pixel option was available; the line widths that display in the drop-down list in the width option are measured in on-screen pixels. When printing the map, an approximation of line width is made. This is printer DPI dependent.

The line width option, Points, allows you to designate accurate line widths using point size. In addition to providing accurate scaling during printing, this option allows for thicker lines than previously available.


Line Width

To select a line width:

Choose Options > Line Style.

A table/workspace that has line widths designated in point size cannot be opened in versions of MapInfo prior to MapInfo Professional 4.5.

See:Line Style Button, Interleaved Line Styles

Region Style Button

Style Choose a type of line from the drop-down list.

Color Display the color palette, and choose a color for the symbol.

Width Pixels: Select a width, in pixels, from the drop-down list. Points: Select a point size from the drop-down list, or enter a point size.

Interleaved If you select a line style that has multiple passes, the Interleaved check box is enabled. Check the Interleaved check box to use the interleave feature.Notes:The Interleaved option is not enabled for solid lines.The Interleaved option is not activated for borders.The Interleaved option is not appropriate for all multiple pass lines; if you activate the Interleaved option in this instance, it may not appear as interleaved.

Sample Displays a sample of the line.


OK Apply the selections. Sets style for new lines and changes the style of any selected lines.


Main Toolbar

Main Toolbar

Use the Main Toolbar to:• choose tools, access dialogs, and show or hide windows.

The Main Toolbar is available when:• a Map, Layout or Browser window is active

and

• the Options > Toolbar dialog is set to display the Main Toolbar.

Using the Main ToolbarFor an on-screen button description, click and hold the mouse button down to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar, and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars.

To choose from the Main Toolbar:


The Main Toolbar contains tools to select objects, change the view of the map window, get information about an object and to show distances between objects. It also contains command buttons that allow you to change layer attributes and open a legend or statistics window.

Change View button Access the Change View dialog to specify settings for map window width, map scale, resizing and centering.

Grabber button Access the Grabber tool to reposition a map or layout within its window.

HotLink button Access the HotLink tool to indicate an active map object is linked to a file or Internet URL.

Info button Access the Info tool to view the tabular data that is associated with a map object.

Label button Access the Label tool to label objects with information from the related database.

Layer Control button Access the Layer Control dialog to specify how the various tables in a map window are layered and displayed.

Legend button Access the Legend window for maps or graphs.


Main Toolbar

Marquee Select button Access the Marquee Select tool to select and search for map objects within a given rectangle (marquee box).

Boundary Select button Access the Boundary Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a given region.

Radius Select button Access the Radius Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a circular region.

Ruler button Access the Ruler tool to determine the distance between two points and the length of some path.

Assign Selected Objects button Assign selected objects to the target district during a Redistricting session.

Set Target District from Map button

Set the target district from the map during a Redistricting session.

Select button Access the Select tool to select objects/records in a map, layout or Browser window. Also acts as the default pointer/cursor tool.

Statistics button Access the Statistics window so you can tally the sum and average of all numeric fields for the currently chosen objects or records.

Zoom-in button Access the Zoom-in tool to obtain a closer area view of a map or layout.

Zoom-out buttonAccess the Zoom-out tool to obtain a wider area view of a map or layout.

Set Clip Region button Access the Set Clip Region button to isolate a map region for display.

Clip Region On/Off button Access the Clip Region On/Off button to redisplay the entire map.

Drag Map Window Button Access the Drag Map Window button to drag a MapInfo map into an OLE container application.

Polygon Selection Tool Access the Polygon Selection tool define a polygon and perform a selection within that polygon region.

Unselect All Tool Access the Unselect All tool to unselect all selections.


Main Toolbar


See:Toolbars Command


Graph Select Tool Access the Graph Select tool to select a record in a graph and the corresponding record in the mapper and browser.


Make DBMS Table Mappable Command Table > Maintenance


Use Make DBMS Table Mappable to:• make a remote database table mappable.

Make DBMS Table Mappable is available when:• a connection to a database exists.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Make DBMS Table Mappable

OR

• DBMS Toolbar > Make DBMS Table Mappable Button

Using Make DBMS Table MappableThe Make DBMS Table Mappable command makes a remote database table mappable. Any DBMS table may be displayed in a Browser, but only a mappable table may have graphical objects attached. Only mappable tables may be displayed in Map windows.

To make an DBMS table mappable:

Choose Table > Maintenance > Make DBMS Table Mappable from the menu or

the Make DBMS Table Mappable Button. The Open dialog displays: select an DBMS table to make mappable.

Select DBMS Dialog



Once you have selected an DBMS Table to make mappable, the following dialog appears:

Make DBMS Table Mappable Dialog

Connection Type This is either ODBC or Oracle for Oracle Spatial.







File name: Type or select the filename you want to make mappable.

MapInfo Professional supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly.For example you can name a table as follows: \\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab


Database Highlight the name of the table you want to select to make mappable.

OK Selects the table to make mappable and brings up the Make DBMS Table dialog.

Cancel Cancels the selection.

Help Access online help.



Index Type The spatial index type of the column that has the spatial information in the DBMS table. The spatial index provides a fast way for MapInfo to access the spatial data in the table. The types to choose from are Oracle SDO, MapInfo, and XY Coordinates, Spatialware,IUS_SW, IUS_MN_SW, IUS_MM_XY, DB2.SW, ORA_SP.

Index Column Select the name of the spatial columns.

X Coordinate, Y Coordinate

Required only if you selected the MapInfo or XY coordinate index type. Select the X and Y columns that contain the point data you wish to map.

Object Type Select the object type consistent with objects stored in the DBMS table.-all-indicates the table may contain points, lines or regions- point - indicates the table only can contain point objects- linear - indicates the table can only contain lines and polylines - region - indicates the table can only contain region objects

Per Row Style Check to enable Per Row Style. See Using Per Row Styles.

Style Column Choose the column for the styles attribute. Only columns that are character or varchar columns are available.This option is only available when the MapCatalog has the structure to support styles: it must contain the columns RENDITIONTYPE, RENDITIONCOLUMN, and RENDITIONTABLE.

Object Style Select one or more styles consistent with the object types that the mappable table can contain. You can set the default style that the objects will use for display when they are downloaded.



Using Per Row StylesPer Row Styles allows the use of different object styles on a remote database. You can modify the styles individual or groups of objects and save the styles to a DBMS table.

To use Per Row Styles, the DBMS table must be set up correctly:

• The MapCatalog must contain the new columns, which control the use of styles. They are RENDITIONTYPE, RENDITIONCOLUMN, and RENDITIONTABLE. If you have created the MapCatalog with EasyLoader version 6.6 or later this will have been done for you. If you have a pre-v 6.6 version of the MapCatalog, there is a script provided that will alter the definition of the MapCatalog to include these columns. Adding these new columns will not cause problems for older version of MapInfo Professional, MapX, or MapXtreme.

• The map table itself must have a character column wide enough to store the complete style string. Style strings vary in width. We recommend a minimum of 50 characters be provided. If you plan to use custom symbols, which use much longer strings, allow 200 characters.

• The entry for the table in the MapCatalog must be set correctly. This means that the RENDITIONTYPE is 1, and the RENDITIONCOLUMN contains the name of the column that will contain the style string. This entry is set by EasyLoader 6.6 or later if the MapCatalog contains the new columns, or it may be set using the Make Table Mappable function.

See: Save Table Command, Unlink DBMS Table Command, Open DBMS Table Command

Symbol Displays the Symbol Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the point data.

Line Displays the Line Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the line data.

Region Displays the Region Style dialog where you can select a default symbol for the region data.

OK Make the DBMS table mappable with the chosen spatial data.



Projection Activates the Choose Projection dialog. Specify the projection for the DBMS table. The projection must match the projection used by the corresponding remote database table. For information on the Choose Projection dialog, see “Projection Button.”


MapInfo Help Topics

MapInfo Help Topics

Use MapInfo Help Topics to:• access Help topics using the Contents, Index or Find categories. Additionally, display

MapInfo Home Page on the Web, MapInfo Data Products on the Web and MapInfo Data and Solutions for Europe, as well as checking for, and downloading updates to your current product.

MapInfo Help Topics is available when:• MapInfo Help Topics is always available.

Menu Path• Help > MapInfo Help Topics

Using MapInfo Help TopicsMapInfo’s comprehensive online help provides step-by-step directions on using MapInfo features, as well as overviews of MapInfo’s functionality. Click the Index tab to display an index of topics; enter the topic name in the search box, and the topic title displays. Click the Find tab to activate the Find Wizard which allows you to search for specific phrases, rather than topic titles.

If you are connected to the web, select MapInfo on the Web, MapInfo Data Products on the Web, MapInfo Data and Solutions for Europe, and Check for Update to display the appropriate web page.


Marquee Select Button Main Toolbar

Marquee Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Marquee Select Button to:• access the Marquee Select tool. Use the Marquee Select tool to search for and choose

objects within a given rectangle.

The Marquee Select Button is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Marquee Select button

Searching for Objects Within a RectangleTo search for objects in a rectangular shaped area:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Marquee Select button. The cursor displays as a pointing hand when in a Map or Layout window.

2. Position the cursor at one corner of the area from which the selection will be made and press the mouse button.

3. Keep the mouse button depressed and drag the cursor away from the starting point; a dotted rectangle or marquee box forms, indicating the area chosen.

4. Release the mouse button when the rectangle reaches the appropriate size. The objects in the topmost selectable layer within the rectangle are selected.

To select objects from another layer, you must turn off selectable in Layer Control for the upper layers. Only objects from one layer at a time are selected.

Adding Objects to the Selection SetPress <SHIFT> while using the Marquee Select tool to add newly selected objects to the previous selection.



Modify Image Registration Command Table > Raster Menu

Modify Image Registration Command Table > Raster Menu

Use Modify Image Registration to:• add or edit the control points used to register a raster image.

Modify Image Registration is Available when:• a raster image is open.

Menu Path• Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration

Modifying the Register Raster Image DialogTo access the Register Raster Image dialog for modification:

Choose Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration.

or

1. Choose File > Open Table.

2. Choose Raster Image from the File Format drop-down list.

3. Choose a raster image and choose Open.

The Display/Register Raster Image dialog displays.

4. Select Register.

5. Modify the dialog options.

See:Register Raster Image Command



Modify Thematic Map

Modify Thematic Map

Use Modify Thematic Map to:• modify an existing thematic map.

Modify Thematic Map is Available when:• a Map window is active

and

• at least one thematic layer is in the Map window.

Menu Path• Map > Modify Thematic Map

Modifying a Thematic MapModify a thematic map by:

• choosing Map > Modify Thematic Map

• double clicking the appropriate legend in the Legend window

• clicking the Thematic button in the Layer Control dialog

Modifying a Thematic Map by Using the Map Menu To modify a thematic map:

1. Make the window that contains the thematic map active.

2. Choose Map > Modify Thematic Map.

If there is more than one thematic layer in the active map window, the Modify Thematic Map dialog displays: choose the layer to be modified. Choose Modify.

The Modify Thematic Map dialog displays.


Modify Thematic Map

Preview Display the legend of the thematic map you are modifying.

Legend Label Order Determine the order in which range labels (for ranged and individual values maps) and labels (for all other thematic maps) appear in the legend. If you are modifying a ranged map, the order you specify is also shown in the Styles dialog.

Ascending Ranges display from lowest to highest value.

Descending Ranges display from highest to lowest value.

Customize The buttons that correspond to the type of thematic map you are modifying display.

Ranges Customize ranges on a ranged map; option is only available for ranged maps.


Modify Thematic Map

If the map is a grid thematic the Grid Appearance dialog displays when the Styles option is selected.

Settings Customize the settings on a dot density map; option is only available for graduated symbols, dot density and grid maps.

In a grid map, display the IDW Interpolator Settings dialog. Cell Size: Defines the width and height of a grid cell in distance units. Grid cells are square so both width and height are specified with one value. Note that when you change the cell size, the Grid Dimensions Control is updated to reflect the new dimensions.Exponent: Defines the exponential influence of nearby data points on the value calculated for each grid cell. Increasing the exponent decreases the influence of data points the further they are from a grid cell.Search Radius: Defines the maximum distance in grid cells between a grid cell and its neighboring data points. This distance determines if these points are considered in the distance weighting average.Grid Border: Defines the distance beyond the source table’s bounding rectangle by which to expand the resultant grid.

Aggregate Coincident Points By: Choose how to aggregate the z-values of source data points that occupy the same grid cell. The values can be counted, averaged, summed. Additionally the minimum or maximum can be used.

Interpolator MapInfo Professional offers two methods method of interpolation: TIN (Triangulated Irregular Network) and IDW (Inverse Distance Weighting. The interpolator produces a raster grid file which displays as a raster table in a map window.


Modify Thematic Map

Styles Customize style attributes such as color and size; option is available for ranged, graduated symbol, pie charts, bar charts, grid and individual value maps.For grid themes, the Grid Appearance dialog displays. A preview of the inflection points, the color spectrum bar, and relief shading options display. Method: There are four different methods that determine where inflection values occur. Select the method for distributing inflections. Equal Cell count and Custom Cell Count are based on percentages. Equal Value Ranges and Custom Value Ranges are based on values.

Equal Cell Count: Sets the inflections so that approximately an equal number of grid cells falls between each inflection value. Inflection breaks can be expressed as a percentage of the whole. When the grid cells are interpolated, these percentages can are converted to actual values. If the inflection spread is based on cell count (equal or custom), you will see percentages in the inflection listview and in the preview legends. You won’t see the actual values until the grid is actually computed. When the spread method is based on cell count, anytime you change an interpolator parameter or choose to use a different interpolator for an existing grid theme, you will see percentages in the preview legend. Changing the number of inflection values in the combo box will respread the cell count percentages. So, if the number of inflections changes from 4 (with equal cell count having set the percentages to 0%, 33%, 67%, and 100%) to 6, the percentages would be 0%, 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, and 100%. Equal Value Ranges: The equal range method spreads the inflections evenly between the minimum and maximum of the source data range.Custom Cell Count: Choose this method when you want to specify your own percentages.Custom Value Ranges: Choose this method when you want to specify your own values. Number of inflections: Select from a list of 2 to 16 inflections or type a number between 2 and 255.Round: Choose from a list of rounding factors to be applied to inflection values. You may not see the effects of this rounding if the spread method is based on cell count until inflection values are actually calculated.


Modify Thematic Map

Inflection Color/Value List

Control color, percentage/value inflection pairs. Items in the list are sorted by percentage/value. Edit the inflection percentages/values by single or double clicking on them with the left mouse button; edit a value by typing over it. Double click on a color swatch to display the color picker dialog and change the color. If you edit a percentage while the method is equal cell count, the method becomes custom cell count. If you edit a value while the method is equal value ranges, the method becomes custom value ranges. The vertical bar to the right of the listview control shows the spectrum of colors used in the grid.Default Colors for New Inflections When you increase the number of inflections, MapInfo Professional chooses default colors for those new inflections. It keeps the last inflection color the same but inserts new colors that fall between the new last color and the one before it.

Color Adjustment Contrast: Slide the bar between 0 and 100% to set the grid’s contrast level. Brightness: Slide the bar between 0 and 100% to set the grid’s brightness level.

Flip Colors Click this button to invert the inflection colors.

Gray Scale Check to show only gray scale colors in the grid.

Relief Shading Shaded relief maps are grid maps whose grid cell colors have had their brightness adjusted to indicate surface slope and slope direction relative to a user-defined light source direction. MapInfo Professional determines the orientation of each cell in the grid, and assigns a brightness to each grid cell.

Brightness Brightness or reflectance values correspond to light striking the surface. The light source can be thought of as the sun shining on a topographic surface. The maximum brightness is assigned at points where the rays are perpendicular to the surface (where the slope directly faces the light source). As slope faces turn away from the light source, lower reflectance values are assigned.

Light Source The Light Source options let you specify the orientation of the light source. Check to activate relief shading and/or generate relief shading information in the grid.

Horizontal Angle Rotate the light source in the horizontal plane. Zero degrees corresponds to the light source shining from due East. Positive angles rotate the light source counterclockwise, so, for example, 90 degrees places the light source due North.

Vertical Angle Rotate the light source in the vertical plane. Zero degrees places the light source at the horizon, and 90 degrees places it directly overhead. Specify angles between 180 and 360 degrees to have the light source originate from under the surface.


Modify Thematic Map

Modifying a Thematic Map by Using the Legend WindowTo modify a thematic map:

1. Double click on the legend entry of the thematic layer you wish to modify. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Use this dialog to make changes to the map or legend. See the preceding: Modify Thematic Layer Dialog.

2. Choose OK. The map is modified according to the specifications.

Vertical Scale Factor Specify a scale factor for the z values. Increasing this scale factor exaggerates the surface vertically, enhancing the shading effect. This can be useful for enhancing detail in relatively flat surfaces.

Template

Save As Displays the Save Theme to a Template dialog. Type a unique name or select an existing name and overwrite it. If you overwrite an existing template, you will be asked to confirm this action.

Save Customized Legend Text: Enabled when a legend’s text has been changed. Choose to save the customized text.

Save Individual Values Categories: Enabled for individual value themes. Choose to save individual category names with their corresponding styles.

If you have created a grid thematic map, the Grid Theme Options display:Save Inflection Values: select to store the actual values for the inflection points in the template.Save Inflection Percentage: Save the percentiles and calculate the actual values from the minimum and maximum of the data source table.

Merge Select this option to display the Merge Template dialog. This dialog displays only themes of the same type as the theme you are merging. The Merge button is enabled only when you are modifying an existing theme, not when you are creating a theme.


Cancel Cancel the dialog option.

OK Modify the thematic map based on the specified changes you made.


Modify Thematic Map

Modifying a Thematic Map Using the Layer Control DialogTo modify a thematic map:

1. Choose Map > Layer Control or click the Layer Control button in the Main ToolBar. The Layer Control dialog displays. You can also press Ctrl/L to display the Layer Control dialog.

2. Choose a thematic layer in the Layer Control list box.

3. Choose Thematic. The Modify Thematic Layer dialog displays. Use this dialog to make changes to the map or legend. See the preceding: Modify Thematic Layer Dialog.

4. Choose OK to exit from the Layer Control dialog.

See:Create Thematic Map, Layer Control Button/Command, User’s Guide: Chapter 11


New Browser Window Command Window Menu


Use New Browser Window to:• display and manipulate data in tabular format.

New Browser Window is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• Window > New Browser Window

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Browser button

The Browser WindowIf you have worked with spreadsheets or databases, you are probably familiar with the Browser format. Each row of the table contains one record, and each column in the record contains information about a particular field.

Components of the Browser Window

• table name: displays in the title bar.

• column titles: displays beneath the title bar.

• check box: click to select the row.

• StatusBar: displays how many records are in the table and which of those records are currently displayed in the Browser window.

Displaying Data in Table FormTo display an open table in a Browser window:

Choose Window > New Browser Window.

If only one table is open, that table displays in a Browser window.

If more than one table is open, the New Browser Window dialog displays.

Choose a table from the Browse Tables list box. Choose OK.

The table displays in a Browser window.



A Browser Window

The Browse menu option displays in the main menu bar. The Browse menu contains menu options used with Browser windows and is active whenever a Browser window is the active window.

Opening Multiple BrowsersTo open multiple browsers:

1. Choose Window > New Browser Window. The Browse Table dialog appears.

2. To open a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want to open.

To open multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables.

3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the table names.

Adding and Editing Text in a Browser WindowWhen you move the cursor into the Browse window, it turns into an I beam. This indicates that you are ready to perform editing functions.

To add and edit text in a Browser window:

1. Move the I beam to the row you want to edit.

2. Click on the row. A blinking cursor displays.

3. Position the cursor at the point where you want to enter text.

4. Click on the location and type the text.

The text displays at the flashing cursor.

Press <TAB> to move to the next column.

Press <SHIFT> <TAB> to move to the previous column.

5. Use File > Save Table to save the changes.



Choosing Text StyleUse the Text Style dialog to change the font, text color, background, and attributes of the text for the entire table.

To access the Text Style dialog:

• Choose Options > Text Style.

Scrolling Through a TableA Browser window allows you to view tabular data in a table. Use the vertical scroll bar to view various ranges of records. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see different sets of columns.

Moving a ColumnSometimes the default order of columns in a table is not the order you want for a particular session. You may want to change the default order, but not change the structure of the underlying table.

To move a column:

1. Move the cursor over the column name. The cursor displays as a hand.

2. Click and drag the column heading left or right.

3. Release the mouse button; the column is moved.

Displaying a FieldUse Browse > Pick Fields to choose which fields are displayed in the active Browser window. You can also rename a column, create a new column, or edit an existing column for display in the Browser window.

A column you modify or create is, by default, for display purposes only, and is not saved with the Browser window. To save a column that has been modified or created, use SQL Select or Update Columns. See Pick Fields Command.



Resizing a ColumnResizing a column allows you to make it wider or narrower to accommodate text in a Browser window.

To resize a column:

1. Move the cursor over a column divider in the Browser window.

The cursor becomes a vertical bar with left and right arrows.

2. Click and hold the mouse button. Move the cursor left to narrow the column width, or right to widen it. Release the mouse button when the column is the appropriate size.

3. Release the mouse button; the column is resized.

This resizing operation is temporary; it only affects the fields of the tables columns that are displayed in the Browser window, but does not change their width in the underlying table. Workspaces or tables do not save resizing information. See Table Maintenance to resize the columns of the underlying table.

See: User’s Guide: Chapter 4


New Graph Window Command Window Menu


Use New Graph Window to:• display a table as a graph.

New Graph Window is Available when:• at least one table with at least one numeric column (integer, small integer, decimal,

float) is open.

Menu Path• Window > New Graph Window

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Graph button

Using MapInfo Graph DocumentationThe many options of the new MapInfo Professional graphing feature are thoroughly documented in the online help and the MapInfo Professional Graph PDF installed during the MapInfo Professional installation process.

This documentation details creating a graph using the Create Graph dialogs, displays examples of various graph types, and describes each of the six main dialogs: Formatting; General Options; Series Options; Grids and Scales; Titles; 3D Viewing Angle. For specific information on the options offered in the dialogs, options that are customized to the graph type you have selected, access the online help or the MapInfo Business Graph PDF.

For information of saving a graph and the graph template, see the Saving a Graph and Template section of this documentation.

Displaying a Table as a GraphTo display a table as a graph, complete the Create Graph Wizard, a two step dialog. The graph window can be printed, added to a layout, exported to an image file, placed in another application window and saved in a workspace.

After creating a graph, access the Graph menu options to customize the graph. Customization options include Formatting, General Options, Series Options, Grids and Scales, Titles, and 3D Viewing Angles. The 3D Viewing Angles option is available only when the graph selection is a 3D graph type.



To display a table as a graph:

• Choose Window > New Graph Window menu. The Create Graph Step 1 of 2

dialog displays.

Graph Type Select a graph type.

Template Displays the templates for the selected graph type; choose a template.

Next Display the Create graph Step 2 of 2 dialog.

Cancel Exit from the dialog and do not create a graph.

Help Display the Help topic associated with this dialog.



Table Displays tables in the active window; tables must contain a numeric field. Choose the table on which to base the graph.

Fields

Fields from Table: Choose the fields, or create an expression containing the data values that will display in the graph. Only numeric fields from the selected table display in the list.

Add Move the fields selected in the Fields from Table column to the Fields from Graph column. These fields are used in the graph display.

Remove Move the fields selected in the Fields for Graph column to the Fields from Table column. These fields will not be used in the graph display.

Fields for Graph: List the fields selected in the Fields from Table column that will display in the graph.

Up Select a field and use the Up and Down options to reorder the appearance of the fields in the graph.

Down

Label with Column Choose the column name for the graph label.

Series in Rows Choose to organize data in rows.

Series in Columns Choose to organize data in columns.

OK Create the graph.

Back Return to Create Graph Step 1 of 2 dialog.



Using Graphs Created in MapInfo Professional Versions Prior to 5.5If you are using graphs created in pre 5.5 MapInfo Professional, right click on the graph to display the shortcut menu that allows you to modify the graph. You cannot create new graphs using the pre-5.5 options. See the Appendix for information on the pre 5.5 Graph menu choices. Pre-5.5 graphs defined in workspaces and MapBasic applications will display correctly.

Saving A GraphUse the Save Workspace option to save a graph. For each graph window in the workspace, MapInfo Professional saves a uniquely named .3tf file in the same directory as the workspace. The name of the .3tf file is: <workspace name>, <window title> .3tf.

To save a graph:

• Choose File > Save Workspace. The Save Workspace dialog displays.



Save in: Designate path to store the workspace file.

File name Type a name for the workspace.

MapInfo Professional supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly.

For example you can name a table as follows:

\\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.wor

Save as type: List all files in the current directory that were saved with a .wor extension. All files (*.*) lists all the files in the current directory. Workspaces (*.wor) is the default.

Cancel Close the dialog box without saving the workspace.

OK Save the workspace. If editing an existing workspace, choose OK to overwrite the existing workspace and replace the existing workspace with the current one. Query tables, symbol size and SQL dialog entries are not saved with a workspace. You can also save a workspace that will open each time you start MapInfo Professional. See Startup.wor.




Saving a Template FileAdd to the template files included in MapInfo Professional 5.5 by creating a graph and saving the graph window, with any edits you have made to the template, as a template file. When you next create a graph window, the saved template file will display in the Graph Wizard. Templates are saved to the Graph Support file directory. You can change the location of this directory at Installation or by accessing Preferences >Directories.

To save a graph as a template:

• Choose Graph > Save as Template

Template

Graph Types and Templates

Save in Defaults to folder containing graphs of the type being saved.

File Name Assign a unique file name.

Save as type Template files are saved with a .3tf extension.

3D 3D Bar, 3D Floating Cube, 3D Floating Sphere, 3D Pyramid, 3D Round Column

Area Clustered, Stacked, Percent

Bar Clustered, Percent, Clustered

Bubble Bubble

Column Clustered, Percent, Stacked

Histogram Horizontal, Vertical

Line Clustered, Percent, Stacked

Pie Pie, Ring Pie

Scatter Scatter

Surface Surface; Surface, Honeycombed; Surface, with Sides



General Options DialogThe General Options dialog can be used to change the general format, layout, and look of a graph. It can also be used to show/hide and format labels for all series in the graph and to show/hide graph objects.

To display the General Options dialog:

• Choose Graph > General Options.

General Options Dialog Tabs

The General Options dialog contains different selections based on the current graph type and the options you select in the dialog.

The General tab shows general formatting options for each graph type.

The Layout tab shows graph layout options.

The Data Labels tab shows formatting and display options for data labels.

The Number tab shows formatting options for data label numbers. This tab is only activated when data labels are selected in the Data Labels section of General Options.

The Dual Y tab shows formatting options for dual axes graphs. This tab is only activated when a dual axes graph is selected in the Layout section of General Options.

The Look tab shows options for changing the graph look.

The Display Status tab shows options for showing and hiding graph objects.



Each dialog includes these buttons:

Select the Help button to display help script about the General Options dialog.

Select the Apply button to apply your selections to the graph and leave the General Options dialog open.

Select the OK button to apply your selections to the graph and close the General Options dialog.

Select the Cancel button to cancel any selection and close the General Options dialog.

Titles DialogAll graphs can include a graph title, subtitle, and footnote. Most graphs can also include a Category Axis title and a Numeric Y1-Axis title. Other axis titles may be available depending on the graph type. The Titles and Labels dialog can be used to add, change, or delete a Title, Subtitle, Footnote, Category Title, X-Axis title, Value Title (Y1 and Y2), and a Series Axis title in your graph titles:

To display the Titles dialog:

• Select Graph > Titles.

Not all title or label options are available for every graph type. See the various Titles and Labels options for graph type availability.

Use the Formatting dialog to change the format of a title.

TitleYou can define a graph title to give your graph a name. By default, the graph title is placed at the top center of your graph.

To enter a title:



1. Select Graph > Titles or right-click on the graph and select Titles from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the Title checkbox.

3. Type your title in the field next to the Title checkbox.

4. Select the Apply button add the text to your graph.

5. Select the OK button to accept the changes and close the Titles dialog.

Change the format of the title text by selecting the title and using the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

Change the location of the title by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph.

SubtitleIn addition to a graph title, you can define a Subtitle that provides additional information about your graph. By default, the subtitle is placed at the top center of your graph, directly below the graph title. You can change this location by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph frame.

To add a subtitle to your graph:

1. Select Graph > Titles or right-click on the graph and select Titles.

2. Select the Subtitle checkbox.

3. Type the subtitle in the field next to the Subtitle checkbox.

4. Select the Apply button add the text to the graph.




Change the format of the subtitle text using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

Change the location of the subtitle by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph.

Category TitleThe Category Title defines a title for your graph’s group/category axis. By default, the category title is placed just above, below, or next to the category axis labels. Change this location by clicking and dragging the title to any place in the graph frame.

To enter a category title:


2. Select the Category Title checkbox.

3. Type the category title in the field next to the Category Title checkbox.

4. Select the Apply button add the text to the graph.


This option is NOT available for Bubble, Histogram, Pie or Scatter graphs.

Change the format of the category title using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

Change the location of the category title by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph.

Graph FootnoteBy default, the graph footnote is placed at the bottom right corner of your graph. You can change this location by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph frame.

To add a footnote to the graph:


2. Select the Footnote checkbox.

3. Type the footnote in the field next to the Footnote checkbox.





Change the format of the footnote using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

Change the location of the footnote by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph.

Series Axis Title (for 3D graphs Only)In 3D graphs, the series labels that are normally displayed in the legend area are plotted along a secondary group (O2) axis. In the default configuration, these series labels are drawn on the lower left side of the 3D cube. You can add a series axis title to further describe the information that is being graphed on this series axis.

To add a title to the series axis of your graph:


2. Select the Series Axis checkbox.

3. Type your series axis title in the field next to the Series Axis checkbox.



You can change the format of the series title using the buttons in the format toolbar or

the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

You can change the location of the series axis title by clicking and dragging it to any

location in the graph.



Value Title (Y1)To add a title to the primary numeric (Y1) axis in your graph:

1. Select Graph > Title or right-click on the graph and select Titles.

2. Select the Value Title (Y1) checkbox.

3. Type your value title in the field next to the Value Title (Y1) checkbox.

4. Select the Apply button add the text to your graph..

5. 5.Select the OK button to accept the changes and close the Titles dialog.

Change the format of the Y1 title using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.


Value Title (Y2)In dual-axes graphs, the primary numeric (Y1) axis shows some of the groups in your table and a secondary numeric (Y2) axis plots other groups of data. You can assign a title to the Y2 axis to explain what is being plotted on this axis.

To assign a Y2 axis:

6. 1.Select Graph >Titles or right-click on the Y2 title and select Titles.

7. 2.Select the Value Title (Y2) checkbox.

8. 3.Type your value title in the field next to the Value Title (Y2) checkbox.

9. 4.Select the Apply button add the text to your graph..

10. 5.Select the OK button to accept the changes and close the Titles dialog.



Change the format of the Y2 title using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.


X-Axis TitleHistogram, Bubble, and Scatter graphs include a numeric X-axis.

To add a title to the X-axis of your graph:

1. Select Graph > Titles or right-click on the X-axis title and select Titles.

2. Select the X-Axis checkbox.

3. Type the value title in the field next to the X-Axis checkbox.



This option is only available for Histogram, Bubble, and Scatter graph types.

Change the format of the title using the buttons in the format toolbar or the Formatting option in the Graph menu.

Change the location of this title by clicking and dragging it to any location in the graph.

Series Options DialogThe Series Options dialog is used to apply formatting options to an individual series in a graph. The Series Option dialog is available for selection if you previously selected a series in your graph. If a series is not selected, a message box displays this message: ”No series is selected.”

To display the Series Options dialog:

Select a riser (area, bar, line, marker, pie slice, etc.) or a legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu or right click to display the shortcut menu.



The General tab shows general formatting options for a series for each graph type.

The Data Labels tab shows formatting and display options for data labels for the currently selected series.

The Number tab shows formatting options for data label numbers. This tab is only activated when data labels are selected in the Data Labels section of graph Options.

The Trendlines tab shows formatting and display options for trend lines. This selection is not available in 3D and pie graphs.

Series Options are not available in 3D Surface graphs. The Series Options dialog contains different selections based on the current graph type and the options you select in the dialog.

General Series Options

To show general formatting options for an individual series in a graph:

1. Select an area riser or legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu or right click on an area riser or right click and select Series Options.

2. Select the General tab at the top of the Series Options dialog.



Riser Shape: In 3D column graphs only, choose an item from this list box to change the shape of the risers -- Rectangular Riser, Rounded Column, Cone/Pyramid, Floating Cube, or Floating Sphere.

Always Show Selected Series As...: In area, bar, and column graphs, you can change the format in which risers are drawn. You can select Default for graph Type, Line, Riser, or Area. For example, you can change an area riser in an area graph to always display as column or line riser or change a column riser in a column graph to always display an area or line.

Data Labels and Numbers

Data labels show the actual values from the cells in your table. Selectable data label values and locations will be slightly different depending on the graph type. Data labels are not available in 3D Surface graphs.

To show/hide and format data labels for an individual series in a graph:

1. Select a riser or legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu or right click and select Series Options.

2. Select the Data Labels tab at the top of the Series Options dialog.



Show/hide and format data labels for an ALL series in a graph; see general Options.

Show Data Labels: Use this check box to show/hide data labels for the currently selected series.

Labels Location: When the Show Data Labels check box is selected, choose an option from this list box to select where the data labels are displayed next to their associated riser in the graph. This option is not available for True 3D graphs.

Label Format: When the Show Data Labels check box is selected, you can choose Value, Label, or Label and Value for area, bar, column, and line graphs. The Value selection will show the values from the table at the corresponding location on each riser. If Label is selected, the series labels are drawn. If Label and Value is selected, the series labels and the value from the table will be shown. This selection is not available for Bubble, Scatter, or True 3D graphs.

Show as Percentage: If you selected a Label Format of ”Value” or ”Value and Label” in a percent or stacked graph, select this checkbox to show the percentage value that each riser represents. This selection is only available in percent or stacked area, bar, and column graphs.

Cumulative Values: If you selected a Label Format of ”Value” or ”Value and Label” in a percent or stacked graph, select this radio button to show the cumulative value of each riser. This selection is only available in percent or stacked area, bar, and column graphs.

Absolute Values: In percent and stacked area graphs, select this radio button to show the absolute value of each riser. You must have also selected either Value or Label and Value in the Label Format field. This selection is only available in percent or stacked area, bar, and column graphs.

Show Total: If you selected Absolute Values, select this check box to show the total value of each category of risers. This selection is only available in percent or stacked area, bar, and column graphs.



Data Labels for a Series in a Pie Graph

To show/hide and format data labels for an individual series in a pie graph:

Click on a pie slice or legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu.

Select the Data Labels tab at the top of the Series Options dialog.

Show Values: Select this check box to show/hide the data label value associated with the series/slice in the pie graph.

Show Values as Percentage: If Show Values is selected, select the checkbox to show the data value as a percentage of the total. Do not select this checkbox to show the absolute value that defines the slice.

Values on Slices / Values outside Slices: If Show Values is selected, select one of these radio buttons to display the data value on the pie slice or outside the pie slice.

Show Labels: Select this check box to show/hide the series label associated with the pie slice/series.

Labels on Slices / Labels outside Slices: If Show Labels is selected, select one of these radio buttons to display the series label on the pie slice or outside the pie slice.

Show Leader Lines: If the ”Values outside Slices” or ”Labels outside Slices” radio button is selected, use this checkbox to show/hide a leader line from the pie slice to the data value and/or series label displayed next to it.

Formatting the Data Label Numbers

When you enable the display of data labels in the Labels tab of Series options, you can select different kinds of information to display:

For Area, Bar, Column, and Line graphs, you can select Value, Label, or Label and Value. If you selected Label, the graph will show series labels only and you cannot format them as numeric values even if the series labels are numbers. If you selected Value or Label and Value, you can format these values using the Numbers tab in Series Options.



For Bubble graphs, you can select (X,Y) Values or (X,Y) and Size (Label) values. Only the Size values can be formatted using the Numbers tab in Series Options. The (X,Y) values always use the number format selected for the X- and Y-axis labels.

For Scatter graphs, the Number tab is not included in the Series Options dialog. The data labels use the same format as the X- and Y-axis labels.

To format data label numbers for an individual series in a graph:

Select a riser or legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu or right click on a riser or legend marker and select Series Options.

Select the Numbers tab at the top of the Series Options dialog.

The Numbers tab is grayed out if the Data Labels checkbox was not selected in the Data Labels section of the Series Options or General Options dialog.

Category: Choose an option from this list box to select the format of data labels numbers -- General, Number, Currency, Percent, Scientific, Date, Time, Fraction, Special or Custom. The remaining fields in this dialog will be different depending on the selected category.

Decimal Places: If you selected Number, Currency, Percentage, or Scientific in the Category field, enter the number of decimal places that you want to appear in the data label numbers.

Use Thousand Separator (,): If you selected Number in the Category field, select this check box if you wish to have a comma separating thousands of values (e.g., 123456789 or 123,456,789).

Symbol: If you selected Currency in the Category field, choose a currency symbol from this list box Domestic and international currency symbols are provided.

Negative Numbers: If you selected Currency in the Category field, choose an item from this list box to identify how you want negative data label numbers to be formatted.

Type: If you selected Special, Date, Time or Fraction in the Category field, choose an item from this list box to identify the format of special numbers to be used.



Trend Lines

Trendlines show a graphics representation of trends in a data series. You can add trendlines to data series in unstacked 2D area, bar, bubble, column, line, and scatter graphs. You can draw Linear, Logarithmic, Polynomial, or Exponential trendlines. You can also draw a Moving Average line that is a sequence of averages computer from the data points in the series. A moving average line smooths the fluctuations in the data points in the series.

Formatting Trend Lines

To show/hide and format trend lines for an individual series in a graph:

Select an area riser or legend marker and select Series Options from the Graph menu.

Select the Trendlines tab at the top of the Series Options dialog.

Show Trendlines: Select this check box to show/hide a trend line for the selected series.

Regression Type: Select one of these regression line types: Linear, Logarithmic, Polynomial, Exponential, or Moving Average to define the type of trend line you want to draw for the selected series. The moving average line is calculated from the data points for the selected series. This trend line smooths the fluctuations in the data points and shows the pattern or trend.



Order: For a Polynomial trend line, specify the degree of linear regression for the polynomial trend line. It must be greater than one but no greater than the number of groups in the graph.

Period: Not currently used.

Show Equation: For all regression types except Moving Average, select this check box to show the equation that was used for a Linear, Logarithmic, Polynomial, Power, or Exponential trend line.

Show Coefficient Values: For all regression types except Moving Average, select this check box to show the coefficient values that are used for a Linear, Logarithmic, Polynomial, Power, or Exponential trend line.

Show Color Same as Series: Select this check box if you want the trend line to be drawn with the same color as the selected series.

Line Name: Use one of these radio buttons to display a trend line name. The default name is the series label. Select the Custom radio button and enter a title to be displayed next to the trend line.

Formatting DialogYou can format line, area, and text objects in a graph by selecting Formatting in the Graph menu.

To access the Formatting dialog:

1. Select a line, area, or text object in the graph.

2. Select Graph >Formatting.

The Formatting dialog contains different selections based on the graph object (text, area, or line) that is selected.



Formatting Text Objects

The Formatting dialog can be used to format any text, line, or area (fill) object.

To format a text object (title, subtitle, footnote, axis labels, data label, Legend text, etc.) in a graph:

1. Click on a text object (title, subtitle, footnote, axis labels, data label, Legend text, etc.) in the graph.

2. Select Formatting from the Graph menu or double-click on the text object.

Color: Select the Transparent button to make the currently selected text object(s) transparent. Select a color from the color grid to apply the color to the currently selected text object(s).

Preview: This window shows a sample of how the text will look when various text formatting options are selected.

Font: Any font that is installed and available in your Windows platform can be selected in this list box. When you select a font name from the list, the font will be applied to the currently selected text object(s).

Size: Selections in this list box will be different depending on the selected font type. Any font size that is installed and available in your Windows platform can be selected in this list box. When you select a font size, it will be applied to the currently selected text object(s).

Style: Selections in this list box are used to apply bold, italic, and bold/italic to the text.

Rotation: Selections in this list box can be used to rotate the text; available only for axis labels and titles.

Box: Select a Box Style to draw around the text. When any option other than ”No Frame” is selected, the Line and Fill tabs in the Formatting dialog will be activated.

Alignment: Selections in this list box change the alignment of the text within its bounding box -- left, center, or right justified. Use only for title, subtitle or footnotes.



Formatting Line Objects


To format a line object (e.g., gridline, axis line, frame, the edge of a riser, etc.) in a graph:

1. Click on a line object (e.g., gridline, axis line, frame, the edge of a riser, etc.) in your graph.

2. Select Formatting from the Graph menu or double-click on the line object.

Color: Select the Transparent button to make the currently selected line object transparent. Select a color from the color grid to apply the color to the currently selected line object.

Preview: This window shows a sample of how the line will look with color, style, and thickness selections.

Style: Select a line style from the list box.

Thickness: Select a line thickness from the list box.



Formatting Area Objects


To format an area object (e.g., riser, marker, text box, etc.) in a graph:

1. Click on a line object (e.g., riser, marker, text box, etc.) in your graph.

2. Select Graph >Formatting or double-click on the area object.

Transparent: Select this button to make the currently selected area object transparent.

Color: Select a color from the color grid to assign the color to the currently selected object.

Gradient: Select this button to apply a gradient to the currently selected area object.

Texture: Select this button to apply a texture to the currently selected area object.

Picture: Select this button to apply a clip art picture to the currently selected area object.

Pattern: Select this button to apply a pattern to the currently selected area object.



Applying a Pattern

To apply a pattern to any area object in your graph:

1. Select an area object (riser, marker, graph frame, etc.).

2. Select Formatting from the Graph menu, select the Fill tab in the Formatting dialog, and select the Pattern button.

3. Select the Foreground button to select a color for the foreground of the pattern.

4. Select the Background button and select a color for the background of the pattern.

5. Select one of the pattern boxes.



Applying a Gradient to an Area Object

To apply a gradient:


2. Select Graph > Formatting. Select the Fill tab in the Formatting dialog, and select the Gradient button.

3. Choose a Gradient from the list of examples and select the apply button to apply the gradient to the currently selected text object.

4. Select the Advanced Options button to modify or create a new gradient.



Select the Presets Only button to close the advanced options section of the Choose a Gradient Angle dialog.

Use the arrow buttons underneath the gradient viewing picture to scroll through and select from the different gradients on the left side of the dialog. The double left-arrow [<<] and right arrow [>>] buttons scroll through the list of gradients continuously. The single left-arrow [<] and right-arrow [>] buttons scroll to the next gradient in the list. The square button in the center of the arrow buttons stops continuous scrolling.

After you have changed or created a new gradient, select the Save As button to save the new gradient.

Select the Save button to save an existing or new gradient using the existing gradient file name.

Select the Rename button to change the name of a gradient file name.

Select the Delete button to delete an existing gradient file.

Select the Duplicate button to create another gradient file that is a duplicate of another gradient.

Select the Apply button to apply the gradient to the selected object in the graph and leave this dialog open.

Select the OK button to apply the gradient angle to your graph and close this dialog. When you select this button, MapInfo will prompt you to save any changes to a gradient. You may save your changes to an existing gradient or create a new gradient that will appear in the Choose a Gradient... dialog the next time you select the gradient option.

Applying Texture to an Area Object

To apply a texture (e.g., Granite, Marble, Wood, etc) to any area object in your graph:




2. Select Graph > Formatting. Select the Fill tab in the Formatting dialog, and select the Texture button.

3. Use the tabs at the top of the dialog to select different texture types (e.g., Granite, Marble, Misc, Models, Wood, etc).

4. Select one of the example texture blocks to choose which texture you want to apply to an area object.



Advanced Options

Select the Advanced Options button to change a texture.

Select the Presets Only button to return to the Choose a Texture dialog.

Use the arrow buttons underneath the texture picture to scroll through and select from the different texture on the left side of the dialog. The double left-arrow [<<] and right arrow [>>] buttons scroll through the list of textures continuously. The single left-arrow [<] and right-arrow [>] buttons scroll to the next texture in the list. The square button in the center of the arrow buttons stops continuous scrolling.

No Flipping/Flip Vertical/Flip Horizontal/Flip Both/Bricks Horizontal/Bricks Vertical: Use these radio buttons to change the orientation of the texture.

Applying a Picture to an Area Object

Choose any picture from the clip art library that is part of MapInfo Professional graph feature and apply it to an area object in your graph.

To apply a picture to an area object:


2. Select Graph > Formatting from the Graph menu. Select the Fill tab in the Formatting dialog, and select the Picture button.

3. Choose a picture and select the OK button to apply the picture to the area object in your graph.

Advanced Options



Select the Presets Only button to return to the Choose a Picture dialog.

Use the arrow buttons underneath the picture to scroll through and select from the different clip art picture on the left side of the dialog. The double left-arrow [<<] and right arrow [>>] buttons scroll through the list of pictures continuously. The single left-arrow [<] and right-arrow [>] buttons scroll to the next picture in the list. The square button in the center of the arrow buttons stops continuos scrolling.

Pictograph: Select this check box to scale the picture to grid units.

No Flipping/Flip Vertical/Flip Horizontal/Flip Both: Use the radio buttons to change the orientation of the picture.

Select the Browse button to look for other clip art picture files.



Grids and Scales DialogThe Grids and Scales dialog is used to format graph axes, gridlines, and scaling.

1. To display the Grids and Scales dialog:

2. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click and select Grids and Scales.

In the Grids and Scales dialog, you can format all of the axes in your graph. The tabs on the left of the dialog show the available axes in the graph: Category Axis, Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis (for dual-axes graphs), X Axis (for bubble and scatter graphs), and Series Axis (for 3D graphs). When you select an axis tab, the tabs at the top of the dialog will also change to represent the formatting options for each axis. The Grids and Scales dialog will contain different options depending on which axis and formatting tab is selected.

Formatting a Category Axis

All graph types except bubble, histogram, and scatter graphs include a category axis. The category axis defines the groups of items that are being graphed.

These graph types do not have a category axis: Bubble, Histogram, and Scatter.

Category Axis General Formatting Options

To show general formatting options for a category axis:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on at he graph and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Category Axis tab on the left side of the Grids and Scales dialog.



Select the General tab at the top of the dialog.

Location of Labels: In area, column, and line graphs, the default category axis base line and category labels are drawn at the bottom of the graph. In bar graphs, the default category axis base line and value labels are drawn on the left side of the graph. In 3D graphs, the category axis is drawn on the lower right side of the 3D cube and cannot be changed. Select an option in this list box to select a different location. For all graphs except Bar graphs, select one of these options -- Axis on Bottom, Axis on Top, or Axis on Both Sides. For Bar graphs, select one of these options -- Axis on Left, Axis on Right, or Axis on Both Sides.

Value Axis Crosses Between Categories: Select this check box if you want the value axis to cross between categories. If you want the edges of a graph to meet the edges of the plot area, do not select this field.

Draw Categories in Reverse Order: In area, column, and line graphs, category axis labels are drawn from left-to-right at the bottom of the graph in the same order they are defined in the first row of your table. In bar graphs, the categories are drawn from top to bottom on the left size of the graph in the same order they are defined in the first row of the table. You can reverse the order of categories displayed on your graph’s category axis. For example, assume that the categories are: MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI. If you reverse the categories, the category labels would be listed in the reverse order: FRI, THU, WED, TUE, MON.

Category Axis Labels

To show/hide and format category axis labels:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on the graph and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Category Axis tab on the left side of the Grids and Scales dialog. Select the Labels tab at the top of the dialog.



For all graph types except Bubble, Histogram, and Scatter graphs, the labels for the category are taken from the values defined in the table. For area, column, line, graphs, the category axis labels are drawn immediately below the graph frame. For bar graphs, the category axis labels are drawn immediately to the left of the graph frame. For 3D graphs, the category labels are drawn on the lower right side of the 3D cube

Show Labels for this Axis: The category axis labels show how data in the graph is grouped or categorized. The category axis labels are taken from the information defined in the first row of your table. When the box is checked, group axis labels are displayed. When the box is not checked, group axis labels are not displayed.

Stagger Labels: By default, labels on the category axis are drawn on a single line. If labels are too long to fit on a single line, labels will be wrapped at word breaks and drawn on multiple lines. You can stagger category axis labels so that they weave in and out in a zig-zag fashion. Staggered labels are useful when a very long label is needed to define each group and you do not want individual labels to be wrapped.

Use Manual Number of Categories Between Labels: The category axis labels show how data in the graph is grouped or categorized. The category axis labels are taken from the information defined in the first row of your table. By default, ALL labels defined in the table are drawn on the category axis. If you want ALL labels defined in the first row of your table to be drawn on the category axis, make sure the Use Manual Number of Categories checkbox is NOT selected. If you want to drawn only some of the labels in the first row of your table, select the Use Manual Number of Categories checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, enter a number in the Between Labels field that defines the interval of category labels to be drawn. For example, assume the category axis labels are MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI. When Between Labels is set to 2, only the MON, WED, FRI labels will be drawn.



Category Axis Gridlines

To show/hide and format major and minor gridlines for a category axis:

Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on the graph and select Grids and Scales.

When the Grids and Scales dialog displays, select the Category Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Grids tab at the top of the dialog.

A graph’s category axis can include major and minor gridlines. By default, major gridlines are displayed and minor gridlines are not. If you choose to draw both major and minor gridlines, you can choose a different style for each group of gridlines so that you can easily determine the difference between the two. By default, major gridlines are drawn across the full length of the graph (Regular Grid) and minor gridlines are drawn as spanned tick marks across the axis base line. You can also choose the number of major and minor gridlines that are drawn on the

category axis. Select the Major Gridlines tab inside the dialog to define major gridlines. Select

the Minor Gridlines tab inside the dialog to define minor gridlines

Major Gridlines / Show Gridlines: Select this check box to show/hide major gridlines for the graph’s category axis.

Major Gridlines/Grid Style: Select this list box to choose the style of major gridlines: Regular Grids, Grids and Ticks, Inner Ticks, Outer Ticks, and Spanning Ticks. Note that you may also change the format, width, and color of a gridline by selecting it in the graph and choosing the Formatting option from the Graph menu.

Major Gridlines/Use a Manual Number of Categories: If you do not want MapInfo to automatically calculate the number of major gridlines, select this checkbox to choose a manual number of gridlines. When this checkbox is NOT selected, a gridline is drawn between each category. When this checkbox is selected, enter a number in the Between Gridlines field that defines the interval of major gridlines to be drawn. For example, assume the category axis



labels are MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI and a major gridline is drawn between each category label. When Between Gridlines is set to 2, gridlines will only be drawn between the TUE/WED and THU/FRI labels.

Minor Gridlines/Show Gridlines: Select this check box to show/hide major gridlines for the category axis. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.

Minor Gridlines / Grid Style: Select this list box to choose the style of minor gridlines for the category axis: Regular Grids, Grids and Ticks, Inner Ticks, Outer Ticks, and Spanning Ticks. Note that you may also change the format, width, and color of a gridline by selecting it in the graph and choosing the Formatting option from the Graph menu. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.

Minor Gridlines / Use a Manual Number of Categories: If you do not want MapInfo to automatically calculate the number of minor gridlines, select this checkbox to choose a manual number of minor gridlines. When this checkbox is NOT selected, one minor gridline is drawn between each major gridline. When this checkbox is selected, enter a number in the Between Gridlines field that defines the interval of minor gridlines to be drawn. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.

Show Major Gridlines on Surfaces: For 3D surface graphs only, select this check box to show/hide major gridlines on the surface risers.

Formatting a Numeric AxisAbout the Primary Numeric (Y1) Axis

All graph types except Pie graphs include a primary numeric axis. The primary numeric axis plots the values from the rows and columns in the table.

Area, bar, bubble, column, line, and scatter graphs can be drawn on two numeric (Y1 and Y2) axes. When a dual axes graph is selected, MapInfo automatically divides the number of series in half and assigns half of the series to one axis and the other half to the second axis. The two axes can be drawn up or out from the same plane/base line or physically split into two separate sections on the graph.

About the X-Axis

Only bubble, histogram, and scatter graphs include an X-axis. These graphs include two numeric axis -- a Y1 axis that is drawn on the left side of the graph and an X axis that is drawn on the bottom of the graph frame.

Numeric Axis General Formatting Options

To define the general format of a numeric axis:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on a gridline and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis, or X Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the General tab at the top of the dialog.



Axis on Left/Axis on Right/Axis on Both Sides: By default, the value labels on the primary numeric (Y1) are drawn on the left side of a vertical graph or the bottom of a horizontal graph. A secondary numeric (Y2) axis is only available in Dual-Y graphs. Unless you change it, the numeric labels for the Y2 axis are displayed on the right side of a vertical graph or the top of a horizontal graph. The numeric X-axis is only available in bubble graphs, scatter graphs and histograms. Unless the location of this axis has been changed, these graphs display Y1-axis labels along the left side of the graph and X-axis labels across the bottom of the graph. Select one of these radio buttons to change the location of the Y1, Y2, or X axis.

Draw Categories in Reverse Order: Values on the Y1 axis are taken from the rows and columns of cells in the table. You can draw these values and their associated risers and gridlines in ascending or descending order. Select this checkbox if you want to draw the numeric axis in descending order. Axis value labels and risers will be drawn in ascending or descending order depending on this selection.

Value Axis Crosses Between Categories: Select this check box if you want the value axis to cross between categories. If you want the edges of a graph to meet the edges of the plot area, do not select this field.

Numeric Axis Scales

To define scaling parameters for a numeric axis:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on a graph and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis, or X Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Scales tab at the top of the dialog.



Use Logarithmic Scale on this Axis: Select this checkbox to use the logarithmic scale. DO NOT select this checkbox to use linear scaling on this axis. If the data that defines the numeric axis includes zero or negative values, MapInfo displays a message box. You must choose manual scaling and set minimum and maximum values to greater than zero in order to choose the logarithmic scale.

Always include Zero on this Scale: Use this check box to include or exclude a zero on a numeric axis. If you specify a Use Manual Scaling for Minimum Value, this check box will be disabled.

Use Manual Scaling for Maximum Value: By default, MapInfo uses the data in your table to determine the range of value labels that is graphed on a numeric axis. If you are graphing a number of widgets sold and the smallest number is 53 and the largest number is 934, your Y1 axis may contain value labels in the range 50 to 1000. However, you may define a specific range of values to be graphed regardless of the range of data that is specified in your table. When Automatic scaling is selected, MapInfo uses the range of values in the table to create the graph. When Manual scaling is selected, you define only a specific range of values to be graphed. If you want to use Automatic scaling, do not select this checkbox. If you want to use manual scaling for the maximum value, select this checkbox and enter the maximum value to appear on a numeric axis in the Maximum Value field. This value will become the largest value label on this axis and the graph risers will be adjusted accordingly.

Use Manual Scaling for Minimum Value: Select the Use Manual Setting for checkbox if you want to define a minimum value to be graphed. If you select this checkbox, enter a number in the Minimum Value field. This value will become the smallest value label on this axis and the graph risers will be adjusted accordingly.



Numeric Axis Labels

To show/hide and format numeric axis labels:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on a graph and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis, or X Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Labels tab at the top of the dialog.

Show Labels for this Axis: Labels on a numeric axis identify the range of data values that are being graphed. If the risers in the graph are drawn vertically from bottom-to-top or top-to-bottom, Y1-axis labels are typically drawn on the left side of the graph. If the risers in the graph are drawn horizontally from left-to-right or right-to-left, the Y1-axis labels are typically drawn on the bottom of the graph. A secondary numeric axis is only available in Dual-Y graphs. Unless you change it, the numeric labels for this axis are displayed on the right side of a vertical graph or the top of a horizontal graph. The numeric X-axis is only available in scatter graphs and histograms. Unless the location of the labels have been changed, these graphs display Y1-axis labels along the left side of the graph and X-axis labels across the bottom of the graph. Select this checkbox to show/hide numeric axis labels.

Don’t Show Maximum Value Label: Select this check box to exclude the maximum value from a numeric axis.

Don’t Show Minimum Value Label:. Select this check box to exclude the minimum value from a numeric axis.



Numeric Axis Numbers

MapInfo lets you choose from a wide variety of number formats including: domestic and foreign currency ($, £. etc), 34.50), percentages (%), and scientific notation.

To format numeric axis labels:


2. Select the Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis, or X Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Labels tab at the top of the dialog.

Category: Choose an option from this list box to select the format of numeric axis labels -- General, Number, Currency, Percentage, Scientific, etc. The remaining fields in this dialog will be different depending on the selected category.

Decimal Places: If you selected Number, Currency, Percentage, or Scientific in the Category field, enter the number of decimal places that you want to appear in the axis label numbers.

Use Thousand Separator (,): If you selected Number in the Category field, select this check box if you wish to have a comma separating thousands of values (e.g., 123456789 or 123,456,789)

Symbol: If you selected Currency in the Category field, choose a currency symbol from this list box. Domestic and international currency symbols are provided.

Negative Numbers: If you selected Currency in the Category field, choose an item from this list box to identify how you want negative numbers to be formatted.

Type: If you selected Special in the Category field, choose an item from this list box to identify the format of special numbers to be used.



Numeric Axis Gridlines

To show/hide and format major and minor gridlines for a numeric axis:


2. Select the Y1 Axis, Y2 Axis, or X Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Grids tab at the top of the dialog.

Major Gridlines / Show Gridlines: Select the Major Gridlines tab inside the Grids and Scales dialog and select the Show Gridlines checkbox to show/hide major gridlines on a numeric axis.

Major Gridlines / Grid Style: The numeric axis in your graph can show major and minor gridlines. You can select a different format or style of major and minor gridlines so that you can easily differentiate between the two. Select the Major Grids tab inside the Grids and Scales dialog. If major gridlines are not displayed, select the Show Gridlines checkbox. Select the Grid Style list box and choose one of these grid styles: Regular Grids, Grids and Ticks, Inner Ticks, Outer Ticks, and Spanning Ticks. Note that you may also change the format, width, and color of a gridline by selecting it in the graph and choosing the Formatting option from the Graph menu.

Major Gridlines / Use Manual Grid / Interval Value: When you enable drawing of major gridlines, you can let MapInfo automatically calculate the number of major gridlines or specify a number of major gridlines on a numeric axis. To use a manual number of major gridlines, select the Use Manual grid check box and specify a number in the Interval Value field. As an example, an interval value of 30 in a range of values between zero and 90 will produce three gridlines. Note that this will also change the number of value labels displayed on this axis.

Minor Gridlines / Show Gridlines: Select the Minor Gridlines tab inside the Grids and Scales dialog. Select the Show Gridlines checkbox to show/hide minor gridlines on the numeric axis. When the box is checked, minor gridlines are displayed on the category axis. When the box is not checked, minor gridlines are not drawn. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.



Minor Gridlines / Grid Style: When minor gridlines are drawn, select this list box to choose a minor grid style: Regular Grids, Grids and Ticks, Inner Ticks, Outer Ticks, and Spanning Ticks. Note that you may also change the format, width, and color of a gridline by selecting it in the graph and choosing the Formatting option from the Graph menu. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.

Minor Gridlines / Use Manual Grid / Count Value: When you enable the display of minor gridlines, MapInfo will drawn one minor gridline between each major gridline. To specify different number of minor gridlines between each major gridline, select the User Minor Grid checkbox and enter a value in the Count Value field. The specified number of minor gridlines will be drawn between each major gridline. Minor gridlines are not available for 3D graphs.

Draw Custom Line at: MapInfo lets you draw a custom gridline at a specific location on the Y1 axis in your graph. Select the Draw Custom Line at checkbox and enter a value to define where the custom line will be drawn.



Formatting A Series (O2) AxisAbout the Series Axis

A series (O2) axis is only included in 3D Riser and 3D Surface graphs. The series axis is also called a secondary ordinal or O2 axis. In 2D graphs, the series or rows of objects being graphed are shown in the legend area of the graph. In 3D graphs, these objects are shown on the series axis.

Series Axis General Format Options

To define the general layout options for a series axis:


2. Select the Series Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the General tab at the top of the dialog.

Draw Series in Reverse Order: You can reverse the order of series displayed on your graph’s series axis. For example, assume that the label column of your table includes the following labels: MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI. If you reverse the series, the series labels would be listed in the reverse order: FRI, THU, WED, TUE, MON.



Series Axis Labels

To show/hide and format series axis labels:


2. Select the Series Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Labels tab at the top of the dialog.

Show Labels for this Axis: The series axis labels are taken from the information defined in the first column of your table. When the box is checked ), series axis labels are displayed. When the box is not checked, series axis labels are not displayed.

Series Axis Gridlines

To show/hide and format major and minor gridlines on a series axis:

1. Select Grids and Scales from the Graph menu or right click on the graph and select Grids and Scales.

2. Select the Series Axis tab on the left side of the dialog and the Grids tab at the top of the dialog.



Major Gridlines / Show Gridlines: Select this checkbox to show/hid major gridlines on the series axis.

Major Gridlines / Grid Style: This option is not available for the series axis.

Major Gridlines / Use a Manual Number of Series: This option is not available for the series axis.

Minor Gridlines: This option is not available for the series axis..

Show Major Gridlines on Surfaces: For 3D surface graphs only, select this check box to show/hide major gridlines on the surface risers.

3D Viewing Angles DialogAbout 3D Viewing Angles

3D Viewing Angles gives you a variety of preset angle options to choose from plus a wide array of possibilities to place your 3D graph at a variety of angles. Not only can you Pan, Rotate, or Move your 3D graph to anywhere on the screen, but you can also adjust the thickness of the frame walls as well as stretch and shrink them. The 3D View Angles enables you to reveal your creativity with the presentation of your 3D graph.



Choose a Viewing Angle

To choose a different Viewing Angle for a 3D graph:

• Select Graph > 3D Viewing Angles. The Choose a Viewing Angle... dialog

displays.

This dialog shows a picture of all defined viewing angles. It may contain more or fewer viewing angle pictures depending on previous selections in the Advanced Options dialog.

To select one of the defined viewing angles:

1. Select a viewing angle picture.

2. Select the Apply button to apply the Viewing Angle to your 3D graph.

Select the Advanced Options button to display additional viewing angle selections.



3D Viewing Angle Advanced Options dialog

Select the Presets Only button to close the advanced options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

Use the arrow buttons underneath the viewing angle picture to scroll through and select from the different viewing angles on the left side of the dialog. The double left-arrow [<<] and right arrow [>>] buttons scroll through the list of viewing angles continuously. The single left-arrow [<] and right-arrow [>] buttons scroll to the next viewing angle in the list. The square button in the center of the arrow buttons stops continuous scrolling.

After you have changed or created a new viewing angle, select the Save As button to save the new viewing angle.

Select the Save button to save an existing or new viewing angle using the existing viewing angle file name.

Select the Rename button to change the name of a viewing angle file name.

Select the Delete button to delete an existing viewing angle file.

Select the Duplicate button to create another viewing angle file that is a duplicate of another angle.

Use the Rotate, Pan, Walls, and Move tabs to change a viewing angle.

Select the Apply button to apply the viewing angle to your graph and leave this dialog open.



Select the OK button to apply the viewing angle to your graph and close this dialog. When you select this button, MapInfo will prompt you to save any changes to a viewing angle. You may save your changes to an existing viewing angle or create a new viewing angle that will display in the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog the next time you select the 3D Settings option.

Rotate a 3D Cube

You can use the Rotate tab inside the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog to rotate a 3D graph to any angle.

Select 3D Settings from the Graph menu to show the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

Select the Advanced Options button in the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

Select the Rotate tab in Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

When the Rotate tab is selected in the Advanced Options section of Choose a Viewing Angle, you can rotate the 3D cube in one of three ways:

Click on the X, Y, and Z arrow tabs. X rotates the cube from left to right or right to left, Y rotates from top to bottom or bottom to top, and Z rotates the graph from side to side. To rotate the graph:

As you rotate a graph with the X, Y, or Z, notice that the arrows on the rotation orb light up. The arrows on the rotation orb corresponds to the X, Y, and Z rotation. The left and right arrows correspond to the X direction. The up and down arrows correspond to the Y direction. The middle arrows correspond to the Z direction. You can use the arrows on the rotation orb to rotate a graph. Simply click on the arrows. The arrows rotate the cube in the same way as the X, Y, Z left-right arrow buttons.

You can also rotate a graph using the Advanced Options 3D Viewing Angle Display Window:

Click and drag your mouse inside this window to rotate the 3D cube.



Pan a 3D Cube

Use the Pan tab inside the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog to pan and zoom a 3D cube inside the graph frame.

Using the Pan Tab

Select the Pan tab in the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

When the Pan tab is selected in the Advanced Options section of Choose a Viewing Angle, you can pan and zoom the 3D cube in one of three ways:

Click on the X, Y, and Zoom arrow tabs. X pans from left to right or right to left, Y pans from top to bottom or bottom to top, and Zoom pans nearer or further away.

Use these arrows to pan the 3D cube in the X and Y direction:

Pan the cube in the X and Y direction using the Advanced Options 3D Viewing Angle Display Window:

Click and drag your mouse inside this window to pan the 3D cube.

3D Cube Walls

Use the Walls tab inside the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog to increase and decrease the thickness of the walls on a 3D cube. You can use the Walls tab inside the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog to change the 3D cube walls.



Select the Walls tab in the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

When the Walls tab is selected in the Advanced Options section of Choose a Viewing Angle, you can change the size of the 3D cube walls in one of three ways:

Use Length and Thickness X, Y, and Z tabs to increase and decrease the length and thickness of the walls. X controls length and thickness along the X-axis, Y controls length and thickness along the Y-axis, Z controls length and thickness along the Z-axis.

Use the arrows on the cube in the Walls tab to change the length and thickness of the 3D cube walls. The arrows on the cube correspond to the X, Y, and Z length and thickness arrows.

The upper left arrows correspond to the X wall thickness. The bottom center arrows correspond to the Y wall thickness. The upper right arrows correspond to the Z wall thickness. The bottom right arrows correspond to the X wall length. The top center arrows correspond to the Y wall length. The bottom left arrows correspond to the Z wall length.

Change the length and width of 3D cube walls using the Advanced Options 3D Viewing Angle Display Window:

Click and drag your mouse inside this window to change the length and thickness of the 3D cube walls.



Moving a 3D Cube

Use the Move tab inside the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog to increase move and set the perspective of the 3D cube within the graph frame.

Select the Move tab in the Advanced Options section of the Choose a Viewing Angle dialog.

When the Move tab is selected in the Advanced Options section of Choose a Viewing Angle, you can change the move the 3D cube one of three ways:

Use the X, Y, Z, and Perspective arrow tabs to move and change the perspective of the cube. X moves the 3D cube from bottom right to top left, Y moves the cube up and down, Z moves the cube from top right to bottom left. Perspective distorts the display of the graph.

The left and right arrows correspond to X. The up and down arrows correspond to Y. The shorter middle arrows correspond to Z.

Change the length and width of 3D cube walls using the Advanced Options 3D Viewing Angle Display Window:

Click and drag your mouse inside this window to move the 3D cube inside the graph frame.


Use these arrows to move the cube on the X, Y, and Z directions


New Layout Window Window Menu


Use New Layout Window to:• arrange and annotate the contents of one or more windows for printing.

New Layout Window is Available when:• New Layout Window is always available.

Menu Path• Window > New Layout Window

Creating a Layout WindowTo create a Layout window:

• Choose Window > New Layout Window.

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Layout button

When no windows are open, MapInfo creates a blank Layout.

When there are windows open, MapInfo displays the New Layout Window dialog:

• Choose one of the options; click OK.

When you have made a choice, MapInfo opens and displays that Layout.

When MapInfo first opens a Layout, the page size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are set according to the printer specifications designated in Options > Preferences > Printer. You can change the printer settings for the active Layout window through File > Page Setup, or by using the Set Window Printer command in the MapBasic window. The sizes and positions of objects in the Layout are the same, but the way the Layout is broken into pages differs.



After you create a Layout, that Layout is the currently active window. MapInfo places the Layout menu on the menu bar. Use the Layout menu to choose options for working with Layouts.

Layout Window DescriptionLayout windows have scroll bars at the right and at the bottom like Map and table windows.

You can display rulers at the top and to the left to help you in positioning, sizing and aligning objects.

The Zoom displayed in the StatusBar indicates the magnification factor that is currently applied to the Layout. When the zoom is 37.46%, then the Layout is being displayed 37.46% of its actual size. When the zoom is at 123%, then the Layout is being displayed at 123% of its actual size.

Ordering of Objects in a LayoutThe objects in Layout frames, text, lines, rectangles, and so forth are ordered from front to back. Think of each object as being drawn on a separate transparency, with the transparencies being stacked, one in front of the other.

This is most obvious in the case of two objects that overlap in space. An object that overlaps another object is said to be in front of it. This is also true for two objects that do not overlap: one of them is in front of the other. To determine which one is in front, you can move one object so that at least part of it occupies the space that is currently occupied by the other object,. When it is in front of the other object, it overlaps it; when it is behind the other object, it is overlapped by it.

This front-to-back ordering is initially determined by the order in which the objects were created. The most recently created object is in front of all other objects. You can change this order using the Bring to Front and Send to Back menu options.

Setting the Zoom Using Numerical KeysYou can use numerical keys <1> through <8> to set the zoom level in a layout:

Click one of these keys when a Layout is the active window, and MapInfo changes the Layout’s zoom.

KEY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ZOOM 6.25 12.5 25 50 100 200 400 800



New Layout Window Dialog


One Frame for Window Use the dialog’s menu to pick the window you want to display in the Layout. MapInfo creates a Layout with the selected window displayed in a frame centered in the Layout. A Map has a legend when it has been thematically shaded or when a cartographic legend has been created for it. You can reposition the legend.

Frames for All Currently Open Windows

Create a Layout where all of the open maps, tables, and graphs (along with a legend for the currently active map or graph) are placed in the Layout in the same positions and sizes they have on the screen. You can then reposition and resize them. When you choose this option, close all of the windows that you are not going to use before you open the Layout.

No Frames Create a blank Layout. Use the Frame tool to manually place maps, and their legends and graphs into the Layout.





New Map Window Command Window Menu


Use New Map Window to:• display a table as a map.

New Map Window is Available when:• at least one mappable table (a table in which graphic objects are attached to the

records) is open

or

• a raster table is open.

Menu Path• Window > New Map Window

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Mapper button

Displaying a Table as a Map Maps give you a visual display of the spatial and geographic contents of tables. When used in conjunction with tables and graphs, maps allow you to do sophisticated analysis with relative ease.

While browsers and graphs only display information from a single table, maps can display information from many tables at once.

You can display a table as a map in one of three ways.

To display a table as a map:

• Choose File > Open. Open a mappable table with the Display table in window

option checked. The table is automatically displayed in a Map window.

or

• Choose File > Open. Open the mappable table(s) without the Display table in

window option checked. Choose Window > New Map Window. Using the Map

Tables dialog, choose the table(s) for the map. See the following: Map Tables

Dialog.



New Map Table Dialog

or

• Choose File > Open. Open a mappable table with the Display table in window option checked. Choose Open Table from the File menu again. Open another mappable file without the Display table in window option checked.

• Choose Map > Layer Control. You will see that the Map currently consists of a layer which is the first table opened and the cosmetic layer. The cosmetic layer is part of every Map and is always the top layer. Press the Add button and select the newly opened table from the drop-down list.

A Map Window

Each table becomes a separate layer in the Map. The tables in a map are listed in the Map window’s title bar. The tables are listed in descending order from left to right. The table farthest to the left is the table that is the top layer in the map. The table farthest to the right is the bottom layer of the map.

Map tables The Map Table dialog allows you to choose the tables which make up the layers for the map. There are four drop-down lists and you can choose up to four tables at a time. You can create a Map with more than four layers by adding additional layers using the Add Layer button in the Layer Control dialog (Map > Layer Control).MapInfo draws the layers into the Map in order from the bottom (fourth drop-down list in the dialog box) to the top (first drop-down list in dialog box). Place the tables into the Map in an order that allows you to see everything. Do not place a table containing regions (such as states or counties) over a table containing only points (such as towns or cities) or lines (streets and roads). The regions would then hide the points and lines.



After you create a Map, it becomes the active window and the Map menu option appears in the

menu bar. Use it to choose options when working with maps.

StatusBar Display for MapsThe StatusBar allows you to view the following information for the active map:

• Current zoom (the distance across the Map). This is the default setting.

• Map scale

• Cursor position in coordinates

• Snap Node status

Choose to display or hide the StatusBar. See Options > StatusBar.

Choose what to display on the StatusBar. See Map > Change View.

Changing a Map’s Display ParametersChange a map’s zoom level by specifying certain parameters in the Change View dialog.

To change a map’s zoom level:

• Choose Map > Change View.

or

Choose Main Toolbar > Change View button.

The Change View dialog displays.

Use the Change View dialog to set various parameters of the map including:

• the display of the current zoom, scale or cursor position in the StatusBar. The default unit of distance is “miles”, specified in Map > Options.

• the option to change the zoom, scale, and the center point of the current map view.

• the behavior of the map when you resize the window.

Scrolling Through a MapUse the scroll bars to move the map up, down, right, or left.

Sometimes you may scroll so that you move the view completely off the map. When this occurs, the map appears to be blank. Activate Previous View or View Entire Layer from the Map menu. Either of these will return you to the previous view of the map, and you can reposition the map again.

See:



New Redistrict Window Command Window Menu


Use New Redistrict Window to: • begin a redistricting session. The New Redistrict command creates a special table,

called Districts, and displays the table in a Browser window. The Districts Browser, in conjunction with a Map window, lets you perform redistricting. You assign map objects to a district by selecting the objects. As you select objects, MapInfo automatically calculates the net values for each district, and displays the values in the Districts Browser.

New Redistrict Window is Available when: • a map window is open.

Menu Path• Window > New Redistrict Window

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Redistricter button

You may only have one Redistricting Window open at a time. If a Redistricting Window is currently open, choosing Window > New Redistrict Window will display a warning that a Redistricting Window already exists.

About Redistricting Redistricting is a process of assigning map objects to groups. As you assign map objects to groups, MapInfo automatically calculates totals for each group of objects, and displays the totals in a special Browser window.

Redistricting is indispensable to anyone creating sales territories. If you plan to assign the same number of salespeople to each territory, you need to make sure that each territory represents an equal number of customers and/or leads. MapInfo’s redistricting feature makes it easy to create territories and adjust the territories based on the distribution of customer data.

When you perform redistricting, you create a number of districts. The exact number of districts needed depends on the nature of your work. You can assign a unique name to each district; thus, if you want to work with four districts, you might call the districts NorthEast, SouthEast, NorthWest, and SouthWest. Each district appears as one row in the special Districts Browser.

The Districts Browser is different from other Browser windows in several respects:

• You can only select one row at a time from the Districts Browser. You cannot Shift-click to select multiple rows.

• The Districts Browser always has one row selected; you cannot unselect this row by choosing Query > Unselect All.

• When you select a row from the Districts Browser, that row becomes the target district. The target district is the district which will be affected by subsequent redistricting operations.



Once you have selected a target district, you assign map objects to that district by selecting the map objects in their Map window. You can select objects by pointing and clicking, or by performing queries with SQL Select.

When you select map objects, MapInfo tentatively assigns the selected objects to the target district. MapInfo then recalculates the totals for each district, and displays the new totals in the Districts Browser. You then can examine the contents of the Districts Browser to decide whether you want to make the district assignments permanent.

To cancel the tentative district assignment, unselect the map objects.

To make the tentative district assignment permanent, choose Redistrict > Assign Selected Objects, or choose Main Toolbar > Assign Selected Objects button. When you choose Assign Selected Objects, MapInfo stores the target district’s name in the district column of the selected objects. Thus, if you assign map objects to a district called NorthWest, MapInfo stores NorthWest in each selected object’s column.

Each district has its own set of fill, line, and symbol styles. When you assign a map object to a district, the object subsequently appears in the style of the district. Thus, if you choose a solid blue fill for the NorthEast district, objects that you assign to district NorthEast appear in solid blue.

Using the Redistrict Dialog When you choose Window > New Redistrict, MapInfo displays the Redistrict dialog. You must complete this dialog to initiate a redistricting session.

New Redistrict Window



Source Table The Source Table drop-down list contains a list of table names. Choose the table that contains the map objects you wish to redistrict. For example, if one of the tables contains customer information, and you want to assign customers to sales districts, choose the customers table from the Source Table drop-down list.

District Fields The District Field drop-down list contains a list of the columns in the selected source table. Choose the column that MapInfo should use to store district names. MapInfo may not be able to create unique districts if the selected field is less than four characters wide. If you choose a column less than four characters wide, you will be asked to confirm your choice.Warning: During the redistricting process, MapInfo automatically overwrites the contents of the district field. Therefore, you must choose a district field carefully. Be aware that MapInfo may overwrite the contents of the column you choose.If you are performing redistricting for the first time, you may want to add a new column to the table, and then use the new column as the district column. To add a new column to the table, choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure. MapInfo automatically creates a district for each value contained in the district column. For example, if you choose a district column that contains area codes, MapInfo creates one district for each area code. If you choose a district column that is blank, MapInfo does not automatically create any districts, and you must create districts manually. As a general rule, you should not choose a column which contains unique values, such as customer names or serial numbers. Instead, you should choose a column which is completely blank or a column containing values that are shared among multiple rows. You might choose a column containing state names, county names, postal codes, or area codes.

Available Fields: Fields to Browse

The Available Fields list box and the Fields to Browse list box work together. Available Fields contains a list of column expressions. You can move some or all of these column expressions to the Fields to Browse list. Each field that you move to the Fields to Browse list will appear in the Districts Browser. Note that the District field, styles, and sum and percent of numeric table fields are in the Fields to Browse list by default. See the following: Aggregate Expressions. See Functions.

Add, Remove To move an expression to the Fields to Browse list: Choose an expression from the Available Fields list.Choose the >> button. To remove an expression from the Fields to Browse list: Choose an expression from the Fields to Browse list. The district field cannot be removed. Choose the << button.

Up, Down The Up and Down buttons let you control the top-to-bottom order of the items in the Fields to Browse list. The Up and Down buttons only become available after you choose a column from Fields to Browse. The district field will always be the first field in the browser.



Aggregate Expressions The Available Fields list contains aggregate column expressions. For example, if the source table has a numeric column called Population, the Available Fields list contains the items Sum(Population) and Percent(Population).

If you move a Sum(column) expression to the Fields to Browse list, MapInfo calculates the sum of the column values for all objects that belong to a district.

If you move a Percent(column) expression to the Fields to Browse list, MapInfo calculates the sum of the column values for the entire table, and then calculates each district’s percentage of the total.

The following Districts Browser includes both Sum( ) and Percent( ) expressions. Note that the total of all percentage values is 100.

Renaming a District To change the name of a district, click on the district name as it appears in the Districts Browser. Similarly, to change the fill color of a district, click on the Brush sample that appears in the Districts Browser.

Adding a DistrictTo create a new district, choose Redistrict > Add District. A new row appears at the bottom of the Districts Browser.

OK MapInfo builds a Districts table and displays it in a Districts Browser. As long as the Districts Browser is on the screen, MapInfo performs districting calculations every time you select or unselect map objects. If the Fields to Browse list contains the expression Count, the Districts Browser displays a count of the number of map objects assigned to each district. If the Fields to Browse list contains the expression Fill, the Districts Browser displays a sample of each district’s fill pattern. Also, use the Line and Symbol expressions to include sample line and symbol styles in the Districts Browser.





Deleting a DistrictTo delete the current target district, choose Redistrict > Delete Target District. When you delete a district, any objects which belong to the district are automatically assigned to the “*****” district.

To choose which district is the target district, check the box of the appropriate row of the Districts Browser. Alternately, you can set the target district by selecting one map object, making the District’s Browser active and then choosing Redistrict > Set Target District or

choose Main Toolbar > Set Target District button.

Ending a Redistrict SessionTo end a redistricting session, close the Districts Browser window. You must use File > Save to permanently save changes made in a redistricting session.

Related TasksOnce you have finalized the districts, you can combine each district’s group of objects into a single object by choosing Table > Combine Objects Using Column. In the Combine Objects Using Column dialog, choose the districting column from the Group Object By Column drop-down list.

There are some restrictions on the types of objects that Combine Objects Using Column can combine. If the districts contain only two dimensional objects such as regions, you can combine the objects.

See:Functions



New Row Command Edit Menu

New Row Command Edit Menu

Use New Row to:• add a blank record to the active Browser window.

New Row is available when:• the active window is a Browser

and

• the table in the active Browser is editable.

You cannot edit read-only tables, such as ASCII tables, Excel and Lotus spreadsheets, or StreetInfo tables.

Menu Path• Edit > New Row

or


Adding a New RowTo add a blank row at the bottom of the active Browser window:

1. Choose Edit > New Row. A blank row displays in the browser.

or

Press Ctrl/E.

Enter data in the new row.

Since in most Windows operating systems, the number of bytes in a file is 2,147,483,647, this is MapInfo Professional’s limit, as well. It is possible to have 2 billion rows in a table, but unlikely, since each row then could contain only 1 byte of data.

See:New Browser Window Command


New Table Command File Menu


Use New Table to:• create a new table. Additionally, create a new table from an existing table. MapInfo

tables have a data (browseable) component and an optional graphable (mappable) component. The New Table command allows you to set up these components.

New Table is available when:• New Table is always available.

Menu Path• File > New Table

or

• Standard Toolbar > New Table button

Creating a New TableWhen you create a new table you will:

• specify how the new table displays

• specify the table’s data attributes

• specify whether the table is mappable

• specify a projection for a mappable table

• specify a name and location of the new table

To create a new table:

• Choose File > New Table. The New Table dialog displays.

Use this dialog to select the new table display: display the table in a Browser window (table format), Map window, or add the table to the current Map window.



New Table Dialog

New Table Structure Dialog

Open New Browser Open an empty Browser window when you have completed specifying the table structure.

Open New Mapper Open a new Map window when you have completed specifying the table structure. Specify the projection of the table in the Create Table dialog.

Add to Current Mapper

Add the table as a layer in the currently active map window. The table has the same projection as the map to which it is added.

Table Structure Create New: Choose to create a new table. Using Table: Choose to create a new table from an existing table. Choose the table from the drop-down list. Choose Create. The New Table Structure dialog displays: select the information to be included in the new table. Choose Create to display the Create New Table dialog.

Create Choose to continue creating a table and display the New Table Structure dialog.



Fields Contains the names of the fields (columns) in the table from top to bottom.

Type Indicates the type of field with the number of characters in the field listed in parentheses (where applicable ). See the following: Type option.



Indexed An X in this column indicates the field is indexed. When the column is blank, the field is not indexed. Index as many fields as necessary: click index box. There is a limit of 29 indices per table.

Up/Down Move the selected field up or down one position in the list box. The file structure is reorganized accordingly. When a table displays in a Browser window, the first field becomes the leftmost column, the second field becomes the second column from the left, and the last field becomes the rightmost column. Moving a field up or down has the effect of moving it left or right in a Browser window.

Add Field Add a new field at the bottom of the list. This field has a default name of Field1, Field2, Field3, etc., depending on the order in which the field was created.

Remove Field Remove the selected field from the table.

Table is mappable Check to modify the table so you can map it and create graphical objects. If you have a table that is geocoded and want to ungeocode it, clear this option. When you click the OK button, the table is ungeocoded. If you do not check this option, you can make the table mappable at a later time by using Table> Maintenance > Table Structure.

Projection Displays the map’s projection. You can change the projection in this option. Change it by using the Save As command. See Projection Button and Save As Command.

Field Information Displays field information.

Name Displays the field name in the Name box. You can also enter new field names here. Defaults are Field1, Field2, etc. A field name can contain up to 31 alphanumeric characters. Use letters, numbers, and the underscore. Do not use spaces; instead, use the underscore character (_) to separate words in a field name. Use upper and lower case for legibility, but MapInfo is not case-sensitive.



Type A drop-down list is used to indicate the field type. The following types are available: Character: Stores up to 254 alphanumeric characters. You cannot perform arithmetic operations on numerals in a character field. You should store ZIP Code information in character fields, otherwise leading zeros are dropped.Decimal: Stores numbers in fixed-point decimal form. The decimal point counts as one character width. Do not put commas in decimal.Integer: Stores integers (numbers without a decimal). The range is from -2 billion to +2 billion.Small Integer: Integers between -32,768 and +32,768. Float: Stores numbers in floating-point decimal form. Date: Contains a date in the format specified by the Window’s Control Panel Regional Settings, Short Date Format. Exceptions: the month and day will always display a leading zero and the year will always display the century. During data entry, it is not necessary to enter the century. Additionally, if the date format is month, day, year, it is not necessary to enter the year.Logical: These fields contain only true/false or yes/no information, stored as T for true/yes and F for false/no.Decimal, integer, small integer, and float can only contain numeric symbols. These fields do not accept any characters besides numbers, the minus sign, or decimal points for decimal and floating-point numbers.

Indexed Check to create an index on the selected field. Indexing does not change the order of records. Use indexes to: Use Query > Find which only works on an indexed field. Speed queries containing numerical and alphabetic comparisons and speed joins.

Width Type the number of characters in the field (character and decimal fields only). Maximum field width is 254 for character fields and 19 for decimal fields.

Decimals Enter decimals in fixed point decimal form.

OK Create table with the structure you have specified in the dialog. When you are creating an earth map, or if the table is not mappable, MapInfo displays the Create New Table dialog. When you are creating a non-earth map, MapInfo displays the Non-Earth Coordinate System dialog. Then the Create New Table dialog displays. At the Create New Table dialog, name the new table and designate where (which directory or folder) you want MapInfo to create the table.

Cancel Cancel the dialog options. MapInfo closes the dialog without creating a new table.




Create New Table Dialog

Save in: Designate the file path.

File Name Enter the filename you want to create.

MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly.


\\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab

Save as type: Select its file format. To create a table compatible with earlier versions of MapInfo, choose MapInfo 2x format.If you choose dBASE, specify the character set.If you choose Access, see Save Copy As for information on the subsequent dialogs.

Save Save the new table to the designated drive and directory.

Cancel Cancel the dialog options. MapInfo closes the dialog without creating a new table.




Creating a New DBMS TableTo create a new remote table:

• Choose File > New Table. The New Table dialog displays.

Use this dialog to select the new table display: display the table in a Browser window (table format), Map window, or add the table to the current Map window. Use the field descriptions in the preceding dialog explanation.

• Click Create from the New Table Structure dialog.

• From the Create New Table dialog, choose the Open DBMS Connection button if

you have not already opened a connection.

• Choose your remote DBMS connection from the Files of Type drop-down list.

Click OK.

• From the Create New Table dialog, type the database name and click Save.

The New DBMS Table Options dialog displays.



New DBMS Table dialog - General Tab

MapInfo TAB file location:

Displays name and path of the .tab file that will be created. Type a filename or click the Browse button to use the Save As dialog to choose a filename.

MapInfo Professional will use the last directory where you saved a DBMS .tab when constructing the default filename full path. If this directory does not exist, then the Remote Tables preference directory is used.

The filename part of the default path is based on the name of the specified DBMS table name.

Download Data (Linked Table)

Select to download the data and make into a local linked table. A linked table is a special kind of MapInfo table that is downloaded from a remote database and retains links to its remote database table. The table on the remote database is referred to as a DBMS table. You can perform most operations on a linked table that you do for a regular MapInfo table. For instance, you can view, edit, copy, save, and rename a linked table just as you could a regular MapInfo table. However, there are some things you can’t do to a linked table. For instance, you can’t pack a linked table. You also can’t modify the table structure of a linked

table (but you can modify its MapInfo index structure).

Live Access Select to Access data live from remote databases. You can access data live from remote databases. For more information on live tables, refer to the chapter “Accessing Remote Database Data” in the MapInfo User’s Guide.

Cache For live access, the Cache checkbox is displayed. Check the Cache checkbox to keep attributes and objects that have been read in memory so if you zoom in they do not need to be fetched from the database. (Since MapInfo looks in memory for a record you will not see the latest updates.) If cache is on, another user’s updates may not appear until the cache is invalidated by a pan or zooming out. Uncheck the Cache checkbox and all data will be fetched from the database. It will give the most up to date data but will be less efficient.



New DBMS Table dialog - Spatial Tab

Key Column Specify a key column for the new table. Without a key column a DBMS table cannot be open as Live Access and can only be opened read only as Linked.

If the key column box is checked, then the corresponding combo-box is enabled. The user can either choose a column that was specified in the New Table Structure dialog or specify a new column by typing into the combobox's edit control.

By default the key column box is checked and a new column is specified. The default name of the new column depends on the DBMS connection: MI_PRINX for Oracle Spatial, SW_MEMBER for all others.

OK Creates the map.



Index Type Determines the type of spatial indexing used on the table. Types MapInfo (MICODE) and XY are always available. Server specific types may also be listed.

The index type selection affect the state of the other three controls in this tab.



Index Column Specifies the primary spatial index column. Always available, except when the index type is XY.

X Coordinate Specifies the X or latitude column in the database. Available only for MapInfo (MICODE) or XY types.

Choose a float column that was specified in the New Table Structure dialog or specify a new column by typing into the combobox's edit control.

YCoordinate Specifies the Y or longitude column in the database. Available only for MapInfo (MICODE) or XY types.

Choose a float column that was specified in the New Table Structure dialog or specify a new column by typing into the combobox's edit control.

OK Creates the map.





New DBMS Table dialog - Styles Tab

See:Table Structure Command


Per Row Style Check the Per Row Style box to enable per row symbology. The style info for each object is maintained in a character column of the table. If unchecked, then the style of all objects in the table is determined by the default object styles (maintained in the map catalog).

Style Column If Per Row Style is checked, then the Style Column combobox is enabled. The user can either choose a character column that was specified in the New Table Structure dialog or specify a new column by typing into the combobox's edit control.

By default Per Row Style is checked and a new column named MI_STYLE is specified.

Default Object Style The default object styles are used when Per Row Style is not turned on for a table, or the style info for a particular object does not exist (the style column for that row is empty). The default style info specified here is entered into the map catalog.

The default symbol, line and region settings within MapInfo Professional are used to initialize these controls.

OK Creates the map.




North Arrow Command Tools Menu File Menu

North Arrow Command Tools Menu

North Arrow Button Toolbar Menu

Use the North Arrow button or command to:• add a North Arrow to a Map or Layout window and optionally, add a Magnetic

Declination Arrow. Use the North Arrow tool from the Tool Manager or use the North Arrow button on the Tools Toolbar to draw a rectangle and place the North Arrow at the specified location.

The North Arrow button or command is available when:• a map or layout window is active

and

the North Arrow tool has been loaded using the Tool Manager.

Menu Path• Tools > North Arrow

OR

• Tools Toolbar > North Arrow button

Accessing the North Arrow Tool from the Tool ManagerThe NorthArrow.mbx is found in the Tools > Tool Manager, it is not autoloaded by default. When the North Arrow is loaded, it displays as the Tools > North Arrow menu option and as a button on the Tools toolbar.

Using North Arrow 1. Choose Tools > North Arrow.

2. Choose Setup North Arrow to establish defaults for inserting a North Arrow.

OR

Choose Draw North Arrow to insert a North Arrow using the defaults already designated in Setup North Arrow, or to override those defaults.

OR

Choose Tool Toolbar > North Arrow button.

The North Arrow Dialog displays.



Select Arrow Style As you choose a number, the corresponding arrow style displays in the preview box.

Choose a style for the Foreground brush, Foreground pen, Background brush, and Background pen.

Rotate North Arrow to match projection.

Available in a Map Window only.

Point North Arrow to top of map.

Stretch the North Arrow to fit the contents of the drawn arrow. Available in a both the Map and Layout Window when using the North Arrow button.

Use aspect ratio of rectangle you draw.

Draw the North Arrow at the original aspect. Available in a both the Map and Layout Window when using the North Arrow button.

Use aspect ratio of selected North Arrow.

Available in a both the Map and Layout Window when using the North Arrow button.

Magnetic Declination Check to display a Magnetic Declination arrow in addition to the north arrow. Display the Magnetic Declination dialog.

Insertion Corner Choose which corner in which to place the North Arrow: NorthWest, NorthEast, SouthEast, SouthWest.This is not available if the North Arrow is enabled using the North Arrow button; the Arrow is placed at the cursor location.

Size North Arrow to be this percentage of window size

Enter percentage number.



Magnetic Declination Dialog

Display Magnetic Declination

Check to display the Magnetic Declination Arrow.

Magnetic Declination Enter the declination angle in degrees from North.

Select Arrow Style As you choose a number, the corresponding arrow style displays in the preview box.


Open DBMS Connection Command File Menu


Use Open DBMS Connection to:• establish a connection to a remote database.

Open DBMS Connection is available when:• DBMS has been installed during the MapInfo installation process. For information on

custom installation, refer to Installation, in the MapInfo User’s Guide. For information on initial configuration of data sources, refer to Accessing Remote Database Data, in the MapInfo User’s Guide.

Menu Path• File > Open DBMS Connection

or

• DBMS Toolbar > Open DBMS Table Button

or

• File > Open > Open DBMS Table Button

Connecting to a Data Source Using ODBCBefore you can download table from a remote data source, the user must connect to the specific data source where the data to be downloaded resides.

A data source specifies the database. For example, CUSTOMERS could be the name of the data source that provides access to a SQL Server database. Once connected to the CUSTOMERS data source, you could download information from any of the SQL Server tables into a MapInfo linked table. You could have several data sources, each providing access to different databases in different locations.

To connect to a data source:

1. File > Open DBMS Connection. The Open DBMS Connection dialog displays.



Open DBMS Connection dialog

Connection Type: Choose your connection type from the drop-down list.

ODBC > New Adds a new file data source. If you click this button, the Select Data Source dialog displays. From here, you can set up a File data source or a machine data source. Adds a new file data source. Choose the driver for which you are adding a file DSN. After you click Next, you may specify the keywords for the file DSN. See the section“Creating New Data Sources,” for instructions on creating a new data source.

Oracle Spatial > New For connection type Oracle Spatial the MapInfo Oracle Connect dialog will display. From here, you can enter the Username, Password and Server for the Oracle database.

OK Closes the Administrator dialog box, and connects to the file data source that is highlighted in the list or entered in the DSN Name text box. You do not have to click OK to accept changes to the File Data Sources list. Changes to the list are accepted once the OK button in the Data Source Setup dialog box has been clicked.

Cancel Closes the Administrator dialog box without connecting to the file data source. Changes to the File Data Sources list are not rejected if the Cancel button is clicked.

Help Displays Help.



Select Data Source Dialog

File Data Sourceor Machine Data Source

Displays all file DSNs (data source names) and subdirectories contained within the directory displayed in the Look In box. Double-clicking a DSN connects to the data source.

Look In Displays the current directory for which the subdirectories and file DSNs are displayed in the window below. Clicking the down arrow to the right of the text box displays the entire directory structure..

DSN Name Displays the file DSN name selected in the File Data Sources list, or you can enter a new file DSN name.

New Adds a new file data source. If you click this button, the Create New Data Source dialog box appears with a list of drivers. Choose the driver for which you are adding a file DSN. After you click Next, you may specify the keywords for the file DSN. See the section“Creating New Data Sources,” above, for instructions on creating a new data source.

OK Closes the Administrator dialog box, and connects to the file data source that is highlighted in the list or entered in the DSN Name text box. You do not have to click OK to accept changes to the File Data Sources list. Changes to the list are accepted once the OK button in the Data Source Setup dialog box has been clicked.

Cancel Closes the Administrator dialog box without connecting to the file data source. Changes to the File Data Sources list are not rejected if the Cancel button is clicked.

Help Displays Help.



Adding New ODBC Data SourcesThis dialog is activated when you press the New button from the Select Data Source dialog. It is used to add new ODBC data sources.

You can add multiple data sources, each one associating a driver with some data you want to access using that driver. You need to give each data source a name that uniquely identifies that data source. For example, if you create a data source for an SQL Server database that contains customer tables, you might name the data source “CUSTOMERS.” Once you have set up your data sources, MapInfo will display data source names to choose in the Select Data Source dialog, described above.

For more information on configuration of data sources, refer to the chapter “Accessing Remote Database Data” in the MapInfo User’s Guide.

Using the Select Data Source DialogBefore accessing the Create New Data Source dialog, the Select Data Source Dialog displays. Choose either File Data Source or Machine Data Source

The Create New Data Source DialogCreate New Data Source Dialog



If creating a new Machine Data Source:

Name The Name list displays the names of installed drivers. From the list, select the driver for the data source to use.

Finish Accept the dialog option. A driver-specific Setup dialog box for the data source appears. (The source of this dialog is the DBMS Administrator.)

Since each driver is different, each data source requires a different configuration. Because of this, each data source has a unique Setup dialog box.

In general, configuration usually includes the data source name, description, and server name. Optional configurations might include server list, default logon ID and application name. (Refer to the Merant DataDirect DBMS Drivers Online Help topic, Configuring Data Sources, for the data source you want to configure. There is a help file for each driver distributed; they are located in the Windows system directory. The help files are names as follows, MIdrvHLP, where drv is the name of a driver. For example, MIINFHLP is the help for Informix.

Advanced Designate data source settings.

Type the required information about the data source.

Click OK when you have finished configuring your data source. The driver writes these values to the DBMS.INI file. These values are now the defaults whenever you connect to the data source.




Connecting to a Data Source Using Oracle SpatialIf you have only OCI installed, the MapInfo Oracle Connect dialog displays

:

After a connection is established, the you can now open a DBMS table. Refer to the Open Command for more information. To connect Oracle Spatial, the Oracle Spatial must be installed.

See:Save Table Command

Refresh DBMS Table Command

Unlink DBMS Table Command


Performance information: User’s Guide: Chapter 23

User Name Enter user name.

Password Enter password.

Server Name Enter server name.


Open Command File Menu


Use Open to:• open a MapInfo table, Microsoft Access table, dBase DBF file, Delimited ASCII file,

Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet, or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or raster/grid image. Additionally, access a DBMS connection, if a connection has been established or make a DBMS connection using the New Connection button.

Open is available when:• Open is always available.

Menu Path• File > Open

or

• Standard Toolbar > Open button

or to Open a DBMS table:

• DBMS Toolbar > Open DBMS Table button

Using the Open Dialog• Use the Open Dialog to open a MapInfo table, Microsoft Access table, dBase DBF file,

Delimited ASCII file, Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet, or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or raster/grid image. Additionally, access a DBMS connection, if a connection has been established or make a DBMS connection using the New Connection button.

In the Windows 2000 operating system, this dialog can be sized.

To open a MapInfo table:

• Choose File > Open. The Open dialog displays.



Open Dialog

Places Bar: Quickly access the specified directory. There are four MapInfo Professional Places options: Table; Workspaces; MapBasic Programs; Remote Tables. Designate each directory path in Options > Preferences> Directories.


Look in: Specify the file path.





Opening Multiple TablesTo open multiple tables:

1. Choose File > Open. The Open dialog displays.

2. To open a contiguous block of tables, select the first table you want, hold down the shift key and select the last table you want.

To open multiple tables that are out of sequence, hold down the control key and select the tables.

3. To deselect tables, hold down the control key and click on the tables.

Note: You cannot open more than one file type with this method.

Files of type: The tables displayed are tables in MapInfo format or non-MapInfo files that have previously been opened in MapInfo. Select the file format of the file you want to open. MapInfo, dBase DBF, Delimited ASCII, Lotus 1-2-3, Microsoft Excel or Raster Images. Also, Shapefiles, Grid images, and established DBMS connections. For certain file types, MapInfo displays other dialogs, prompting for further information. These dialog explanations follow.


Available if DBMS support is installed.


Open Opens the table or displays an in import information dialog. The table can be displayed in other windows by choosing New Browser Window, or New Graph Window.To open a MrSid raster file: open or double-click on the file name; the file displays. Register it as you register any raster file. Additionally, you can open a MapInfo table by double-clicking on the table name in Windows Explorer. If MapInfo Professional is not currently running, double-clicking on the table name will launch MapInfo.





Opening a ShapefileTo open a shapefile:

1. Choose File > Open. The Open dialog display.

2. In the Files of type drop-down list, choose Shapefile (.shp).

3. Select the shapefile to open; press Open.

4. Specify name and location of newly created TAB file. By default, the TAB file location is the directory specified in Preferences. The name of the TAB file is the same name as that of the Shapefile.

5. Press Save: the Shapefile Information dialog displays. This information is only required the first time a shapefile is opened. The default Styles and default Projection

designated in Options > Preferences are used.

Opening a Microsoft Access Table The following limitations apply to the direct Access feature:

• No support for decimal data type. If you modify the table structure of a MS Access table within MapInfo and change a FLOAT type to a DECIMAL, the type changes to FLOAT.

• The MapBasic Pack Table statement will save a copy of the original MS Access table without columns that MapInfo does not support. If a MS Access table has a MEMO, OLE, or LONG BINARY type column, it will be lost during a pack.

• Compact your database. Each time a table is renamed disk space is used up. The space used up is the space the original table was taking up. MapInfo renames the table when the structure is altered and when the rename statement is issued. An Access database may be compacted using the DBMS Administrator or Microsoft Access. To compact a MS Access database using the DBMS Administrator, see the DBMS Administrator’s on-line help for compact database. To compact a MS Access database using Microsoft Access, see Access’s on-line help for Compact a database to defragment and free disk space.

File Character Set Designate a character set.

Projection Designate a projection.

Style Designate a styles setting for objects stored in a shapefile.

Save Object Cache If enabled, the files created during opening of Shapefiles are saved on hard disk after closing a table. If disabled, these files are deleted after closing a table and will be generated each time table is opened.

OK The table opens.



Access Table Specifications

• A table in Access must have an auto-counter column with a unique index or primary key set on that column. Otherwise, MapInfo will alter the table to fit this requirement.

• The Access table being brought into MapInfo must be a flat Access table, i.e., the table must not contain fields that point to data in other Access tables.

• Memo, OLE, and Replication ID field types from an Access table will not be brought into MapInfo.

• Text field length cannot exceed 254 characters. If the length exceeds 254 characters, the field is brought in as read-only.

• Zero length strings are not allowed.

To open an Access table:

1. Choose File > Open. The Open Table dialog displays.

2. Choose Microsoft Access Database from the Files of type drop-down list. The Access databases (.mdb) for the specified location display.

3. Choose an Access database to open. If database security is turned on, you will be prompted to give the password for the database.

The Open Access Table dialog displays the tables for the opened database.

4. Choose an Access table or tables to open. The table or tables are opened in MapInfo.

After you open an Access table in MapInfo for the first time, MapInfo creates a definition for the table and gives it a .TAB extension. This enables you to it treat it like any other MapInfo table. For example, to open this file you would now open it like any other MapInfo table.

Please note that even though the table now has the .TAB extension in MapInfo, your data is still in your original Access database table and is not a duplicate.



Opening a dBASE DBF File To open a dBASE DBF file:


2. Choose dBASE DBF from the Files of Type drop-down list. The DBF files for the specified location display.

3. Choose a DBF file.

dBASE DBF Information Dialog

The dBASE DBF Information dialog box allows you to specify the File Character Set, so that MapInfo can make the proper translation.

Opening a Delimited ASCII FileTo open a delimited ASCII file:


2. Choose Delimited ASCII from the File Format drop-down list. The ASCII files for the specified location are displayed.

3. Choose a delimited ASCII file. The Delimited ASCII Information dialog displays.

Delimited ASCII Information Dialog

The Delimited ASCII Information dialog allows you to specify a delimiter and file origin for your table. This information is necessary for mapInfo to make the proper translation.

Delimiter

File Character Set Several different character sets are commonly used in computing. MapInfo needs to know which set the files uses.

OK The table opens.

Tab Choose Tab when you want tabs for the field delimiters.

Other This option allows you to specify the delimiter you want to use. Type the character in the box. Comma is the default choice.

File Character Set Specify the appropriate character set the file is using.

Use first line for column titles

Choose this option when you want to treat the first line of the file as column titles.

OK Opens the file. You can only read information from these files, when you want to do other tasks, see the following: Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and ASCII files.



Opening a Lotus or Excel SpreadsheetTo open a Lotus or Excel spreadsheet:


2. Choose Lotus 1-2-3 or Microsoft Excel from the Files of Type drop-down list. The spreadsheets for the specified location display.

3. Choose a Lotus or Excel spreadsheet.

4. Click Open. The Excel or Lotus Information dialog displays.

Excel/Lotus Information Dialog

Other Range Dialog

The Other Range dialog allows you to enter a range other than the entire worksheet.

Working With SpreadsheetsWhen working with spreadsheet, note the spreadsheet structure. Spreadsheets are not organized into records and fields the way databases are. However, since MapInfo is organized as a database, it reads spreadsheet files as through they were database files. When MapInfo reads a spreadsheet file it treats spreadsheet rows as records and spreadsheet columns as fields. Everything in a spreadsheet row is treated as through it were data about a single object. And all the items in a spreadsheet column are treated as though they were the same type of data about different objects.

Named Range Use this menu to specify Entire Worksheet or Other. When you choose Other, the Other Range dialog displays which allows you to specify a cell range. See the following: Other Range.

Current Value The current cell range value of the worksheet.

Use row above selected range for column titles

Choose this option when you want the row above the selected range used for column titles.

OK Open the file. You can only read information from these files; when you want to do other tasks, see the following: Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and ASCII files.

Type a cell range in the form A1:F9 or R1C1:R9C6

Type the appropriate cell range in the form indicated.

Cancel Cancel your current work with the dialog box. MapInfo closes the dialog box without creating a new table.

OK Enter the new range and return to the Excel/Lotus Information dialog.



In databases, the type of data to be found in a particular field is explicitly declared in the database structure. Since spreadsheets allow any type of data in any cell, there are no such explicit declarations. Therefore, when MapInfo reads a spreadsheet, it determines the type of data by examining the data itself. Since it treats columns as database fields, it assumes that every cell in the column contains the same type of data.

Further, MapInfo reads the column width as set in the spreadsheet and only reads the number of characters that fit the width. When a column width has been set to 9 and it contains the label “Sales Forecast”, MapInfo truncates that label to Sales For”.

Opening a Registered Raster Image See the Register Raster Image entry for more information.

Opening an Unregistered Raster ImageAfter selecting an unregistered raster image file in the Open dialog, the prompt “Display unregistered image” displays. Choose Display to open the image directly in a map window by using non-earth co-ordinates. The raster image is stored in a table file as a non-earth map. Choose Register to register the image using accurate map (latitude/longitude) co-ordinates. See the Register Raster Image entry for more information.

Editing Excel and Lotus Spreadsheets and ASCII FilesWhile you can directly access Excel and Lotus spreadsheets, and ASCII files, you can only read the information.

When you want to do any of the following tasks, you must first use Save Copy As to save the file in MapInfo’s format. The copy is a MapInfo-format table, and you can treat it as any other MapInfo table.

• Edit information from one of these files.

• Add new columns to one of these files through Table Structure.

• Use Update Column to calculate new data values and place them into the file.

• Use Table Structure to add graphic objects to the file.

Opening vs. ImportingYou must open a table before you can use it. Use the Open dialog for opening tables, (opening a table is described below). Choose the appropriate table by double-clicking on it in the dialog box.

Most programs require you to import files created in some other programs. MapInfo allows you to work directly with files created in other programs. When you have a file in dBase DBF, Delimited ASCII, Lotus 1-2-3, Microsoft Excel, or a Raster Image format you do not have to import it.



By not importing data you save time; opening a file is quicker than importing it. You also save disk space. When you import a file, you make a copy of it. Since MapInfo works directly with files from other programs, it does not have to make a copy.

When MapInfo opens a file from some other program, it creates a file with a .tab extension. This file describes the format of the file that actually contains the data. When you have opened a non-MapInfo file, such as a Lotus file, in a previous session and attempt to open it again, the following prompt appears:

Table definition already exists. Overwrite it?The table definition referred to is the .tab file. Continue; MapInfo overwrites the .tab file and opens the file.

Opening Remote DatabasesA DBMS table is a table that resides in a remote SQL database such as Oracle, Access, Informix, etc. A series of dialogs supports downloading a DBMS Table or Query result set for read or update as a MapInfo table

Oracle Spatial is an implementation of a spatial database from Oracle Corporation. It has some similarities to the previous Oracle SDO implementation, but is significantly different. Oracle Spatial maintains the Oracle SDO implementation via a relational schema. However, MapInfo does not support the Oracle SDO relational schema via OCI. MapInfo does support simultaneous connections to Oracle Spatial through OCI and to other databases through ODBC. MapInfo does not support downloading Oracle Spatial geometry tables via ODBC using the current ODBC drivers from Merant.You must establish a connection before you can open a remote database. See Open DBMS Connection for information on establishing a connection. After establishing a connection:

1. Choose File > Open.

The Open dialog displays.

2. From the File of Type drop-down, choose the remote connection which contains the database you want to open. For example, a remote connection will appear in the list with its description followed by the number of connection it is such as SQL:1.

The Open Dialog specific to DBMS tables displays.



Open dialog for DBMS













Database Displays the directory path of the database connection or the database name. This field is present only for data sources that provide this information. In the example above it is not present.

Open Opens the table or displays an in import information dialog. Displays the Open DBMS Table Options dialog.





Open DBMS Table dialog

MapInfo TAB file location: Displays the path to the TAB file that will be created.

SaveAs button: Press this button to specify the directory where the table is to be saved. Directories and files appear in the window below.

Standard Mode: Select Standard if you want to download an entire table or choosing specific rows and columns or using the entire

Column Filter: Display the Column Picker dialog.

Row Filter Display the Row Picker dialog

Expert Mode: Select Expert if you want to download a table by entering your own SQL query.

SQL View Press the SQL View button to display the Expert dialog. The Expert dialog is explained elsewhere in this section.

Download Data (Linked Table)

Select to download the data and make into a local linked table. A linked table is a special kind of MapInfo table that is downloaded from a remote database and retains links to its remote database table. The table on the remote database is referred to as a DBMS table. You can perform most operations on a linked table that you do for a regular MapInfo table. For instance, you can view, edit, copy, save, and rename a linked table just as you could a regular MapInfo table. However, there are some things you can’t do to a linked table. For instance, you can’t pack a linked table. You also can’t modify the table structure of a linked

table (but you can modify its MapInfo index structure).

Live Access Select to Access data live from remote databases. You can access data live from remote databases. For more information on live tables, refer to the chapter “Accessing Remote Database Data” in the MapInfo User’s Guide.

Cache For live access, the Cache checkbox is displayed. Check the Cache checkbox to keep attributes and objects that have been read in memory so if you zoom in they do not need to be fetched from the database. (Since MapInfo looks in memory for a record you will not see the latest updates.) If cache is on, another user’s updates may not appear until the cache is invalidated by a pan or zooming out. Uncheck the Cache checkbox and all data will be fetched from the database. It will give the most up to date data but will be less efficient.

Back Returns to the previous dialog

OK Displays the Open DBMS Table Options dialog.





Column Filter ButtonPress the Column Filter button to display the Column Picker dialog. When you selected a table in the first dialog, in effect, you selected all the rows and columns in that table. In this dialog you will be selecting the columns which contain the data to be downloaded. By default, all columns will be downloaded.

If you don’t have a primary or unique key, MapInfo will download it anyway and mark it as read-only. The primary key is the column used for updating data in the table.

Column Filter Dialog

Available Displays the available columns from the selected table. Also displays an additional column called “OBJECT” when this table is mappable. You can select it to download objects from the table. If Per Record Style is enabled, the MapInfo Symbology column displays.

Selected Displays the columns you selected from the table. Initially an asterisk (*) appears here. If you leave the asterisk, all columns will be selected from the table.

> The > button moves the currently highlighted column(s) from the available to selected list.

>> The >> button moves all columns from the available list to the selected list.

< The <button moves the currently highlighted columns back from the selected list to the available list.

<< The << button moves all columns back from the selected list to the available list.

Help Press the Help button for online help.



Row FilterPress the Row Filter button to display the Row Picker dialog. This dialog allows you to restrict the downloading of data from rows that match the criteria you specify. (This is the same as specifying the WHERE clause in a SQL query.) If you select no filtering criteria in this dialog, all rows will be selected.

Row Picker

Cancel Press the Cancel button to abort the dialog.

OK Press the OK button to accept the selected columns .

Conjunction When rows are being filtered from more than one column, Conjunction becomes available. Choose one of these boolean operators: AND, OR, AND NOT, OR NOT.

Selected Column Choose the column(s) for which you want to filter rows.

If you are filtering rows for one column, select a column, operator, and value. If filtering rows on more than one column, select a column from the next drop down list. This will also activate the next row of fields for data entry.

Operator The Operator list boxes contain all supported operator symbols for their corresponding selected column. The list of operators will vary depending on the type of the selected column. For example, the operators <, >, and = (among others) will be available for numeric columns, but object columns will have only the operator WITHIN.



Entering SQL Queries The Expert button can be used to invoke the following dialog:

This dialog allows the user to enter more complex queries using the standard DBMS SQL syntax.

To type in multi-line formatted SQL do the following:

• To get a new line press ENTER.

• To tab press <CTRL> TAB.

• To cut and paste from the clipboard, use <CTRL> X to cut, <CTRL> C to copy, and <CTRL> V to paste.

Value The type of the Value control also varies depending on the column type.

For object columns, this control will be a list box containing the values CURRENT_MAPPER and SELECTION.

For all other column types, this control will be an edit box, allowing the user to enter the proper type of data.

String values are enclosed in single quotes; e.g., ’New York’. Numerical values are entered without any quotes.For example, for a numeric column, the user might select the operator >, and enter a value of 0. This would select only rows in which that column contained a value greater than 0.

There are two wildcard characters that can be used with the LIKE operator: ’%’ and ’_’. The ’%’ wildcard character matches zero or more characters. The ’_’ wildcard character matches only one character.

Help Press the Help button for online help.

Cancel Press the Cancel button to abort the dialog.

OK .Press the OK button to accept the selected rows.



Making an Oracle Spatial Table MappableTo make an Oracle Spatial table mappable two things must occur:

• a proper entry must be made in the mapinfo.mapinfo_mapcatalog, which can be done from MapInfo Professional through the Table > Maintenance > Make DBMS Table Mappable option.

• The entry in the SDO_GEOM_METADATA table must be selectable by any user wanting to map a spatial table. See the Oracle documentation for details on SDO_GEOM_METADATA. The SDO_GEOM_METADATA table exists on a per user basis. If the spatial data table owner grants access to other users, they should also grant SELECT access to the SDO_GEOM_METADATA table as well.

Granting Access:

Granting access for the SDO_GEOM_METADATA is done using the SQL GRANT command. See the Oracle documentation for further details. A MapInfo Professional user needs SELECT access to the table. To obtain SELECT access: GRANT SELECT on SDO_GEOM_METADATA to <userid>. <userid> may be a specific user or PUBLIC to grant to everyone

Conflicts Detection For DBMS Live AccessBecause the records in a linked or live table are from a remote database, it is possible that other users may have changed or deleted them on the remote database since the table was downloaded into MapInfo Professional. As a result, conflicts may exist between the data residing on the remote database and the new data to be uploaded to the remote database.

OK Press to move to accept the query.

Cancel Press to cancel the query. You will be returned to the Open DBMS Table Options dialog.

Load Press to load an SQL statement that has been saved in a file. The Load button activates the Load SQL Query dialog. This dialog provides you with access to existing files containing SQL statements (*.sql files). When you load an SQL file, its format will be preserved.

Save Press to save the sql statement in a file for later use. The Save button activates the Save SQL Query dialog. Use this dialog to save newly constructed SQL statements, or modifications to existing statements. When you save an SQL file, its format will be preserved.

Once saved, the SQL statement appears in the list of available *.sql files in the Load SQL Query dialog.

Last Query Press to load the last query that was executed in this session of MapInfo.

Help Press for online help.



When saving a remote table, if MapInfo finds conflicts between the data on the remote database and any records in the remote table since it was downloaded, the Resolve Conflicts dialog displays. Use this dialog to resolve these conflicts.

The conflict resolution dialog will appear once for each conflicting record. At any point in this process, you may choose to leave this interactive mode and have the rest of the conflicts resolved automatically. You may use all local values or all server values.

Resolve Conflicts Dialog

Column Shows the name of the column in the record that has data which is in conflict and needs to be resolved. If the column name is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead.

Original DBMS Displays the original data as it appeared when extracted from the database.If the original data is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation displays.



Current MapInfo Shows the data as it appears in the MapInfo remote table you are trying to update. The MapInfo field will be blank if the record has been deleted from the MapInfo database. If the data from the MapInfo remote table is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the MapInfo field, below.

Current DBMS Shows data as it appears in the remote database at the time of the update. (This data might have been changed by another user since it was downloaded into a MapInfo remote table.)The Current field will be blank if the record has been deleted on the remote database, after being downloaded into a MapInfo remote table.If the current data from the remote database is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the Current field, below.

Current MapInfo: Check this box to update the remote database with the value from the MapInfo remote table.If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below.

Current DBMS Check this box to retain the current value on the remote database.If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below.

MapInfo This button selects all the MapInfo values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the MapInfo button will delete the record from the remote database. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, selecting the MapInfo button will insert the new record into the remote database.

DBMS Choose to select all the current DBMS values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the Current button will ignore the deletion and retain the current record in the remote database.If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, select the MapInfo to insert the new record into the remote database.

Column Shows the full name of the column highlighted in the list box.

Original DBMS Shows the full value of the original data highlighted in the list box.

Current MapInfo Shows the full value of the MapInfo data highlighted in the list box.

Current DBMS Shows the full value of the current remote database data highlighted in the list box.

OK Use the selected values to update of this record.



See: Import Command

New Table Command

Save Copy As Command

User’s Guide: Chapters 5 and 23

Stop Commit Terminates the entire update. A second dialog box will display to confirm this choice.

Automatic Choose to cause the interactive conflict resolution to end. A dialog displays allowing the user to select which of the automatic conflict–resolution modes will be used for the remainder of this update. One of two automatic modes can be selected from the dialog. Accept MapInfo values, or the values currently residing on the remote database.

Save Changes to MapInfo Table

Save the edits only to the local MapInfo table.

Save Changes to DBMS Table

Save edits to DBMS table on the remote database. Edits are also saved to the local MapInfo table.

Discard Changes Discard the changes made to the table.


Options Command Browse Menu

Options Command Browse Menu

Use Options to:• display or hide the grid pattern in the Browser window.

Options is available when:• a Browser window is the active window.

Menu Path• Browse > Options

Showing or Hiding a Browser’s Grid To show or hide a Browser’s grid:

1. Choose Browse > Options. The Browse Options dialog displays.

2. Check Show Grid Lines box to display grid lines.

or

Clear the box to hide grid lines.

3. Choose OK.



Options Command Layout Menu


Use Options to:• specify how window frames and their contents are displayed in a Layout window and

how the Layout window displays. Specify the margins and number of pages for the current Layout window.

Options is available when:• a Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Layout > Options

Specifying Layout OptionsTo access the Layout Display Options dialog:

• Choose Layout > Options. The Layout Display Options dialog displays.

Layout Display Options Dialog

Show Rulers Display rulers along the left side and top of the layout.

Show Page Breaks Display dotted lines in multi-page layouts to indicate page breaks.



Show Frame Contents

Layout Size

Always Allows you to have the contents of a frame display all the time, even when it is not active. For example, if you are changing the contents of a Map window that is also in the layout, select the Always option to see the effect on the layout as you make changes.

Only when Layout window is active

Display the contents of a frame only when it is the active window.

Never Display only the file name and frame type, even when the Layout is the active window. For example, choose Never when you are resizing and repositioning frames. The contents of each frame will not redraw each time you modify the layout.

Layout Size Use the Width and Height boxes to specify the number of pages in the layout. The display of the Total layout size changes as you adjust the width and height page settings.

Width_page Type the appropriate number of pages.

Height_page Type the appropriate number of pages.

Page Size Static display of the page size. The page size is the current printer setting.

Total Size Static display of the total width and height of the layout.

Autoscroll Autoscroll on is the default setting. When activated, the layout scrolls automatically when the mouse moves beyond the window edge during a Tool operation.





Additional Layout Options InformationNon-printing Area of the Page

When you are using a printer that cannot print to the full page, if you have set the page margins to zero, the non-printing area is grayed. For example, if the system is connected to a laser printer and you have set page margins to zero, you still see a small gray border at the edge of the Layout. That is the non-printing area of the page. Objects placed in the border zone will not print.

Paper Size

The paper size from the current printer settings are used. When you are set up to print to 8.5 inch by 11 inch paper in portrait orientation, it sets paper size to 8.5 inches wide and 11 inches high. When you are set up to print in landscape mode, it sets paper size to 11 inches wide and 8.5 inches high.


Print Setup Command


Options Command Map Menu


Use Options to:• specify Coordinate, Distance, and Area Units for a map. You can also show/hide

scroll bars, specify StatusBar display, designate clipping specifications and access the Choose Projection dialog.

Options is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Map > Options

Using the Map Options DialogTo access the Map Options dialog:

• Choose Map > Options. The Map Options dialog displays.

Map Options Dialog



Map Units

Display in StatusBar

Coordinate Units Specify the unit of measure from the drop-down list. Earth Maps: The menu always contains degrees. It may also contain the native units for the coordinate system if they are not degrees. Non-Earth Maps: inches, feet, yards, miles, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, links, rods, chains.

Distance Units Specify the distance units from the drop-down list.Earth Maps: inches, links, rods, chains, millimeters, centimeters, feet, US Survey feet, yards, miles, nautical miles, meters, kilometers.Non-Earth Maps: inches, feet, yards, miles, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers.One US Survey Foot is equal to 12/39.37 meters or approximately 30.48006 centimeters. A nautical mile equals 1852 meters.

Area Units Specify the area unit from the drop-down list. Earth Maps: square links, square rods, perches, square chains, roods, square feet, square yards, acres, square miles, square meters, hectares, square, kilometers, square chains, roods, square millimeters, square centimeters.Non-Earth Maps: square inches, square feet, square yards, acres, square miles, square millimeters, square centimeters, square meters, hectares, square kilometers, square links, square rods, perches, square chains, roods.

Distance/Area using Choose a calculation method:SphericalSpherical calculations are used for distance methods, which attempt to keep the measurement on the curved surface of the earth. The data is first converted to Latitude/Longitude and then a calculation is produced. Non-Earth projections cannot use spherical calculations.CartesianCartesian methods are used to perform calculations on data projected onto a flat plane. Cartesian coordinates are a pair of numbers, (x, y), defining the position of a point in a two-dimensional space by its perpendicular projection onto two axes which are at right angles to each other. Long/Lat projections cannot use Cartesian calculations.

Zoom (window width)

Display the horizontal width across the Map Window.

Map scale Display the map scale.

Cursor location Display the X and Y coordinates of the cursor’s location.



Apply Clip Region Using:

When resizing window




The Windows Device Clipping (no points, text) option emulates the Erase Outside method used in previous versions of MapInfo Professional. All objects are using Erase Outside except points and labels. Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects are always displayed and never clipped.


The Erase Outside method uses the MapInfo Erase Outside functionality to produce the clipping. This method is used in all versions prior to MapInfo 6.0. The Clip Region object is the Cutter object, and all other objects are Target objects for this operation. All objects are clipped using Erase Outside, excepts points and labels. In addition, Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects, raster, and grids are always displayed and never clipped.

Fit map to new window

Retain the same view but at the new size.

Preserve current scale Preserve the map scale; see more or less of the map when the Map window is resized, but at the same scale.

Scroll Bars Check to display scroll bars; clear to hide scroll bars.

Autoscroll When you use a tool in the Map or Layout window, the window scrolls if you drag the tool outside of the window boundaries. The window will continue to scroll until you release the mouse or move the cursor back into the window. Press Esc to stop scrolling; the tool remains active. To cancel the tool, press Esc after the scrolling has stopped. Autoscrolling works with any tool that can be dragged; it does not work with single-click tools, such as the Grabber or Info tools.



Projection button Access the Choose Projection dialog. See Projection Button.




Display Coordinates

See:User’s Guide, Appendix H

New Map Command, Change View Command

Degrees Decimal Choose to designate the default coordinate type as degrees in decimal.

Degrees Minutes Seconds

Choose to designate the default coordinate type as degrees, minutes, seconds, .e.g., 75 degrees 12’ 48”).

Military Grid Reference Choose to designate the default coordinate type as Military Grid Reference System, e.g. 41VLG3270555205 for 60 degrees longitude and 60 degrees latitude.


Options Command Redistrict Menu


Use Options to:• specify the districts sort order

or

• gridline display for a session

or

• as the default.

Options is available when:• a Districts Browser is active.

Menu Path• Redistrict > Options

Specifying Districts Browser OptionsTo specify display options for the Districts Browser:

• Choose Redistrict > Options. The Redistricter Options dialog displays.

Redistricter Options Dialog



Districts Sort Order

See:New Redistrict Window Command


Most Recently Used List districts in order used.

Alphabetical Place the districts in alphabetical order.

Unordered Do not place the districts in any specific order.

Show Grid Lines Check to display gridlines in the Districts Browser. Clear to remove gridlines.

Save as Default Check to save the redistricter options as defaults options. Clear to use them only for the current session.





Overlay Nodes Command Objects Menu


Use Overlay Nodes to: • add nodes to the target objects at all points where the target objects intersect the

currently selected objects.

Overlay Nodes is available when: • a map editing target has been chosen in the active edit window

and

• one or more objects are selected in any layer of the active Map window.

Menu Path• Objects > Overlay Nodes

Using Overlay Nodes to Add Nodes to an Object When you choose Overlay Nodes, MapInfo adds nodes to the current target objects. MapInfo calculates all points where the target objects intersect the currently selected objects; MapInfo then adds nodes to the target objects at the points of intersection unless the target objects already have nodes at those locations. If the target objects do not intersect the selected objects, MapInfo does not add any nodes.

If you use Overlay Nodes to add nodes to a line, MapInfo converts the line to a polyline. If you use Overlay Nodes to add nodes to an ellipse, rectangle or rounded rectangle object, MapInfo converts the object to a region. Overlay Nodes does not affect text or point objects, and you may not use point or text objects to add nodes to other objects.

To add nodes to an existing object:

1. Select one or more objects in the editable map layer of the active map window. These are the objects to which you want to add nodes.

2. Choose Objects > Set Target. The objects you selected in step 1 now appear in a different style to indicate that they are the editing target.

3. Select one or more objects from any layer of the active map window. These are objects that intersect the target object(s).

4. Choose Objects > Overlay Nodes. MapInfo adds nodes, if appropriate, to the target object(s).



Uses for Overlay Nodes When you add a street object to a map, the street that you add may cross existing streets. Usually, this indicates that the streets intersect (except in the case of an overpass, where there is no intersection). You may want to perform Overlay Nodes so that MapInfo adds a node to each street object at the point of intersection. Once the street objects share a common node, MapInfo’s Find command is able to locate the intersection of the two streets. To find an intersection, enter two street names in the Find dialog, separated by a pair of ampersand characters (e.g. “Broadway && River St”).

See:Add Node Button



Pack Table Command Table > Maintenance


Use Pack Table to:• compress tables to use less disk space and eliminate records that have been marked as

deleted. This command is not available for linked tables.

Pack Table is available when:• at least one table (that is not a query table) is open.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Pack Table

Packing a TableBefore you pack a table, make sure there is enough disk space to accommodate a copy of the database. You cannot pack a read-only file.

To pack a table:

Choose Table > Maintenance > Pack Table. The Pack Table dialog displays.



Pack Table Dialog

Packing a table may invalidate custom labels (labels entered using the Label tool) that have been previously saved to a workspace.


Pack table Choose the table to be packed.

Pack tabular data Remove deleted records to make the table smaller and increase processing speed.

Pack graphic data Pack only graphic information. If you have deleted map objects, packing the table will make the table smaller and increase processing speed.

Pack both types of data Pack both graphic and textual information.

OK Pack the appropriate table and remove deleted records.




Page Setup Command File Menu


Use Page Setup to:• designate paper size, paper source, orientation, and margin dimensions.

Additionally, choose a printer and printer connection.

Page Setup is available when:• a window is open.

Menu Path• File > Page Setup

Choosing a Printer and Default OptionsAll document windows in MapInfo Professional 7.0 have printer information associated with them. This information is initialized when a new window is created. The printer can be the Windows default printer, or a printer designated as the MapInfo Professional preferred printer. This choice is made in the Printer Preferences dialog and can be overridden on a per window basis using either the File > Print, or File > Page Setup options.Additionally, you can choose to save printer specifications in workspaces, and read printer information from workspaces. These options are in the Startup Preferences dialog.Install printers and configure ports through the Windows Control Panel. The options in the Setup dialog box vary, depending on the printer you install. The title of the setup dialog box also changes to reflect the printer.



To display the Page Setup dialog:

• Choose File > Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog displays.

Page Setup Dialog

Paper Size: Select paper size from drop down list.Source: Select paper feed tray from drop down list.

Orientation Portrait: Select to print in portrait mode.Landscape: Select to print in landscape mode.

Margins Designate page margins.

Set the margins. Inches is the default setting for margins. To change the unit of measure, choose Options > Preferences > System Settings and choose a unit of measure from the Paper & Layout units drop-down list.

Left Specify the distance between the left edge of the page and the left end of each line with no left indent.

Right Specify the distance between the right edge of the page and the right end of each line with no right indent.

Top Specify the distance between the top of the page and the top of the first line on the page.

Bottom Specify the distance between the last line on the page and the bottom of the page.



See:Print Command

Preferences; Printing; Output Preferences

Printer Display the Page Setup Printer dialog: Name: Displays the name of the printer designated in the Printer Preference dialog. Access this dialog by choosing Options > Preferences > Printer.To change the printer for this window, choose the printer name and path from the drop-down list.Status: Indicates the status of the designated printer.Type: Indicates the type of the designated printer.Where: Indicates the location of the designated printer.Size: Designate the paper size used in the designated printer.

OK Accept dialog specifications.

Cancel Cancel dialog specifications.


Paste Command Edit Menu

Paste Command Edit Menu

Use Paste to:• copy the clipboard contents into the table or window being edited.

Paste is available when:• a Browser window is active and there is text or an object in the clipboard

or

• a Map window is active, a layer is editable and an object is in the clipboardor

• the MapBasic window is active and there is text in the clipboardor

• a Layout window is active and an object is in the clipboard.

The table must be editable. It cannot be a query table, SQL group by table, view or a table in a read-only directory.

Menu Path• Edit > Paste

Pasting Text and Objects from the ClipboardTo paste text and objects from the clipboard:

1. If you are pasting text, position the cursor where you want the text to be pasted.

2. Choose Edit > Paste.

When pasting into a Map window, the object is pasted in the currently editable layer. If you are pasting an object with geographic coordinates, the object is pasted to those coordinates. For example, when you paste a copy of New York State onto a new map, New York is pasted to the geographic position on the earth’s surface (coordinates) where New York is located.

When text or an object is currently selected, it is replaced by the object being pasted into the table.

See:Copy Command

Cut Command


Pick Fields Command Browse Menu


Use Pick Fields to:• choose which fields display in the active Browser window. Temporarily rename a

column, create a new column or edit the expression that defines an existing column.

Pick Fields is available when:• a Browser window is active.

Menu Path• Browse > Pick Fields

or


Using Pick FieldsTo access the Pick Fields dialog:

Choose Browse > Pick Fields. The Pick Fields dialog displays.

Use the Pick Fields dialog to perform a variety of column and field display operations.

Pick Fields Dialog



Edit Browser Column

Adding Fields to a Browser WindowTo add field(s) to the Browser window:

1. Choose a field from the Fields in Table box.

or

Shift-click to select multiple fields from the Fields in Table list box.

2. Choose Add. The selected field(s) are added to the end of the Columns in Browser box.

3. Choose OK. The field(s) are added to the displayed Browser window.

Removing Fields from a Browser WindowTo remove field(s) from the Browser window:

1. Choose a field from the Columns in Browser box.

or

Shift-click to select multiple fields from the Columns in Browser box.

2. Choose Remove.

3. Choose OK. The field(s) are removed from the displayed Browser window.

Fields in Table Display a list of the fields in the current table.

Columns in Browser Display a list of the columns currently displayed in the Browser window.

Add Add a field to the Browser window.

Remove Remove a field from the Browser window.

Up Move the selected item in Columns in Browser up one column.

Down Move selected item in Columns in Browser down one column.

Name Temporarily rename the browser column.

Expression Display an expression as a browser column.

Assist Access the Expression dialog where you can specify an expression. See Expression Dialog.

OK Perform the specified options.





Creating a New Column by Applying an ExpressionCreate a new display column by applying an expression to an existing column or modifying the expression which defines an existing column. A column you modify or create using an Expression is for display purposes only. Modifications are not saved with the Browser window.

To create a new Browser window column:

1. Click on Expression in the Fields in Table box. The Expression Dialog displays.

2. Type an Expression or create an expression by choosing parameters from the Columns, Operators and Functions drop-down lists. See Functions.

3. Choose verify to validate the syntax of the expression. This step is optional.

4. Choose OK to accept the expression. The expression displays in the Edit Browser Column Name and Expression boxes.

5. Choose OK if the information in the Name and Expression boxes is accurate. See the following: Editing the Expression that Defines a Column and Expression Dialog.

Editing a Column NameTo edit a column name:

1. Choose a column from the Columns in Browser list.

2. Position the cursor in the name box.

3. Enter the new column name.

4. Choose OK. The column displays with its new name.

Editing the Expression that Defines a ColumnEdit only the column name or the expression that defines the column. A column you modify or create using an expression is for display purposes only. Modifications are not saved with the browser. To create an expression that can be saved, create the expression through the SQL Select command. Use File > Save Copy As to save the table.

There are two methods for defining an expression:

• Change the text in the Edit Browser Column Expression box.or

• Click Assist to display the Expression dialog that contains drop-down lists of columns, operators and functions. See Functions.



Editing an Expression Using Assist

To edit the expression that defines a column using Assist:

1. Choose the text in the Expression box to make the Assist button active.

2. Click the Assist button. The Expression dialog displays.

3. Edit the expression by choosing parameters from the Columns, Operators, and Functions drop-down lists.

4. Choose OK to execute the expression and modify the column display in the Browser window.

Editing an Expression by Changing Text

To edit the expression that defines the column by changing the text in the Expression box:

1. Choose the column name in the Columns in Browser column. The column name and expression display in the Edit Expression Name and Expression boxes.

2. Edit the expression in the Expression box.

3. Choose OK to execute the expression and modify the column display in the Browser window.

See:Functions

New Browser Window Command


Polygon Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Polygon button to:• access the Polygon tool. Use the Polygon tool to draw polygons one side at a time.

The Polygon button is available when:• at least one map with an editable layer is open.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Polygon button

Drawing PolygonsTo draw a polygon:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polygon button.

The cursor becomes a small cross.

2. Move the pointer to where you want to begin drawing and click the mouse button once. Drag the pointer to draw the first side or line.

3. Click the mouse button once when you want to terminate the current line and continue drawing another line from that endpoint.

Continue this process for each additional side. Point and click, and a new line dis-

plays between the previous end-point and the new point that you selected.

4. When you want to stop, double-click on the last end point.

MapInfo Professional draws the last side of the polygon, automatically connecting it with the starting point and fills the polygon with the default pattern as set by the Symbol Style option. For example, when you want to draw a triangle, draw two lines in a V shape, then double-click. MapInfo Professional draws a third line to close the shape.

When you press <SHIFT> while using the Polygon tool, the line segments will be constrained to horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree diagonal.

Drawing Multiple PolygonsTo draw a region consisting of more than one polygon:

1. Draw each polygon with the Polygon tool.

2. Select all polygons.

3. Use Objects > Combine to join the separate polygons into one region.

Add, delete, and move nodes by accessing Reshape mode once a polygon is chosen. See Reshape Button/Command.



Specifying Polygon Objects AttributesUse the Polyline Object dialog to determine the polyline’s location, length, line segments, sections, and smoothness.

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click the polyline object.


or

Use the Select tool and double-click the object.

The Region Object dialog displays.

Region Object Dialog

Bounds X1 and X2 These are the left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively, of the region’s minimum bounding rectangle (the smallest rectangle that can fully enclose the region.

Center X, Y The coordinate values for the center of the polygon or region. The center of the polygon is considered to be the center of its minimum bounding rectangle.

Total Area Total area of the polygon.

Total Perimeter Total perimeter of the line segments.

Line Segments The number of line segments in the polygon.



Polygons Indicates how many polygons make up the selected region. There are maps where an object consists of more than one polygon (for example, the state of Massachusetts has many islands) but is still considered one object. This attribute tells you how many polygons are in the chosen object.

Style Display the Region Style dialog. Specify fill and border for the polygon. See Region Style Command.

OK Perform the specified options.




Polygon Select Button MainToolbar

Polygon Select Button MainToolbar

Use the Polygon Select button to:• access the Polygon Select tool. Use the Polygon Select tool to draw a polygon and

search for and choose objects within a given polygon.

The Polygon Select button is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Polygon Select button

Searching for Objects Within a PolygonTo search for objects in a polygon shaped area:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Polygon Select button.

2. Position the cursor at one corner of the area from which the selection will be made and press the mouse button.

3. Keep the mouse button depressed and drag the cursor away from the starting point; click the mouse button once when you want to terminate drawing the line. Continue drawing a line from that endpoint.

4. Repeat for each additional side. To end; double-click the last end point. The objects in the topmost selectable layer within the polygon are selected.

To select objects from another layer, you must turn off selectable in Layer Control for

the upper layers. Only objects from one layer at a time are selected.

Adding Objects to the Selection SetPress <SHIFT> while using the Polygon Select tool to add newly selected objects to the previous selection.


Polyline Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Polyline button to:• access the Polyline tool. Use the Polyline Tool to draw polylines, a connected

sequence of lines that are not closed. These segments are then treated as one object.

The Polyline button is available when:• a Layout or Map window with an editable layer is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button

Drawing a PolylineTo draw a polyline:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button.

2. Move the pointer where you want to begin drawing. The cursor displays as a cross in the layer or editable Map window. Click the left mouse button once.

3. Move the pointer to draw the first line segment.

4. Click the mouse button once to terminate the current line and continue drawing another line from that endpoint.

5. Continue this process for each additional segment, point and click; a new line appears between the previous end point and the new point that you select.

6. Double-click the last endpoint to stop drawing.

Press <SHIFT> while using the Polyline tool, to constrain the line segments to horizontal, vertical, and 45-degree diagonals.

Drawing a Curved LineTo draw a curved line:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Polyline button; draw a figure.

2. When you are done, double-click on the object using the Select tool to display the attribute box.

3. Check the Smooth box.

or

Choose Objects > Smooth.

MapInfo Professional smooths the polyline into a curve.

Unsmooth changes a curved line or shape into an angular one.



To unsmooth the object:

Clear the Smooth box

or

Select the figure by using the Select button and choose Objects > Unsmooth.

The polyline is unsmoothed.

Specifying Polyline Objects AttributesUse the Polyline Object dialog to determine the polyline’s location, length, line segments, sections, and smoothness.

To specify object attributes:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button. Click the polyline object.

2. Choose Edit > Get Info. The Polyline Object dialog displays.

or

Use the Select tool and double-click the object. The Polyline Object dialog displays.

Polyline Object Dialog



Bounds X1 and X2, Y1 and Y2

X1 and X2 are the left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries of the polyline’s minimum bounding rectangle (the smallest rectangle that can fully enclose the polyline).

Center X, Y The coordinate of the midpoint of the middle segment. When there is an even number of segments, the middle segment is defined to be segment N/2 + 1, with N equal to the number of segments. If you have eight segments, MapInfo Professional reports the center of the fifth segment, or 8/2 + 1.

Total Length Total length of the line segments.

Line Segments The number of segments is the total number in all sections of the polyline.

Sections Number of sections in a multi-polyline object.

Smooth Smooth the polyline, making it into a continuous curve.

Line Style Double click to display the Line Style dialog. Specify style, color and width of the polyline. See Line Style.





Polyline Split Command Objects Menu


Use Polyline Split to:• split points, multipoints, and collections. Additionally split closed objects (regions,

ellipses, rectangles, and rounded rectangles, and linear objects (ploylines, lines and arcs).

Polyline Split is available when:• a map window is active

and

• there is a target in an editable layer

and

• polyline objects are selected as cutters

Menu Path• Objects> Polyline Split

Using Polyline SplitSplit points, multipoints, and collections, as well as closed objects (regions, ellipses, rectangles, and rounded rectangles, and open objects (ploylines, lines and arcs). The cutter object(s) must be a contiguous polyline object(s).

To use Polyline Split:

1. Make the target editable using the Layer Control dialog or using the editing popup in the Status Bar.

2. Select the object(s) to be used as targets.

3. Access Objects > Set Targets to designate the objects as targets.

4. Create the cutting object(s); the object must be contiguous, non-branching polylines.

5. Select the cutting object.

6. Choose Objects > Polyline Split.

7. A region object is created from the polyline to be used as the cutter object. A dialog displays: "Split marked target using selected region cutter?" Only objects that intersect the original polyline remain as targets. Some objects may be removed from the list of target objects.Choose Cancel to remove the region and cancel the operation.

8. Choose Next to display the Data Disaggregation dialog; choose Cancel to return the map to its original state.

9. Complete the Data Disaggregation dialog.



Data Disaggregation Dialog



Field Name Show the headings contained in the table.

Method Show the disaggregation method (blank, value, or area proportion) that will be applied to the corresponding field.







OK Perform the dialog options. After splitting the target object(s), MapInfo Professional deletes the original target from the table.




Preferences Command Options Menu


Use Preferences to:• specify the way in which you want MapInfo Professional to operate.

Preferences is available when:• Preferences is always available.

Menu Path

Options > Preferences

Specifying PreferencesSpecify settings that control the way MapInfo Professional operates. MapInfo Professional retains preferences from session to session.

To specify preferences:

• Choose Options > Preferences. The Preferences dialog displays.

Preferences Dialog



System Settings Specify clipboard operation, color defaults, screen size, paper and layout units of measure and number used for the undo feature. Displays System Settings Preferences dialog.

Map Window Specify how to resize a window, duplicate node movement, snap tolerance, designate clipping preferences, use of metric distance and area units and scroll bar display. Displays Map Window Preferences dialog.

Legend Window Specify title; subtitle and symbol text for the Legend Window.

Startup Specify the Quick Start dialog display and use of the mapinfow.wor workspace. Additionally, you can choose to save printer specifications in workspaces, and read printer information from workspaces. Displays the Startup Preferences dialog.

Address Matching Specify the placement of house numbers. Displays the Address Matching Preferences dialog.

Directories Specify directories MapInfo Professional will use to store and search, including Workspaces, MapBasic Programs, Import Files, Crystal Report files, Places Bar, theme templates.

Styles Designate highlighting for selected and target objects, as well as designating default object styles for region, line, symbol and text.

Output Settings Access dialog to control the on-screen display of a raster file, the printer output, and exporting choices.

Printer Designate a printer as the default MapInfo Professional printer. This printer can be the Windows default printer, or a printer you designate as your MapInfo Professional preferred printer. This choice can be overridden on a per window basis using either the File > Print, or File > Page Setup options.

OK Display the dialog for the selection.



System Settings Preferences Dialog

Copy to Clipboard

Color Defaults

When creating a thematic map, you need to distinguish between objects in different thematic layers. When you create a new thematic layer, MapInfo Professional chooses the initial colors and patterns based on the Color Defaults setting. Either a range of solid colors or a range of black and white patterns is used. Changing the color default settings does not affect existing maps or graphs.


Check to specify that you want only text copied to the clipboard. Clear to specify that you do not want text copied to the clipboard.




Copy graphic objects as a metafile (.wmf); metafiles are scalable representations of an object.



Aspect Ratio Adjustment

The aspect ratio is the relationship between the height and width of the screen. It can be adjusted to deal with various problems. When you are running under Windows and you choose Window Size as the map size when you print the map, the printout of the map is smaller than it appears on the screen. To compensate, measure the display area of the screen and enter those dimensions in the Aspect Ratio Adjustment box.

Pre-Version 4 Symbols

Date Window for 2-digit Years

Monitor Setting Check to have MapInfo Professional determine if your monitor is color or black and white and then uses either color or gray scale fill patterns.

Black & White View and print the thematic map in gray scale when working on a color monitor.

Color Use a black and white monitor, but print in color on a color printer.

Use custom screen size

Check to have MapInfo Professional calculate the display area of your monitor and displays its estimated width and height dimensions. Use these dimensions or enter your own.

Width Enter the width of the monitor’s display area in inches.

Height Enter the height of the monitor’s display area in inches.

Paper & Layout Units Specify the units used when you measure the size of objects in a Layout and the size of paper in the Print dialogs.

Number of Undo Objects

Set the number of times edits can be undone. You cannot undo the following; Revert, Save, Save As, or Modify Table, or any operations whose effects are primarily cosmetic. Set the undo number from 0, which deactivates the Undo system, to 800 undo records; the default is 10 undo records. For example, if you set the undo number to 120 and attempt to undo 121 records, the undo menu is unavailable. There is a memory limit for the Undo command. If you are editing extremely complex graphic objects, the number of reversible records may drop below this undo setting. See the Undo Command.

Display Using True Type Font

Check to draw vector symbols with characters from the MapInfo Professional Symbols font. Clear to draw vector symbols.

Turn date windowing off (use current century)

Use the current century; if you choose this option the Set date window to option is disabled.



Map Window Preferences Dialog

Set date window to Enter a number from 0-99. The number you enter displays in the statements below the prompt and whether the date will display with the prefix 19 or 20.






Default Projections

Warn Prior to Loss of

When resizing Map window

Specify how map windows resize (default). This setting has no effect on already open maps. Choose Map > Change View to override this default. See Change View.

Move duplicate nodes in

Specifies whether MapInfo Professional looks for duplicate nodes when you move a node by using Reshape. Since the nodes of various objects are often adjacent to one another, this features ensures boundaries are not accidently corrupted.

Table Projection Designate a default table projection for creating new tables, importing MIF, MBI, and IMG files and for Choose Projection options in dialogs. Override the defaults by accessing the Choose Projection option.This feature is not available for Universal Translator, ArcLink, or Importing DXF files.

Session Projection Designate a default MapBasic projection for returning coordinate values using a MapBasic window or Update Column. Compiled MapBasic applications are not affected by this preference.

Cosmetic Objects Check to have dialog display asking you to save cosmetic objects to a table before closing.

Map Labels Check to have dialog display asking you to save labels to a workspace before closing.

Thematic Labels Check to have dialog display asking you to save thematic layers to a workspace before closing.




Fit map to new window

Choose to see the same view of the map after enlarging or shrinking the Map window.

Preserve current scale Choose to change the map view after enlarging or shrinking the Map window. See a smaller or larger area depending on whether you enlarged or shrunk the window.

None of the layers Do not look for duplicate nodes when moving a node.

The same layer Move connected nodes in the same layer when an adjacent node is moved.



Apply Clip Region Using:




The Erase Outside method uses the MapInfo Erase Outside functionality to produce the clipping. This method is used in all versions prior to MapInfo Professional 6.0. The Clip Region object is the Cutter object, and all other objects are Target objects for this operation. All objects are clipped using Erase Outside, excepts points and labels. In addition, Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects are always displayed and never clipped.


The Windows Device Clipping (no points, text) option emulates the Erase Outside method used in previous versions of MapInfo Professional. All objects are using Erase Outside except points and labels. Points and labels will be completely displayed only if the point or label point lie inside the Clip Region object. Text objects, rasters, and grids are always displayed and never clipped.

Distance/area using Choose a calculation method:SphericalSpherical calculations are used for distance methods, which attempt to keep the measurement on the curved surface of the earth. The data is first converted to Latitude/Longitude and then a calculation is produced. Non-Earth projections cannot use spherical calculations.CartesianCartesian methods are used to perform calculations on data projected onto a flat plane. Cartesian coordinates are a pair of numbers, (x, y), defining the position of a point in a two-dimensional space by its perpendicular projection onto two axes which are at right angles to each other. Latitude/Longitude projections cannot use Cartesian calculations.This option has no effect on already open Maps. Use Map > Options to change existing Map units.

Scroll Bars Choose to display window scroll bar.

Autoscroll Choose to automatically enable Autoscroll for all newly created map and layout windows.Override the default on a per window basis by accessing Map > Options.

Show InfoTips Choose to display the value of an object’s label expression in a ToolTip-like bubble.

Automatic Raster Zoom Layering

Choose the default mode for displaying zoom layering when adding a raster layer to a map.



Display Coordinates

Automatic Grid Zoom Layering

Choose the default mode for displaying zoom layering when adding a grid layer to a map.

Enable Hardware Acceleration for 3DMap Window

Uncheck “Enable Hardware Acceleration for 3DMap Window” to allow MapInfo Professional to display 3DMaps and Prism Maps without using your video card acceleration capability.While disabling hardware rendering will diminish performance, it avoids potential failure when using certain graphic adapters and drivers.

Handler for New Grids

Choose which grid handler to use when creating grid files. The grid handler determines the format of the grid files generated during the Create Grid Thematic operation. The list of grid handlers displays the grid handlers you have installed on your system.

MapInfo Professional 7.0 includes these grid handlers: DEM-USGS ASCII (.dem), GTOPO30 (.dem) and DTED levels 1, 2, 3 (.dt0, .dt1, .dt2). These grid handlers are read-only; they can not be used to create grid files during the Create Grid Thematic interpolation process.

If using the DEM, GTOPO30, & DTED grid handlers with hillshading, a separate file will be created to store the hillshade information. You will be prompted for writable location to pace the .tab file.The hillshade file is stored in the same location as the grid file and has the same basename as the grid with the extension ".mih". If the grid file is read-only (ie; on a CD-ROM) the relief shading data can not be

enabled.

You cannot hillshade Vertical Mapper grids.

For more information on reading and writing, or using your own grid formats, contact MapInfo Corporation for information on the Grid Engine Toolkit.

Degrees Decimal Choose to designate the default coordinate format as degrees in decimal.

Degrees Minutes Seconds

Choose to designate the default coordinate format as degrees, minutes, seconds, .e.g., 75 degrees 12’ 48”.

Military Grid Reference Choose to designate the default coordinate format as Military Grid Reference System, e.g. 41VLG3270555205 for 60 degrees longitude and 60 degrees latitude.



Legend Window Preferences Dialog

Startup Preferences Dialog

Legend Window

Title Pattern Designates the text that displays at the top of each frame. The first occurrence of a # character will be replaced with the name of the map layer on which the frame is based. For example, # Legend for layers States, will produce the title States Legend. If you prefer to have Legend precede the layer name, enter Legend of # . This will produce Legend of States.


Style Name Pattern Designate the text that displays next to each symbol in a frame. The % character will be replaced by the text Line, Point, Region, as appropriate. Use the # character as described in the default title pattern section. For example, %of # will expand to Region of States.

Border Check to place a border around the legend. Click the box displaying the X to display the Line Style dialog. Choose a border style.



Workspace Options

Address Matching Preferences Dialog

Save MAPINFOW.WOR when exiting MapInfo

Automatically save your work setup as a workspace when you exit.

Load MAPINFOW.WOR when starting MapInfo

Load this workspace whenever you start MapInfo.

Save Queries in Workspaces

Check to save queries in workspaces automatically when you exit MapInfo.

Save Printer Information into Workspaces

Save printer information with the workspace, including information that overrides the printing specifications made in the Printer Preferences dialog.

Restore Printer Information from Workspaces

Restore printer information when opening a workspace. If the printer designated in the workspace is not available or this option is not checked, the printer specified in Options > Preferences > Printer will be used.

Display Quick Start Dialog

Check to display the Quick Start dialog each time you start MapInfo. The Quick Start Dialog offers the following options: Restore Previous Session; Open Last Used Workspace; Open a Workspace; Open a Table. See Quick Start.

Default DBMS Connection

If DBMS support is installed, designate a DBMS connection preference.Choose Set to display a dialog to select an open connection.Choose Clear to clear the connection; no connection will open when MapInfo Professional starts.






Directories

House number comes before street name

Place the house number before the street name when specifying addresses.

House number comes after street name

Place the house number after the street name when specifying addresses.




Initial Directories for File Dialogs

Specify the paths MapInfo should use as default for opening and saving Tables, Workspaces, MapBasic Programs, Import Files, SQL and Saved Queries, Theme Templates, New Grids, Crystal Report, Places Bar and Graph support files. There are four MapInfo Professional Places options: Table; Workspaces; MBX and Remote Table.

To set a path, click the file type and click modify, or double click the file type. The Choose Directory dialog displays; select the appropriate path.



Output Settings Preferences Dialog

Search Directories for Tables

Specifies the directories MapInfo will search to find tables without fully qualified paths referenced in workspaces or MapBasic programs. Subdirectories of any search path listed are also searched. You can have up to four entries in the list. A more general path requires a longer search time. Click Modify, Add or Remove to edit the list of paths.






Display Display Raster In True Color When Possible: Check to use 24-bit true color to display raster and grid images. This option can be executed when the image is 24 bit and the screen color depth is greater than 256 colors.Dither Method: When it is necessary to convert a 24-bit image to 256 colors, choose whether to use halftone or error diffusion. Dithering will occur if ”Display Raster In True Color When Possible” is disabled or if the screen color depth is set to 256 colors or less.

PrintingOutput Method Print Directly to Device: Use the printing process employed by

MapInfo Professional versions prior to 6.0.Print using Enhanced Metafile: This printing process generates an enhanced metafile containing the print contents and sends the Enhanced Metafile to the printer. As long as the device can handle the metafile, this option can result in much smaller spool sizes and faster printing without sacrificing quality. Print Border For Map Window: Check to print a black border on the printer output.

Internal Handling For Printing Transparent Vector: Check to allow MapInfo to handle transparent fill patterns or bitmap symbols internally. If unchecked, device handling occurs.

Use ROP Method to Display Transparent Raster: ROP method determines how to display transparent images. When this option is checked, the same method is used as is used for on-screen display of transparent images. This method may not be good when printing the output. You should determine the setting appropriate to your output requirements.

Print Raster In True Color When Possible: Use 24-bit true color to print raster and grid images. This is possible when the image is 24 bit and the printer supports more than 256 colors.

Printing Dither Method: When it is necessary to convert a 24-bit image to 256 colors, choose whether to use halftone or error diffusion. This option is used when printing raster and grid images. Dithering will occur if “Print Raster In True Color When Possible” is disabled or if the printer color depth is 256 colors or less.



Windows Export Export Border: Check to include the black border when exporting.

Internal Handling For Exporting Transparent Vector: Check to allow MapInfo to handle transparent fill patterns or bitmap symbols internally. If unchecked, device handling occurs.

Internal Handling For Exporting Transparent Raster Check to allow MapInfo to handle transparent raster or grid internally.

Export Raster In True Color When Possible: Use 24-bit true color when exporting maps containing raster and grid images. This is possible when the image is 24 bit and the export supports more than 256 colors.

Export Dither Method: Choose when it is necessary to convert a 24 image to 256 colors, use either halftone or error diffusion. This option is used when printing raster and grid images. Dithering occurs if ”Print Raster In True Color When Possible” is disabled or if the printer color depth is 256 colors or less.



Printer Preferences Dialog

Windows Default Choose to use the default Windows printer. If this option is selected, the MapInfo Preferred Printer Setup options are not available for modification. The Status, Type and Where options in the MapInfo Preferred Printer Setup section of the dialog display information for the Default Printer. If you select this option, MapInfo will always use the current printer that is set as the default in Windows. The Windows default printer can be changed through Control Panel.

MapInfo Preferred Printer Setup

Choose to use the printer designated in MapInfo Preferred Printer Setup options to print from MapInfo Professional. This allows you set a specific printer that will be associated with new windows.

MapInfo Preferred Printer Setup:Name: Choose the printer name and path from the drop-down list.Status: Indicates the status of the designated printer.Type: Indicates the type of the designated printer.Where: Indicates the location of the designated printer.Size: Designate the paper size used in the designated printer.Orientation: Choose portrait or landscape paper orientation.To print from MapInfo using a different printer, or printing designations other than those specified in the Printer Preferences dialog, access either the File > Print, or File > Page Setup dialogs.



Using Default PreferencesMapInfo stores the preference settings in the file mapinfow.prf in the windows/system or your personal home directory (directory where files such as the windows.ini file is stored). If at any time you want to return to the MapInfo’s default settings, rename mapinfow.prf and delete it. Then, when you use MapInfo, settings will be returned to the MapInfo defaults. If you want to return to your own settings, rename your setting file to mapinfow.prf.

StylesUse the Styles Preferences option to designate default styles for Region, Symbol, Line and Text. Additionally, set default Highlight Control for Line, Region and Multipoint Objects. Access Map > Layer Control > Display > Style Override OR Options > (region, line, text, symbol,) to override these designations.

Highlight Control


Selected Objects Specify the color, pattern and size of lines and the color and pattern for selected objects in selectable layers. The buttons correspond, in order: lines, regions, multipoint objects.

Target Objects Specify the color, pattern and size of lines and the color and pattern for target objects in selectable layers. The buttons correspond, in order: lines, regions, multipoint objects.


Previous View Command Map and Layout Menus

Previous View Command Map and Layout Menus

Use Previous View to:• return to the last view of a map or layout.

Previous View is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active and its view has been changed at least once.

Menu Path• Map > Previous View

or

• Layout > Previous Viewor


Viewing a Previous Map or LayoutBy using Previous View repeatedly, you can toggle between two views of the map or layout.

To return to the previous view of a map:

Choose Map > Previous View.

To return to the previous view of a layout:

Choose Layout > Previous View.

If you frequently use Previous View it is more efficient to create two maps of the same table, each with a different view. Then, you can view the two simultaneously.

See:Grabber Button

Zoom-in Button

Zoom-out Button


Print Command File Menu


Use Print to:• print the contents of a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window and set

printing specifications appropriate to the type of window contents.

Print is available when:• a Layout, Browse, Map, Redistrict or Graph window is active, and at least one printer

driver is installed on a system.

Menu Path• File > Print

Using the Print DialogAccess the Print Dialog to specify the printer, print range number of copies and display information on printer status.

Print Dialog

Printer

Name Displays the current printer. Select another printer from the drop down list.

Status Indicates if printer is currently busy.

Type Displays printer name.



Advanced Printing

Where Displays printer path.

Comment Displays comment entered in Windows Printer Properties dialog. See your system documentation.

Properties Displays printer information; see your system documentation.

Print to File Prints document to a file, not to the printer. You will be prompted for a file name and path.

Print Range All: Print entire document.Pages from: to: Specify from/to range of pages to be printed.

Copies Use the drop down list to specify number of copies to be printed.

OK Print the document using the designated settings.

Cancel Cancel the printing options.

Options Click to display settings appropriate to the type of window to be printed: map; browser; layout; redistricts; graph. See Printing Options.

Advanced Display the Advanced Printing dialog.




Printing OptionsClick the Options button in the Print dialog to display dialogs appropriate to the type of window being printed.

Printing

Output Method Print Directly to Device: Use the printing process employed by MapInfo Professional versions prior to 6.0.Print using Enhanced Metafile: This printing process generates an enhanced metafile containing the print contents and sends the Enhanced Metafile to the printer. As long as the device can handle the metafile, this option can result in much smaller spool sizes and faster printing without sacrificing quality. Print Border For Map Window: Check to print a black border on the printer output.

Internal Handling For Printing Transparent Vector: Check to allow MapInfo to handle transparent fill patterns or bitmap symbols internally. If unchecked, device handling occurs.


Print Raster In True Color When Possible: Use 24-bit true color to print raster and grid images. This is possible when the image is 24 bit and the printer supports more than 256 colors.

Printing Dither Method: When it is necessary to convert a 24-bit image to 256 colors, choose whether to use halftone or error diffusion. This option is used when printing raster and grid images. Dithering will occur if “Print Raster In True Color When Possible” is disabled or if the printer color depth is 256 colors or less.



Using the Browser Print Options Dialog

Rows

Using the Map Print Options Dialog

Print Map Dialog

All Print all the rows of the browser.

From Specify the number of the first row you want to print.

To Specify the number of the last row you want to print.

OK Print the browser using the specified options.





Map Size

Map Contents

Window Size Set the printed map to the same size as the window on the screen. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option.

Fit to Page Set the output to take up the full printed page, even though the window may be much smaller than the page. This size displays in the two text boxes associated with the Custom size option.

Custom Scale Specify a custom scale. For example, one inch on the output page equals 100 miles. To change the scale (paper and layout units), use Options > Preferences > System Settings to access the System Settings Preferences dialog.

Same as Window Print a map that is the same as the mapper window. Set the output to the same content and proportions as the window.

Centered on Window Set the output to be centered on the window. Note that this setting may cause the output to print beyond the extents of the window, depending on how you set its size, scale and margins.

Custom Width Specify the width of the printed map. Also shows width for non-custom maps.

Height Specify the height of the printed map. Also shows height for non-custom maps.When you specify a size smaller than one page, the map is centered on the page. Custom states the size of the printed image (width and height) in the default unit set by Preferences (Options > Preferences > System Settings). You can specify a size larger than one page, and the map is automatically printed on as many pages as necessary.

OK Print the map using the specified options. Depending on the printer configuration, the output goes to the printer you specified in the dialog. Consult the system coordinator for the configuration.





Using the 3DMap Printing Options Dialog

3DMap Print Options Dialog

Using the Graph Print Options Dialog

Size Fit to Page: print the map using the width and height dimensions designated in the Options > Printer >Printer Preferences dialog.Custom: designate the height and width of the 3Dmap; when you change either the height or width, MapInfo changes the other dimension to preserve the correct proportion. You cannot designate a size larger than the default height and width.

Width: Displays the default paper width. Height: Displays the default paper height.



Size

Note: Pen Plotter UsersDepending on what device driver you are using, you may see unsatisfactory results using a pen plotter to output certain line styles. In the Line Style dialog, the list of available styles ends with several styles that may not plot properly.

If you do plan to do extensive map editing using patterned line styles, you may want to print or plot a small sample of the line style as a test, before you begin editing.

Printing a Map LegendTo print a map legend, place the map and its legend into a layout. You can then print the layout.

or

Using the utilities program, Legends.mbx, embed the legend in the map window and print the map window.

Cartographic legends cannot be embedded in a map window.

See:Legend Button, New Browser Window Command

New Graph Window Command, New Layout Window Command

New Map Window Command, New Redistricter Window Command, Print Setup Command

Window Size Print the graph exactly as it is on the screen.

Fit to Page Print the graph with the same aspect ratio as the window on the screen (that is, the same proportions of width to height), but enlarge (or shrink) the graph to fit either the page width or height.

Full Page Print the graph to completely fill one page, changing the aspect ratio to fit both the page width and height.

Custom Specify a size. When the custom size is larger than one page, MapInfo automatically spreads the graph over the correct number of pages to print the size you request.

Width Specify the appropriate width of the printed graph. Also, show width for non-custom graphs.

Height Specify the appropriate height of the printed graph. Also, show height for non-custom graphs.

OK Print the graph using the specified options. Depending on the printer configuration, the output goes to the printer you specified in the dialog. Consult the system coordinator for the configuration.




Projection Button

Projection Button

Use the Projection button to:• specify table projection.

Menu Path:Access the Projection Button through the following paths:

• File > New Table > New Table Structure

• Table > Maintenance > Table Structure

• Table > Maintenance > Make DBMS Table Mappable

• Table > Import > DXF

• File > Open > Raster Image > Register Raster Image dialog

• Digitizer Setup

• Options > Map Menu

Specifying a ProjectionTo specify a projection:

Click Projection. The Choose Projection dialog displays.

Choose Projection Dialog

Non-Earth Coordinate Bounds DialogThe Non-Earth Coordinate System dialog allows you to specify coordinates for a non-earth map. Bounds are required for non-Earth coordinate systems.

You may want to create a non-earth map, such as a floor plan. Unlike those in an earth map, the coordinates of objects in the floor plan are not referenced to positions on the earth. The objects’ coordinates are referenced to the floor plan itself, generally representing distance from the lower-left corner of the floor plan.

Category Choose a projection from the Category drop-down list. See the MapInfo User’s Guide, Appendix H: Creating Your Own Coordinate System and the User’s Guide, Chapter 23 for further description.

MapInfo displays Longitude/Latitude maps using an Equidistant Cylindrical projection. Access Map > Options to change this option.

Category Members Choose the appropriate coordinate unit from the Category Members drop-down list.

OK Change the table projection as specified.



Projection Button

This dialog allows you to specify the bounds and units for a non-earth coordinate system. You can use positive or negative numbers to specify the minimum and maximum X and Y values.

Coordinate Bounds

If you want to create a floor plan that is 20 inches wide and 10 inches high, choose inches and enter the following numbers for Coordinate bounds:

Min X: 0Min Y: 0

Max X: 20Max Y: 10

When you create a non-earth map, it is important to specify bounds that are large enough to contain the objects you want to put in the map.

See:User’s Guide: Appendix H



Quick Start

Quick Start

Use Quick Start to:• specify startup options for your next session.

Menu Path• Options > Preferences> Startup > Display Quick Start Dialog.

Quick Start DialogTo access the Quick Start dialog:

Start MapInfo. The Quick Start dialog displays.

Quick Start Dialog

See:Open Table Command, Open Workspace Command

Restore Previous Session

Open the same windows, tables, and files that were open when you exited from your last session.

Open Last Used Workspace (Workspace Name)

Open the workspace last used. If No Workspace displays, no workspace was used in your last session.

Open a Workspace Open a workspace. The Open Workspace dialog displays. See Save Workspace Command.

Open a Table Open a Table; the Open Table dialog displays. See Open Table Command.

OK Begin session using designated option.

Cancel Begin session with no tables open.


Radius Select Button Main Toolbar

Radius Select Button Main Toolbar

Use the Radius Select button to:• access the Radius Select tool. Use the Radius Select tool to select objects within a

circular region.

The Radius Select Button is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Radius Select button

Searching for Objects Within a CircleTo search for objects within a given radius:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Radius Select button.

2. Position the cursor at the center of the area from which the selection will be made and press the mouse button.

3. Keep the mouse button depressed, and drag the cursor away from the center point. As you do so, a dotted circle forms, indicating the area chosen. The exact radius displays in the StatusBar at the screen’s lower-left corner.

4. Release the mouse button when the circle reaches the appropriate radius. The objects in the topmost selectable layer within the radius are selected.

The Radius Select tool selects objects whose centroid is within the chosen area; the object does not have to be completely bounded by the radius. To select objects from another layer, you must turn off selectable in Layer Control for the upper layers. Only objects from one layer at a time are selected.

Adding Objects to the Selection SetPress <SHIFT> while using the Radius Select tool to add the newly selected objects to the previous selection.

See:Boundary Select Button

Marquee Select Button

Select Button



Recent Files File Menu

Recent Files File Menu

Use Recent Files to:• display a list of the ten most recently used files.

Recent Files is available when:• always available.

Menu Path• File > Recent Files

Using Recent FilesClick on any file in the Recent Files list to display that file.


Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Rectangle button to:• access the Rectangle tool. Use the Rectangle tool to draw rectangles and squares in an

editable map or layout.

The Rectangle button is available when:• a Layout or a Map window with an editable layer is active.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Rectangle button

Drawing a RectangleTo draw a rectangle:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Rectangle button.

2. Move the pointer where you want to begin creating the rectangle.

3. Press and hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the rectangle.

The shape displays and changes size and proportion as you move the pointer.

4. Release the mouse button to finish creating the shape.

Rectangles are closed figures. They are filled with the default fill pattern and/or color as specified in Options > Region Style.

Drawing a SquareTo draw a square:

Press <SHIFT> while using the Rectangle tool.

Note: the sides of a rectangle are always true horizontal and vertical, even when you change the map’s projection. If you want the sides of a rectangle to adjust when you change the map’s projection, create four-sided region objects instead of rectangle objects.

Specifying Rectangle Object AttributesTo specify the attributes of a Rectangle:

Use the Select tool and double-click the object. The Rectangle Object dialog dis-plays.

or

Select the object.

Choose Edit > Get Info. The Rectangle Object dialog displays.



Rectangle Object Dialog

As with all graphic objects, you can change the object by changing its attributes in the [Name] Object dialog. You can change these attributes when the layer is editable or view the attributes whenever the layer is selectable.

Bounds X1 and X2 Left and right boundaries. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively.

Center X, Y Coordinate values of the rectangle’s center.

Width Left to right distance. Set the width of the object.

Height Top to bottom distance. Set the height of the object.

Style Display the Region Style dialog to specify the style of the object. See Region Style Command.





Redraw Window Command Window Menu

Redraw Window Command Window Menu

Use Redraw Window to:• redraw the active window.

Redraw Window is active when:• a window is active.

Menu Path

Window > Redraw Window

Using the Redraw Window CommandWhen you add a new table as the top layer of a map, only the effected portions of the map are redrawn. When switching between open windows, the map is preserved, so the entire window does not have to be redrawn. Also, use Redraw Window after pressing <ESCAPE> to interrupt the window drawing.


New Graph Window Command





Refresh DBMS Table Button DBMS Toolbar

Refresh DBMS Table Button DBMS Toolbar

Refresh DBMS Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Refresh DBMS Table to:• refresh a MapInfo linked table with the most recent data residing on the remote

database for that linked table.

Refresh DBMS Table is available when:• at least one linked table is open and there are no pending edits against it.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Refresh DBMS Table

or

• DBMS Toolbar > Refresh DBMS button

Using Refresh DBMS TableTo Refresh a table:

1. Choose Table > Maintenance > Refresh DBMS Table. The Refresh Table dialog displays.

2. Choose the name of the table to be refreshed from the refresh table list.

3. Choose OK. The specified table is refreshed.


Unlink DBMS Table Command

Open Command


Region Style Button Drawing Toolbar


Region Style Command Options Menu

Use the Region Style button and command to:• specify the color, pattern and outline of new or existing closed objects.

The Region Style command and button is available when:• The Region Style command and button is always available.

Menu Path• Options > Region Style

or

• Drawing Toolbar > Region Style button

Using Region Style Region Style applies color and pattern to closed objects such as ellipses, rectangles, rounded rectangles, window frames and polygons. To change the color and pattern of existing map objects, they must be editable. See Layer Control Button/Command.

To change the attributes of line, text and point objects, use the Line Style, Text Style and Symbol Style options.

Specifying the Color and Pattern of New ObjectsTo specify the color(s) and pattern of new objects:

1. Make the layer where the objects are to be created editable and deselect any selected objects.

2. Choose Options > Region Style. The Region Style dialog displays.



Region Style Dialog

Fill

Pattern Choose a palette for patterns. If you do not want to use a pattern, choose the letter N, for none; the foreground and background color are disabled. If you choose the solid black pattern, the background color is disabled.

Color Choose a color for the object(s)’ foreground. The Sample box displays the pattern using the foreground color you chose. The foreground color is applied to the part of the pattern that displays as black. Therefore, to make the object a solid color, choose the solid black pattern in the Fill Pattern palette and a color from the Foreground Color palette. The color you chose displays in the Sample box as a solid-colored region.

Background Color Check the box to display a background color; clear for a “transparent” background.

Choose a color for the object’s background. The background color is applied to the part of the pattern that displays as white. Background color is grayed if you have chosen the solid black pattern.



Border

Changing the Color and Pattern of an Existing Region To change the color(s) and pattern of an existing object:

1. Make the layer where the objects reside editable.

2. Choose an object or multiple regions.

3. Choose Options > Region Style. The Region Style dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description.

4. Choose OK. The object’s color and pattern changes according to the selections.

Using a Black and White MonitorWhen you are using a black and white monitor (or a color monitor with a monochromatic display), MapInfo provides you with a menu of 8 color options. Although these colors appear as various shades of gray on the screen, they print in the correct color when you are using a color output device.


Style Choose the border line style.

Color Choose the border line color.

Width Choose the border line width.Pixels: Enter a number from 1-7, each number represents a line width in pixels.Points: Select a point size from the drop-down list, or enter a point size.

Sample Display a sample of the pattern and color selections.

OK Apply the fill and border selections to selected objects or uses the selections when you create new objects.






Use Register Raster Image to: • prepare a raster image for use with MapInfo.

Menu PathThe Image Registration dialog displays when you open a raster image file in MapInfo using File > Open Table of the type Raster Image, and you select "Register" from the dialog.

Once you have opened a raster image table, open the Image Registration dialog by choosing Table > Raster > Modify Image Registration.

Raster Images A raster image is a type of computerized image that consists of rows of tiny dots (pixels). If you have a scanner and scanner software, you can create a raster image by scanning a paper map. After you scan a map image and store the image in a file, you can display the file using MapInfo.

There are many different raster image file formats. MapInfo can read the following types of raster image files: JPEG, GIF, TIFF, PCX, BMP, TGA (Targa), and BIL (SPOT satellite images), SID, PNG, PSD, WMF, ECW, GRD, GRC, ASRP, ADRG, CADRG, NITF. See the MapInfo Professional User’s Guide, Appendix E: Registering SPOT Images.

For best results we recommend using a high resolution display.

Registering a Raster Image When you register a raster map image, you enter map coordinates (e.g. longitude/latitude degrees), and indicate which locations on the raster image correspond to those coordinates. Register each raster image before displaying the image in MapInfo, so that MapInfo can perform geographic calculations, such as distance and area calculations, when displaying the raster map.

The first time you open a raster image file, the Image Registration dialog displays. Complete this dialog to register the raster image. The raster image’s registration information is stored in a table file. Therefore, you only need to register a raster image once.

Raster image files provided by MapInfo are already registered. You do not need to perform the registration process when you display the sample raster data included with MapInfo.

If you have not yet registered the raster image in MapInfo, perform the following:



When you know the control point coordinates:

1. Open the raster file by choosing File > Open Table and Raster Image file format. Choose the raster image file and choose Open. The Display/Register dialog displays: choose Open. A preview of the raster image appears in the lower half of the dialog. See the following: Image Registration Dialog.

2. Specify the projection of the raster image by choosing the Projection button. It is important to use the proper projection for the image to minimize image distortion when overlaying vector map layers. You cannot change the projection from the Map window.

3. Click on a point in the preview image. The Add Control Point dialog displays. Specify the coordinates from the paper map in the dialog. The points become marked on the preview image. Enter at least three control points; more if you do not know the projection or the image does not have a projection, such as an aerial photograph. Click OK to display the raster image.

When you don’t know the control point coordinates:

1. Open the raster file by choosing File > Open and Raster Image file format. Choose the raster image file and choose Open. The Display/Register dialog displays: choose Open. A preview of the raster image appears in the lower half of the dialog.

2. Specify the appropriate projection for the raster image by choosing the Projection button. If you do not set the projection, MapInfo defaults to Longitude/Latitude.

3. To begin adding control points, click on a location in the preview. The Add Control Point dialog displays showing the point’s location in pixels. Click OK. The point with no X and Y coordinates is listed in the Image Registration dialog. You will specify the coordinates in a following step.

4. Choose at least three more control points in the same way. Use the scroll bars to move to other areas of the image. Choose points that can be easily identified and selected in a Map window.

5. Open the corresponding vector map table in a Map window. You may have to move the Image Registration dialog to access the Map window.

6. Choose Table > Raster > Select Control Points from Map.

7. Highlight Pt 1 in the Image Registration dialog. Click on the equivalent point in the map window. The Add Control Point dialog displays showing the map X and Y coordinates for the vector point location. Click OK to accept the coordinates. MapInfo transfers them to the Image Registration dialog.

8. Repeat for the remaining control points by repeating step 7 for at least three control points. To ensure accurate results, enter five or six control points. Each control point that you add helps MapInfo associate earth coordinates with locations on the raster image. Ideally, you should have at least one control point at or near each corner of the image.



The number of control points needed depends on the nature of the raster image. If

you cannot determine the map’s projection, or if you are working with an image that

does not have an actual map projection, such as an aerial photograph, you may want

to enter twenty or more control points.

9. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster image will display in the Map window under the vector layer.

Remember that any location west of the Prime Meridian has a negative longitude, and any location south of the Equator has a negative latitude. Thus, 73 degrees West corresponds to the X value -73.

If you are entering coordinates in degrees, you must enter decimal degrees, as opposed to degrees/minutes/seconds. Use the Degree Converter tool in the Tool Manager option to do this. When you complete the Image Registration dialog, the registration information is saved in a table (.tab) file. In later MapInfo sessions, you can re-open the table by choosing File > Open Table without repeating the registration process, and without having to choose Raster Images as the File Type in the Open Table dialog.

Determining Map CoordinatesIf the raster map image shows a graticule (a grid of longitude/latitude lines), you can determine map coordinates by noting the longitude/latitude labels along the graticule.

If the map does not show a graticule, you may be able to determine map coordinates by locating prominent map features, e.g. the North-West corner of a region, and then using another MapInfo table as a reference to determine the coordinates of those prominent features. For a discussion of this process, see the following: Choosing Control Points from an Existing Map.

Choosing Control Points from an Existing MapAnother method of adding control points is by displaying a Map window next to the Image Registration dialog, and then adding control points by clicking on the Map window.

To choose control points by clicking on an existing Map window:

1. Open a Map window. Ideally, this Map window should contain a non-raster MapInfo table which covers roughly the same area as the raster image. For example, if the raster image shows a map of Australia, the vector Map window should also show Australia. The Map window does not need to contain any raster images.

2. Open a raster image file as described above: choose File > Open, set File of Type to Raster Image, choose the image file that you wish to open. Select "register" at the Display/Register dialog. The Image Registration dialog displays. Choose a Projection for the image.

3. Choose Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map. This action puts MapInfo in a special mode which allows you to select control points by clicking on a Map window.



4. Move the Image Registration dialog off to the side of the screen, so that you can see the Map window. Do not close the dialog; move it to the side.

5. Move the cursor over the Map window, to a prominent map feature (e.g. the north-east corner of a region). Choose a map feature that appears in both the Map window and the raster image.

6. Click on the prominent feature in the Map window. The Add Control Point dialog displays, showing you the longitude/latitude coordinates of the location where you clicked on the Map. Enter a Label (e.g. “Northeast”) to help you remember where you clicked on the Map.

At this point, the Image X and Image Y fields are set to zero; you do not need to fill

these fields in at this time. Choose OK.

7. Move the Image Registration dialog back to the center of the screen. Select the control point you just added (“Northeast”) by clicking on the list at the top of the dialog.

8. Move the cursor over the image preview in the lower half of the dialog, so that the cursor is over the same prominent feature where you clicked on the Map window. Click on the prominent feature in the image preview.

The Edit Control Point dialog displays. Notice that the Image X and Image Y fields are

no longer set to zero. When you clicked on the image preview, MapInfo assigned X-

and Y-coordinates to the selected control point. Choose OK.

9. Choose the New button to deselect the control point. You are now ready to add another control point by returning to step 4.

Editing Control Points by Pointing and ClickingThe preceding steps describe how you can add control points by pointing and clicking. You can also edit existing control points by pointing and clicking. If you select a control point (by clicking in the list at the top of the dialog), and then click on the map or the preview, MapInfo repositions the selected control point. If you click while no control point is selected, MapInfo adds a new control point.

Converting Degree/Minute/Second Coordinates into Decimal DegreesIf you are entering map coordinates in degrees, you must enter decimal degrees as opposed to degrees/minutes/seconds. For example, to specify the coordinates 40 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 40.5 degrees. Use the Degree Converter tool in the Tool Manager to do this.



Image Registration Dialog

Control Points The list at the top of the dialog shows all control points that have been assigned to the raster image. Each control point has a label, indicating the name of the control point. The label is optional; if you do not specify a label, MapInfo assigns a default label, such as “Pt 1.” To enter a new control point, choose the New button, then click on the image preview in the lower half of the dialog, at a location in the map image where you know the map coordinates. When you click on the image, MapInfo displays the Add Control Point dialog (described below).

Once you have entered three control points, an error calculation for each control point displays. An error value of zero indicates that the control point is placed correctly relative to other control points. An error value greater than zero indicates that the control point’s placement seems incorrect, given the placement of the other control points. The numeric error code indicates the control point’s distance, in pixels, from where MapInfo calculates the control point should be placed.

Edit. . . Enabled when you choose a control point. Choose Display the Edit Control Point dialog. Use this dialog to edit the name, map coordinates, or raster image coordinates of the selected control point. For a description of this dialog, see the following: Using the Add Point Dialog and Edit Control Point Dialog.

Remove Enabled when you choose a control point from the Control Points list. Choose to delete the selected control point.



Goto Enabled when you choose a control point from the Control Points list. Choose to see the selected control point in the preview window. MapInfo scrolls the preview window so that the window shows the portion of the image containing the selected control point.

New Choose to unselect the currently-selected control point. If no control point is currently selected, the New button has no effect. Remember to choose the New button before you add new control points. If a control point is selected, and you forget to choose the New button, and you click on the image preview, you will not be adding a new control point, you will be editing the selected control point.

Projection Specify the map projection represented by the raster image. The default projection is longitude/latitude.

Units Set the coordinate units you want to use when entering control points.When you choose Units, a dialog with a list of coordinate units displays. The list of available units depends on the map projection you are using. For example, if you have specified a Lambert map projection, the Units dialog lets you choose between degrees longitude/latitude and meters (the unit of measure normally associated with Lambert maps).

+ Button, - Button Choose + to get a closer look at the raster image. Choose - to zoom back out.

OK Register the image.

Cancel Cancel the registration.




Using the Add Control Point Dialog and the Edit Control Point Dialog If no control points are selected, and you click on the image preview area of the Image Registration dialog, the Add Control Point dialog displays. If you select a control point, then click on the image preview, the Edit Control Point dialog displays. Both dialogs contain the same options, as described below.

You can also add or edit control points by choosing Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map, and then clicking on a Map window while the Image Registration dialog is displayed.

See:Adjust Image Styles Command

Modify Image Registration Command


Label Enter an optional label in this field.

Map X, Map Y Enter the x- and y-coordinate values, such as longitude. If you are entering coordinates in degrees (the default), any location west of the Prime Meridian has a negative x-coordinate, and any point south of the Equator has a negative y-coordinate. Thus, 73 degrees West is represented by the X value -73.

Image X, Image Y pixels

These fields represent the position of the control point, in the raster image. An Image X value of zero represents the left edge of the image, and an Image Y value of zero represents the top edge of the image.


Rename Table Command Table > Maintenance


Use Rename Table to:• rename a table and its component files.

Rename Table is available when:• a table is open.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Rename Table

Renaming a TableA MapInfo table consists of several component files; use the Rename Table command to rename each of the table’s component files. If you rename a table by using the Windows File Manager, be sure to rename all of the component files.

NOTE: when you rename a table, any workspaces containing that table are affected. When you want to continue using those workspaces, you should edit the workspace file so that it uses the new table name. Edit a workspace file in any text editor or word processor.

When you rename a raster image, MapInfo renames its associated .tab file (MapInfo Registration File) without renaming the actual raster image file.

When you rename a linked table, MapInfo renames its associated .TAB, .MAP, .DAT, and .ID files without renaming the linked remote table.

To rename a table:

Choose Table > Maintenance > Rename Table.

Rename Table Dialog

Rename table Choose the table to rename.

Rename Display the Rename Table dialog.

Cancel Cancel the rename operation.




Rename Table Dialog

See:Save Copy As Command




Save in: Select the directory where you want to store the table.

File name Enter the new table name.

Save as type: Designate file type.

Save Rename the table and its component files.

Cancel Cancel the dialog options. The dialog box closes without renaming the table.



Reshape Button Drawing Toolbar


Reshape Command Edit Menu

Use the Reshape button and command to:

• toggle in and out of Reshape mode. Use reshape to edit regions, polylines, lines, arcs, and points by moving, adding, and deleting nodes that define line segments. You also can copy and paste selected nodes to create new points, lines and polylines.

Reshape is available when:• a single region, polyline, line, arc or point is selected from an editable map layer or

Layout window.

Menu Path• Edit > Reshape

or

• Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button

or

• Press Ctrl-R

Changing the Shape of ObjectsRegions and polylines are created by joining lines. The lines which make up these objects have nodes at their endpoints. Change the shape of regions and polylines by moving, adding or deleting these nodes. Select as many object nodes as you want, however, the nodes must be contiguous, belong to the same region and reside in an editable map layer or layout.

The maximum number of nodes for regions and polylines is 1,048,572 nodes for a single polygon region or polyline. The limit drops by seven nodes for every two additional polygons.

If an object with more than 32K nodes is saved and the table is read in a version of MapInfo prior to version 4.5, the object(s) will not be visible. Objects in the table that do not exceed the 32K limit will be visible.

Displaying and Selecting an Object’s NodesTo display an object’s nodes:

1. Select the object to be reshaped.

2. Choose Edit > Reshape

or

Choose Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button.

Small, filled boxes display at each node in the object.



To select a single node:

• Using the Select Tool, click on a node.

To select the shortest range between two nodes:

• Click on a node to select it and Shift-click on another node.

To select the longest range between two nodes in a polygon:

• Click on a node to select it and Control-click on another node.

To select all the nodes in an object:

• Click on a node and Control-click on the same node.

Moving and Deleting an Object’s NodesTo move a node:

Click and drag a selected node to the new location. All other selected nodes will also move.

To prevent accidental moving of nodes, MapInfo Professional does not move them until you hold down the mouse button for one second.

To delete a node:

1. Select a node(s).

2. Choose Edit > Clear

or

Edit > Cut (to remove the nodes and place them on the clipboard)

or

Press <DELETE> or <BACKSPACE>.

3. The selected nodes are deleted. If all nodes are deleted, the region or polyline is deleted. If only some nodes are deleted, the region or polyline is redrawn to reflect the deletion(s). When nodes are deleted from a region, the resulting object is still a region.

To create a polyline, use Convert to Polylines on the resulting region, or Copy/Paste

nodes that you want to retain.

Adding a NodeNodes can be added only to lines, polylines and regions.

To add a node:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Add Node button.

2. Move the cursor to the point on the segment where you want to add a node.

3. Click to add the node.

Drag and release the cursor in a new location to control where the new node is positioned.



Copying and Pasting an Object’s Nodes If you copy and paste a single node, a point object is created. If you copy and paste multiple nodes, a polyline object is created.

To copy and paste nodes:

1. Select the nodes to be copied.

2. Choose Edit > Copy. The selected nodes are copied to the clipboard as a point or polyline.

3. Choose Edit > Paste to paste the nodes as a point or polyline.

The tabular data is not copied to the clipboard. When you paste the nodes, the resulting object has an empty tabular row.

Changing a Region’s CentroidLabels created using the automatic labeling option, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and point objects created by geocoding, are drawn at an object’s centroid. To move the label, or point, move the object’s centroid.

If you move a region’s centroid (you cannot move the centroid of any other objects) it will affect where future labels, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and points are placed. It will not affect the location of existing labels, thematic mapping bar and pie graphs and points. To move existing labels and points, select them and drag them.

To display centroids:

Choose Map > Layer Control > Display > Show Centroids.

To move an object’s centroid:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button.

2. Select the object whose centroid will be moved.

3. Choose Edit > Reshape

or

Choose Drawing Toolbar > Reshape button.

4. Click on the centroid and drag it to another location within the object.

See:Add Node Button

Snap To Node



Revert Table Command File Menu

Revert Table Command File Menu

Use Revert Table to:• to access a previous version of a table when you have made changes that you do not

want to make permanent and haven’t saved yet.

Revert Table is active when:• a table has been edited, but not saved.

Menu Path• File > Revert Table

Reverting to a Previous VersionRevert Table replaces the selected table currently in memory with the last version saved.

To revert to a previous version:

1. Choose File > Revert Table. A dialog displays. If necessary, choose the table to revert.

2. Click Discard. The changes you have made to the selected table are discarded.

See:Save Copy As Command

Save Table Command


Rounded Rectangle Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Rounded Rectangle button to:• access the Rounded Rectangle tool. Use the Rounded Rectangle tool to draw rounded

rectangles and squares.

The Rounded Rectangle button is available when:• a Map window with an editable layer is active

or


Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Rounded Rectangle button

Drawing Rounded Rectangles and SquaresTo draw rounded rectangles:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Rounded Rectangle button.

2. Move the pointer where you want to begin creating the rectangle.

3. Press and hold down the mouse button, dragging the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner of the rectangle.

The shape appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you move the

pointer.

4. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the size you want.

To draw rounded squares:

• Press <SHIFT> while using the Rounded Rectangle tool.

Rounded Rectangles are closed figures filled with the default fill pattern and/or color. Patterns and colors are set from the Region Style option. Change the settings by choosing Options > Region Style. See Region Style Command.

Specifying Rounded Rectangle Object AttributesTo specify rounded rectangle attributes:

• Use the Select tool and double-click the object.

or

• Select the object and choose Edit > Get Info.

The Rounded Rectangle Object dialog displays.



Rounded Rectangle Object Dialog

Bounds X1 and X2 are left and right boundaries, respectively. Y1 and Y2 are the top and bottom boundaries, respectively.

Center X, Y Coordinate values of the rectangle’s center.

Height Top to bottom distance. Set the height of the rounded rectangle field.

Width Left to right distance. Set the width of the rounded rectangle field.

Corner Radius Corner radius is measured in units appropriate to the object represented.

Style Choose to display the Region Style dialog where you can specify the fill and pattern of rounded rectangles. See Region Style Button.





Rotate Objects Drawing Toolbar

Rotate Objects

Use Rotate Objects to:• rotate these objects: line, polyline,polygon, multipoint, collection, arc, ellipse,

rectangle, and rounded rectangle.

Rotate Objects is available when:• there is an object in an editable layer.

Using Rotate ObjectsTo rotate an object:

1. Make the layer containing the object editable.

2. Use the select tool to select an object; edit handles display, including a fifth edit handle located below the right corner of the selected object.

3. Click on the fifth edit handle, hold down the mouse button and rotate the object. A ’rubber-band’ box displays indicating the rotation of the object. Press the Shift key while rotating the object to rotate the object in 45 degree increments.

See:



Ruler Button Main Toolbar


Use the Ruler button to:• determine the distance between two points.

The Ruler button is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Ruler button

Measuring the Distance Between Two PointsTo measure the distance between two points:

1. Click at the point where you want to start measuring. The Ruler window displays:

Distance

The distance the ruler is currently measuring.

Total

The total of all the distances measured during the current use of the Ruler tool.

As you move the cursor, you will see the distance measurement change in the Ruler

window. Position the Ruler window anywhere on the screen.

2. Click a second point.

MapInfo adds that distance to the total distance.

If you are only measuring the distance between two points, double-click to terminate

the measurement, or

If you are measuring the length of a path containing more than one segment continue

this process to keep a running total of the length of a multi-segment path.

3. Double-click the mouse button when you have completed the measurement.

You can now start another measurement or choose a new tool.

Press the backspace key to delete the last node added.

Display Distance While Drawing Objects

If the ruler window is active, the ruler tool will show the distance when drawing or selection tools are being used. The Ruler window shows the current segment distance, as well as a cumulative distance. If necessary, a rubber banding line displays to show what points are being used to compute the distance; the type of object being drawn or used for selection determines



whether the rubber-banding line displays. Tools that display an additional rubber-banding line include:Arc drawing tool, Ellipse drawing tool, Rectangle drawing tool,Round Rectangle drawing tool,Marquee Select tool, Radius Select tool. If the ruler window is not active, the drawing and selection tools will not display distance and the additional rubber banding line will not be visible.

When you choose a new tool, you may want to close the Ruler window. To close the Ruler window, click the Control-menu box.

The Ruler tool displays the type of distance being calculated: Spherical or Cartesian. To change the units of measure, choose Map > Options or Preferences > Map Window.

For more accurate measurement between two points, the ruler tool can be used in conjunction with Snap Mode. Press the "S" key to toggle Snap Mode. When near an exisiting node, a crosshair cursor displays; distances measured to/from that crosshair point are measured to/from the existing node.

The distance displayed is an approximation; to measure the exact distance between the same locations, use the MapBasic Distance function.


Run MapBasic Program Button Tools Toolbar


Run MapBasic Program Command Tools Menu

Use the Run MapBasic Program button or command to:• run a MapBasic application.

Run MapBasic Program is available when:• The Run MapBasic Program button or command is always available.

Menu Path• Tools> Run MapBasic Program

or

• Tools Toolbar > Run MapBasic Program button

Running a MapBasic ProgramMapBasic is a programming language which you can use to customize or automate Maplnfo. To create MapBasic applications, you need the MapBasic compiler, which is a separate product. However, you do not need the MapBasic compiler to run a completed MapBasic application.

To run a MapBasic program:

• Choose Tools > Run MapBasic Program

or

• Choose Tools Toolbar > Run Mapbasic Program button.

The Run MapBasic Program dialog displays.



Run MapBasic Program Dialog



Look in: Designate the search path.

File Name Type or select the filename you want to run. This box lists files with the extension you select in the Files of Type box. To see a list of files with a particular extension. type an asterisk (*), a period and the three character extension. For example if you want to see all files with a .mbx extension in a directory, type *.mbx.



\\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.mbx



MapBasic Utilities Provided with MapInfo MapInfo comes with an assortment of MapBasic utilities, which simplify some common tasks. These applications are described in the Tool Manager section of this documentation. The applications, among many others, include: Concentric Ring Buffer, Degree Converter, Grid Tools, HTML Image Map, MDB Launcher, and Legend Manager.

Running Older MapBasic ApplicationsMapInfo 7.0 can run older MapBasic applications (i.e. applications created and compiled using version 3 of the MapBasic compiler). However, some older MapBasic applications may not be fully functional in MapInfo 7.0. For example, applications that customize the MapInfo menus may produce different results in MapInfo 7.0, because MapInfo 7.0 provides menu items that were not available in earlier versions.

Some MapBasic applications use Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs).

If you encounter problems when running an older MapBasic application in MapInfo 7.0, ask the application developer about whether the application is fully compatible with MapInfo 7.0.

SeeUser’s Guide: Chapter 24

Files of type: Display all available MapBasic applications in the specified drive and directory. Select All Files (*.*) to list all available files in the specified drive and directory.

Open Run the selected MapBasic application.




Save Copy As Command File Menu


Use Save Copy As to:• save an existing table, including a query table, a linked table or a DBMS table, under a

new name, with a designated projection, in MapInfo, Microsoft Access, or dBASE DBF file format.

Save Copy As is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• File > Save Copy As

Saving a Copy of a Table as a New Table A new table can be created from any open table. The original table remains unchanged and open for further edits. The new table does not open immediately after it is created; use the Open Table command to open the table.

When you save a copy of a raster image, MapInfo saves another copy of the .TAB file (MapInfo Registration File), without copying the actual raster image file. Both the old and new copies refer to the same raster image. Another .tab file is useful since it is where brightness and contrast settings are stored.

When you save a copy of a linked table, the newly created table is no longer linked to a remote database table.

To save a copy of a table as a new table:

• Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table As dialog displays.

If more than one table is open, choose the appropriate table from the drop-down list.



Save Copy of Table As Dialog



Save in: Specify the path where the table is to be saved.

File Name Type the new name of the file. If you are saving a DBMS table, specify the table name and indicate the open DBMS connection in Save As Type.



\\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.tab



Saving a Copy of Access and MapInfo TablesYou can save a MapInfo table as an Access table, save an Access table as a MapInfo table, and save an Access table to an Access database in either Version 95/97 or Version 2000 format using the File > Save Copy As menu command.

Saving a MapInfo Table as an Access Table1. Choose File > Save Copy As. The Save Copy of Table As dialog displays.

2. In the Save in field, specify the location where you want to save the MapInfo table definition of your Access file. The MapInfo table definition is the .tab file. It is used by MapInfo to keep information about an Access file registered in MapInfo.

3. In the Save As Type field choose Microsoft Access Database.

Save as type: Choose MapInfo, MapInfo 2.x (save to MapInfo 2.0 or 2.1 format) or dBASE DBF. When saving to dBase, the data file is saved to both DBF and MapInfo format. If you want only a DBF file, use the Export command (Table > Export).

If you are saving a DBMS table, specify the appropriate open DBMS connection name. Refer to the Open Command for information on the Filter Table button.

Save Save a copy of the table with the specified name and format in the specified path. If the file format is dBASE DBF, the dBASE DBF dialog displays. Specify the appropriate character set.



Projection Display the Choose Projection Dialog. To save a table with a different projection, click the projection button and choose the appropriate projection. See Projection Button.



4. Choose Save to display the Save Access Table dialog.

5. By default, the Microsoft Access Database name is the same as the filename specified in the Save Copy of Table As dialog. To select a different Access Database name, choose Database to display the Select Access database dialog.



6. Select the name and location of the Access database where you want to save the table. Select an existing database or create a new database by entering the new database name in the "File name” prompt. Choose “Save” to return to the Save Access Table dialog.

7. If the specified database exists, MapInfo displays the database version. For a new database, you can select the database version from the “Version” drop-down list.

8. By default, the Microsoft Access Table name is the same as the file name specified in the Save Copy As dialog. To choose a different table name, enter the name in the enter the name of the new Access table” prompt. The Existing Tables list displays the existing table names in the designated Access database.

9. Choose OK to save the table.

Saving an Access Table as a MapInfo TableUse the Save Copy As command as you normally would to save the Access table as a MapInfo table.

Saving an Access Table as Another Access TableThis option is used to save an Access table to a different database. The process is similar to saving a native MapInfo table. Use the Save Copy of Table As dialog to specify the database path and name, then the new Save Access Table dialog to specify the table name of the new table.

See:Rename Table Command


Save Cosmetic Objects

Save Cosmetic Objects

Use Save Cosmetic Objects to:• prevent data loss when you are closing a mapper window or table; save cosmetic

objects to an existing table or new table.

Save Cosmetic Objects is available when:• you select Close Table and there is only one table left open in your mapper window.

• you select Close All.

• you select Table > Maintenance >Pack Table.

• you select File > Exit.

• you select Close from the Windows System menu.

• you select Map > Save Cosmetic Objects.

If you have a mapper window with cosmetic objects open and you select any of the close actions listed above, the Save Cosmetic objects dialog will display.

Save Cosmetic Objects allows you to:• save cosmetic objects to a table.

Using the Save Cosmetic Objects Dialog

Disabling the Save Cosmetic Objects DialogTo disable the Save Cosmetic Objects dialog:

1. Select Options > Preferences > Map Window. The Map Window Preferences dialog displays.

2. In the Warn prior loss of: section, uncheck Cosmetic Objects.

Transfer Cosmetic Objects to Layer

Select the layer to which the cosmetic objects should be saved. Select New to save objects to a table not currently open, or to a new table; the Save Objects to Table dialog displays.

Save Saves the cosmetic objects to the designated table.

Cancel Cancels the operation; cosmetic objects are not saved.


Save Query File Menu

Save Query File Menu

Use Save Query to:• save a query created using the SQL Select or Select command as MapInfo Query

tables.

Save Query is available when:• you have created a query using the Select or SQL Select command.

Menu Path• File > Save Query

Save QueryThe Save Query command is enabled when you have created a query using the Select or SQL Select command. Save Query is available only for queries created using Select or SQL Select commands. Queries against other queries may not be saved using this feature.

Queries can be saved using a new MapInfo table type. These tables consist of two files; a .TAB and a .QRY. Once a query has been saved in one of these tables, it may be re-executed by simply opening the table.

To use Save Query:

1. Create a query using the SQL Select or Select command.

2. Choose File > Save Query. Complete the dialog to save the query as a MapInfo table file. When you open this table, the tables on which the query is based are re-opened and the query is re-executed.

Save Query and WorkspacesTo activate the Save Query option when using a workspace, you must activate the Save Queries in Workspaces option in the Startup Preferences dialog. Choose Options > Preferences > Startup Preferences and check the Save Queries in Workspaces option. This is the default setting.

If you have selected this option and open a workspace, the associated query(ies) will be executed, and any windows created by the query(ies) will be regenerated. A separate .tab file for the query(ies) is not created.

Only queries created using the SQL Select and Select commands are saved in a workspace. Queries against other queries may not be saved using this feature.

See:Save Template


Save Table Command File Menu


Use Save Table to:• save changes made to a MapInfo local table, or to a remote database table.

Save Table is available when:• at least one table has been edited (i.e., information added, records deleted or

modified, etc.).

Menu Path• File > Save Table

Saving Changes Made to a TableThe Save Table dialog allows you to save changes made to more than one table.

To save changes:

• Choose File > Save Table. The Save Table dialog displays.

Save Table Dialog

Save Tables Display a list of open tables with edits pending. Choose the table or tables that you want to save.

Save Saves the changes made to the edited table. MapInfo saves the edits and leaves the table open for continued use.





Saving Changes Made to a DBMS TableThe Save Table dialog allows you to save changes made to a DBMS table.

A DBMS table is one that has been downloaded from a remote database into MapInfo using the File > Open DBMS Table menu option. Edits to these tables are maintained in a local transaction file and are not sent to the server until save/commit. As a result, saving the table updates these records on the remote database. But before MapInfo allows these records to be updated, it evaluates the records in a process called conflict resolution for linked tables only.

Conflict ResolutionBecause the records in a linked table are from a remote database, it is possible that other users may have changed or deleted them on the remote database since the table was downloaded into MapInfo. As a result, conflicts may exist between the data residing on the remote database and the new data that you want to upload to the remote database.

When saving a linked table, if MapInfo finds conflicts between the data on the remote database and any records in the linked table since it was downloaded, the Resolve Conflicts dialog automatically appears. Use this dialog to resolve conflicts as explained below.

This process will be invoked whenever an attempt to save a linked table detects a conflict in an update. The dialog allows the user to choose which fields from the conflicting records will be used to update the database. Three instances of the record being updated must be considered:

• The original server state of the record (the record as it appeared when initially extracted from the database).

• The current local state of the record (the record as it appears in the session of MapInfo making the update, possibly after editing by the user).

• The current server state of the record (the record as it appears in the database at the time of the update).

A conflict exists when the current server state of the record does not match the original server state. This implies that another user has updated this database since it was extracted by MapInfo.

The conflict resolution dialog will appear once for each conflicting record. At any point in this process, the user may choose to leave this interactive mode and have the rest of the conflicts resolved automatically. The user may choose to use all local values or all server values.

For each conflict found during a commit, the user will be presented with a modal dialog box. This box will display enough information for the user to decide which data values to use to update the row in question.

Type of conflict Default resolution

Value changed on server, local value unchanged

Use server value

Value changed on server, local value changed

Use local value



Resolve Conflicts Dialog

Column Shows the name of the column in the record that has data which is in conflict and needs to be resolved.

If the column name is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value is displayed in the Column field, below.

Original DBMS Shows the original data as it appeared when extracted from the database.

If the original data is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the Original field, below.

Current MapInfo Shows the data as it appears in the MapInfo linked table you are trying to save.

The MapInfo field will be blank if the record has been deleted from the MapInfo database.

If the data from the MapInfo linked table is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the MapInfo field, below.



Current DBMS Shows data as it appears in the remote database at the time of the update. (This data might have been changed by another user since it was downloaded into a MapInfo linked table.)

The Current field will be blank if the record has been deleted on the remote database, after being downloaded into a MapInfo linked table.

If the current data from the remote database is too long and does not fit into the list box, a truncated representation will be shown instead. Its full value can be displayed in the Current field, below.

Current MapInfo Check this box to update the remote database with the value from the MapInfo linked table.

If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below.

Current DBMS Check this box to retain the current value on the remote database.

If the current record on the database, or the MapInfo record was deleted, then this check box is not available. Instead, you must use the MapInfo or Current button, below.

MapInfo button This button selects all the MapInfo values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the MapInfo button will delete the record from the remote database.

If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, selecting the MapInfo button will insert the new record into the remote database.

DBMS button This button selects all the current DBMS values. If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the MapInfo database, selecting the Current button will ignore the deletion and retain the current record in the remote database.

If the record you are trying to resolve was deleted from the remote database, selecting the MapInfo button will insert the new record into the remote database.

Column Shows the full name of the column highlighted in the list box.

Original DBMS Shows the full value of the original data highlighted in the list box.

Current MapInfo Shows the full value of the MapInfo data highlighted in the list box.

Current DBMS Shows the full value of the current remote database data highlighted in the list box.

OK Causes the selected values to be used for the update of this record.



Stop Commit The Stop Commit button terminates the entire update. A second dialog box will pop up to confirm that this is what the user really wants.

Automatic The Automatic button causes the interactive conflict resolution to end. A dialog displays which allows the user to select which of the automatic conflict-resolution modes will be used for the remainder of this update. One of two automatic modes can be selected from the dialog. You can accept MapInfo values, or the values currently residing on the remote database.

Help Accesses online help.


Save Template in the Select and SQL Select Dialogs


Use Save Template to:• save a query statement for later reuse.

Save Template is available when:• always available.

Menu Path• Query > Select

• Query > SQL Select

Using Save TemplateIn the Select and SQL Select dialogs, the options Save Template and Load Template display. These options allow you to save a query statement, and to reload the query statement.

You may want to save a query statement and use it with an updated version of the table on which it was created or use it with a table containing the same fields as the table on which the query statement was created. The query does not need to be complete or syntactically correct to be saved. When you save the query, a .QRY file is created. The .QRY file is saved in the directory specified in Options/Preferences/Directories.



To use Save Template:

1. Choose Save Template from either the SQL Select or Select dialogs. The Save Dialog to Query File dialog displays. The Save Template option is enabled even if the query is not complete or syntactically

correct.

2. Designate a file name for the query, and a folder destination.

3. The Select or SQL Select dialog re-displays; choose OK to execute the query.

See:Save Query


Save Thematic Settings

Save Thematic Settings

Use Save Thematic Settings to:• prevent thematic layer data loss when you are closing a mapper window, table, or

workspace.

Save Thematic Settings is available when:• you select Close Table Interactive and there is only one table left open in your mapper

window.

• you select Close Table.

• you select Close All.

• you select Table > Maintenance >Pack Table.

• you select File > Exit.

• you select Close from the Windows System menu.

Save Thematic Settings allows you to:• save thematic settings to a workspace.

The Save Thematic Settings dialog offers the following options:

• Save: Saves your thematic settings to a workspace.

• Discard: Discards your thematic settings, without saving them.

• Cancel: Cancels the Close action.

If you have a mapper window with a thematic layer in it and you select any of the close actions listed above, the Save Objects dialog will display. You must choose Save, Discard, or Cancel to leave the dialog.

Turning Save Objects and Map Labels Dialog Off:1. Select Map Window Preferences.

2. Uncheck the Thematic Layer box.

3. Uncheck the Map Labels box.


Save Window As Command File Menu


Use Save Window As to:• capture the active window and save it as an image. You can then use the exported file

with other applications.

Save Window As is available when:• one of the following is active: Browser, Map, Graph, or Layout window.

Menu Path• File > Save Window As

Saving a Window as an ImageTo save a window as a Windows Bitmap, Windows Metafile, Windows Enhanced Metafile, JPEG 2000, Portable Network Graphics Format, Tagged Image File Format, TIFF CMYK, Photoshop 3.0:

• Choose File > Save Window As. The Save Window to File dialog displays.

Save Window to File Dialog



Save Window As Dialog

Save in: Choose a directory where you want to save the image.

File name: Type a file name.


Save as type: Choose the file format for the exported image. Bitmap (.BMP) is the default format. You can also choose Windows Metafile (.WMF); Windows Enhanced Metafile Format (.EMF); Windows Bitmap; JPEG (JPEG 2000); Portable Network Graphics Format; Tagged Image File Format; TIFF CMYK, Photoshop 3.0. Before you choose the WMF format, read the information on window metafiles which follows.



Save Displays the Save Window As dialog.





Image Size

Advanced Exporting Options Dialog

Same as Window Default Width and Height of the image automatically display. When you choose this setting, the image is saved with the same scale as the window.

Custom Size Set the window size. When you want to make the image larger or smaller, scale the image by either entering the width or height or resize the window manually. When you change either the height or the width, MapInfo changes the other dimension to preserve the image’s proportions. paper units are set in Options > Preferences > System Settings > Paper and Layout units.Width: Enter the size either in paper units or pixels; MapInfo automatically adjusts each designation accordingly.Height: Enter the size either in paper units or pixels; MapInfo automatically adjusts each designation accordingly.Resolution: When exporting images to raster formats, designate the resolution (dots per inch)

Save Saves the window.

Cancel Cancel the dialog.

Advanced Display the Advanced Exporting Options dialog:




Cropping Images and Saving as Bitmaps and MetafilesWindows metafiles and bitmaps are complex images. The way they behave in other applications depends on those applications. The way that images are clipped or cropped can vary according to the target application.

When MapInfo exports a window, it does not crop objects that extend beyond the edges of the windows. However, it does export information about where the cropping occurs. For example, if you are exporting a map that displays part of Germany, the exported file contains the entire image of Germany. It also contains information about where MapInfo clipped that image in its map. When you open the exported window in the target application such as a drawing package, the image of Germany may not be cropped.

Other applications always accommodate the cropping or clipping of bitmaps done by MapInfo. However, clipping of metafiles can vary between applications. Many drawing applications explode the metafile into individual objects. For example, if a metafile contains several county

Advanced Exporting Options

Export Border: Check to include the black border when exporting.

Internal Handling For Exporting Transparent Vector Fills and Symbols: Check to allow MapInfo to handle transparent fill patterns or bitmap symbols internally. If unchecked, device handling occurs.


Export Raster In True Color When Possible: Use 24-bit true color when exporting maps containing raster and grid images. This is possible when the image is 24 bit and the export file format supports more than 256 colors.

Export Dither Method: Choose when it is necessary to convert a 24 bit image to 256 colors, use either halftone or error diffusion. This option is used when drawing raster and grid images. Dithering occurs if ”Print Raster In True Color When Possible” is disabled or if the color depth of the exported file is 256 colors or less.

OK Displays the Save Window As dialog.





boundaries, they explode into several polygon objects, one for each county. These types of applications usually ignore the cropping information that MapInfo stores in the metafile.

Other applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets, usually open metafiles as one compound object, without trying to explode it into component objects. The programs usually honor the MapInfo clipping information and clip the contents appropriately.

For consistent and predictable results, use the Map Clipping feature to predefine a clip region. See Set Clip Region.

See:Set Clip Region


Save Workspace Command File Menu


Use Save Workspace to:• save information about the tables and windows used in the current session.

Save Workspace is available when:• Save Workspace is always available.

Menu Path• File > Save Workspace

Saving a Work SessionTo name and save the tables and windows used in the current session as a workspace:

• Choose File > Save Workspace. The Save Workspace dialog displays.

Save Workspace Dialog



See:Open Workspace Command

Startup.wor




Save in: Designate path to store the workspace file.

File name Type a name for the workspace.MapInfo supports long filenames. This allows you to use up to 260 characters when naming your file. In addition, any one name within your directory path can be up to 255 characters. You can insert spaces in the filename and long filenames can have more than one “.” in them. When using more than one “.”, you must remember to type in the file extension in order to save the file correctly.


\\soup\for.lunch.today.and.everyday.wor

Save as type: List all files in the current directory that were saved with a .wor extension. All files (*.*) lists all the files in the current directory. Workspaces (*.wor) is the default.

Cancel Close the dialog box without saving the workspace.

OK Save the workspace. If editing an existing workspace, choose OK to overwrite the existing workspace and replace the existing workspace with the current one. Query tables, symbol size and SQL dialog entries are not saved with a workspace. You can also save a workspace that will open each time you start MapInfo. See Startup.wor.



Select All Command Query Menu

Select All Command Query Menu

Use Select All to:• select all objects from the top selectable layer in a map, all objects in a layout or all

rows in a browser.

Select All is available when:• a Browser window is active

or

• a Map window is active, and at least one layer is selectableor


Menu Path• Query > Select All

Selecting All Objects from a Table, Browser or Map WindowTo select all objects:

• Choose Query > Select All.

In a browser, all the records are selected.

In a map, all the objects in the topmost selectable layer are selected.

In a layout, all objects in the layout are selected.

See:Layer Control Button/Command


Select Button

Select Button

Use the Select button:• access the Select tool. Use the Select tool to select one or more objects or records for

analysis or editing in a Map, Layout or Browser window.

The Select button is available when:• The Select button is always available.

Menu Path • Main Toolbar > Select button

Selecting ObjectsMaking selections is a basic MapInfo operation. Using the Select tool is only one way of making selections. When you activate the tool by clicking on its button, the cursor becomes a pointer. If you are editing records in a Browser window, the cursor becomes an I-beam.

Selecting a Single Object from a Map or Layout To select a single object from a map or layout:


2. Click the object.

The layer where the object is located must be selectable in the Map window. When an object is selected it is highlighted according to the settings you specified in Options > Preferences > Map > Highlight Control.

If the layer is editable, the selected object is surrounded by edit handles.

When you select another object, the first object is unselected. When you want to select more than one object, press <SHIFT> while selecting.

Selecting Multiple Objects from a Map or LayoutTo select multiple objects from a map or layout:

• Press <SHIFT> while using the Select tool to continue to make selections.

Select multiple objects as long as they reside in the same layer. Each time you select additional object(s), the newly chosen object(s) is added to the current selection.


Select Button

Removing Objects from the SelectionTo unselect an object or remove it from the selection:

• Press <SHIFT> while using the Select tool and click the object.

When you click, the object is removed from the selection.

To unselect all objects:

• Choose Query > Unselect All.

or

• Click on the Map or Layout window where there are no objects.

Hot Spots for Point ObjectsWhen selecting a point object, position the Select tool in the center of the symbol. However, some symbols have a hot spot that you select. For example, the hot spot for the small flag on a pole (like those used to mark the hole on a golf course) is at the base of the pole. For arrows, the hot spot is the point.

Selecting the Next Selectable Object Beneath the Current ObjectPress and hold <CONTROL> while using the Select tool to select the next selectable object beneath the current object. When several objects are overlapping in the same layer, the next object down is selected. When there are no more objects left in the current layer, MapInfo selects objects from the next selectable layer.

Moving a Single ObjectTo move a single object:

1. Click the title bar of the map or layout to make it active.

2. Make the layer where the object is located editable (Map > Layer Control).

3. Hold the mouse button down until the cursor changes to a four way arrow. Click on the object you want to move and hold down the mouse button for one second. This one second delay prevents you from moving objects accidentally.

4. Keep the mouse button down; drag the object. The actual shape of the object is shown while you drag. When you reach the new location, release the button.

You can move several objects at a time. However, when moving multiple objects, a dotted rectangle displays instead of the object’s shape. Once you have chosen multiple objects, place the cursor on any one of them and continue as if you were selecting a single object. When you move the rectangle all of the objects move at once and maintain their positions relative to one another.


Select Button

Using the Arrow Keys to Move an ObjectIn a Layout or Map window, press the up, down, left and right arrow keys to move the selected object one screen pixel in the corresponding direction. Press the Shift key along with the Arrow key to move an object ten pixels.

Using the Select Tool in a Browser

Editing a Table

Use the Select tool in a Browser window to select a row, add a row to the selection or remove a row from the selection.

Selecting a Row

To select a row in a browser:

• Click in the box preceding the first field.

To select multiple rows

• Press Shift-click and drag to select multiple rows.

Adding a Row to the Current Selection

To add a row to a current browser selection:

• Press <SHIFT> while selecting another box.

That record is added to the current selection.

Removing a Row from the Current Selection

To remove a row from the current browser selection:

• Shift-click an already selected row.

The row is removed.

See:Boundary Select Button

Marquee Select Button

Radius Select Button



Select Command Query Menu


Use Select to:• query a database, select records and objects from a table according to certain criteria

and create a results table that you can view as a map, browser or graph. To query remote database tables, see the Open DBMS Table command.

Select is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• Query > Select

Making Queries Using the Select CommandMapInfo has two commands for selecting objects through querying: Select and SQL Select.

Use Select to highlight objects in a Map or a Browser window that meet certain criteria and create a results table that you can browse, map or graph as you would any other table. Use to perform the following:

• Highlight the records meeting the criteria of the query in a browser .

• Highlight the graphic objects of the chosen records are highlighted in a map.

• Highlight both the objects and the records if both a Map and Browser window are open.

In all cases, a selection results in a working table called Selection. This table contains the results of the query. Map or graph this table or save it as a separate table with by using Save Copy As.

To make a query:

• Choose Query > Select. The Select dialog displays.

Select Dialog



See:User’s Guide: Appendix F

SQL Select Command


Select records from table

Choose the table you will query.

That satisfy Type the query expression or click the Assist button to display the Expression dialog. This dialog will help you build the query expression See Expression Dialog.

Store results in table (optional)

Name the temporary table that holds the query results. “Selection” is the default value. If you choose “Selection,” MapInfo names the table Query1, Query2, etc.

Sort results by column (optional)

Sort the query by the value in some column. By default, the query is unsorted. Sort a table into some appropriate order by using Select and specifying a sort without using a query expression. MapInfo then selects all records in the table and sorts them according to their values in the specified column.

Browse results Choose when you want to display a Browser window of the query results, leave it checked. Otherwise, the table is named according to the specifications entered into Store results in table.

OK Execute the query.




Select Control Point From Map Command Table > Raster

Select Control Point From Map Command Table > Raster

Use Select Control Point From Map to: • add control points to a raster image by clicking on a Map window.

Select Control Point From Map is available when:• a Map window is open

and

• the Image Registration dialog displays.

You do not need to close the Image Registration dialog before choosing the Select Control Point From Map command. Choose menu items while the Image Registration dialog is on the screen.

Menu Path• Table > Raster > Select Control Point From Map

Selecting Control PointsThe Select Control Point From Map command works in conjunction with the Image Registration dialog. The first time you open a raster image file in MapInfo or if you choose Table > Taster > Modify Image Registration, the Image Registration dialog displays. The Image Registration dialog provides an image preview; you can click on the image preview to add control points to the image.

The Select Control Point From Map command gives you an alternate way of adding control points. If you choose Select Control Point From Map and click on a Map window, a control point is added to the raster image.

For a discussion of adding control points to raster images, see Register Raster Image.

Choosing Select Control Point From Map activates a special mode that allows you to add control points by clicking on the map. The coordinates from that location on the map are applied to the selected control point for the raster image. To cancel that mode, choose a tool, such as the Zoom-in button, from the Main Toolbar. This special selection mode is canceled automatically when you close the Image Registration dialog.

See:Adjust Image Styles Command

Modify Image Registration Command




Send to Back Command Layout Menu

Send to Back Command Layout Menu

Use Send to Back to:• change the order of objects in a layout by positioning the current selected object, or

objects, behind other existing objects.

Send to Back is available when:• a Layout window is active and an object is selected.

Menu Path• Layout > Send to Back, or


Changing Objects to the Back of a LayoutAll objects in a layout are ordered from front to back. Consider frames and other graphic objects as being stacked in the layout. When you draw a new object it is automatically the frontmost object. The object overlaps any other object in the layout. Use the Send to Back and Bring to Front commands to change the ordering of objects in the stack.

Use Send to Back in conjunction with Bring to Front to re-order overlapping objects. You can move any number of objects simultaneously. The selected objects maintain their relative front-to-back ordering, and are placed behind all other objects.

If you have added a dropped shadow to an object, select both the object and its dropped shadow when you want to send the object to the back. Otherwise, the object goes behind its dropped shadow.

To move an object to the back of a layout:

1. Choose the object or objects you want to move.

2. Choose Layout > Send to Back.

To move an object when it is behind other objects:

• Press <CONTROL> while using the Select tool and choose the objects.

The Select tool cycles through overlapping objects starting with the topmost one.

See:Bring to Front Command




Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile Map Menu


Use Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile to:• export the current map window to MapInfo MapX Mobile format. A new set of

MapInfo native tables will be created, one for each layer in the current map. Each new table will contain the objects and associated data needed to duplicate the map in MapX Mobile, or any MapX based operation.

Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile is available when:• a map is the active window.

Menu Path• Map > Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile

Using Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile

When you export a map to MapX Mobile, a geoset file (.gst) is created referencing the new tables. Geosets in MapX Mobile are the equivalent of workspace files in MapInfo Professional, but they store settings only for a single map window. The MapX Geoset utility tool, included with MapInfo Professional, can read the files created by the Send to MapX feature. But, generally, this tool is most useful for exporting data from MapInfo Professional for use by MapX Mobile, MapX, or MapXtreme applications.

Not all layer types can be exported to MapInfo MapX Mobile. Raster, grid, seamless and some non-native table types, for example, Excel, cannot be exported by this tool.

To use Send to MapInfo MapX Mobile:

1. Choose Tool > Tool Manager. The Tool Manager dialog displays.

2. Choose Send to MapX Mobile.

Choose Autoload to activate Send to MapX Mobile on startup of MapInfo Professional, or choose Loaded to load the tool for this session.

These menu items are added to the Tool Manager menu:

Send To MapX Mobile > About Send to MapX Mobile.

and

Send To MapX Mobile > Exit Send to MapX Mobile.

3. Choose Map > Send Map To MapInfo MapX Mobile. The Send to MapX Mobile Wizard: Step 1 displays.



Export

Export complete copies of all tables (including records with no map objects

Export all records in each table. No subselection is performed. Choose this option if the size of the exported files is not a concern, or if you want to be able to pan the resulting map to see objects outside of the current map window.

Export only objects visible in current map window.

Exports only the map objects that are currently visible in the map window. For each layer, the objects that intersect the map window rectangle will be copied to a new table, with their associated data. This option will create tables with minimal memory requirements that duplicate a given map view. Use this option if you do not need to pan the resulting map outside of the current window boundaries.

Subset Export Settings If you choose to export only the objects visible in the current map window, you must select the Subset Export settings.

Select objects that overlap the original map window.

Choose to export all objects visible in the current MapInfo Professional 7.0 map window, and no others.

Select objects that overlap a device-shaped map window with the original zoom width.

Choose to first resize the map window to match the dimensions of a MapX Mobile device’s map window and then export objects visible in that map window. The zoom width of the original window will be retained, so the same objects will remain visible horizontally, across the center of the map. However, more or fewer objects may be shown to the north and south of the center line in the resized map, depending on the shape of the original window.



Export all layers, even if resulting table is empty.

Check this option to include empty tables in the geoset.

Help Display Help for the Tool.

Next Choose to display the MapX Mobile Wizard: Step 2 dialog.


Export Size Indicates the size of the combined map files that will be exported under the current settings. If this value is too large, choose Back to designate alternate settings, or Cancel to return to the MapInfo Professional desktop and change the map view so that it contains fewer objects or fewer layers.

Choose the folder to which the selected data will be copied. A geoset file will also be created in this location.

Accept the default or enter a new location. To copy the files to your Pocket PC device, choose Browse, and choose an ActiveSync folder.

In standard use, the geoset is the file that will be used to access the exported tables. On a device running MapX Mobile, when the files have been copied to the device using ActiveSync, the resulting map can be viewed by opening the .GST file using the MapX Mobile Geoset Manager, or another viewer tool.

Settings



Overwrite any existing files in the above location.

When this option is selected, the Send to MapX Mobile Wizard assumes you are exporting a newer version of the map to your ActiveSync directory or other export folder. It will attempt to overwrite any older version of the .TAB files found in the export directory.If Overwrite is not selected, or if a table to be written is currently open in MapInfo Professional or are otherwise set as Read-Only, and cannot be overwritten, the Wizard will choose an alternate filename for the table.

Open resulting Geoset in MapInfo Professional.

Check this option to open a preview of the geoset in MapInfo Professional, after the tables are exported. The map window matches the standard map size for a MapX Mobile device: 241 x 192 pixels.

Back Return to Step 1.

Finish Accept the options.



Set Clip Region Command Map > Set Clip Region


Use Set Clip Region to:• clip a designated portion of a map for use in printing and presentations.

Set Clip Region is available when:• a map window is active and a selection has been made.

Menu Path• Map > Set Clip Region

or

• Main Toolbar >Clip Region Button

Using Clip RegionUse Clip Region to isolate a region of a map for display and/or printing. Designate the region to be clipped using the Select tool; the region may be a pre-defined map region, such as a state, or one you define using a drawing tool. Thematic maps and seamless layers, labels, and points displayed on the map will be included in the clipped region. To clip a raster image, use an object created in the cosmetic layer, or an object from an existing vector layer.

To use Clip Region:

1. Use the Select Tool to select the region of the map you want to clip.

Only one region can be selected. If you select another clip region, you will be

prompted to replace or retain the current clipped region.


or

Click the Set Clip Region button in the Main Toolbar.

The map redraws; only the clipped region displays.

3. To redisplay the entire map, choose Map > Clip Region Off

or

Click the Clip Region On /Off button in the Main Toolbar.

To toggle between the map and the clipped region, you may find it useful to use the Clip Region On /Off button.

After defining a map clipping object to use as a cutter, you may wish to save the object for reuse.

To set clipping options, choose Map > Options.



To save a map clipping object in the cosmetic layer:

1. Click the Layer Control button and make the Cosmetic Layer editable. Also, make sure each of the layers you want to clip are visible.

2. Use a Drawing Tool to draw the map clipping object.

3. Click the Select Tool and select that object.


The prompt “Retain the object used for clipping in the Cosmetic Layer” displays.

5. Select OK to leave the map clipping object in the Cosmetic Layer.

The selected map clipping object displays in the Cosmetic Layer.

6. To view the map region associated with the map clipping object choose Options > Region Style and choose None from the Pattern drop-down list.

The layers that comprise the clipped region display.

See:Clip Region Off



Set Target Command Objects > Set Target

Set Target Command Objects > Set Target

Use Set Target to:• prepare a selected object to accept subsequent editing commands: Combine, Erase,

Erase Outside, Split and Overlay Nodes.

Set Target is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• a layer in the current Map window is editableand

• at least one object in the layer is selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Set Target

or


Setting a Map Object as a TargetSetting a map object as a target allows you to perform a variety of editing operations on the object, including Combine, Erase, Erase Outside, Split, and Overlay Nodes. Setting the target tells MapInfo to apply any of these editing operations to the target object.

MapInfo’s editing model is based on first setting the target, then creating an object to act as the modifying object that overlays the target and performs the editing action on the target.

Use Set Target on editable lines, polylines, arcs, ellipses, regions, rectangles, and rounded rectangles. You cannot use Set Target to edit point or text objects.

To set a map object as a target:

1. Select the object(s) to be the target for editing.

2. Choose Objects > Set Target.

You can now create a cutter object and perform an editing operation. For a full discussion of each editing operation, see Combine, Erase, Erase Outside, Split, Overlay Nodes.

See:Clear Target Command



Set Target District From Map Button Main Toolbar

Set Target District From Map Button Main Toolbar

Set Target District From Map Command Redistrict Menu

Use Set Target District From Map button and command to: • make the selected object’s district the new target district.

Set Target District From Map is available when: • a redistricting session is active

and

• one map object is selected.

Menu Path• Redistrict > Set Target District from Map

or

• Main Toolbar > Set Target District from Map button

Using Set Target District from MapThe Set Target District from Map command changes which district is the target district. This command is only available during a redistricting session. For more information on Redistricting, see New Redistrict Window Command.

To change which district is the target district:

1. Select one map object.

2. Choose Redistrict > Set Target District from Map.

or

Main Toolbar > Set Target District from Map button.

The district which owns the selected map object becomes the new target district.

You also can choose the target district by checking the box of the appropriate row in the Districts Browser window.

See:Assign Selected Objects Button/Command




Shortcut Menus

Shortcut Menus

Use Shortcut Menus to:• display command menus for the window in which you are working.

Shortcut Menus are available when:• a graph, map, browser, MapBasic, redistricter, or layout window is open.

Displaying Shortcut MenusTo display a shortcut menu from the window in which you are working:

• press and hold the right mouse button. The shortcut menu for that window displays.

Customize shortcut menus by editing the .mnu file using MapBasic language syntax.

Each window displays the appropriate shortcut menus. The following lists the options

available in each window:

Browser window• New Row• Pick Fields

Legend window• Add Frames• Refresh• Delete• Window Properties

Graph window• Graph Type• Label Axis• Value Axis• Series• Formatting• General Options• Series Options• Grids and Scales• Titles• 3D Viewing Angle• Save as Template

Layout window• Change Zoom• View Actual Size• View Entire Layout• Previous View• Bring to Front• Send to Back• Align Objects• Create Drop Shadows• Turn Autoscroll On/Of

Map window• Layer Control• Turn Autoscroll On/Off• Clear Cosmetic Layer• Change View• Clone View• Previous View• View Entire Layer• Edit Objects > Objects menu displays• Get Info


Shortcut Menus

3DWindow• Refresh Texture• Clone View• Previous View• View Entire Layer• Viewpoint Control• Wireframe• Properties

MapBasic window• Undo• Cut• Copy• Paste

Redistricter window• Assign Selected Objects• Set Target District from Map• Add District• Delete Target District


Show Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Show Theme Legend Window Command Options Menu

Use Show Theme Legend Window button and command to:• display the legends associated with thematic maps or graphs.

Show Theme Legend Window is available when:• a Legend Window is not displayed.

Menu Path• Options > Show Theme Legend Window

Displaying a LegendTo display a theme legend window:

1. Choose Options.

2. Choose Show Theme Legend Window. The Legend window displays or disappears from the screen.

Close the Legend window by clicking on the window’s Control menu box.

or

Choose Options > Hide Theme Legend Window.

Legend for a Thematically Shaded Map The legend is a summary presentation of the thematic shading. When you have one or more layers shaded by value (thematically mapped), you can choose to display a theme legend identifying the ranges and their colors/symbols. When the Map is not shaded, the legend displays “No active Legend”.

Legend for a GraphThe legend indicates what each data series represents.


Hide Theme Legend Window Command

Modify Thematic Map Command

Cartographic Legend


Show MapBasic Window Button Tools Toolbar


Show MapBasic Window Command Options Menu

Use the Show MapBasic Window button and command to:• display the MapBasic window.

Show MapBasic Window is available when:• a MapBasic window is not displayed.

Menu Path• Options > Show MapBasic Window

or

• Tools ButtonPad > Show MapBasic Window button

Displaying the MapBasic WindowTo display the MapBasic window:

• Choose Options > Show MapBasic Window. The MapBasic Window displays

or

• Choose Tools Toolbar > Show MapBasic Window button

Issuing Commands Through the MapBasic WindowYou can perform many tasks by typing statements into the MapBasic window. Those same tasks can also be performed by choosing items from menu options. At times, however, it is easier to type commands into the command window. When you issue a command through the MapBasic window, you must use the correct syntax. When you choose a menu option, its associated command displays in the MapBasic window. Use this feature to learn the syntax of commands by observing them in the window.



To issue a command through the MapBasic window:

1. Type the command.

2. Press <ENTER>.

MapInfo executes the command.

When the command does not produce the expected result, edit the command statement by deleting items, adding new items or rearranging items.

To reissue a command that you have previously issued:

1. Position the cursor anywhere within the command statement.

2. Press <ENTER>.

Use this feature to issue a command several times with small changes each time.

To reissue a series of commands:

1. Choose the series by dragging the cursor over them to highlight them.

2. Press <ENTER>.

See:Tool Manager


Show Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar

Show Statistics Window Button Main Toolbar

Show Statistics Window Command Options Menu

Use Show Statistics Window command and button to:• show the Statistics window.

Show Statistics Window is available when:• a Statistics window is not displayed.

Menu Path• Options > Show Statistics Window

or

• Main Toolbar > Statistics button

Displaying the Statistics WindowTo display Statistics:

• Choose Options > Show Statistics Window. The Statistics window displays.

or

• Choose Main Toolbar > Statistics button

The Statistics window shows the number and tallies the sum and average of all numeric fields for the currently selected objects/records. As the selection changes, the data is re-tallied, and the Statistics window is updated automatically.

To obtain statistics for an entire table, use Query > Select All to select all records in a table.

See:Calculate Statistics Command

Hide Statistics Window Command


Show StatusBar Command Options Menu

Show StatusBar Command Options Menu

Use Show StatusBar to:• display the StatusBar.

Show StatusBar is available when:• a StatusBar is not displayed.

Menu Path• Options > Show StatusBar

Displaying the StatusBarTo control the StatusBar display:

• Choose Options > Show StatusBar. The StatusBar displays.

See:Hide Status Bar Command

StatusBar


Smooth Command Objects Menu

Smooth Command Objects Menu

Use Smooth to:• smooth a polyline, making it into a continuous curve.

Smooth is available when:• a Map window is active

and

• a layer is editableand

• a polyline is chosen.

Menu Path• Objects > Smooth

Smoothing a PolylineSmooth is available when any object is chosen, however, it only smooths a polyline. It does not smooth a polygon or a rectangle.

To smooth a polyline:

1. Select a polyline in an editable layer.

2. Choose Objects > Smooth.

The polyline is smoothed.

See:Unsmooth Command



Snap/Thin Command Objects Menu


Use Snap/Thin to:• Snap nodes from different objects that are close to each other together, and thin the

number of nodes of an object while retaining the general shape of the object.

Snap/Thin is available when:• objects are selected in an editable table.

All of the objects selected must be closed objects: regions, rectangles, rounded rectangles or ellipses, or linear: polylines and arcs. Mixed closed and linear objects cannot be cleaned in one operation.

Menu Path• Objects > Snap/Thin

The Snap/Thin Command

Nodes from different objects that are very close to each other may have resulted from

object creation or editing, and can result in small overlaps and gaps between objects.

Designate tolerance values to snap the nodes together and eliminate such overlaps

and gaps.

Some objects may contain nodes that do not contribute to the object and/or applica-

tion. This can be the result of the data not being great enough to register subtle differ-

ences in node positions, or the objects may contain more resolution than is required

for the application. This can contribute unnecessary overhead in the display, manipu-

lation, and storage of the objects. Thinning the data can remove nodes and reduce the

complexity of the objects while retaining the shape and features of the object.

Additionally, the operation will remove any self-intersections and overlapping areas

that exist in region data. The overlap removal is done after the node snap and thin

operations and will remove any overlaps which survive these processes.



Using the Snap/Thin Dialog

:

Inter-Object Node Snap

Use the Inter-Object Node Snap values to snap nodes from different objects together; eliminate overlaps and gaps in region objects and connect polyline objects that are close, but do not touch each other.

Enable Node Snap Check to enable node snap using the tolerance values indicated. The End Node and Internal Node settings are not available for region objects.

End Node Tolerance Designate the tolerance used for end node of a polyline. This option is not available for Region Objects. For Polyline objects, the End Node Tolerance must be greater than or equal to the Internal Node Tolerance. If there is a node in a different object that is within this tolerance of an end node of a polyline, then one or both of those nodes will be moved to occupy the same location.

Internal Node Tolerance

Designate the tolerance used for all nodes of regions and non-end point nodes of polylines.

Tolerance Units Designate the unit of measurement for the Node Snap values.



Node Thinning/Generalization: When thinning region objects, shared boundaries

are retained.

Polygon Area Thinning

Use Polygon Area Thinning to remove small polygons from the result set. Polygons that are smaller in area than the Minimum Area value will automatically be removed. The polygon can be part of a multi-polygon region, in which case only that polygon is removed from the region, and the rest of the polygons in the region are retained.

Enable Thinning/Generalization

Check to enable Thinning/Generalization using the designated values.

3-Node Co-linear Deviation

This value measures how co-linear a set of 3 successive nodes in the object are. Three nodes are connected in a closed triangular shaped object. The perpendicular distance between the second node and the line segment connecting the first and the third nodes is measured. If the distance is less than or equal to the 3-Node Co-linear Deviation distance, the three points are considered co-linear, and the middle (second) point is removed from the object

Node Separation Designate a tolerance to thin nodes that are close within an object. If two successive nodes in an object are closer than the Distance tolerance, one of the nodes is removed from the object.

Distance Units Designate a unit of measurement for the Thinning/generalization calculation.

Enable Polygon Area Thinning

Check to enable Polygon Area Thinning using the designated values.

Minimum Area Polygons that are smaller in area than the designated minimum area will be removed.

Area Units Designate a unit of measurement to be used in the Minimum Area calculation.


Snap to Node Options > Preferences > Map Window


Use Snap to Node to:• specify the number of pixels at which a node will align (“snap”) to another node.

Snap to Node is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Options > Preferences > Map Window

Using Snap to NodeNodes can be used to reshape an object, and to align objects to one another. Use the Map Window Preferences option: Snap tolerance, to designate the pixel distance between nodes before snap to node occurs. If the tolerance is set to 3 pixels, when you move a node within 3 pixels of another node, and activate snap to node, the node will snap to the other node.

When active, snap to node affects the nodes of lines, points, polylines, arcs, regions, and rectangles in all selectable layers. Each window has its own snap node tolerance; for example, if three windows are open, each window can have snap mode activated/not activated.

To activate snap to node:

• Press the “S” key.

The “S” key is a toggle; to deactivate snap to node, press “S” again.

When snap to nodes is active “SNAP” displays in the StatusBar.

AutotraceUse autotrace to easily trace multiple nodes of a polyline or polygon when using the Polyline or Polygon tools. Autotrace is available when Snap mode is activated and can be used with the mouse or digitizing puck.



Using AutotraceTo use Autotrace:

1. Activate Snap mode by pressing the ”S” key.

2. Click on a node of the polyline/polygon you want to autotrace.

3. Move the mouse to another node of the same object.

To trace the shortest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Shift

key and click.

To trace the longest distance between the mouse and the node hold down the Ctrl key

and click.

Pressing the Shift or Control keys highlights the autotrace path. Click to automatically

trace the segments between the nodes and add them to the polyline/polygon you are

drawing.

To autotrace more than one polygon, click on a node common to both polygons. The

autotraced border(s) are placed in the editable layer. To see the autotraced object, select

it and drag it away from the existing object.

You may also find it helpful to autotrace a border and place it in the Cosmetic Layer.

To do so, make the Cosmetic Layer editable before you begin the autotrace process.

Autotrace the polygon(s) or polyline(s) and save the Cosmetic Objects to a new layer.

See:Reshape

Polygon Button

User’s Guide: Chapters 17 and 26


Split Objects Menu

Split Objects Menu

Use Split to:• break map object(s) into smaller parts using the currently selected object(s) as the

cutter.

Split is available when:• a Map window with an editable layer is active

and

• at least one object is set as the target and

• the object(s) that will act as the cutter is selected.

Menu Path• Objects > Split

Splitting an ObjectUse split to split closed objects (regions, ellipses, rectangles, or rounded rectangles) or open objects (polylines, lines and arcs).

You cannot use Split on points or text objects or to cut objects that are not in editable layers.

To use Split:



3. Create and select the erasing object (or use objects from same or another layer). The erasing object (s) must be closed.

4. Choose Objects >Split.


6. Click OK.


Split Objects Menu

Data Disaggregation Dialog



Field Name Show the headings contained in the table.

Method Show the disaggregation method (blank, value, or area proportion) that will be applied to the corresponding field.





Split Objects Menu

Disaggregating Multiple RowsTo apply the same disaggregation function to consecutive rows of a field:

• select the first row and Shift-click to select subsequent row and choose the appropriate function.

To apply the same disaggregation function to non-consecutive rows:

• select the first row and Control-click. select subsequent row and choose the appropriate function.

You must choose or accept a disaggregation method (blank, value or area proportion) for each field.

See:Combine Command

Set Target Command



OK Perform the dialog options. After splitting the target object(s), MapInfo deletes the original target from the table. The new objects are appended to the end of the table. For subsequent split operations, the dialog retains the previous disaggregation status for a field.




SQL Select Command Query Menu


Use SQL Select to:• generate query tables (using one or more base tables to make selections based on

certain criteria), join tables, create derived columns or as combinations of these. To query remote database tables, see the Open DBMS Table command.

SQL Select is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• Query > SQL Select

Making Queries Using the SQL Select CommandMapInfo has two commands for selecting objects through querying: Select and SQL Select. Select is simpler and SQL Select is more powerful.

Use SQL Select to specify selection criteria that is used to create a table of records. To create this table, data is combined from one or more tables, data is aggregated and records are sorted.

OverviewBefore you start querying, it is helpful to understand the concepts involved in the SQL Select process: Derived Information, Joining Tables and Assembly.

Derived InformationDerived information is information that can be calculated from information in a table but that is not directly present in the table. For example, the states table that comes with MapInfo has a column for 1990 population (POP_1990) and another column for the total area (TOTAL_AREA) of the state. That information is explicit. When you divide the 1990 population by the total area, you get the 1990 population density. Population density is derived. You cannot read density values in the table, but you can calculate them from explicit information.

Continuing with the example of the states table, we can derive information about population change from information that is explicit in the table, which contains information about 1980 population (POP_1980) and 1990 population (POP_1990). If you are interested in population change between 1990 and 1980, you could subtract 1980 population from 1990 population to compute the absolute difference in population. You could also divide 1990 population by 1980 population, that would give you the ratio between the population values. Either way, the information about population change is derived information.

SQL Select allows you to take one or more tables and create a new table containing derived information. This derived information is based on information that is explicit in the source tables.



Joining TablesUse SQL Select to create relational joins that can bring information from various databases together into a single table.

For example, you may have a table of counties that has demographic information--the population of people in various age ranges, ethnic groups, and occupational categories in each county. You also have a database containing information about customer orders. You want to examine these two tables and see if certain kinds of orders come from counties having certain demographic characteristics. Perhaps you want to select counties according to combinations of orders and demographic characteristics.

First, you have join the two tables. One way to join two tables is to use a column that contains matching information. The counties table contains the name of the county. Similarly, one of the columns in the order table contains the name of the county in which the order originated. These two tables have one field in common, the county name. MapInfo uses that common field to match information in the customer table to the objects in the geographic table.

When you use SQL Select, you tell MapInfo to match the information in the County column of the counties table with the County column of the orders table. Given that clue, MapInfo is able to link other information about orders to information about county demographics.

You can also specify joins geographically. When the two tables have graphic objects, MapInfo can match records on the basis of the spatial relationship between those objects. For example, you could match cities and counties such that records for cities are joined to those of the counties containing them.

County Table Order Table

County Pop_1980

Pop_1990 Order #

Customer County

Foster 23,789

27,135 478001

Francis Foster

Williamette 35,456

34,846 478002

James Foster

Mason 147,101

151,201 478003

Wickwire Mason



AssemblyThe concept of assembly is straight forward: create a new table by assembling explicit or derived information from one or more existing tables. You can use SQL Select to assemble existing information into substantially different databases.

You can use MapInfo’s SQL Select command to create one table that is a subset of another table or quite different from any of its source tables.

Specifying Query OptionsTo make a query, you need to perform the following:

• Specify tables

• Select columns

• Formulate the where condition

• Group by columns to create sub-totals

• Order by Columns

Select ColumnsTo select columns:

• Choose Query > SQL Select. The SQL Select dialog displays.

In the first box, the Select columns box, list the columns (i.e., fields) you want to appear in the query table. If you want to use all of the columns, leave the (*) asterisk in the select box or place one there if it is not already there.

You cannot select any columns until you specify what tables to use. The Columns menu is empty until you fill in the From tables box.

• Use the column name or column position (i.e. col2, for second column in table).

You can have two kinds of columns in the list:

• Columns that are from one of the base tables you are using.

• Derived columns - columns that are based on expressions.

When you are using more than one table, a column name should be preceded by the name of its table, with the two separated by a period. “STATES.ABBR” refers to the ABBR column in the states table, and “STATES.POP_1990” refers to the POP_1990 column in the states table. When you choose the columns from the menu, MapInfo automatically attaches the table name to the column name.

Derived columns are defined by expressions, such as:

• sum(ORDER_AMOUNT)

• avg(RECEIVED-SHIPPED)

• POP_1990/POP_1980

MapInfo evaluates the expression and places the result in the derived column. The name of the column is the expression itself. However, you can specify an alias for any column named in



Select Columns. An alias is simply an alternative name for a column. When you specify an alias, the alias appears as the column name in the results table.

To specify an alias:

• Type a blank space after the column name or expression.

• Type the alias enclosed in double quotes.

For example, you might specify aliases for the derived columns in the example as follows:

• sum(ORDER_AMOUNT) “Total_Amount”

• POP_1990/POP_1980 “Population_Change”

• avg(RECEIVED-SHIPPED) “Avg_Processing”

When you place “object” (or “obj”) into a column, MapInfo lists the type of object attached to that row (line, polyline, polygon, etc.).

Finally, you cannot have an asterisk followed by column names. You might be tempted to do this when you are working from several tables. You might, for example, want all the columns from one table, and only one or two columns from another table (or tables). In that case you must list all of the columns. There is no way you can use the asterisk to designate all columns from only one of the tables.

Formulating the Where ConditionThe Where condition specifies what records (rows) from the table, or tables, are to be included in the query table. This is comparable to the That Satisfy line in a query using the Select command. The condition is formulated in the standard way, using variables (columns) and relations between variables (operators).

You can use any column in the table (or tables), whether or not it is listed in the Select Columns box. Columns can be referred to by name

You must have a Where condition when you’re selecting from more than one table. In this situation, the condition tells MapInfo how to join the two tables. The Where condition can be as simple as asserting that the values in one field of one table equal the values of one field in the other table: TABLE_A.SERIAL_NUM = TABLE_B.PART_NUM. Notice that, because we’re dealing with a multi-table query, the column name is preceded by the table name.

Order of FieldsThe order of fields used in the Join does not matter. Either of the following syntax is acceptable:

Select * from A,B where A.field1 = B.field1

Select * from A,B where B.field1 = A.field1

However, keep in mind that when you switch the order of geographic operands, the geographic operator must also change. The following statements will produce identical results:

Select * from states, cities where states.obj contains cit-ies.obj

Select * from states, cities where cities.obj within states.obj



Order of ClausesThe order in which Join clauses are performed does not matter. For example, each of the following are valid clauses:

Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125 where Us_custg.state = States.state and States.state =City_125.state and Us_custg.order_amt > 10000

Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125

where States.state = City_125.state and States.state =

City_125.state and Us_custg.order_amt > 10000

Select * from Us_custg,States,City_125

where Us_custg.state = States.state and Us_custg.order_amt >

10000 and States.state = City_125.state

Error HandlingIf an invalid Where condition that uses an OR as a logical operator is detected, MapInfo will indicate an error has occurred. Usually this error will display whenever MapInfo cannot find a join between two tables. For example, if you have specified the following incorrect condition:

Select * from A,B where A.field1 = B.field1 or A.field1 =B.field2

The error “No join specified between A and B. Invalid join condition in Where clause” displays.

You cannot use aggregate functions in a Where condition.

Using Group By Columns to Create Sub-totalsUse Group by columns to create sub-totals for a table.

Group by columns groups rows in the query table so that all rows with the same values for the specified columns are grouped together. When used in conjunction with aggregate functions (count, sum, avg, min, max), rows with the same value on all grouping columns are treated as a group, duplicate rows are suppressed, and aggregate values are reported for derived columns based on aggregate functions.

All columns in the Select box that are not based on aggregate functions can be listed in Group by columns. MapInfo examines these columns to determine the groupings. Each set of unique data values on these columns has a single row in the query table. Derived columns should be designated by numbers indicating relative position, “1,” “2,” “5,” for first, second, and fifth column, respectively.

For example, you might want to figure out the total amount of sales and number of customers per state. Since the customers are listed individually in the table, “per state” determines the grouping level. All customers in New York should be grouped together in one group, counted, and the sales amounts totaled.



When using Group by columns keep in mind that the table resulting from a Group is not mappable.

• Refer to columns by their name or by a number. The resulting table from Group by is not mappable.

• If you aren’t using a join, you can use regular field names.

• If you are grouping by the value of a derived column or if you are joining tables, you must use a numerical designator.

• When referring to columns by number, do not prefix the number by “col.” Use the numbers alone.

• You can list more than one column. MapInfo first groups records by the first column you list. Within those groupings, it groups records by the second column, and so forth. For each resulting row, the query table contains aggregate values for all columns based on aggregate functions.

• Columns in the Select Columns box that are based on aggregate functions cannot be listed in Group by column. However, all other columns should be listed in Group by columns.

Using Order By ColumnsUse an Order by columns clause to specify the order in which MapInfo lists or sorts the records in the query table. By default, MapInfo orders records by their ascending value (alphabetical order for character fields). When you list more than one column, MapInfo first orders the records by the first column. Records with identical values in the first named column are ordered by their values in the second column. Records with identical values in the second column are ordered by their values in the third column. There is no limit to the number of columns you can use. However, the sum of the length of the columns must be less than 255 bytes.

In Order by columns, you should refer to columns by their name or by a number. When you aren’t using a join, you can use regular field names. When you are ordering by the value of a derived column or if you are joining tables, you must use a numerical designator. When referring to columns by number, do not prefix the number by “col.” Use the numbers alone.

You can also order the result by a field that isn’t in Select columns.

When you want to have columns ordered in descending order, place the keyword “desc” after the column designator:

order by columns: STATE desc

order by columns:POP_1990 desc

order by columns:3 desc

Select columns State, Count(*), Sum(Sales)

from tables My_cust

group by columns State



The first statement orders the records by state name, starting with Wyoming and ending with Alabama. The second statement orders records by 1990 population, listing the record with the highest population value first. The third statement orders the records in descending order by the values in the third column. Notice that “desc” is separated from the column name (or number) by a single blank space.

You can also use the “asc” keyword to have a column sorted in ascending order. You use “asc” the same as you would “desc”. By using “desc” and “asc” you can sort by one column in ascending order, by another in descending order, then back to ascending order, and so forth.

SQL Query Dialog

Select Columns List the columns (i.e., fields) you want to appear in the query table. Click the Columns drop-down list to display a list of available columns. The columns are inserted into the box at the cursor. If you want to use all of the columns, leave the asterisk in the select box, or place one there if it is not already there.

from Tables Choose from a list of tables available for making the query. Click the Tables drop-down list to display a list of available tables. You cannot use query tables in multi-table SQL Selects When you are doing a multi-table join, the tables must be base tables.

where Condition Specifies what records (rows) from the base table, or tables, are included in the query table. See the preceding: Formulating the Where Condition.



The table is still only temporary. To make it a permanent base table, use the Save Copy As command in the File menu. Also, if you want to work with the new base table, open it using File > Open.

See: Expression dialog for a list of available operators and Functions for a list of functions.

Aggregate FunctionsUse aggregate functions when you want to summarize data. You place an aggregate function in the Select columns box in the SQL Query dialog. Imagine that you have a table of customer orders. Each row in the table represents a single order. One column in the table contains the name of the sales representative who booked the order, another contains the name of the customer, and yet another contains the order amount.

You want to find out:

• How many orders were booked by each sales representative

• The average amount of the orders

• The total value of the orders

The following SQL Select provides that information:

Notice the three aggregate functions in Select columns and the Group by columns. What MapInfo does is:

• Find all the rows for a particular sales representative.

• Count the number of rows: count(*).

• Calculate the average value of orders for the sales representative: average(AMOUNT).

• Calculate the total value of the orders for the sales representative: sum(AMOUNT)

Group by Columns Create sub-totals for a table. Group by columns groups rows in the query table so that all rows with the same values for the specified columns are grouped together.

Order by Columns Specify the order in which MapInfo lists or sorts the records in the query table. By default, MapInfo orders records by their ascending value (alphabetical order for character fields).

into Table Named Name the query table. When you don’t type in a name, MapInfo puts the results in the temporary table selection, and windows based on that selection are designated “Query1”, “Query2”, etc. When you want a more descriptive name, enter it here.

Select columns Sales_Rep, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT)

from tables Orders

group by columns Sales_Rep



MapInfo does this for each representative and produces a results table that has a single row for each sales representative. The aggregate functions aggregated the data values for all of the rows having the same value for Sales_Rep.

Consider this SQL Select:

This query is essentially the same query as the previous one, except that we are grouping by Customer rather than by Sales_Rep. This SQL Select finds the count, average, and sum of orders for each customer rather than for each sales representative.

The following example illustrates using multiple group by columns:

We have specified two columns in Group by columns. In this case, MapInfo groups rows first by sales representative and then by customer. The result table for this query has one row for each different customer/sales representative combination. When a particular customer has ordered through two or more sales representatives, there is a row summarizing that customer’s business with each sales representative. The rows are grouped first by sales representative and then, for each representative, by customer.

Joining Two TablesWhen you are joining tables where there is a one-to-one correspondence between the rows in the tables, the result table has the same number of rows as the tables being joined.

When there is a many-to-one correspondence between the tables, several results are possible depending on the order of the tables in the SQL Select.

When you are joining tables together, the result table, will use the object from the join table, that is listed first in the from table box.

Geographic OperatorsGeographic operators allow you to select objects on the basis of their spatial relationship to some other object. MapInfo has a special keyword you use with geographical operators: “obj” or “object”. This keyword tells MapInfo that it has to get values based on the graphical objects in the table rather than the tabular data.

Select columns Customer, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT)

from tables Orders

group by columns Customer

Select columns Sales_Rep, Customer, count(*), avg(AMOUNT), sum(AMOUNT)

from tables Orders

group by columns Sales_Rep, Customer



The geographic operators go between the objects being specified. Select the geographic operators from the Operators menu.

The following are geographic operators:

The difference between Contains and Within and Contains Entire and Entirely Within, hinges on how the geographic comparison is made. For Contains and Within, the comparison is based on object centroids. For Contains Entirely and Entirely Within, the comparisons are based on the whole object. The following graphic illustrates this point:

In each case, object A contains object B because the centroid of object B is inside the boundary of object A. However, in the cases at the left and in the middle, part of object B is outside the boundary of object A. Only in the case to the right is all of object B inside object A. Only in this case could we assert “object A Contains Entire object B” or “object B Entirely Within object A.” Further, if A contains entire B, then A contains B, and If A is entirely within B then A is within B.

However, MapInfo can perform a simple Contains or Within comparison more rapidly than a Contains Entire or Entirely Within. Therefore, unless you must be absolutely sure that objects are completely inside other objects, you should use Contains and Within rather than Contains Entire or Entirely Within.

Geographic operators are useful in working with multiple tables. When there are no columns in the tables on which you can base the join, you can use a geographical operator to specify the join (in the Where condition).

Contains Object A Contains object B if B’s centroid is anywhere within A’s boundary.

Contains Entire Object A Contains Entire object B if B’s boundary is entirely within A’s boundary.

Within Object A is Within object B if its centroid is inside B’s boundary.

Entirely Within Object A is Entirely Within object B if A’s boundary is entirely within B’s boundary.

Intersects Object A Intersects object B if they have at least one point in common or if one of them is entirely within the other.

objectA contains objectBobjectB within objectA

objectA Intersects objectBobjectB Intersects objectA

objectA contains entire objBobjectB entirely within objA



When you are working with a table of cities and a table of states, you could use either of the following:

city.obj within state.obj

state.obj contains city.obj

In either case, MapInfo finds the cities within each state and then associates a row for a city with the row for the state that contains it. You could use aggregate functions to count the number of cities per state or to summarize city-based data on a statewide basis.

When you have a table of counties and one of customers, where counties are polygons and customers are points, you could specify a geographic join with:

customer.obj within county.obj

county.obj contains customer.obj

Geographic operators are particularly useful in conjunction with subselects.

SubselectsMapInfo allows subselects in an SQL Select. A subselect is a select statement that is placed in the Where condition of the SQL Select dialog. MapInfo first evaluates the subselect and then uses those values to evaluate the main SQL Select.

For example, imagine you want to select all states whose population is greater than the average for 1990. In effect, you want to use the following statement in the Where condition:

Pop_1990>Average

However, you do not know what that average is. But you know that MapInfo can calculate that average using the following aggregate expression:

avg(Pop_1990)

What you can do is use that aggregate function in a subselect to calculate the average population per state. You would fill in the SQL Select dialog as follows:

The subselect is in the Where condition following the greater-than (>) operator. Note that you have to type words such as “select” and “from” the subselect into the Where condition. You will not find them on a menu. Finally, the subselect must be enclosed in parentheses.

The most useful subselects contain a select clause, a from clause, and a where clause, as follows:

select one column from some tables where some condition

As noted above, you must type “select”, “from” and “where” into the subselect.

Select columns *

from tables states

where condition Pop_1990>(select avg(Pop_1990) from states)



Consider the following SQL Select, which selects all cities in states with more than 4,000,000 people:

The subselect gets the graphic object for all states with a 1990 population greater than 4,000,000. The main Select statement then gets all the cities that are in any of the states chosen in the subselect. Notice that the main Select statement uses a geographical operator (within) to do this.

Notice also that, while we are working with both the States table and the Cities table, we have only specified the Cities table in From tables. That is because we are not joining the two tables. We are only using States in the subselect.

In the next example, we select all states that intersect Tennessee, that is, all states touching it.

The main Where condition has the form: obj intersects obj. The second object is, in turn, specified by the subselect: select obj from states where obj=”TN”. MapInfo uses the subselect to find the graphic object for Tennessee and then uses the main Where condition to find those objects that intersect with it. You could use a similar query to select all street segments that cross some given street.

Now consider this example:

This query finds all counties containing a dealer. The main Where condition has the form: obj contains obj. The second object is chosen by the subselect: select obj from Dealers. MapInfo selects the row for any county object that contains a dealer object.

Select columns *

from tables cities

where condition obj within any (select obj from states where POP_1990 > 4000000)

Select columns: *

from tables states

where condition obj intersects (select obj from States where ABBR = “TN”)

Select columns *

from tables county

where condition county.obj contains any (select obj from dealers)



Notes on subselects:• You can use tables in the subselect that aren’t listed in From tables for your main

Select. You must, of course, list these tables in the From clause of your subselect.

• All subselects must return one column. The following example is not valid:any(select abbr, pop_1990 from states)

• When the subselect is not used with “any”, “all”, or “in”, one and only one value can be returned. The following example is not valid:obj within (select obj from states where POP_1990 >4000000)

• You cannot have nested subselects. You can have only one subselect per SQL Select statement.

See:User’s Guide: Appendix D



Standard Toolbar

Standard Toolbar

Use the Standard Toolbar to:• choose tools providing standard Windows options including cut, paste, and copy, as

well as options unique to MapInfo; creating a new mapper, browser, graph, layout, redistricter.

Standard Toolbar is available when:• a Map, Layout or Browser window is active

and

• the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Standard Toolbar.

Using the Standard ToolbarFor an on-screen button description, click and hold the mouse button to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button.

The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars.

To choose an action from the Standard Toolbar:


The Standard Toolbar contains these tools:

For more information, see the appropriate button entry.

New Table New Graph Window

Undo Cut

Open Table New Layout Window

New Browser Copy

Save Table New Redistricting Window

New Map Window

Paste

Print Help


Standard Toolbar





Startup.wor

Startup.wor

Use Startup.wor to:• start MapInfo using a particular workspace that opens various tables and windows.

Using Startup.worName a workspace startup.wor when you want to start MapInfo with particular windows and tables already loaded. MapInfo will performs the startup actions as specified by startup.wor regardless of what you did in your previous MapInfo session or how you have set preferences.

To create a startup workspace:

1. Start MapInfo.

2. Open the tables and windows and size and position them as they should display whenever you start MapInfo.

3. Choose File > Save Workspace. The Save Workspace dialog displays.

4. Type startup in the File name box. At the Save in:box, specify the MapInfo program directory or the home directory (directory where windows configuration files such as win.ini are stored).

Running MapBasic ApplicationsYou also can use a startup workspace to run a MapBasic application. When you want to run a MapBasic application in your startup workspace, create the workspace by creating the following ASCII file with a text editor:

1. Type the following into an ASCII file: !workspace

!version 400

run application “someprog.mbx”

where someprog.mbx is the name of the MapBasic application you want to run when-

ever MapInfo starts.

2. Name this file startup.wor.

3. Place this file in the MapInfo program directory or in your home directory (directory where windows configuration files such as win.ini are stored).


Startup.wor

Starting MapInfo When you start MapInfo:

1. If Startup.wor is found in the MapInfo program directory, MapInfo will start by displaying the specified workspace.

2. Again, if there is a startup.wor in your home directory, MapInfo will start by displaying the specified workspace. (If there is a startup.wor in both the MapInfo program directory and the home directory, both will be run.)

3. If any file names are given on the command line (from the Windows File Manager or Program Manager, those file(s) will be loaded. MapInfo supports adding workspaces (.wor), running applications (.mbx), and opening databases (.tab) from the command line.

4. If MapInfo did not add a workspace or run a program from the command line it then checks the Startup Preferences setting. If Load mapinfow.wor when starting MapInfo is checked, the workspace mapinfow.wor (in the user’s home directory) is run.

5. Finally, if MapInfo didn’t load a workspace or run an application from the command line, and it didn’t load mapinfow.wor, the Quick Start dialog displays.


StatusBar

StatusBar

Use the StatusBar to:• display information about the active window.

The StatusBar is available when:• the StatusBar is set to display by using Options > Show/Hide StatusBar.

Using the StatusBarThe StatusBar displays at the bottom of the main MapInfo window, and provides information that helps you use MapInfo. The following displays in the StatusBar:

Map Window:

Cursor co-ordinates, the editable layer, the layer containing the current selection, the

status of digitizer and snap modes, map scale, zoom level

You can customize the StatusBar display when a map is the active window; select Map > Options to display dialog. You can also use the StatusBar Popups to change the current editable layer, or to change whether cursor-co-ordinates, map scale or zoom is displayed.

Browser Window:

Number of records currently displayed

and

Total number of records in the table

Layout Window:

Zoom displays as a percentage of what is on screen

Redistricter Window:

Target District

Help Messages:

when a menu item or button is highlighted, its description displays in the Status Bar.

See:Hide StatusBar Command

Show StatusBar Command


Status Bar Popups

Status Bar Popups

Use Status Bar Popups to:• display and change the current editable layer

or

• change the StatusBar display to indicate Zoom level; map scale; cursor location.

Status Bar Popups are available when:• always available for the active Map window.

Using Status Bar PopupsEditable Layer Popup: The current editable layer displays in the StatusBar.

To change the editable layer from the StatusBar:

• click on the layer name; a list of layers displays. Choose the layer you wish to

make editable. Choose None to deactivate editability for all layers.

Zoom Popup: Click the Zoom area of the StatusBar to display a popup allowing you to choose from the following map options: zoom level; map scale; cursor location.

See:StatusBar Command


Symbol Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Symbol button to:• access the Symbol tool. Use the Symbol tool to place symbols on a map.

The Symbol button is available when:• a Map window with an editable layer is active

or


Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Symbol button

Adding Symbols to a MapTo add symbols to a map:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Symbol button. The cursor changes to a cross when it is over the Map or Layout window.

2. Click on the map where you want to place the point symbol. The symbol displays at that location.

Changing the Location of SymbolsTo change the location of symbols:


2. Click on the object and drag it to the new location.

Specifying Symbol AttributesIf the object is editable you can change the attributes. If it is not editable, you can only view the attributes.

To specify symbol attributes:

1.Choose a symbol and choose Edit > Get Info.

or

Double-click the symbol.

The Point Object dialog displays.



Point Object Dialog

See:Symbol Style Button

Location X Location of the point on the X axis.

Location Y Location of the point on the Y axis.

Style Display the Symbol Style dialog to change symbol attributes. See Symbol Style Button.





Symbol Style Button Drawing Toolbar


Symbol Style Command Options Menu

Use Symbol Style to:• specify symbol attributes (symbol font type, size, color, rotation angle, and special

effects) for new or selected symbols.

Symbol Style is available when:• Symbol Style is always available.

Menu Path• Options > Symbol Style

or

• Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button

Using Symbol Style Use Symbol Style to set the symbol font type, character size, color, rotation angle and special effects of symbols for point objects you create, or change the attributes of existing symbols. MapInfo Professional supports the following fonts:

• MapInfo Cartographic

• MapInfo Transportation

• MapInfo Real Estate

• MapInfo Miscellaneous

• MapInfo 3.0 Compatible Symbols (vector symbols, available as a True Type font in MapInfo Professional ): the 36 shapes from the MapInfo symbol set offered in versions prior to MapInfo Professional.

• MapInfo Oil & Gas

• MapInfo Weather

• MapInfo Arrows

• installed font symbols: symbols available from the installed fonts that offer a symbol set

• custom symbols: user-created bitmap symbols saved to the CUSTSYMB directory created during MapInfo Professional installation.

To change symbol attributes, the symbols must reside in an editable layer or in a layout window. Symbol Style applies only to symbols. To change the attributes of other types of objects, see Region Style Button, Line Style Button and Text Style Button.



Setting Symbol Style for New SymbolsTo set symbol type, size and color for new symbols:

1.Make the layer where the symbols are to be created editable. This is not necessary in a layoutwindow.

2.Choose Options > Symbol Style

or

Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button.

The Symbol Style dialog displays.

Symbol Style Dialog

Font Choose a font from the drop-down list. In addition to the symbol sets provided by MapInfo, the list displays any fonts installed on Windows. The Custom Symbols category lists those bitmaps you have created and saved to the CUSTSYMB directory.

Size Choose a size or type a different point size. The maximum size is 48 points.

Symbol Choose a symbol type from the symbol palette.

Custom Effects:Show Background: display the custom bitmap symbol with the background with which it was created; this background is white.Apply Color: Replace all non-white bitmap pixels with the color designated from the Color palette.

Reload: reloads Custom symbols from disk.



Creating a Custom SymbolCreate your own custom symbol and save it as a bitmap in the CUSTSYMB directory in the program directory. This directory is created during the installation process. Note the following limitations:

• if using MapInfo Professional, the bitmap should be under 128K in size.

• Save as a 256 (or less) color bitmap.

When creating custom symbols, smaller bitmaps (32 x 32 pixels) print better with smaller font sizes; larger bitmaps (64 x 64 pixels) print better with larger font sizes.

Changing Symbol StyleTo change the type, size, and color of existing symbols:

1. Make the layer where the symbols are to be created editable. This is not necessary in a layoutwindow.

2. Select one or more symbol objects.

3. Choose Options > Symbol Style

or

Drawing Toolbar > Symbol Style button. The Symbol Style dialog displays.

4. Choose a symbol, and its attributes. See the preceding: Symbol Style Dialog description.

5. Choose OK. The symbol’s attributes change according to the dialog selections.


True TypeFonts

Background:None: no background displays.Halo: Outline symbol with a white border.Border: Outline symbol with a black border.

Effects:Bold: Draw the symbol in boldface.Drop Shadow: Draw a drop shadow under the symbol.

Color:Display the color palette and choose a color for the symbol.

Rotation Angle: Specify number of degrees the symbol should be rotated; 0-360.

Sample Display a sample of the symbol using the designated selections.

OK Apply the selections. Sets style for new symbols and changes the style of any selected symbols.

Cancel Cancel the settings made during the dialog session.



Table Structure Command Table > Maintenance


Use Table Structure to:• change the structure of a table. Add, remove, rename or reorder fields, add and

remove indexes, make a table mappable or ungeocode a table.

Table Structure is available when:• at least one table is open.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Table Structure

Modifying a TableAll tables must have at least one field. You cannot modify the structure of a read-only table, you can view it. If the table is read-only, the View Structure dialog displays.

To modify a table’s structure:

• Choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure.

If more than one table is open, the View/Modify dialog displays. Select the table you want to view.

The Modify Table Structure dialog displays.

Modify Table Structure Dialog



Fields Contains the names of the fields (columns) in the table from top to bottom.

Type Indicates the type of field with the number of characters in the field listed in parentheses (where applicable ). See the following: Field Information: Type.

Indexed An X in this column indicates the field is indexed. When the column is blank, the field is not indexed.

Up/Down Move the selected field up or down one position in the list box. The file structure is reorganized accordingly. When a table displays in a Browser window, the first field becomes the leftmost column, the second field becomes the second column from the left, and the last field becomes the rightmost column. Moving a field up or down has the effect of moving it left or right in a Browser window.

Add Field Add a new field at the bottom of the list. This field has a default name of Field1, Field2, Field3, etc., depending on the order in which the field was created.

Remove Field Remove the selected field from the table.

Table is Mappable Check to modify the table so you can map it and create graphical objects. If you have a table that is geocoded and want to ungeocode it, clear the box. When you click the OK button, the table is ungeocoded.

Projection Displays the map’s Projection. To change the projections, use the Save As command. See Projection Button and Save As.




Field Information

Name Displays the field name in the Name box. You can also enter new field names. Defaults are Field1, Field2, etc. A field name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters long. Use letters, numbers, and the underscore. Do not use spaces; instead, use the underscore character (_) to separate words in a field name. Use upper and lower case; MapInfo is not case-sensitive.

Type Displays the field type. The following types are available: Character: Stores up to 254 alphanumeric characters. You cannot perform arithmetic operations on numerals in a character field. You should store ZIP Code information in character fields, otherwise leading zeros are dropped. Decimal: Stores numbers in fixed-point decimal form. Do not put commas in decimal. Integer: Stores integers (numbers without a decimal). The range is from -2 billion to +2 billion. Small Integer: Integers between -32,768 and +32,768. Float: Stores numbers in floating-point decimal form. Date: Contains a date in the format specified by the Window’s Control Panel Regional Settings, Short Date Format. Exceptions: the month and day will always display a leading zero and the year will always display the century. During data entry, it is not necessary to enter the century. Additionally, if the date format is month, day, year, it is not necessary to enter the year.Logical: Can contain only true/false or yes/no information, stored as T for true/yes and F for false/no.Decimal, integer, small integer, and float can only contain numeric symbols. These fields do not accept any characters besides numbers, the minus sign, or decimal points for decimal and floating-point numbers.

Indexed Create an index on the selected field. To use Query > Find, the table must be mappable and have at least one indexed field. You can index as many fields as you want (click index box). Indexing does not change the order of records. Also, indexes speed up queries containing numerical and alphabetic comparisons and joins.

Width Type the number of characters in the field (character and decimal fields only). Maximum field width is 254 for character fields and 19 for decimal fields.

Decimals Enter decimals in fixed point decimal form.

OK Modify the existing structure using the specifications designated in the dialog box.

Cancel Cancel the dialog options; close the dialog without modifying the table.




Viewing the Structure of a Read-Only TableTo view the table structure:

1. Choose Table > Maintenance > Table Structure.

If more than one table is open, the View/Modify dialog displays. Select the table you

want to view.

The View Table Structure dialog displays.

2. See preceding Modify Table Structure dialog description. You cannot modify a read-only table.

See:New Table Command



Text Button Drawing Toolbar


Use the Text button to:• access the Text Tool. Use the Text tool to annotate maps, tables and layouts.

The Text button is available when:• a Map or Layout window is active with an editable layer.

Menu Path• Drawing Toolbar > Text Tool button

Entering TextUse the Text tool to create single and multi-line text objects.

To enter text:

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Text Tool button. The cursor becomes an I-beam when inside an active Map, or Layout window.

2. Click the cursor at the place on the map or layout where you want the text to be drawn. A flashing cursor displays.

3. Type the text. The text displays at the flashing cursor as you type. To move to a new line of text, press <ENTER>. A text object is limited to 255 characters.

4.Press <ESCAPE> or click the mouse on the map or layout when you are finished typing.

The settings used are designated in the Text Object and Text Style dialogs. To change the attributes of new or existing text, see Text Style Button.

Displaying Text in a Map WindowIn a Map window, text size is specified relative to the screen. When you zoom in and out on a map window, the size of the text on the screen will change as well as its specified point size. If you zoom in, text will appear larger, and the point size of the text, as indicated in its attributes box, will be appropriate to the text displayed on screen.

Displaying Text in a Layout WindowIn a Layout window, the point size of the text is specified relative to the actual size of the page, that is, the size in which it will print (as it is in word processing and desktop publishing programs). When you zoom in and out on a layout, the text will be larger or smaller on the screen, but its specified point size, as indicated in its attributes box, remains the same.



Using the Text Object DialogAccess the Text Object dialog to designate text spacing, justification, label lines, and to access the Text Style dialog, where you can change font, color, background and effects of text. To access the Text Object dialog, double-click on the text object.

Text Object Dialog

Line Spacing (applies to multi-line text only)

Justification (applies to multi-line text only)

Text Displays text. Add or edit text here.

Style Display the Text Style dialog to specify text attributes. See Text Style Button.

Start X Y Designate the X-Y coordinates of the upper left corner of the text object. Change coordinates to reposition text.

Single Display no blank lines between text.

1.5 Display half a blank line between text lines.

Double Display a full blank line between each line of text.

Left Left justifies text; justification is based on the point at which you clicked to place the label. Default setting.

Center Center multi-line text. The center is based on the length of the longest line.

Right Right-justifies text; justification is based on the point at which you clicked to place the label.



Label Line

Rotating Text The Text tool allows you to rotate text objects by using the Select tool to grab an editing handle and rotate the text.

To rotate text by dragging:

1. Select the text with the Select tool. The text region is highlighted and bound by four edit handles at the corners and a fifth handle below the lower right corner.

2. Grab the fifth handle and rotate the highlighted box to the appropriate angle.

To specify a rotation angle:

• Double-click on the text object. The Text Object dialog displays.

Editing TextTo edit text created with the Text tool:


2. Double-click on the text. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description.

3. Click OK.

To change the text style of multiple text objects:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Select button.2. Shift-click on the each text object you want to change.

3. Choose Options > Text Style or press F8. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description.

4. Click OK.

No line No line displays extending to the label.

Simple line Create a callout by using a simple line that connects the label to the object’s centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created.

Arrow line Create a callout by using an arrow and line that connects the label to the object’s centroid. Label lines display after you move the label from where it was originally created.

Line Style Set the style for simple or arrow lines. See the Line Style Button.

Rotation Angle Enter degrees to rotate label. Angles are measured starting at horizontal proceeding counter-clockwise.

OK Apply the selections. Sets style for new text and labels and changes the style of any selected text or labels.





Creating CalloutsTo create call-outs (labels with pointers to the objects they designate):

1. Choose Drawing Toolbar > Text button.

2. Position the Text tool where you want the arrow or line to point and type the text you want as the call-out.

3. Double-click on the text with the Select tool. The Text Object dialog displays. See the preceding dialog description.

4. Choose Simple Line or Arrow line for the line that connects the label with the object.

5. Click OK.

6. Select the text object and move it to its new position. A line is drawn from the new text position to its original position.

Editing Text in a Browser WindowTo edit text in a Browser window:

1. Open a table in a Browser window (cannot be a read-only table).

2. Click on the field you want to edit. The field displays outlined with a black border and the text highlighted.

3. Edit the text in the box.

4. Press <TAB> to move from field to field.

5. .Choose OK.

6. Save changes to the table by using File > Save.


Text Style Button Drawing Toolbar


Text Style Command Options Menu

Use the Text Style button and command to:• access the Text style dialog where you can set font, color and attributes for text you

enter using the Text Tool.

Text Style is available when:• always available

Menu Path• Options > Text Style.

Setting Text Style for Text Entered Using the Text ToolWhen you use the Text Tool to enter text, the font, color and attributes for the text are determined by the settings designated in the Text Style dialog. To change the settings, access the Text Style dialog.

Text settings including label line, justification and line setting are designated in the Text Object dialog. See Text Tool.

To set the Text Style for text entered using the Text Tool:

1. Make the layer containing the text editable.

2. Choose Options > Text Style

or

Drawing Toolbar > Text Style button.

or

Double-click on the text object; the Text Object dialog displays. Select the Style button.

The Text Style dialog displays.



Text Style Dialog



Choose a point size from the point size drop-down list.


Background





Effects












Tile Windows Command Window Menu

Tile Windows Command Window Menu

Use Tile Windows to:• organize the windows on the screen and/or expose windows that have become

hidden under other windows. Windows are placed next to each other.

Tile Windows is available when:• at least one of the following is open: Browser, Map, Redistrict, Graph, Layout or

MapBasic window.

Menu Path• Windows > Tile Windows

Tiling WindowsThe Window resizes and arranges all the windows next to one another so that each window is visible on the screen.

The windows that are currently open are numbered and listed at the bottom of the Window menu.

See:Cascade Windows Command


Toolbars Command Options Menu


Use Toolbars to:• display or hide the Main, Drawing, Tools or Standard, or Custom Toolbars.

Additionally, display or hide the DBMS Toolbar, if DBMS functionality is enabled.

• specify if the Toolbars are docked under the menu bar, or are allowed to be moved (float) on the screen.

Toolbars is available when:• Toolbars is always available.


Toolbars OptionsTo display or hide any of the Toolbars or to specify their location:

• Choose Options > Toolbars. The Toolbars Options dialog displays.

Toolbars Dialog



Docking a ToolbarIf you have not checked Floating, Toolbars display docked under the menu bar. Change these toolbars to floating by clicking on the background of the Toolbar, and dragging it onto the screen. The Toolbar assumes a rectangular shape and becomes a floating Toolbar.

You can change the location of a docked toolbar by clicking on the background of the Toolbar, and dragging it to a new position below the menu bar.

Only entire Toolbars can be moved; you cannot remove individual buttons from the Toolbars for placement. The maximum number of ToolBar rows is six.

See:Drawing Toolbar

Main Toolbar

Tools Toolbar


Toolbar Lists the Toolbars: Tools, Drawing, Main, Standard and any Custom Toolbars. Highlight the Toolbar whose status you want to modify.

Show If the Toolbar is currently displaying on screen, the Show option is checked. If the Toolbar is not currently displaying, the Show option is clear. Check to display the selected Toolbar. Clear to hide the selected Toolbar.

Floating Check to designate the selected Toolbar as floating. A floating Toolbar can be moved on the screen. If this option is not checked, the Toolbar will display (dock) under the menu bar.

To reshape a Toolbar, click and drag on its borders.

To move a Toolbar, drag the Toolbar title area, and release.

Color Buttons Check to display buttons in color.

Large Buttons Check to display large buttons.

Show ToolTips Check to display ToolTips. ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar, display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed or the mouse is moved.

Save as Default Display the specified Toolbar configuration when you run MapInfo.





Tool Manager

Tool Manager

Use Tool Manager to:• access the Tool Manager dialog. Run a tool from the dialog, and/or add, edit,

remove a tool from the list of currently registered tools. Additionally, configure a

tool to run automatically when MapInfo starts.

Tool Manager is available when:• always available.

Menu Path• Tools > Tool Manager

The Tool Manager DialogIf you installed MapInfo Professional using the Standard Installation process, many tools are installed and registered with the Tool Manager. By performing a Custom Installation and unchecking the appropriate combination of options, it is possible to install no tools. In this case, the listbox in the Tool Manager dialog will be empty. Register tools manually using the Add Tool option in the Tool Manager dialog. Use the Edit Tool option to modify information about an existing tool. Use the Remove Tool option to unregister a tool; unregistering a tool will not delete any files associated with the tool. Some of the installed tools may be configured to AutoLoad when MapInfo starts. AutoLoad status is indicated in the Tool Manager dialog listbox; the tool will have a corresponding menu item in the Tools menu. Each tool that is currently running will have the Loaded box checked.

Tools:

Autolabeler Places text object style labels in the Cosmetic Layer of the active mapper.

CoordSys Bounds Manager

Check and set the coordinate system bounds for mappable MapInfo base tables.

Concentric Ring Buffer

Creates concentric ring buffers around one or more map objects. The tool also computes aggregated values for underlying data that occur within each ring. Therefore, it can be used to count how many customers occur within each ring and their total sales. You can graph the results.

Coordinate Extractor Adds two columns to an open table and updates each column with x and y coordinates. Choose either the table’s native projection, or the non-native projection. For objects other than point objects, the x and y coordinates represent Centroid x and Centroid y locations.

Create Line by Length Draw a line in the Cosmetic Layer of a specific length and angle.


Tool Manager

DBMS Catalog Allows a DBA to create a MapInfo Map Catalog table in a remote database. The catalog is needed for downloading coordinate information to MapInfo from a remote database.

DBMS Count Rows in Table

Updates the Map Catalog setting for the number of rows in a table. Use this for certain types of large tables.

DBMS SQL Builder Allows you to connect to an SQL database server, build queries and execute SQL statements. Additionally, issue queries to preview data and download query results to a local MapInfo table.

Degree Converter Converts a column of data containing DMS coordinates to Degree Decimals and Decimal Degrees to degrees/minutes/seconds.

Disperse Points Disperses points located at the same position. Points can be dispersed systematically or randomly.

Easy Loader Uploads MapInfo tables into remote databases.

Grid Maker Draws a grid (graticule) of longitude and latitude lines.You can designate a coordinate system.

Grid Tools Converts grid files to Mapinfo grid files (.mig). The grid converter uses the available grid handlers. By converting grids to .mig format, you may be able to obtain better performance than using the direct grid handlers. This tool also creates a grid from points in a table and provides an info tool displaying x, y, and z values at the cursor location.

HTML Image Map Generate an HTML image map and corresponding image from a map window containing a polygon layer. The tool creates a JPEG or PNG images and applies a user-designated title and copyright.HTML Image maps supports HotLinks and HyperLinks and can combine landing pages into a single HTML page.

Labeler Transfer Layer’s labels into permanent text objects; label current selection; use label tool and individual label objects into permanent text objects.

Legend Manager Take control of how MapInfo displays Legend windows. Includes the ability to have multiple legend windows open, and associate each legend with a specific map window.

Map Window Manager

Designate the title of a map window and default table view.

Mapping Wizard Tool New to mapping? Use the Map Wizard to introduce you to mapping concepts and the power of MapInfo.


Tool Manager

MapX GeoSet Utility Open and read a MapX Geoset into a MapInfo Professional map window: Open specified tables; order them as layers in a new map window; pan and zoom map window; apply display, zoom, and label settings to each layer.Write and save a MapInfo Professional map window into a MapX Geoset: Write map window settings: pan and zoom. Write table names for each layer. Write individual layer settings: display, zoom, and label settings.There is not a one-to-one match between MapInfo Professional map window and MapX Geoset capabilities. Certain MapInfo Professional table types are not supported in MapX: XLS (Excel spreadsheets); WKS (Lotus 123 spreadsheets). Certain raster file formats are not supported: BMP; WMF; MIG. Seamless Map Sheets are not supported. Other MapInfo Professional map window contents are not supported in MapX Geosets: Cosmetic layer contents; Thematic maps; Custom labels. Drill-down tables are not supported in MapInfo Professional.

MDB Launcher Install the MetaData Browser during the MapInfo Professional 6.0 Installation process, or from the Install at any time. Use the MapInfo MetaData Browser to search data clearinghouse Web sites for data products that meet your geographic analysis needs.

Named Views Save a map window’s current zoom and center as a named view. Return to that view by selecting the view name from a dialog.

North Arrow Add a North Arrow to a Map or Layout window in various styles, and, optionally, add a Magnetic Declination Arrow. Use the North Arrow tool to designate in which corner to position the North Arrow, or use the North Arrow button on the Tools Toolbar to draw a rectangle and place the North Arrow at the specified location.

Overview Opens a new Map window to provide an overview of another map window.

Rotate Labels Rotate labels a fixed amount in degrees: positive; negative; floating point. This tool is available in Layout windows as well as Map windows.

Rotate Map Window Rotate Map Window enables you to rotate the contents of the current map window a specific number of degrees. Rotate Map Window calculates and sets an Affine transformation for the map window. It does not change any of the tables displayed there. Affine transformations do not rotate raster images or grid files. Symbols and text are also not rotated by Affine transformations.

Rotate Symbols Rotate symbols a fixed amount in degrees; clockwise and counter clockwise. Additionally, access the Symbol Picker to override the designated symbol.

ScaleBar Create a custom distance scalebar to annotate map and layout windows. You can control the colors and style of lines, and the ratio of width to height. Designate the width and fill color for the scale bar, as well as the font for the scale bar labels.


Tool Manager

Seamless Table Manager

Creates and manages seamless map sheets.

Search and Replace Search a character column for a specific string and replace it with another string.

Send to MapX Mobile Write a custom MapX geoset and associated .Tab files to create a user-defined subset of a map window’s background data for display on a mobile device.

Set the Minimum Bounding Rectangle Utility

Check and set the coordinate system bounds for mappable MapInfo base tables.

Shields Draw decorative frames around text objects.

Spatialize SQLServer Table

Allows an existing SQL Server table to accommodate spatial data.

Symbol Maker Create, edit, delete MapInfo symbols. These symbols become part of the standard MapInfo symbol set.

Table Manager Get information about all currently open tables, including table metadata. A warning displays if the projection does not match the table metadata projection.

TOC Utility Build a seamless table of all the files listed in a TOC file. Create one or more seamless tables, grouped by zone and resolution.

Universal Translator Import and export MapInfo data to and from other popular mapping files formats.


Tool Manager

Using the Tool ManagerTo use the Tool Manager:

• Choose Tools > Tool Manager. The Tool Manager dialog displays:

Tools: Displays the list of registered tools.

Loaded: If the box is checked the tool is loaded and a corresponding menu item dis-

plays in the Tools menu. Check the box to load a tool that is not currently running.

Clear the box to unload the tool. Tools load and unload when you click OK to exit

from the dialog box.


Tool Manager

Autoload: Check to run the tool at startup. You must exit MapInfo after checking this

box for the first time for the Autoload feature to work.

Add Tool: Choose to display the Add Tool dialog. Add tools from the MapInfo Tool

directory or tools you have created.

Using the Add Tool dialog:

Title: Enter the name of the tool.

Location: Enter the complete path for the tool. Click the . . . (browse) button to display

the Select MapBasic Program dialog.

Description: Enter an optional description of the tool’s function.

Choose OK to enter the tool in the Tool Manager listbox.

Edit Tool: Choose to display the Tool Definition dialog. Edit the name; path; descrip-

tion of the highlighted tool.

Using the Edit Tool dialog:

Title: Display the highlighted tool. You can edit the name of the tool.

Location: Display the path of the highlighted tool. Edit the path; if the path is invalid,

an error message displays. Click the . . . (browse) button to display the Select MapBasic

Program dialog.

Description: Display the current description of the highlighted tool. Enter/edit an

optional description of the tool’s function.

Choose OK to enter the tool to the Tool Manager listbox.

Remove Tool: Display a dialog that allows you to remove the highlighted tool from

the tool table and update the list of available tools. This action takes effect when you

exit from MapInfo.

See:Tools Menu


Tools Menu

Tools Menu

Use the Tools Menu to:• access the Tool Manager

and

• display a list of loaded MapBasic tools.

Tools Menu is available when:• always available.

Using the Tools MenuUse the Tools menu to access the Tool Manager dialog to add, edit and remove MapBasic tools, as well as designate tools to be autoloaded at startup. Additionally, the menu displays a list of currently loaded tools, and their sub-menus.

See:Tool Manager


Tools Toolbar

Tools Toolbar

Use the Tools Toolbar to:• choose MapBasic tools.

Tools Toolbar is available when:• a Map, Layout or Browser window is active

and

• the Options > Toolbars dialog is set to display the Tools Toolbar.

Using the Tools ToolbarFor an on-screen button description, click and hold the mouse button down to display a button description in the StatusBar. Additionally, use ToolTips, text that describes the behavior of a button on a Toolbar. ToolTips display as the mouse tracks over a button. The text continues to display until an action is performed. For information on hiding/displaying the Tools Toolbar,and accessing ToolTips, see Toolbars.

To choose an action from the Tools Toolbar:


For a full button description, see the appropriate button entry.

Run MapBasic Program Access the Run MapBasic Program dialog.

Show MapBasic WindowDisplay or hide the MapBasic window.

Run Mapping Wizard ToolNew to mapping? Run the Mapping Wizard to introduce you to mapping concepts and the power of MapInfo.

Launch MetaData BrowserUse the MapInfo MetaData Browser to search data clearinghouse Web sites for data products that meet your geographic analysis needs.

North ArrowLaunches the North Arrow tool that has been loaded from the Tool Manager. Use this tool to designate where the North Arrow should display. Click this button to draw a rectangle in which the North Arrow will be placed.


Tools Toolbar


See:Toolbars, User’s Guide: Chapter 4


ToolTips

ToolTips

Use ToolTips to:• display text describing the behavior of a button on a Toolbar.

ToolTips is available when:• ToolTips is always available.

Using ToolTipsAs the mouse tracks over a button, text describing the purpose or action of the button displays. The text continues to display until the mouse is moved or clicked.



Universal Translator Tools Menu

Universal TranslatorTools Menu

Use the Universal Translator to:• import and export MapInfo data to and from other mapping formats.

The Universal Translator is available when:• always available, unless disabled during Custom Installation, or unloaded using the

Tool Manager dialog, or Tools > Universal Translator > Exit.

Menu Path• Tools > Universal Translator > Universal Translator

Using the Universal TranslatorTo use the Universal Translator:

• Choose Tools > Universal Translator > Universal Translator. The Universal Translator

dialog displays:



Source

Format Select the format of the file to be translated. Click to display a drop-down list of formats. If the source is Intergraph MicroStation Design, a Settings button displays. Click this button to display the Design File Input Settings dialog. Choose the appropriate co-ordinate units: Master; Sub; UOR. If you have chosen ESRI (R) ARCINFO Export (E00) the Projection button is enabled; the E00 format is not required to contain coordinate information, but it may do so.

Files Enter the file(s) to be translated or click . . . to display the Select Input Files dialog. Choose the file(s) from the Select Input dialog. You can select more than one file of the same type for translation. AutoCAD defaults to DWG format. When translating a TAB or a MIF/MID file whose name is greater than 8 characters long to DWG/DXF, the resulting file’s name is longer than 8 characters. AutoCAD versions 14 and earlier cannot open a file whose name is longer than 8 characters; an error message: “Invalid Input File” displays. AutoCAD 2000 can handle long filenames. For example, boundary_usa.TAB translates to boundary_usa.DWG; AutoCAD 14 and earlier cannot open this DWG file. Rename the DWG file to a shorter name.

Projection If you have selected a MapInfo Tab file, “Coordinate system will be read from source” displays since MapInfo Tab files contain coordinate system information. If you have selected Shape or VPF, AutoCAD or Intergraph files, the Projection button displays. The entries in the MapInfo.prj are used. Custom projections can be added. Click this button to designate the coordinate system. If you choose the wrong coordinate system, erroneous results may occur. If you do not know the coordinate system, select non-Earth. Please contact data vendor or creator for metadata on the projection/coordinate system used in data. If you do not designate a coordinate system, the Universal Translator defaults to non-Earth meters.

Category: a list of available categories displays.Category Members: displays the projection choices for the selected category.

Use projection in source file

If you have selected a shapefile, this option is available. Check to have the Universal Translator look for a matching MapInfo Projection automatically from the Shapefile's associated *.prj file, if one exists in same directory, and create the TAB\MIF file in that projection. You may choose to create a custom matching projection entry before-hand in the mapinfow.prj file if one does not exist: see Appendix H in the MapInfo User's Guide for more detail. If box is unchecked, the TAB\MIF file will be created in Non-Earth Meters system by default, or another projection designated be manually selected by clicking on the Projection... button and selecting the correct projection to apply to the translated TAB or MIF\MID file.



Additional Notes

MapInfo Professional 7.0 includes these AutoCAD enhancements for versions 14 and 2000:

AutoCad data attributes are translated.

AutoCad Z value is translated as a data attribute named ’elevation’.

Intergraph DGN MSLink is supported.

Destination

Format Select the format of the translated file.When translating into MapInfo TAB or MIF/MID, the translation creates version 3.0 MapInfo tables; if the translation encounters a feature unique to later versions of MapInfo Professional, (such as the expanded maximum node limit) the version is designated with an edited version. The version number corresponds to the version containing the first instance of the feature. The files then can only be edited in this version of MapInfo Professional. The file can be viewed in previous versions of MapInfo, however, it cannot be edited in those versions and the feature may not display.If you have chosen ESRI (R) ARCINFO Export (E00), the E00 Output Settings dialog displays: Coverage Precision: Specify whether the E00 file will be written with single precision numbers or double precision numbers. The default is double precisionCompression: Specify whether to write out the E00 file in a compressed form. Compressed files take up less space, but are not as portable as uncompressed files. The choices are Full (default), Partial and None.

Directory Enter the destination of the translated file. Click . . . to display the Select Directory dialog. The output file name is based on the contents and format of the input file. See Additional Notes.If the Source file is MapInfo format, and the destination file is AutoCAD, a Settings button displays. Click to display the AutoCAD Output Settings dialog: Select the version of AutoCAD that should be used.Universal Translator reads and writes any version of AutoCAD DWG/DXF version up to and including version 2000.

Log Universal Translator automatically creates a log file documenting the translation process.

Log to File Specify a file name and location for the Log file. The default is C:\temp\mutlog.txt, where C:\temp\mutlog.txt is an environment variable. Click . . . to designate another name/path for the log file.

Append to Log Add each log file to the previous file, rather than beginning a new file for each translation process.



Universal Translator does not translate between third party formats, e.g. AutoCad DXF to ESRI (R) Shape.

The Universal Translator does not officially support 3-dimensional Intergraph DGN or 3 dimensional AutoCAD DWG/DXF files; the translation results using these files are unpredictable.

The Universal Translator does not perform coordinate transformations.

When translating DWG/DXF to TAB/MIF, the Universal Translator does not translate AutoCAD meshes.

When translating DWG/DXF or DGN, the translator does not attempt to match display attributes, including line color, font type.

When translating from SHAPE to TAB, Universal Translator defaults empty fields to the following:

empty numeric field with a width of one translates to a 0 (zero)

empty numeric field with a width of two translates to -9

empty numeric field with a width of three translates to -99

empty numeric field with a width of four translates to -999

empty numeric field with a width of five or greater translates to -9999

A single file translation may result in multiple files depending on file types.

DGN to TAB - MIF/MID : name of original file appended to geometry type.

Example: original file: CANADA.DGN

translated TAB files:

CANADA_ELLIPSES.TAB

CANADA_POINTS.TAB

CANADA_TEXT.TAB

DWG/DXF to TAB - MIF/MID: name of original file appended to layer name. AutoCAD organizes drawing entities by user named layers.

Example: original file: SWEDEN.DWG

translated TAB files:

SWEDEN_FORESTS.TAB

SWEDEN_RIVERS.TAB

SWEDEN_ROADS.TAB

SHAPE to TAB - MIF/MID : One shape file creates one TAB/MIF/MID file.

Example: original file: STATES.SHP

translated file: STATES.TAB



TAB - MIF/MID to SHAPE : name of original file appended to geometry type.

Example: original file: USHIGHWAY.TAB

translated file:

USHIGHWAY_POLYLINE.SHP

USHIGHWAY_POINT.SHP

SDTS to TAB - MIF/MID projection from source

Example: original file: HYD001.DDF

For an original SDTS catalog file such as HY01CATD.ddf ( e.g.: a 1:24000 scale SDTS

format DLG Hydrology dataset) translating to MapInfo *.TAB format, the resultant

names of the multiple output files are:

HY01CATD_PC01.tab

HY01CATD_NA01.tab

HY01CATD_N0O1.tab

HY01CATD_NP01.tab

HY01CATD_LE01.tab

VPF to TAB - MIF/MID choose the correct projection.

Example: original file: Polbnd.AFT

translated file: Polbnda.TAB

TAB - MIF/MID to DWG/DXF or DGN: One TAB - MIF/MID file creates one DWG or DXF or DGN file.

Example: original file: STATES.TAB

translated file:

STATES .DGN

STATES.DWG

Since DGN, DXF, DWG, and Shape files do not share coordinate system information, you must specify the correct coordinate system. Designating the wrong coordinate system will give erroneous results.

Virtual Memory: Translating to or from DWG/DXF may trigger a lack of virtual memory. If the error message displays, increase virtual memory. See your operating system documentation for information on increasing virtual memory. After adjusting virtual memory, you must reboot your computer for the changes to take effect.

When translating from DXF, DWG, and DGN to TAB, MIF/MID attempts to preserve color, solid frills, and styles, if these attributes exist in MapInfo. The same consideration applies when translating from MapInfo to DXF, DWG, and DGN formats.


Undo Command Edit Menu

Undo Command Edit Menu

Use Undo to:• undo the last edit operation.

Undo is available when:• a Map window is active and Reshape is activated.

• Undo is active when an “undoable” operation such as adding, moving, or deleting objects or adding and deleting records has been performed. (Redo is enabled if an Undo has been performed)

Menu Path• Edit > Undo.

Undoing Your Last ActionIf you perform an action that produces an unwanted result, you sometimes can reverse or “undo” the action.

The actual name of this command changes to let you know exactly what operation you will be undoing. After a Paste, for example, the name of this command changes to Undo Paste.

Once you have undone something, the name of this command changes to Redo, for example, Redo Paste.

You cannot undo the following; Revert, Save, Save As, or Modify Table, or any operations whose effects are primarily cosmetic.

Undo is affected by the Number of Undo Objects option in the System Preferences (Options > Preferences > System Settings). Set the undo number from 0, which deactivates the Undo system, to 800 undo records; the default is 10 undo records. For example, if you set the undo number to 120 and attempt to undo 121 records, the undo menu is unavailable.

There is a memory limit for the Undo command. If you are editing extremely complex graphic objects, the number of reversible records may drop below the designation set in Preferences.

See:Clear Command

Preferences Command


Unlink DBMS Table Button DBMS Toolbar

Unlink DBMS Table Button DBMS Toolbar

Unlink DBMS Table Command Table > Maintenance

Use Unlink DBMS Table to:• to unlink a table which was downloaded from a remote database and linked to a

MapInfo table with the Open command.

Unlink DBMS Table is available when:• at least one linked table is open and there are no pending edits against it.

Menu Path• Table > Maintenance > Unlink DBMS Table

OR

• DBMS Toolbar > Unlink DBMS Button

Using Unlink DBMS TableUnlinking a table removes the link to the remote database. This command doesn’t work if edits are pending on the linked table. You must first update any pending edits with the Save Table command. The table linkage is removed. Fields that were marked non-editable are now editable. The end product is a normal MapInfo base table.

To unlink a table:

1. Choose Table > Maintenance > Unlink DBMS Table or the Unlink DBMS button. The Unlink Table dialog displays.

2. Choose the name of the table to be unlinked from the Unlink table list.

3. Choose OK. The specified table is unlinked.


Refresh DBMS Table Command

Open Command


Unselect All Button

Unselect All Button

Use Unselect All to:• access the Unselect All Tool. Use the Unselect All tool to unselect the currently selected

objects in a Map or Layout or rows in a Browser window.

Unselect All is available when:• an open Map, Layout, Browser window contains a selection.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Unselect All Button

Unselecting ObjectsIn addition to using the Unselect All Button, you can unselect all by:

• When in a map or layout window with selected objects, click the Select tool where there are no objects.

• When in a browser window, select a row; this is the only selected row in the table. Press <Shift> and select the row again, the row is deselected.

• Choose File > Close Table and specify Selection.

• Choose Query >Unselect All.


Unselect All Command Query Menu

Unselect All Command Query Menu

Use Unselect All to:• unselect the currently selected objects in a Map or Layout or rows in a Browser

window.

Unselect All is available when:• an open Map, Layout, Browser window contains a selection.

Menu Path• Query > Unselect All

Unselecting ObjectsTo unselect the currently selected objects in any open window:

• Choose Query >Unselect All.

Other ways of unselecting include:

• When in a map or layout with selected objects, click the Select tool where there are no objects.

• When a row in a browser is selected, press <SHIFT> while selecting the row again.

• Choose File > Close Table and specify Selection.


Unsmooth Command Objects Menu

Unsmooth Command Objects Menu

Use Unsmooth to:• revert a smoothed polyline to its original state.

Unsmooth is available when:• an Map window with an editable layer is active

and

• a polyline object is selected from the editable layer.

Menu Path• Objects > Unsmooth

Unsmoothing a PolylineTo unsmooth a polyline:

1. Select a smoothed polyline in an editable layer.

2. Choose Objects > Unsmooth.

See:Smooth Command



Update Column Command Table Menu


Use Update Column to:• assign values to a column, add a new (temporary) column using data from another

table, move values between columns and enter graphics information into columns for descriptive data.

Update Column is available when:• at least one MapInfo table that isn’t read-only is open.

Menu Path• Table > Update Column

Assigning Values to ColumnsUpdate Column allows you to change a column’s value by updating a table based on its own data values or by updating a table based on data from another table. To update an existing column’s value:

• Choose Table > Update Column. The Update Column dialog displays.

Update Column Dialog

Table to Update Choose the table that contains the column you want to update. If adding a temporary column, this table will store the temporary column.

Column to Update Choose the column to update. If the Table to update is different from the Get value from table, choose Add new temporary column to add a temporary column to the update table.



Get Value from Table Choose the table from which MapInfo should retrieve the update information. If you are updating a column by applying only a mathematical expression, and do not need data from another table, this table should be the same as Table to update.

Join Display the Join dialog. The Join button is active when the data table is different than the table to update. When updating a column using data from another table or when adding a temporary column using data from another table, use the Join dialog to specify how records in the two tables are matched. See Join.

Value Displays if you are working with one table only. Enter an expression, or use Assist button to access the Expression dialog to create an expression.

Calculate The choice of options is dictated by the table from which you are retrieving the data. When you update one table based on its own data values, MapInfo automatically chooses the Value option. When you update one table based on data from another table, specify Value, Min, Average, Sum, Max, Count, Proportion Sum, WtAvg, Proportion Avg or Proportion WtAvg.

Avg (expression) Calculate the average of the values in expression for all records in a group. See Join Command for information on grouping.

Count Count the number of records in a group. Takes * as its argument because it applies to the record as a whole and not to any particular field in the record.

Max (expression) Find the highest value in expression for all records in a group.

Min (expression) Find the lowest value in expression for all records in a group.

Sum(expression) Calculate the sum of the expression values for all the records in the group.

WtAvg MapInfo adjusts the calculation of averages so that the values from each selected object are weighted more or less heavily. For a more detailed explanation, see Combine Command, Weight by section.

Proportion Sum Aggregate data into a polygon. Accounts for the area of the polygons that overlap the polygon receiving the aggregation. For example, if a third of an object’s area falls within a polygon the proportion sum aggregate will put one third of the overlapping object’s data value in the polygon.

Proportion Avg Compute the average based on the proportion of values from the covered areas (weighs the averages according to area). For example, if 80% of a new object’s area is from Object A having a mortality rate of .8%, and 20% of the new object’s area is from object B having a birth mortality rate of .6%, then the birth mortality rate of the new object would be equal to .8 x .8 + .6 x .2 = .76.



1. Choose the table to which the new temporary column will be added.

2. Choose the table from which MapInfo will retrieve the update information. To add temporary columns, you must specify updating one table based on data from another table.

3. Accept Add new temporary column at the Column to Update option.

4. If necessary, specify the information MapInfo will need to associate the data (join) in the two tables by using their common tabular or graphic data. See Join.

5. Choose how to produce column data by specifying how to calculate the information based on columns or an expression at the Calculate and of boxes. See the preceding: Update Column Dialog.

6. Check the Browse Results box to display the table with its new temporary column.

7. Click OK. The temporary column is added based on the specified information.

When you make changes to the data table, the new temporary columns(s) are automatically updated.

Proportion WtAvg Compute the average based on the proportion of values from the covered areas (weighs the averages according to another field whose value is proportioned). For example, continuing the example from above, Population of Object A that is in the new object = 34,000, Population of Object B that is in the new object = 26,000. The birth mortality rate of the new object is (.8 x 34000 + .6 x 26000) /60000 = .713.

of Specify values stored in a single column or a mathematical expression based on values in the data table. Specify the field or build an expression by choosing Expression and using the Expression dialog. Expressions or fields are evaluated according to the selected Aggregate Function or Value. Value is automatically selected when you update one table based on its own data values. See Expression Dialog.

Assist Displays if updating a column in one table with a value. Choose to display the Expression dialog and build a Value expression that will be applied to the column values. See the Expression Dialog.

Browse results Check to display an updated table.

Add Column to List Display the update column expression created by the previous update column dialog options. Build multiple updates using the same update and data tables.

Remove from List Available if update column is selected. Select the update column expression you want to remove from the list.






To save the table with its new temporary columns use the File > Save Copy As command. Temporary columns will also be saved in a workspace when you use save a workspace by choosing File > Save Workspace, if the two tables are both base tables.

Updating Information in a Subset of a TableUse Update Column to update information in a subset of a table. For example, you could marquee the southeast of the United States, then use Update Column to set the “sales rep” field to the name of your sales representative for the selection table.

You can update all the rows in a table or a selection of rows. To update a selection of rows you need to select the rows using Select, SQL Select, the Select tool, the Boundary Select tool, Marquee Select tool or the Radius Select tool and then update the selection.

Updating an SQL Select Query Table Use Update Column on the result of an SQL Select multi-table join, if the SQL Select didn’t have a Group By clause.

To update a column in one table with information from another table:

1. Join the tables with SQL Select.

2. Use Update Column on the selection table. The update will automatically take effect in the appropriate base table.

Placing Graphic Information into Visible ColumnsUse Update Column to place graphic information into visible columns. Tables containing graphic objects (maps) store graphic information that is not visible in tables. You can place some of that information into columns and view it in a Browser window.

You cannot create a temporary column using data from the same table. Create empty columns using Table > Maintenance > Modify Structure; fill with Update Column and Save.



Tables You Cannot UpdateYou cannot update:

• ASCII files

• Excel and Lotus files

• StreetInfo main tables. You can update component files. See Chapter 20 of the User’s Guide, Editing Street Maps, for information on editing street maps.

• Tables formed using SQL Select with a Group By clause

• Read-only tables

Although you cannot update these tables, you can use Update Column to add temporary columns.

See:Join

Table Structure Command



View Actual Size Command Layout Menu

View Actual Size Command Layout Menu

Use View Actual Size to:• display the layout so that objects appear at their actual size (sets the zoom to 100%).

An object’s actual size is the size of the objects when printed.

View Actual Size is available when:• a Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Layout > View Actual Size

or


See:Change Zoom Command

View Entire Layer Command


View Entire Layer Command Map Menu

View Entire Layer Command Map Menu

Use View Entire Layer to:• zoom and display an entire layer or all layers in a map.

View Entire Layer is available when:• a Map window is active.

Menu Path• Map > View Entire Layer

or


Displaying the Entire Map or a Map LayerUse this option if the map contains layers that cover different amounts of territory. For example, you have a map containing New York counties, highways, ZIP Codes and streets for Utica. If you choose All Layers, MapInfo will zoom out to display the entire map. But if you are only interested in viewing Utica streets, choose the Utica streets layer. MapInfo will zoom to display those streets.

To display an entire map or map layer:

• Choose Map > View Entire Layer. The View Entire Layer dialog displays.

View Entire Layer Dialog

Since redraw can be slow when using large maps, such as MapInfo Street maps, interrupt redraw by pressing <ESC> or the right mouse-button during redraw. Then, use the Zoom-in button to view the appropriate section.

See:Grabber Button

Zoom-in Button

Zoom-out Button

View entire layer Choose a specific layer or All Layers.


OK View the layer(s).


View Entire Layout Command Layout Menu

View Entire Layout Command Layout Menu

Use View Entire Layout to:• zoom out so all pages in the layout window display. Chooses a zoom that allows the

entire layout to display in a window. If the window is too small it selects a minimum zoom (6.25%).

View Entire Layout is available when:• a Layout window is active.

Menu Path• Layout > View Entire Layout

or



View Actual Size Command


Voronoi Objects Menu


Use Voronoi to:• create a Voronoi polygon, a partition of space into cells. Each cell is an area in which

the contained points are closer to the enclosed site than to any others. Use Voronoi to generate the polygons from a designated set of points. You can create a Voronoi polygon within the same layer, or select points from one layer and place the Voronoi polygon in another layer.

Voronoi is available when:• there is a current selection which contains at least three point objects.

Menu Path:• Objects > Voronoi

Creating a Voronoi polygon1. Make a selection containing at least three points. The Voronoi polygon is constrained

by the bounding box of the selected points. If a target region is specified, this region is used to constrain the polygon.

2. Choose Objects > Voronoi. The Voronoi Field Values dialog displays:



Voronoi Field Values


Data Fields


Value Store a specific value, the value displayed in the edit field, in the new row. Enter an appropriate value in the field.If you are selecting points from one layer and have another layer as the editable layer, specify columns in the source table as the Value field and put their value in the Destination column.







Sample Voronoi Polygon



Zoom-in Button Main Toolbar

Zoom-in Button Main Toolbar

Use the Zoom-in button to:• access the Zoom-in tool. Use the Zoom-in tool to get a closer area view of a map or a

layout.

The Zoom-in button is available when:• a map or layout is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Zoom-in button

Magnifying a Map or LayoutTo zoom-in:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoom-in button.

2. Click the Zoom-in cursor on the center of the area you want to zoom in on, magnifying the area by a linear factor of two.

This point will be at the center of the map in the zoomed-in view. Repeat this procedure until you have the appropriate level of enlargement.

To zoom-in on a rectangular area:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoom-in button.

2. Draw a marquee around an area by dragging the Zoom-in tool diagonally across it. The selected area is enlarged to fill the Map window.


Grabber Button

Previous View Command


View Entire Layout Command

Zoom-out Button


Zoom-out Button Main Toolbar

Zoom-out Button Main Toolbar

Use the Zoom-out button to:• access the Zoom-out tool. Use the Zoom-out tool to get a wider area view of a map or

a layout.

The Zoom-out button is available when:• a map or layout window is active.

Menu Path• Main Toolbar > Zoom-out button

Zooming Out on a Map or LayoutTo Zoom-out:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoom-out button.

2. Click the Zoom-out cursor on the center of the area from which you want to zoom out. The visible area of the map is increased by a linear factor of two. The map is redrawn, placing the point at the center of the Map window in the zoomed-out view.

To Zoom-out a rectangular area:

1. Choose Main Toolbar > Zoom-out button.

2. Draw a marquee in the map or layout by diagonally dragging the Zoom-out tool. The area within the marquee is reduced, allowing more of the map to display.


Grabber Button

Previous View Command


View Entire Layout Command

Zoom-in Button


Appendix: Using Graphs Created Prior to 5.5If you are using graphs created in pre-5.5 MapInfo Professional, right click on the graph to display the shortcut menu that allows you to modify the graph. You cannot create new maps using the pre-5.5 options.

This appendix documents the options for prior versions.

Graph Type Command

Use Graph Type to:• choose the type of graph and its associated graphing options.

Graph Type is available when:• a Graph window is active.

Menu Path• Graph > Graph Type

or• Display Shortcut Menu

Choosing a Type of GraphTo choose a type of graph:

• Choose Graph > Graph Type. The Graph Type dialog displays.

Graph Type Dialog

Appendix: Using Graphs Created Prior to 5.5

Graph Type

Options

Graph Title Type the title. You can leave MapInfo’s default title: “Graph of SOME_TABLE”. Click on the Text Style button (Aa) to display the Text Style dialog. Use this dialog to choose a font, font size, font color, and background color for the graph’s title. You can also choose bold, italic or underline for the title. See Text Style Button.

Area Area graphs represent quantities as the size of an area on the graph. See the following: Area Graph.

Bar Use Bar graphs to compare a relatively small number of discrete items. See the following: Bar Graph.

Line Line graphs plot data points at equal intervals along the label axis, connecting the points with a line. See the following: Line Graph.

Pie Pie graphs, also referred to as pie charts, show the relative proportions of items, with quantities represented by the area of the pie wedge. See the following: Pie Graph.

X-Y Plot points according to their X and Y coordinates without any connecting line. See the following: X-Y Graph.

Stacked Places graph areas, lines, or bars on top of each other rather than side by side.

Overlapped Sets the bars representing different quantities on a bar graph to overlap.

Drop Lines Extend from the top of the highest series in an area, line, or X-Y graph to the horizontal axis.

Rotated Rotates the graph 90 degrees so that, for example, the bars in a bar chart are horizontal rather than vertical.

Show 3-D Causes the graphic objects in area or bar charts to be represented as three-dimensional.

Overlap % When you are creating a bar graph with information from more than one table column, control how far each bar overlaps the others in a group by entering a number in the Overlap % box. Enter 0 and the bars will not overlap. Enter 100 and the bars overlap completely when overlap is turned on.

Bar Gutter % When you are creating a bar graph, control the space between the bars, which in turn affects the thickness of the bars, by setting the Bar Gutter %. When you enter 0 in the box, there is no space and the bars appear adjacent. When you enter 90, the bars are thin and have large spaces between them. Enter any number between 0 and 99.



Area Graph

Area graphs represent quantities as the size of an area on the graph. This type of graph is similar to a line graph, with the area between the line and the label axis filled. When you choose the Stacked option, MapInfo stacks one data series above the other, so that the shaded areas are proportional to data values. This is the usual way in which area graphs are done.

Bar Graph

Start Pie Angle When you are creating a pie graph, you can set the starting pie angle. A pie graph starts with the first item in the corresponding Table. You can adjust the orientation of the starting pie angle in degrees clockwise. Zero degrees (the default) starts the first wedge at a 12 o’clock position going toward a 1 o’clock position. Using 90 degrees starts the first wedge at a 3 o’clock position going toward 4 o’clock. Set the pie angle from 0 to 360 degrees.

Cancel Cancel the current dialog. The graph remains unchanged.

OK Modify the graph to reflect the dialog settings.



Use Bar graphs to compare a relatively small number of discrete items. Quantities are represented by the length of the bar. MapInfo allows you to graph up to four variables in a single bar graph. MapInfo positions the columns for the variables side-by-side unless you choose the Stacked option. When you choose the Stacked option, MapInfo stacks the bars for each variable one atop the other.

Line Graph

Line graphs plot data points at equal intervals along the label axis, connecting the points with a line. MapInfo allows you to plot up to four different variables at a time. MapInfo automatically uses a different colored point for each variable. When you want to set these colors, use the Series option on the Graph menu.

Pie Graph

Pie graphs show the relative proportions of items, with quantities represented by the area of the pie wedge. In general, you should only use a pie graph if your data values add up to the total of some quantity. For example, if you are graphing the sales in different territories, you should use a pie graph only if you are graphing sales for all your territories. That way the size of a territory’s wedge accurately represents its contribution to the total sales effort. When you



are only graphing the sales of five (out of 13) territories, then you should use a bar graph. The bar graph allows you to compare the sales of those five territories, but doesn’t imply that they represent the entire sales effort, as a pie graph would.

It is difficult to show small differences between two percentages with a pie graph. You should try to limit the number of wedges in a pie because it often becomes difficult distinguish between values in an over-crowded pie.

X-Y GraphX-Y graphs are also known as scatter plots. These graphs plot points according to their X and Y coordinates without any connecting line. When you want to examine the correlation between variables, use an X-Y graph. When you specify the columns to be graphed (in Window > New Graph Window), the first column is graphed along the X (label) axis, while the other column is graphed along the Y (value) axis.

Customizing GraphsYou can create a variety of different graphs by using various customizing options. Here are some of the possibilities:

Stacked Bar Chart 3-D Bar Chart



Overlapped Bar Chart 3-D Stacked Bar Chart

Basic Line Graph Line Graph with Drop Lines

Area Graph 3-D Area Graph

Stacked Area Graph



Label Axis Command

Use Label Axis to:• ◆ customize the label axis of a graph.

Label Axis is available when:• ◆ a Graph window is active.

Menu Path• Graph > Label Axis

The Label AxisThe label axis displays the labels of the data values being graphed. For example, in a typical financial graph, the label axis might have “1st Qtr”, “2nd Qtr”, and “3rd Qtr” while the value axis might have dollar amounts.

For a graph in a non-rotated orientation, the label axis is the X, or horizontal, axis.

Using the Label Axis Settings DialogMany of the settings for value and label axis are only relevant if the graph is an X-Y graph. For example, bar, line, area, and pie graphs use almost none of the label axis settings. However, bar, line, and area use all of the value axis settings.

To specify value and label axis options:

• Choose Graph > The Label Axis. The Label Axis Settings dialog displays.

Label Axis Settings Dialog



Axis Values

See:New Graph Window Command

Value Axis Command

Auto Minimum Value Specify the lowest value to appear on the label axis.

Auto Maximum Value Specify the highest value to appear on the label axis.

Auto Cross At Specify the place on the label axis where it is crossed by the Value axis.

Auto Major Unit Specify the increment between major ticks.

Auto Minor Unit Specify the increment between minor ticks.

Major Tick Marks Set major tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis.

Minor Tick Marks Set minor tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis.

Axis Labels Choose no labels (None) or to have the labels appear At Axis. Click the text “Aa” button to display the Text Style dialog to specify the size, font, style, and color of labels. See Text Style Button.

Axis Title Specify a title for the axis. The title appears adjacent to the axis. Click the text “Aa” button to display the Text Style dialog to specify the the size, font, style, and color of the title. See Text Style Button.

Major Gridline Choose to have gridlines drawn at major ticks. The Major Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. See Line Style Button.

Minor Gridline Choose to have gridlines drawn at minor ticks. The Minor Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display. See Line Style Button.

Axis Line To designate the style, color and width of the Axis Line, click in the sample line box to display the Line Style dialog. See Line Style Button.

OK Redraw the graph with the current specifications.





Series Command

Use Series to:• customize the appearance of graphs.

Series is available when:• a Graph window is active.

Menu Path• Graph > Series

or• Display Shortcut Menu

Customizing Area, Bar, Line and X-Y GraphsUse the Graph Series dialog to specify the name of the series and the color and pattern of series elements for all graph types.

To customize graphs:

• Choose Graph > Series. The Graph Series dialog displays.

Graph Series Dialog

Data Column Choose the column you want to customize in the current graph.



Draw Using

Customizing Pie GraphsTo customize a Pie Graph Series:

• Choose Graph > Series. The Graph Series dialog displays.

Graph Series Dialog

Title Enter a title other than the column name.

Area/Bar Access the Region Style dialog where you can choose a color, fill pattern, and border line style for bars (on bar charts), and areas (on area graphs). See Region Style Button.

Line Access the Line Style dialog where you can specify drop lines for a line graph, XY graph, and an area graph. See Line Style Button.

Symbol Access the Symbols Style dialog where you can specify the symbol style used to represent data points in line and XY graphs. See Symbol Style Button.

Use color defaults Check to use color defaults. Clear to use black and white defaults. The customizing choices you make in this dialog override the defaults. However, if you have created a custom scheme for a pie chart and want to return to the defaults, click on this box twice. The defaults are restored when you leave the dialog.

OK Redraw the graph with the specified options.

Cancel Cancel the dialog and leaves the graph unchanged.




See:Graph Type Command

New Graph Window Command

Data Value Display the data value of the wedge you want to customize.

Pie Wedge Access the Region Style dialog. Use this dialog to choose the wedge color, fill and line style. See Region Style Button.

Use color defaults Use color defaults to graph. Clear to use black and white defaults. The customizing choices you make in this dialog override these defaults. However, if you have created a custom scheme for a pie graph and want to return to the defaults, click on this box twice. The defaults are restored when you leave the dialog.

Cancel Cancel the dialog and leaves the graph unchanged.





Value Axis Command Graph Menu

Use Value Axis to:• ◆ change the labels, tick marks, and grid lines of the value (y) axis of a graph.

Value Axis is available when:• ◆ a Graph window is active.

Menu Path• Graph > Value Axis

or• ◆ Display Shortcut Menu

Specifying Value Axis OptionsTo specify value axis options:

• Choose Graph > Value Axis. The Value Axis dialog displays.

Value Axis Dialog



Axis Values

See:Label Axis Command

New Graph Window

Auto Minimum Value Specify the lowest value to appear along the Value/Label axis.

Auto Maximum Value Specify the highest value to appear on the Value/Label axis.

Auto Cross At Specify the place on the label axis where it is crossed by the Value/Label axis.

Auto Major Unit Specify the increment between major ticks.

Auto Minor Unit Specify the increment between minor ticks.

Major Tick Marks Set major tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis.

Minor Tick Marks Set the tick marks to off (None), to appear inside the axis, to appear outside the axis, or to cross the axis.

Axis Labels Choose no labels (None) or to have the labels appear At Axis. Click the text “Aa” button to display the Text Style dialog where you specify the size, font, style, and color of the labels. See Text Style Button.

Axis Title Specify a title for the axis. The title appears adjacent to the axis. Click the text “Aa” button to display the Text Style dialog where you specify the the size, font, style, and color of the title. See Text Style Button.

Major Gridline Choose to have gridlines drawn at major ticks. The Major Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display.

Minor Gridline Choose to have gridlines drawn at minor ticks. The Minor Tick Marks option cannot be set to None. To set the style of the gridlines, click on the adjacent line to activate the Line Style dialog. The check box must be checked for new styles to display.

Axis Line Choose to display the Line Style dialog where you specify the width, style and color of the axis lines. See Line Style Button.





Index

Numerics3D viewing angles

graphs 322–3283DMap window

print options 4333DMaps

3DMap menu 70–71, 96–97creating 69–70preferences 71, 98with Select tool 71, 98

AAbbreviations file

finding objects 185About MapInfo command 1Abs (num) function

absolute value 191Access tables 364

saving 470, 472Add District command 2Add Node button 3Adding

columns to a browser 398digitizer control points 144districts 338HotLink data 209layers 249–250nodes 457objects to selection 17temporary columns 579tools 559–564

Address matchingpreferences 420–421

Adjust Image Styles command 4–6Aggregate functions

redistricting column expressions 338SQL Select 529–530Update Column dialog 579–581

Align Objects command 7–8Append Rows To Table command 9Arc objects

Arc button 10converting to polylines 63, 64converting to regions (polygons) 65drawing 10modifying 11–12specifying attributes 10–11splitting 519–521

Area graph 594Area(obj, str) function

area of object 193Arrange Icons command 13ASCII files

deleting 139exporting to 169–170opening as a table 365

Assign Selected Objects button/command 14AutoCAD DXF files

autoflip 218import format 212importing 215–221importing attributes 220–221

Autocad DXF filesexporting to 170–172

Autoflip 218Autolabels 235–236

moving 458Automatic geocoding 199Autoscrolling 158, 262, 536, 567Autotracing 15, 517–518Average

of column values 22, 58, 59–60proportional 580proportional weighted 581record values 580weighted of column values 580

BBar chart maps

customizing styles 115–118thematic map type 101

Bar graph 594Bitmaps

exporting a window to 483raster format 447

BMP filesexporting a window to 483raster format 447

Boundary column 196Boundary Select button 16–17Bring To Front command 18

Index

Browser windowadding text 278cascading 26closing 47copying from 66cutting to clipboard 135–136deleting a selection 36, 38display 277editing text 278, 553entering text 550–553finding field information 181–185finding selected objects 186grid display 379HotLink support 211layout display 190modifying column display 397–400opening 277–280print options 431saving with new attributes 483, 487scrolling 279selecting from 493StatusBar display 539text style 279tiling 556using the Info tool 222See also Columns in a table, Rows in a table

Buffering objectsBuffer command 19, 23buffer function 193converting to polylines 63, 64

CCalculate Statistics command 24, 25Callouts 242, 553Cartesian distance calculations

with buffers 21Cartographic legends

adding frames 84–87creating 75–80creating metadata keys 82, 88customizing labels 80, 87frame properties 89–91labeling with joined table 80metadata keys 81–82, 87–89pass-through metadata keys 82, 89refresh option 91saving settings to metadata 80, 87

Cascade Windows command 26

Centroid(obj) functionpoint object at centroid 193

Centroidsdefining 239displaying 239moving 458

CentroidX(obj) functionx coordinate centroid 193

CentroidY(obj) functiony coordinate centroid 193

Change DBMS Table Symbol button/command 27–30

Change View button/command 31, 32Change Zoom command 33Character sets

exporting files 172Character strings

in expressions 176operators 177table field type 344

Charts. See Graph WindowCheck Regions command 34, 35Choosing a printer 393–395, 425Chr$(num) function

character code 192Circle objects

drawing 159specifying attributes 159–160

Clear command 38Clear Cosmetic Layer command 39Clear Custom Labels command 233Clear Map Objects Only command 40Clear Target command 41Clip Region 502–503Clip Region Off command 42, 43Clipboard

copying to 66, 67cutting to 135–136pasting from 396preferences 136

Clone View command 44Close All command 45Close DBMS Connection command 46Close Table command 49Collection object

creating 52modifying 53


Index

Colorcustomizing 134defaults 413–414region style setting 444–446

Columns in a tableadding fields 398, 546–549adding graphic information 582adding using expressions 399adding/removing text 278averaging values 22, 58calculating statistics 24–25choosing for display 397–398clearing all 398combining objects using a column 61, 62field display 279finding information 181–185indexed 344indexing 546–549joining 227removing fields 546–547removing from display 398removing indexes 546–549renaming display 399renaming fields 546–548reordering 279, 546–549resizing 280selecting 524temporary columns 579totaling with SQL 526–527types 344weighted averaging 23, 58

Combining data. See Objects, modifyingCombining objects

Combine command 50, 60Combine Objects Using Column command

61, 62combining object types 50data aggregation 55, 60multipoint 51using a target object 54, 55

Comparison operators 177–178Conflict resolution 476Connecting to a data source 354–359Continuous surface maps. See Grid mapsControl points

adding to a raster image 453digitizer setup 143–145digitizing tablet 149editing raster image 453raster images 449–450, 496

Convert to Polylines command 63, 64Convert to Regions command 65Coordinate transformations

importing DXF files 218–219Copying

clipboard preferences 66, 67Copy command 66Drag button 156object nodes 458objects 66, 67pasting information 396specify behavior 413

Cos(num) functioncosine of a number 191

Cosmetic layerdeleting objects 39editing 237selectable 237

Create 3DMap command 68, 68–71, 98Create Convex Hull command 72Create Drop Shadows command 73–74Create Legend command 75–80Create line function

line object 193Create point function

point object 193Create Points command 93–94Create Thematic Map command 99–109CreateCircle function

circle object 193Creating

buffers 19–23columns using expressions 399

Creating a HotLink 209Cropping images

exporting 486–487Crystal Reports tool 133CurDate() function

current date 191Custom Colors command 134Custom range method 112Custom symbols 545Custom toolbar

displaying 557–558Customizing

graph appearance 596–597graph series elements 600–602

Cut command 135–136


Index

DData aggregation

combining map objects 55, 60, 62dialog options 22, 23, 57, 58, 588

Data disaggregationerasing objects 163erasing outside of objects 165splitting objects 409, 520–521

Data sourceconnecting 354–359

Date functions 191Dates

in expressions 176Dates table field type 344Day(date) function

day of month 191dBASE files

deleting 139exporting to 172importing table to 214opening as a table 365saving tables to 468–470

DBMS connectionclosing 46

DBMS tablesmaking mappable 263–266opening 354–359refreshing 443unlinking 575

DBMS toolbarChange DBMS Table Symbol button 27–30Open DBMS Table button 359Refresh DBMS Table button 443Unlink DBMS Table button 575using 137–138

Decimal degreesconverting to 450–452

Decimal field type 344DeformatNumber$(str) function

reverse number formatting 192Delete Table command 139Delete Target District command 140

Deletingcosmetic objects 39districts 140map objects 162–163objects from a table 40selected text/objects 36, 38tables 139

Descriptive joins 227–229Digitizer mode

D key 151digitizer cursor 146using the mouse 146using tools 146

Digitizer setupconfiguring digitizer buttons 145, 149–150control points 143–145map units 143menu command 141projection 142–143supported drivers 141

Digitizingcontrol points 149error estimates 147–148procedure 147–150projection settings 435–436troubleshooting 151–152

Directorypreferences 421–422

Disaggregate Command 153Distance function

distance between locations 193Districts browser. See RedistrictingDot density maps

customizing 123–124thematic map type 101

Drag button 156Drawing

arc objects 10circle objects 159curved lines 405–406editable cosmetic layer 237ellipses 159–160lines 253polygons 401polylines 405–407rectangles 440squares 440


Index

Drawing toolbarAdd Node button 3Arc button 10displaying 557–558Ellipse button 159–160Frame button 187–190Line button 253–254Line Style button 255–257line width 258–259Polygon button 401–403Polyline button 405–407Rectangle button 440–441Region Style button 444–446Reshape button 456–458Rounded Rectangle button 460–461Symbol button 541–542Text button 550–553Text Style button 554–555using 157–158

DXF filesautoflip 218importing 215–221importing attributes 220–221

EEditable layers 235–236

statusbar display 540Editing

column names 399labels 231–233, 244text 552

Editing a tool 559–564Editing objects. See Reshape, Resize, Get Info, and

individual object typeArc, Ellipse, Frame, Line, Symbol, Polygon,

Polyline, Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Text

Ellipse objectsconverting to polylines 63, 64converting to regions (polygons) 65drawing 159Ellipse button 159–160specifying attributes 159–160splitting 519–521

Embedding a map legend 434

Enclose command 161Enhanced Windows Metafiles

export format 483Equal count

thematic range method 112Equal ranges

thematic range method 112Erase command 162–163Erase Outside command 164–165Excel files. See Microsoft Excel filesExit command 166Exporting

Advanced exporting options 485ASCII files 169–170Autocad DXF files 170–172cropping images 486–487dBASE files 172Export command 167–173file character sets 172MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) 169maps in different projections 173projection settings 435–436supported file formats 483

Expressionscreating labels 245–246date functions 191editing column display 399–400Expression dialog 174–180geographical functions 193math functions 191modifying 400modifying column display 399object functions 193, 194specifying 174–175string functions 192thematic maps 109–110

FFields. See Columns in a tableFile formats

exporting 483importing 212raster 447

Files. See Tables


Index

FindingFind command 181–185Find Selection command 186front window only 182indexed fields 344MAPINFOW.ABB file 185objects 181–185position of points 183–184street addresses 181–185

Fonts 554–555Format$(num, str) function

formatted number 192FormatNumber$(num) function

formatted number 192Frame objects

creating in Layout windows 187–188drop shadows 73–74Frame button 187–190modifying 188specifying attributes 190

Framescartographic legend 84–87legend frame properties 89–91

Functions. See Aggregate functions

GGeocoding

automatic 199boundary column 196creating points 93–94Geocode command 195interactive 200MAPINFOW.ABB file 199moving points 458procedure 195–199ungeocoded records 201

Geographic joins 227–229Geographic objects. See objectsGeographic operators

in expressions 178with SQL Select 530–532

Geographical functions 193Get Info command 202GIF files

raster format 447Grabber button 203Graduated symbol maps


Graph Select button 204Graph Type command 592–597Graph types

list of 285Graph window

3D viewing angles dialog 322–328cascading 26closing 47copying from 66customizing appearance 596–597customizing series 600–602customizing the value axis 603–604displaying 281–284exporting 483–487formatting dialog 299–308general options dialog 286–287grids and scales dialog 309–322layout display 189legend display 208, 252, 508pre-5.5 graphs 284printing 433–434saving 284saving a template 285series options dialog 292–299tiling 556titles dialog 287–292

Grid handler 418Grid maps

creating 104–105customizing 126–130thematic map type 102

Group by columns 526–527

HHelp

MapInfo Help Topics command 267Hiding

Hide MapBasic Window button/command 205

Hide Statistics Window button/command 206

Hide StatusBar command 207Hide Theme Legend command 208

Highlight control 416HotLink

layer control 249HotLink button 209–211


Index

IIDW interpolator 126IMG files

importing MapInfo for DOS files 212Importing

DXF files 215–221Import command 212MIF files 214projection settings 435–436supported file formats 212

Indexed columnsfinding information 181

Indexed fields 344removing 546–549reordering 546–549

Individual values mapscustomizing styles 124–125thematic map type 101

Info button 222–223Info tool

using 222InfoTips 224Insetting points

street level geocoding 198with Find command 183–184

InStr(num, str1, str2) functionoccurrence of a string 192

Int(num) functioninteger portion of a number 191

Integer field type 344Interactive geocoding 200Interleaved line styles 225Interpolator

IDW 126TIN 126

Intersectionslocating 185

Invert Selection 226

JJoined tables

creating labels from 80

Joining tablesautomatic 228Join button 227RowID column 227SQL Select command 523, 530Update Column command 227–229, 579–583

JPEG filesexport format 483raster format 447

KKeywords in expressions 179

LLabel Axis command 598–599Labels

creating callouts 553customizing graph label axis 598–599customizing graph value axis 603–604deleting 233, 245display options 240–243editing 231–233, 244in cartographic legends 80, 87Label button 230modifying 230moving 233, 245moving autolabels 458rotating 233, 242, 245specifying attributes 554–555using expressions 245–246using the Text button 550–553

Layer Control button/command 234–251Layer Control dialog

auto label icon 235–236editable icon 235–236HotLink options 210selectable icon 235–236visible icon 235

Layers. See Map layers


Index

Layout windowaligning objects 7–8cascading 26closing 47copying from 66creating 329–331creating frames 187–188cutting selections to the clipboard 135–136deleting objects 36, 38description 330drop shadows 73–74exporting 483–487frame display 381labeling 550–553legend display 189magnifying 590map proportion 189modifying objects 202moving objects to the front 18object size 584ordering objects 330, 497, 498page breaks 380paper size 381positioning 203previous view 427rulers 380scale 189selecting objects 491StatusBar display 539symbols 541–542tiling 556unit settings 414viewing a larger area 591viewing pages 586, 587zoom level setting 33zoom setting 330

LCase$(str) functionconverting strings to lowercase 192

Left$(str, num) functionfirst character 192

Legend windowclosing 47Legend button 252modifying a thematic map 275preferences 419printing 434

Legendsadding frames 84–87creating metadata keys 82, 88frame properties 89–91labeling with joined table 80labels 80, 87metadata keys 81–82, 87–89pass-through metadata keys 82, 89refresh option 91saving settings to metadata 80, 87thematic map 118, 130–132, 208with Layout window 189

Len(str) functionnumber of characters 192

Line graph 595Line objects

adding nodes 3converting to polylines 63converting to regions (polygons) 65drawing 253Line button 253–254specifying attributes 253–254specifying style 255–257splitting 519–521

Line Style button/command 255–257Line styles

interleaved 225Line width 258–259Linked table

closing 48Linked tables

defined 347, 371saving 476

Logical operators 178Logical table field type 344Lotus spreadsheets

deleting 139opening as a table 366

LTrim$(str) functiontrim spaces from start 192


Index

MMain toolbar

Assign Selected Objects button 14Boundary Select button 16–17Change View button 31, 32Clip Region button 42, 43displaying 557–558Grabber button 203Graph select button 204HotLink button 209–211Info button 222–223Label button 230Layer Control button 234–251Legend button 252Marquee Select button 268Polygon Select button 404Radius Select button 438, 439Ruler button 463, 464Select button 491–493Set Target District From Map button 505Unselect All button 576using 260–262Zoom-in button 590Zoom-out button 591

Make DBMS Table Mappable 263Per Row Style 265

Map layersadding 249–250controlling 234–251cosmetic layer 237editable 235–236modifying a thematic map 276ordering 237removing 250reordering 247–248seamless 237searching 17specifying attributes 237–239, 250–251StatusBar display 539thematic 236, 247viewing 585zoom layering 238

Map objectscutting to the clipboard 135–136polygons 401–403polylines 405–407selecting 490splitting 519–521See also Objects

Map Print Options dialog 431–432

Map unitsdigitizer setup 143

Map windowcascading 26centering 32changing the view 31, 32clipping a region 42, 43clone view 44closing 47copying from 66exporting 483–487finding selected objects 186labeling 550–553legend display 208opening 332–334positioning 203print options 431–432projection settings 435–436redrawing 442scroll bar display 385scrolling 334selecting from 491sizing 416StatusBar display 334theme legend display 508

MapBasiccascading windows 26copying from window 66cutting commands to a clipboard 135–136deleting a command 36, 38displaying MapBasic window 205entering commands 509–510MapBasic window display 509–510running programs 465, 467running programs on startup 538sample utilities 467tiling windows 556

MapInfo Boundary Interchange (MBI) filesimport format 212

MapInfo for DOSimporting images 212

MapInfo Help Topics command 267MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF)

exporting to 169MapInfo Interchange Format (MIF) files

import format 212importing 214

MapInfo Map Interchange (MMI) filesimporting 212


Index

MAPINFOW.ABB filefinding objects 185geocoding 199

Mapinfow.prfpreference settings 426

Mapinfow.wor 419–420Maps

area units 384coordinate units 384creating points 93–94digitizing 141–152displaying multiple layers 234–251displaying tables as 332–334legend display 252magnifying 590measurement units 383–384, 417non-earth 341previous view 427putting data on a map 195symbols 541–542using the Info tool 222viewing a larger area 591zoom setting 334

Marquee Select button 268Math functions

creating expressions 191Mathematical operators 176Maximum(num, num) function

larger of two numbers 191Measuring distance 463, 464Merging objects. See Combining objectsMetadata

creating legend keys 82, 88legend keys 81–82, 87–89pass-through keys 82, 89saving HotLink options 210saving legend settings 80, 87

Metafilesexporting a window to 483

Microsoft Access tables 364Microsoft Excel files

deleting 139opening as a table 366

Mid$(str, num1, num2) functionpart of a string 192

Minimum(num, num) functionsmaller of two numbers 191

Modify Image Registration command 269ModifyThematic Map command 270–276

Month(date) functionmonth portion of date 191

Moving a label 233, 245Multipoint object 51

creating 51modifying 51

NNatural break

thematic range method 112New Browser Window command 277–280New Graph Window command 281–284New Layout Window command 329, 331New Map Window command 332, 334New Redistrict Window command 335–338New Row command 340New Row Style 265New Table command 341–350Node limit 456Nodes

adding 3, 389, 457autotrace 517autotracing 15converting objects to polylines 63converting objects to regions (polygons) 65deleting 38, 457displaying 456–457editing display 239maximum number 3reshaping 456–458selecting 456snap to node 517–518

Non-Earth mapscoordinates 435–436creating 341

North Arrow button 351North Arrow command 351Numeric

table field type 344values in expressions 176

OObject functions

check regions 34, 35enclose 161querying map objects 194returning objects 193


Index

Objects, creatingbuffering 19–23combining 50, 60, 61, 62specifying color and pattern 444–446

Objects, modifyingadding nodes 3, 389aligning layout objects 7–8clearing a target 41clearing cosmetic layer objects 39combining object types 50combining objects 50, 60, 61, 62converting objects to polylines 63converting objects to regions (polygons) 65copying to the clipboard 66, 67cutting to the clipboard 135–136deleting selected objects 36, 38, 40, 162–163editable layer 235–236erasing outside of an object 164–165Get Info command 202location 458moving 492nodes 456–458ordering in a Layout window 497, 498pasting 396reshaping 456–458selectable layers 235–236specifying color and pattern 446splitting 519–521target 504undo 574unselecting 492

Objects, selectingadding to selection 17Boundary Select button 16–17Browser window 490buffering objects 19, 23default display 426finding selected objects 186Layout window 490Map window 490Marquee Select button 268Radius Select button 438, 439Select button 491–493selectable cosmetic layer 237specify highlighting 416table 490unselecting 577

Offsetting pointsstreet level geocoding 198with Find command 183–184

OpeningAccess tables in MapInfo 363–364ASCII files 365dBase files 365multiple tables 362Open Table command 360–378raster images 367reports 133shapefiles 363spreadsheets 366–367

Opening multiple browsers 278Operators

comparison 177–178geographic 178, 530–532logical 178mathematical 176precedence 180string 177

Options commandBrowse menu 379Layout menu 380–382Map menu 382–387Redistricter menu 387–388

Order by columns 527–529Output preferences 422–424Overlay Nodes command 389, 390

PPack Table command 391–392Page Setup command 393–395Pass-through keys

metadata 82, 89Pasting

object nodes 458Paste command 396

PCX filesraster format 447

Perimeter(obj, str) functionobject perimeter 193

Photoshop 3.0 filesexport format 483

Pick Fields command 397–400Pie chart map

graph 595Pie chart maps


Pie graph 595


Index

Pie graphscustomizing series 601–602

Pin map. See Create Points commandPoints. See SymbolsPolygon objects

autotracing 517converting to polylines 63, 64converting to regions 65convex hull 72drawing 401erasing outside 164–165Polygon button 401–403snap to node 517–518specifying attributes 402–403splitting 519–521

Polygon Select button 404Polyline objects

adding nodes 3autoracing 517converting to 63, 64erasing outside 164–165modifying nodes 456Polyline button 405–407reshaping 456smoothing 513, 514specifying attributes 406–407splitting 519–521unsmoothing 578

Portable Network Graphics Format filesexport format 483

Position of objectsarcs 11–12

Preferencesaddress matching 420–421default 426directory 421–422Legend Window 419map window 415–416output 422–424Preferences command 411–412printer 425save cosmetic objects 473startup 419–420system settings 413–415

Previous View command 427

Printing3DMap Print Options dialog 433advanced options 429–430color printer 446layout options 381, 382Map Print Options dialog 431–432page setup 393–395paper size 414preferences 425Print command 428–434Print dialog 428

Prism Map 95manipulating 98properties 97

Projectioncreating 341digitizer setup 142–143exporting maps 173map options dialog setting 385raster images 447saving table with different 468, 470

Projection button 435–436Proper$(str) function

proper capitalization 192

QQuantile

thematic range method 112Queries

Save Template option 480–481saving 474

Query tablesclosing 48

Quick Startdialog options 437preference setting 419–420

Quitting. See Exit command

RRadius Select button 438, 439Ranged maps

range methods 112–113thematic map type 101

Raster imagetranslucent 4


Index

Raster imagesadjusting image styles 4–6modifying image registration 269opening 367projection settings 435–436registering 447–453selecting control points 496supported formats 447

Rectangle objectsconverting to polylines 63, 64converting to regions (polygons) 65drawing 440Rectangle button 440–441rounded 460specifying attributes 440–441splitting 519–521

Redistrictingadding a district 338adding districts 2aggregate expressions 338assigning objects to districts 14browser display defaults 387–388changing a district’s name 2closing districts browser 47combining created districts 339deleting a district 339deleting target district 140Districts Browser display 387–388ending a session 339grid line display 387ordering districts 387redistrict window 335–338renaming a district 338target district 505

Redraw Window command 442Refresh DBMS Table command / button 443Region objects

converting to 65Region Style command 444–446Regions

adding nodes 3converting to polylines 63, 64searching for objects within 16–17

Registering. See Raster imagesRemoving

columns from a browser 398digitizer control points 145labels 233, 245map layers 250

Removing a tool 559–564

Rename Table command 454–455Renaming a column 399Reports

creating 133Reshaping

adding nodes 3arc objects 12autotrace 517deleting selected objects 36, 38moving default 416Reshape button/command 456–458snap to node 416, 517–518unsmoothing a polyline 578

Revert Table command 459Right$(str, num) function

last character 192Rotate Objects

using 462Rotating a label 233, 245Round(num1, num2) function

rounded number 191Rounded rectangle objects

converting to polylines 63, 64converting to regions (polygons) 65drawing 460Rounded Rectangle button 460–461specifying attributes 460–??splitting 519–521

RowID columnjoining tables 227

Rows in a tableadding to current selection 493appending 9editing with Info tool 223new row 340removing from selection 493selecting 493undo operation 574

RTrim$(str, num) functiontrim spaces from end 192

Ruler windowopening 463Ruler button 463, 464

Run MapBasic Program button/command 465, 467

SSave Copy As command 468–472Save Cosmetic Objects command 237, 473


Index

Save Table command 475Save template 480–481Save Window As command 483–487Saving

Access and MapInfo tables 470–472graphs 284queries 474reports 133Save Workspace command 488–489 See also Browser window, Layout window,

Map window, Graph windowScale

layout setting 189preferences setting 416setting 31

Scatter plots 596Seamless map layers 237Seamless tables

seammgr.mbx application 237Searching

areas 268Browser window 181–185buffering objects 19, 23map objects 181–185objects in other layers 17objects within a region 16–17, 438, 439

Select All command 490Select button 491–493Select command 494–495, 500

save template 480–481Select Control Point From Map command 496Selectable layers 235–236Selecting by querying

buffering objects 19, 23fields from a Browser window 397–398Select command 494–495, 500SQL select command 522–534unselecting 577

Selecting from screenBoundary Select button 16–17Marquee Select button 268overlapping layout objects 18Radius Select button 438, 439Select button 491–493unselect all 492

Send To Back command 497, 498Series command 600–602

Set Clip Region command 502–503exporting images 486–487

Set Target command 504Set Target District from Map button/command

505Shade by value. See Ranged mapShapefiles 363Shortcut menus 506–507Show MapBasic Window button/command 509–

510Show Statistics Window button/command 511Show StatusBar command 512Show Theme Legend window command 508Sin(num) function

sine of a number 191Sizing objects

arcs 12Smooth command 513, 514Smoothing a polyline 405–406Snap to node

autotrace 517–518using 517

Spacesaving with Pack Table 391–392

Spherical distance calculationswith buffers 21

Split command 519–521SPOT files

raster format 447Spreadsheets. See Lotus spreadsheets, Microsoft

Excel filesSQL select

save template 480–481SQL Select command 522–534Squares

drawing 440rounded 460specifying attributes 440–441

Standard deviationthematic range method 112

Standard toolbar 535–536Starting MapInfo 419, 420, 538Startup.wor vi, 537, 538Statistics window

displaying 206, 511Statistics button 206


Index

StatusBarcursor location display 384display 539displaying 207, 512map scale display 384map window 334popups 540zoom display 384, 539

Str$(expr) functionstring approximation of expression 192

Street intersectionslocating 185

String functions 192String operators 177Styles

frame object 188ranges in thematic maps 113–115region objects 444–446

Subselect statements 532–534Sum of record values 580Symbols

creating 541–542custom symbols 545geocoded points 197MapInfo 3.0 compatible symbols 543modifying 541specifying style 541–542, 543–545Symbol button 541–542Symbol Style button/command 543–545

TTable Structure command 546–549

Tablesadding temporary columns 579appending rows 9closing 45closing multiple 48creating 341–350creating points 93–94cutting selections to the clipboard 135–136deleting 139deleting map objects 40directory paths 421–422editing with Info tool 223exporting 167–168geocoding 195–199graphing 281–284importing 212joining 227–229making mappable 546–549map display 332, 334mappable 343multi-user editing 223opening 360–378, 437opening vs importing 367packing a table 391, 392preferred view 29, 362, 370projection setting 468–470projection settings 435–436read-only 549removing indexes 546–549renaming 454–455reverting to previous 459saving 475saving as dBase 468–470saving to a new name 468–470table structure 546–549using the Info tool 222

Tables, DBMSmaking mappable 263–266opening 354–359refreshing 443unlinking 575

Tagged Image File Format filesexport format 483

Tan(num) functiontangent of a number 191


Index

Target objectsclearing a target 41combining objects with 54, 55erasing 162–163erasing outside 164–165specifying 504splitting 519–521

Technical Support information 1Templates

graph 285thematic mapping 109

Territories. See RedistrictingText

clearing from cosmetic layer 39editing 552entering 550pasting 396rotating 552Text button 550–553

Text Style button/command 554–555TGA files

raster format 447Thematic maps

creating 99–109customizing range styles 113–115grid maps 102, 104–105layers 247legend 118, 130–132legend display 508moving bar charts 458moving pie charts 458multi-variable 105–107range methods 112–113save thematic settings 482single variable 103–104theme templates 109using expressions 109–110

Theme legendscustomizing 92display 208displaying 508editing titles 80, 87thematic map layers 75

TIFF filesraster format 447

Tile Windows command 556TIN Interpolator 102TIN interpolator 126Tool Manager 559–564

ToolbarsDBMS 137–138docking 558Drawing 157–158floating 558Main 260–262moving 558reshaping 558Standard 535–536Toolbars command 557–558Tools 566–567

ToolsCrystal Reports 133

Tools menu 565Tools toolbar

accessing MapBasic tools 566–567displaying 557–558Hide MapBasic Window button 205Run Mapbasic Program button 465, 467Show MapBasic Window button 509–510

Tooltips 568Translucent Grid 102Translucent raster 4

UUCase$(str) function

uppercase version of string 192Undoing edits

Clear command 38specify number 414Undo command 574

Ungeocoded records 201Ungeocoding

table structure modifications 546–549Units of measurement

area units 384coordinate units 384distance units 384

Universal Translator 569–573Unlink DBMS Table command / button 575Unselect All button 576Unselect All command 577Unsmooth command 578Unsmoothing a curve 405–406Update Column command 579–583Update Column dialog

Join button 227–229


Index

VVal(str) function

numeric value 193Value

columns 580Value Axis command 603–604Vector graphic files 212Vector symbols. See MapInfo 3.0 compatible sym-

bolsVersion

MapInfo current 1previous version MapBasic programs 467

Video display 414, 446View Actual Size command 584View Entire Layer command 585View Entire Layout command 586, 587Virtual tablet interface digitizers 141Voronoi polygon

creating 587

WWeekday(date) function

day of week 191Weighted averages 23, 58Window numbering 556Windows. See individual window types

Browser, Districts, Graph, Info tool, Layout, Legend, Map, Ruler window

Wintab digitizer 141Workspaces

accessing on startup 538graphs 284Mapinfow.wor 419–420opening 437saving 488–489saving queries in 474

XX-Y graph 596

YYear(date) function

year portion of date 191

ZZoom

changing in a layout 33labels 241layering 238map windows 334setting 31, 32StatusBar display 539

Zoom popup 540Zoom-in button 590Zoom-out button 591


mi_ref

Documents